Guide to SOLIDWORKS 2016 Readable - Level I

Beginner's Guide to ® SOLIDWORKS 2016 Level I

Parts, Assemblies, Drawings, PhotoView 360 and SimulationXpress

Alejandro Reyes MSME, CSWE, CSWI

� � r,I]

Pue LI c ATI o NS

Better Textbooks. Lower Prices.

www.SDCpublications.com

r""\..

LJ,_)

ACCESS CODE

UNIQUE CODE INSIDE

Beginner's Guide to SOLIDWORKS 2016 Level I Parts, Assemblies, Drawings, PhotoView 360 and Simulation Xpress

Alejandro Reyes, MSME, CSWE, CSWI Certified SOLIDWORKS Professional

9S10C Publications

SDC Publications

P.O. Box 1334 Mission, KS 66222 913-262-2664 www.SDCpublications.com Publisher: Stephen Schroff

Copyright 2016 Alejandro Reyes

All rights reserved. This document may not be copied, photocopied, reproduced, transmitted, or translated in any form or for any purpose without the express written consent of the publisher, SDC Publications. Examination Copies

Books received as examination copies are for review purposes only and may not be made available for student use. Resale of examination copies is prohibited. Electronic Files

Any electronic files associated with this book are licensed to the original user only. These files may not be transferred to any other party. Trademarks and Disclaimer

SolidWorks and its family of products are registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes. Microsoft Windows and its family products are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. Every effort has been made to provide an accurate text. The author and the manufacturers shall not be held liable for any parts developed with this book or held responsible for any inaccuracies or errors that appear in the book.

ISBN-13: 978-1-58503-992-0 ISBN-10: 1-58503-992-6 Printed and bound in the United States of America.

REDEEM YOUR CODE

To access exclusive bonus content

This book comes with a unique access code that gives you access to exclusive bonus content. Please email your proof of purchase to service@SDCpublications.com in order to receive your access code. Once you've redeemed your code the book will be added to your SDC Publications Library. You can access your files wherever and whenever you want by logging into your account and going to your account library.

REDEEM YOUR CODE 1. Login to your SDC Publications account or register at SDCpublications.com/Register 2. Once you are logged in to your account visit SDCpublications.com/Redeem 3. Enter the code you received. 4. Go to SDCpublications.com/Library to access this book's exclusive content from your account library.

For answers to frequently asked questions regarding downloads and opening files visit SDCpublications.com/FAQ For technical support visit SDCpublications.com/Contact-Us Instructors: You can access this book's downloads by logging into your instructor account and visiting this book's details page on our website.

Beginner's Guide to SOLIDWORKS 2016 - Level I

Acknowledgements Beginner's Guide to SOLIDWORKS 2016-LevelI is dedicated to my lovely wife Patricia and my kids Liz, Ale and Hector, all of whom have always been very supportive, patient and comprehensive during the writing of this book. To you, all my love. Also, I wish to thank the hundreds of students, users, teachers and engineers whose great ideas and words of encouragement have helped me improve this book and make it a great success.

About the Author Alejandro Reyes holds a BSME from the Instituto Tecnologico de Ciudad Juarez, Mexico in electro-mechanical engineering and a Master's Degree from the University of Texas at El Paso in mechanical design, with a strong focus in Materials Science and Finite Element Analysis. Alejandro spent more than 8 years as a SOLIDWORKS Value Added Reseller. During this time he was a Certified SOLIDWORKS Instructor and Support Technician, Simulation Support Technician, and a Certified SOLIDWORKS Professional, a credential that he still maintains. Alejandro has over 20 years of experience using CAD/CAM/FEA software and is currently the President of MechaniCAD Inc. His professional interests include finding alternatives and improvements to existing products, FEA analysis, and new technologies. On a personal level, he enjoys bicycle riding and spending time with family and friends.

i


\

ii


Table of Contents Introduction

13

The SOLIDWORKS Interface

15

Part Modeling

25

The Housing

27

The Side Cover

107

The Top Cover

123

The Offset Shaft

151

Auxiliary Geometry:

171

The Worm Gear

181

The Worm Gear Shaft

201

Special Features: Sweep, Loft and Wrap

213

Sweep: Cup and Springs

215

The Cup

217

Simple Spring

229

Variable Pitch Spring

233

Thread Feature

237

Sweep: Bottle

243

Loft: Bottle

255

Wrap Feature

267

Worm Gear Shaft Complete

275

Worm Gear Complete

281

iii


*T

E:

3

i

fn t—J

^P

iE

or A?, :c — • -I • J-.

iM

s"

II < H

Hf

-s —L——-tl-

\ ._y

D«crfctk»: -r.r- no «J£ 113-1

J/N

AB-2468

IE

A Woirn Gear

t

&

#•>

£B

r

4

r®4 «4J e «

f©

t-0 1lfc±=

f ... -

I Gicrlox Complete

von Mises (psi) r-m 6.099e+004 15.59164-004 L-15.03364-004

34.575e+004 4.067e+004

3.5596+004 3.051e+004 2.5436+004 2.0356+004 1.527e+004 J1.019e+004 •5.1106+003 •2.979e+001 .Yield strength: 1.030e+005

IV


297

Detail Drawing Drawing One: The Housing

299

Drawing Two: The Side Cover

343

Drawing Three: The Top Cover

367

Drawing Four: The Offset Shaft

385

Drawing Five: The Worm Gear

393

Drawing Six: The Worm Gear Shaft

409 427

Assembly Modeling The Gear Housing Assembly

429

SmartMates

459

Fasteners

477

Configurations using Design Tables

489

Interference Detection

507

Assembly Configurations

511

Exploded View

531

Assembly and Design Table Drawings

555

Assembly Drawing

557

Design Table Drawing

575

Animation and Rendering

581

PhotoView 360

583

Animation

603 633

Analysis: SimulationXpress Background: Why Analysis?

635

Engine's Connecting Rod Analysis

639

v


0

vi

?

_ • x


661

A final word on analysis Collaboration: eDrawings

663

Final Comments

667

Appendix

669 669

Document templates

675

Index

vii


Notes:

viii


List of commands introduced in each chapter. Note that many commands are used extensively in following chapters after they have been presented.

PART MODELING Housing: New Part Create Sketch Confirmation Corner Sketch Grid Auto-Rotate view normal to Sketch plane Sketch Rectangle Sketch Centerline Sketch Relations Smart Dimension Sketch Status Extrude Boss/Base Document Units View Orientation Mouse Gestures Menu Customization Center Rectangle Fillet Magnifying Glass Extruded Cut Through All (End condition) Sketch Fillet Rename Features Circle Instant 3D Mirror Features Model Display Styles Fly-Out FeatureManager Dimension Tolerance Hole Wizard Cosmetic Threads Sketch Point Edit Sketch Rebuild Circular Pattern Automatic Relations Temporary Axes Sketch Slot Sketch Numeric Input

Linear Pattern Edit Material Mass Properties Side Cover Revolved Boss/Base Trim Entities Extend Entities Construction Geometry Top Cover Offset Entities Mirror Entities (Sketch) Up to Surface (End condition) Shell Measure Tool Select Other More Fillet options

SWEEP, LOFT, WRAP Sweep Thin Feature Ellipse Auxiliary Plane at point Sweep Up to Next (End condition) Full Round Fillet Helix Variable pitch helix Open Sketch Cut Guide Curves Loft Offset Plane Hide/Show Plane Loft Start/End Conditions Model Section View

Offset Shaft Revolved Cut Auxiliary Planes Wrap Wrap Hide/Show sketch Intersection Curve Convert Entities Polygon (Sketch) Flip Side to Cut Worm Gear Shaft Axis (Reference geometry) Complete Helix Coordinate Systems Sweep Worm Gear Convert Entities Mid Plane (End Condition) Chamfer Worm Gear Complete Dimension to Arc Sweep Direction 2 (End Circular Pattern Condition) Fillets Worm Gear Shaft General Review of previous commands

ix


DETAIL DRAWING Housing Drawing Part Configurations Suppress Feature Parent Child Relation Unsuppress Configure Dimensions Change Configuration New Drawing Make Drawing from Part View Palette (Drawing) Projected View Tangent Edge Display Section View Detail View Model Items (Import dimensions) Drawing cleanup Center Mark/Centerlines Add Sheet to Drawing Model View Configuration Rename Sheet

Layers Side Cover Drawing Reference Dimension Dimension Parentheses Sheet Scale View Scale Top Cover Drawing Display only Cut Surface Display Dimension As diameter Ordinate Dimension Add to Ordinate Notes Custom Document Properties Parametric Notes Link to Property

Worm Gear Drawing Display Sheet Format Insert Model View Crop View Ellipse Angle Dimension Tolerance/Precision Chamfer Dimension Edit Sheet Format / Title Block Edit Sheet Worm Gear Shaft Drawing Broken-Out Section Spline Property Tab Builder

Offset Shaft Drawing Broken View

ASSEMBLY MODELING New Assembly Add New Component Change Configuration Mates Concentric Mate Coincident Mate Move Component Rotate Component Change Appearance Parallel Mate Hide/Show Component SmartMates Mirror Components Width Mate Toolbox Fasteners Design Library Add Fasteners Cosmetic Thread Display Configurations using Design Tables

Show Feature Dimensions Rename Dimensions Edit Design Table Mate Reference Design Library Assembly Configurations Interference Detection Change dimensions in the assembly Collision Detection Isolate Gear Mate Component Transparency Display Pane Drawing update Exploded View creation Collapse View Animate Exploded view

x

Exploded View Sketch Line Assembly Drawing Show Assembly in exploded view Bill of Materials Add Custom Properties to bill of Materials Open Part from assembly drawing Format Bill of Materials Auto Balloons Assembly Views Selective Assembly Section View


ANIMATION AND RENDERING Rendering Apply materials Edit Scenes RealView Graphics Edit Lighting

Save Rendered images Best rendering practices Animation Add Animation

Exploded animation Edit time keys Edit View Points Save Animation

SimulationXpress Analysis Background Split Line SimulationXpress Model Fixture Model Forces

Meshing Run Simulation Review results Factor of Safety Generate reports eDrawings Appendix

Document Templates

XI

Model changes and simulation update Model optimization


In the next book,

Beginner's Guide to SOLIDWORKS 2016 Level you'll learn: Multi body part techniques Part editing, equations and errors Top Down design techniques Design sheet metal parts How to build and use Libraries 3D Sketches Design welded structures Structural member libraries Surface modeling Mold design tools And more...

m

-

XII

m


Introduction This book is intended to help new users learn the basic concepts of SOLIDWORKS and good solid modeling techniques in an easy to follow guide. It will be a great starting point for those new to SOLIDWORKS or as a teaching aid in classroom training to become familiar with the software's interface, basic commands and strategies as the user completes a series of models while learning different ways to accomplish a particular task. At the end of this book, the user will have a good understanding of the SOLIDWORKS interface and the most commonly used commands for part modeling, assembly and detailing after completing a series of components and their 2D drawings complete with Bill of Materials. Our books are primarily focused on the processes to complete a task, (Modeling of components, assembly or drawing), instead of the commands or operations, which are learned as we progress through the project. We strived very hard to cover the majority of the commands required to pass the multiple certification tests, including Certified SOLIDWORKS Associate, Certified SOLIDWORKS Professional, and in the level II book many of the commands for the Advanced Sheet Metal, Weldments, Surfacing, Mold Tools, and Certified Expert tests as well. SOLIDWORKS is an easy to use, yet powerful CAD software that includes many time saving tools that enable new and experienced users to complete design tasks in a very short time. The majority of the commands covered in this book are first introduced using simple examples, and while many of these commands also have advanced options, they may or not be covered in this book, as it is meant to be a starting point to help new users learn the basic and most frequently used commands, instead of an extensive in-depth command tutorial which could potentially confuse a new user; the Level II book goes deeper and covers many advanced commands, options and trade specific tools for sheet metal, mold making, surfacing, weldments, etc. SOLIDWORKS has hundreds of thousands of users from one man shops to Fortune 500 companies, as well as a very strong presence in the educational market including high schools, vocational schools and many world renowned prestigious universities. We always love to hear from our readers about your experience with our books, questions you may have, and ideas or suggestions. As much as we'd love to hear what you think we did right, we are a lot more interested, and it is that much more important to us, to know which areas can be improved. This is how we have been able to make this the best SOLIDWORKS book available. Please send us your questions, suggestions and comments by email to alejandro@mechanicad.com. Your message will be personally answered.

13


Prerequisites: This book was written assuming the reader has knowledge of the following topics: • The reader must be familiar with the Windows operating system, conventions and generalities (open, save, close, copy files, etc). • Knowledge of mechanical design, drafting (detailing), engineering graphics. • Experience with other CAD systems is a plus. • Principles of mechanics of materials is a must to understand Finite Element Analysis using SimulationXpress.

14


The SOLIDWORKS Interface The very first time we open SOLIDWORKS we are presented with the option to select our default drafting standard and units of measure. Selecting a default doesn't mean we have to use those options; we can change either one at any time as we see fit. Most samples and exercises in the book are presented using the ANSI dimensioning standard and inches for units of measure. Units and Dimension Standard Select the initial settings for the default templates: Units: IPS Onch, pound, second)

•

dimension standard: ANSI

•

NOTE: These settings can be changed for individual templates or documents in Tools, Options, Document Properties.

Cancel

OK

Help

1.1. - The Menu bar is hidden by default. It is automatically displayed when the user moves the pointer over the SOLIDWORKS banner in the upper left corner of the window and is hidden when we move away from it. In order to make the menu bar always visible for ease of clarity in the book, press the pin icon at the end of the menu bar as indicated. I

7-

pS SOLIDWORKS

I

pS SOLIDWORK

7-

pS SOLIDWORKS

D 'ft7'

•

|le ij

View

Tools

Help

File

View

Tools

Help l

'

'

'

'

{§5"

-N

'

-

-

L

-

1.2. - The SOLIDWORKS interface is simple and easy to navigate. The main areas in the interface include toolbars, menus, graphics area, Feature-

15


Manager/PropertyManager and Task Pane. SOLIDWORKS includes an intelligent system of pop up toolbars which is automatically activated when the user selects elements in the FeatureManager or graphics area. SOLIDWORKS has icons and menus similar to those of Microsoft Office applications, and follows Windows rules like drag and drop, copy/paste, etc., typical of any Windows compliant software. FeatureManager

UDWORKS

File

Menus and Toolbars Edit

View

insert

Tools

Window

m & Component Pattern

Assembly

Sketcl

Move Component

View Toolbar

/

Help

Graphics Area

/

Sn

rAssy.sidaim ?

_ n x

Show Hidden Component

Evaluate | SOLIDWORKS Add-lro

i fe 0 © Hair Drier Assy (Deflult< Display State-1: fgj History

•

D m 9

\

tSi Sensors

\

fXl Annotations

wf

L-.i Front

0 Top $ Right L» Origin y

^ (OHairDrier back<1>->? (Defautt< <

•

CjJ) 10 Hair Drier Front<1)-> ? (Defaults •

•

(0 Hair DrierfiKer<1>->?(Defauh<< Def.

• CjJ) Concentrators 1> (Defaults < Default • |||l Mates

n; Model

3D Views | Motion Study 1

SOLIDWORKS Professional 2016 x54 Edition

Task Pane Icons

The graphics area is the main part of SOLIDWORKS and where most of the action happens; this is where parts, assemblies, and drawings are created, visualized, and modified. SOLIDWORKS lets users Zoom, Pan, Rotate, change view orientations, etc., as well as change how the models are displayed, either as Shaded, Hidden Lines, Hidden Lines Visible and Wireframe to name a few. 1.3. - The FeatureManager is the graphical browser of features, operations, parts, drawing views and more where we can edit, modify, delete, etc. and is located on the left side of the screen. The FeatureManager's space is also shared by the PropertyManager and the ConfigurationManager. The PropertyManager is where most of the SOLIDWORKS' command options are presented to the user; this is also where a selected entity's properties are displayed and Configurations are created. The

16


PropertyManager is displayed automatically when needed, so the user does not need to worry about it. We'll show the user how to view both Feature and PropertyManager at the same time later in the book. 1.4. - In the PropertyManager we are presented with a consistent, common interface for most commands in SOLIDWORKS, including common controls such as check boxes, open and closed option boxes, action buttons, etc.

(?) <*-

(S§] Boss-Extrude OK

v x tr\

Help Detailed Preview

From Sketch Plane

Cancel

Expand/Collapse options box

Direction 1

Reverse Direction button

\^} I B»nd Drop-Down Options list

I 0,125in

Action Button

Value Spin Box

0 Merge result

: Draft outward

0 Direction 2 T

Check Box

Blind 0.125in

G£i • Thin Feature Selected Contours

1.5. - To manipulate the models in the graphics area, a set of tools is available from the menu "View, Modify" or the right-mouse-button menu in the graphics screen, to Zoom, Pan, Rotate, etc. Open the file 'Model Views' from the accompanying book files, select a view manipulation tool, and left-click-and-drag the mouse in the graphics area to see its effect.

17


Zoom to Fit J.J Zoom to Area

IP

Zoom In/Out

c

Rotate View Pan

(Qj

Roll View Rotate About Scene Floor

^

View Orientation... Edit Scene Open Drawing Recent Commands

1.6. - Alternatively, we can use SOLIDWORKS' Mouse Gestures. Gestures are activated by right-mouse-button-dragging in the graphics area, the gestures shortcuts wheel will appear, and we simply keep dragging to touch the command we want. In order to modify the commands in the wheel we have to select the menu "Tools, Customize" and select the Mouse Gestures tab. By default, Mouse Gestures are enabled, but they can be turned off in this tab; we can configure Mouse Gestures to have either 4 or 8 gestures for each environment (Part, Assembly, Drawing and Sketch) by assigning a command to each gesture position. In this book we'll use the 8 gesture default settings.

0

&

m

18

& m


Customize Toolbars

Shortcut Bars

Category:

Commands

Menus

Keyboard

Mouse Gestures

Customizati 0 Enable mouse gestures

All Commands

(.J 4 gestures 0 Show only commands with mouse gestures assigned

(8)8 gestures

Search for

Print ListReset to Defaults A

Category File File File

Command

Drawing

Sketch

Open.. Open Recent Recent File-

File

Browse Recent Documents..

File

Q Close..

File

P Make Drawing from Part.

File

^ Make Assembly from Part.

File

Assembly

Q New..

File

File

Part

Save.. (Jj^ Save As..

File

Save All-

File

Page Setup..

File

JT| Print Preview..

c;i«

jL_k n.:-*-

V

Description

OK

Cancel

Help

Ji

A few shortcuts to manipulate models: The mouse wheel can be used to zoom in and out in the model, notice we zoom in at the mouse pointer; clicking the middle mouse button (the wheel) and dragging the mouse Rotates the model in the graphics area. The rotation is automatic about the area of the model where the pointer is located. The Previous View (default shortcut "Ctrl+Shift+Z") and Zoom to fit (default shortcut "F") are single click commands in the view orientation toolbar. 1.7. - Use the Standard Views icon to view the model from any orthogonal view (Front, Back, Left, Bottom, Top, Right, Isometric, etc.). Another way to rotate the models on the screen is with the arrow keys in the keyboard. Holding down the "Shift" key and pressing the arrow keys rotates the model in 90° increments.

19


€> w Q - ^ ft

C3 fl© • D - ^ 66

V

View Orientation

eD "

Changes the current view orientation

e -

or number of viewports.

Ir_y

I

S,/

1/

v

v/

i/ -i.

•• m m 1.8. - Yet another way to change the view orientation is using the View Selector. We can activate it from the "View Orientation" drop down menu or using the shortcut "Ctrl + Spacebar." After activating the View Selector, every time we click in the "View Orientation" we'll get the View Selector until we turn it off. From here we can select the view we want in the translucent box and the model will be reoriented to that view.

€i-©-D>

View Selector (Ctrl+SpaceBar) Show or hide the in-context View Selector to choose from a variety of I standard and non-standard view orientations. Press Alt to expose only the back faces of the View Selector.

•

a Click on a plane to switch views

O

20


1.9. - To change the Display Style (the way the model looks in the graphics area), the Display Style icon can be selected in the View toolbar; the effects will be immediately visible to the user. Feel free to explore them with your first model to become familiar; sometimes it's convenient to switch to a different view style for visibility or easy selection of internal or hidden entities. Display Style icon Shaded with Edges

eiP 0

Shaded

U

Hidden Lines

©

Hidden Lines Visible Wireframe

1.10. - In this book we will make use of the CommandManager. The CommandManager is a tool that consolidates many toolbars in a single location, and selecting a toolbar's tab displays commands available, like Features, Sketch, Detailing, Assembly, Sheet Metal, etc. The CommandManager is a smart feature in SOLIDWORKS - depending on the task at hand, different toolbars will be available to the user - and is enabled by default. ' Swept Boss/Base Extruded Boss/Base

Revolved Boss/Base

4

Lofted Boss/Base

|g| Extruded Cut

(jjjjj

jgj Rnolved Cut

SweptCut

I Lofted Cut

<8>

m

R 0 •I

£

iiWrap

Linear

fc

Pattern |^j Draft

Intersect

™Cp

IS

Reference

Curves

Geometry

lnstant3D

(J| Shell

| Boundary Boss/Base

o

0 Fillet

p pa p

• d•

1.11. - To enable or disable the CommandManager, select the menu "View, O? - Ha CommandManager Toolbars, CommandManager." You must Use Large Buttons with Text have a document open to be able to turn the vrap Customize... CommandManager on or off. For clarity, the itersect option "Use Large Buttons with Text" has £0 2D to 3D been enabled; it can be activated by right- /lirror Align mouse-clicking anywhere in the CommandManager or a toolbar and selecting the option from the pop-up menu. Models in SOLIDWORKS can be displayed as simple solid colors or with high quality images; depending on the video card (graphics accelerator) used, real time reflections and shadows can be displayed using "RealView" technology. In our book RealView graphics will be used sparsely to make images clear and easier to understand.

21


One option the user may wish to change is to display dimensions flat to screen; this way, regardless of the orientation of the part, the dimensions are easier to read. This option can be found in the menu "Tools, Options" under the "System Options" tab, in the "Display/Selection" section. The images in this book will use the "Display dimensions flat to screen" option toggled on. By default, SOLIDWORKS shows dimensions aligned to a plane, sometimes making it difficult to read dimensions and annotations. 0 Oisplay dimensions flat to screen

[V] Oisplay notes flat to screen

1.000 p-

440

0

O

Option OFF

Option ON

22


The images in your screen may be slightly different from this book. The images in the book were made using Windows 8.1 Professional and SOLIDWORKS' default installation settings. Unless otherwise noted, the only changes made to SOLIDWORKS' default options were adding a white background and in some instances the preview colors were changed to improve clarity in print and/or electronic format. IMPORTANT NOTE: High resolution images of all the exercises are included with the exercise files or can be downloaded from our website for reference.

www.mechanicad.com With that said, let's design something...

23


Notes:

24

Part Modeling

Part Modeling The design process in SOLIDWORKS generally starts in the part modeling environment, where we create the different parts that make the design of the product or machine. These are later assembled to other parts; at that time the group of parts becomes an Assembly. In SOLIDWORKS, every component of the design will be modeled separately, and each one is a single file with the extension *.sldprt. SOLIDWORKS is Feature based software; this means that the parts are created by incrementally adding features to the model. In the simplest of terms, features are operations that either add or remove material to a part; for example, extrusions, cuts, rounds, etc. There are also features that do not create geometry, but are used as a construction aid, such as auxiliary planes, axes, etc. This book will cover many different features to create parts, including the most commonly used tools and options. Some features require a Sketch or profile to be created first; these are known as Sketched features. A Sketch is a 2D profile created on a plane or flat face that will be later used to generate a 3D feature. It is in the Sketch where most of the design information is added to the model, including dimensions and geometric relations between the different sketch elements and existing geometry. Examples of sketched features include Extrusions, Revolved features, Sweeps and Lofts. A 2D Sketch can be created only in a Plane or planar (flat) face. By default, every SOLIDWORKS Part and Assembly has three default planes (Front, Top and Right) and an Origin. Most parts can be started in any one of these planes. It is not really critical which plane we use to start our designs; however, the plane's initial selection can potentially save us a little time when working in an assembly or when we start detailing the part in the detail drawing for manufacturing. The initial planning that takes place before we start modeling a part is called the Design Intent. Basically, the Design Intent includes the general plan of how the part is going to be modeled, sort of a "Step 1, Step 2, etc.", and how we anticipate (or guess) our model may change to accommodate possible design changes to fit other parts in an assembly, or overall design needs. For example, we may choose to create a revolved feature instead of multiple extrusions, or the other way around, based on the particular needs of the task at hand. SOLIDWORKS is a 3D parametric design software. Parametric means the models created are driven by parameters. These parameters are dimensions, geometric relations, equations, etc. When a parameter is modified, the 3D model is updated to reflect the changes. Good design practices are evident in how well the Design Intent and model integrity is maintained when parameters are modified. In other words, the model updates predictably when we change the parameters.

25


Notes:

26

LZ

0

0 v

I guisnoH


Notes:

28

Part Modeling

When we start a new design, we have to decide how we are going to model it. Remember that the parts will be made one feature or operation at a time. It takes a little practice to define the optimum feature sequence for any given part, but this is something that you will master once you learn to think of parts as a sequence of features or operations. To help you understand how to make the 'Housing' part, we'll show a sequence of features. The order of some of these features can be changed, but always remember that sometimes we have to make some features before others. For example, we cannot round a corner if there are no corners to round! A sequence will be shown at the beginning of each part, and the dimensional details will be given as we progress. In this lesson we will cover the following tools and features: creating various sketch elements, geometric relations and dimensions, Extrusions, Cuts, Fillets, Mirror Features, Flole Wizard, Linear, and Circular Patterns. For the 'Housing' part, we'll follow the next sequence of features:

Base Extrusion

Top Extrusion

Fillets

Inside Cut

A Front boss

Mirror Front boss

Side boss

Mirror Side boss

A

A Front cut

Side cut

Screw ho e

Screw hole pattern

Top screw holes

Base slot

Slots pattern

Mirror slots pattern

29


2.1. - The first thing we need to do after opening SOLIDWORKS, is to make a New Part file. Go to the "New" document icon in the main toolbar and select it.

pS SOLIDWORKS

File

View

Tools

Help

ew (Ctrl+N) Creates a new document.

We are now presented with the New Document dialog. (If your screen is different than this, click the "Novice" button in the lower left corner.) Now select the "Part" template, and click OK, this is where we tell SOLIDWORKS that we want to create a Part file. Additional Part templates can be created, with different options and settings, including different units, dimensioning standards, materials, colors, etc. See the Appendix for information on how to make additional templates and change the document units to inches and/or millimeters. Using the "Advanced" option allows the user to choose from different custom templates when creating new documents instead of using the default templates.

D

New SOLIDWORKS Document

•

Part

Assembly

Drawing

a 3D representation of a single design component

a 3D arrangement of parts and/or other assemblies

a 2D engineering drawing, typically of a part or assembly

Advanced

OK

30

Cancel

Help

Part Modeling

2.2. - Now that we have made a new Part file, we can start modeling the part, and the first thing we need to do is to make the extrusion for the base of the 'Housing'. The first feature is usually one that other features can be added to or one that can be used as a starting point for our model. Select the "Extruded Boss/Base" icon from the CommandManager's Features tab (active by default). SOLIDWORKS will automatically start a new Sketch, and we will be asked to select the plane in which we want to start working. Since this is the first feature of the part, we will be shown the three standard planes (Front, Top, and Right). Remember the sketch is the 2D environment where we draw the profile before creating an extrusion, in other words, before we make it "3D."

\OLIDWORKS

File

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

Window

k - IH Hcp If J

Help

m

Reference Curves Geometry

Extruded 3os$/Base

Weldments

d Boss/Base

Mold Tools

Direct Editing j Evaluate

DimXpert

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

•Q -

Extrudes a sketch or selected sketch < contours in one or two directions to create a solid feature.

2.3. - For the 'Housing' we'll select the "Top Plane" to create the first sketch. We want to select the "Top Plane" because we are going to start modeling the part at the base of the 'Housing' and build it up as was shown in the sequence at the beginning of the chapter. Don't get too concerned if you can't figure out which plane to choose first when starting to model a part. At worst, what you thought would be a Front view may not be the front; this is for the most part irrelevant, as the user is able to choose the views at the time of detailing the part in the 2D drawing for manufacturing. Select the "Top Plane"from the screen using the left mouse button. Notice the plane is highlighted as we move the mouse to it. The view orientation will be automatically rotated to a Top View.

" S I m IS

tp .

Extrude

>

©

X Message

A

Fr

Select a plane on which to sketch the feature cross-section.

ont pi a he O,

Top Plane

31


After selecting the "Top Plane," a new Sketch is created and now we are working in the first sketch. It is in the Sketch environment where we will create the profiles that will be used to make features like Extrusions, Cuts, etc. SOLIDWORKS gives us many indications, most of them graphical, to help us know when we are working in the Sketch environment, like:

n n _ ^ x a) The Confirmation Corner is activated in the upper right corner and displays the Sketch icon in transparent colors.

b) The Status bar at the bottom shows "Editing Sketch" in the lower right corner. i

Under Defined

Editing Sketchl

c) In the FeatureManager"Sketch 1" is added at the bottom just under "Origin." •

a] Annotations

[

Q| Material < not specified> LjJ Front Plane

LjJ Top Plane LjJ Right Plane {_ (-) Sketchl

d) The part's Origin is projected in red.

L e) The Sketch tab is activated in the CommandManager displaying sketch tools.

pS SOLIDWORKS C 0"

Exit Sketch

File

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

" (Z) ~ (\)"

Smart Dimension

(p n

| o f • ST*1 • /a) •

Window

j-\^

J""1 Entities

Convert Entities

Q

f f r

Help

D-&

t'fGMirfor Entities -.

ooo OOO Linear Sketch Pattern

-U Display/Delete Relations

•o res

Sketch

Surfara

Sheet Metal

Weldments

Mold Tools

R-

32

Direct Editing

Evaluate

DimXpert

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

?JP. Skel

Part Modeling

f) If the "Display Grid" option is activated, it will be displayed. This can be easily turned on or off while in the Sketch environment, by right-mouseclicking in the graphics area and selecting the "Display Grid" command. ixeidiioib

Display/Delete Relations... Display Grid

As the reader can see, SOLIDWORKS gives us plenty of clues to help us know when we are working in a sketch. 2.4. - Notice that when we make the first sketch, SOLIDWORKS rotates the view to match the plane that we selected. In this case, we are looking at the part from above. By default, this behavior is only in the first sketch to help the user get oriented. For subsequent operations we can rotate the view manually using view orientation tools, or turn on the option to always rotate the view to be normal to the sketch plane in the menu "Tools, Options, System Options, Sketch" and turn on the option "Auto-rotate view normal to sketch plane on sketch creation." Turning this option on will help new users get oriented in 3D. Feel free to turn it ON or OFF as you feel comfortable. System Options - Sketch System Options

Document Properties!

General

jyl Auto-rotate view normal to sketch plane on sketch creation,^

Drawings

0 Use tuliy ULIIIILU jIllLlIil j

I Display Style i

Area Hatch/Fill

i..~ Performance Colors

@ Display arc centerpoints in part/assembly sketches @ Display entity points in part/assembly sketches 0 Prompt to close sketch • Create sketch on new part I fWerriHd rtrt rtran/mm/A

2.5. - The first thing we need to do in the first sketch is to draw a rectangle and center it about the origin. Select the "Rectangle" tool from the "Sketch" tab or make a right-mouse-button-click in the graphics area to select it from the pop-up menu, or click-and-drag with the rightmouse-button to select it in the Mouse Gestures. For this step, make sure we have the "Corner Rectangle" option selected in the PropertyManager of the rectangle's command.

33

pS SOLIDWORKS

*— CL o

Exit Sketch

Smart > Dimension

•

Edit

File

A7* 0

w

A

Corner Rectangle Sketches a rectangle.

Features

Sketch

Surfaces | Sheet Metal

.1

Weldm


Draw a Rectangle around the origin as shown. To draw it, left-mouse-clickand-drag (or click to start, move, click to end) to the opposite corner. Don't worry about the rectangle's size, we'll dimension it in a later step. J T Rectangle V x = 2.93, y = 2.01 Rectangle Type

.•l

a

t

''^^jpCome^f^ctangkJ^' •Add construction lines

2.6. - Notice the lines are colored using the "Selected Entity" color as defined in the system options after finishing the rectangle. This means the lines are pre selected immediately after creating them. You can unselect them by hitting the Escape (Esc) key, this will also de-select (turn off) the rectangle tool. Since we only need one rectangle in this sketch, hit the "Esc" key to finish the command. After drawing the rectangle we need to draw a "Centerline" from one corner of the rectangle to the opposite corner. The purpose of this line is to help us center the rectangle about the part's origin. (We'll also learn a faster way to do this in the next few steps.) From the Sketch tab select the "Line" command's drop down arrow, and select "Centerline" (or the menu "Tools, Sketch Entities, Centerline"). Default system colors can be changed in the menu "Tools, Options, System Options, Colors" or the Options icon.

Sketch1 of Parti "

/Vft Options Changes options settings for SOLIDWORKS.

pS SOLIDWORKS titExit Sketch

Smart Dimension

File

/ Line (L)

0 ~ (2) Sketch

Direct Editing

pS SOLIDWORKS *—

Sketches a line.

Features

Ed

Exit Sketch

9-

Smart

/

•

[

Features

-rjCenterline

•

Sketch

n—

34

Ed

me

Dimension

/

^~ Evaluate

O

File

Direct Editing

Evaluate

C

Part Modeling

2.7. - SOLIDWORKS gives the user indications that we will start or finish a line (or any geometric entity) at an existing endpoint using yellow icons; when we locate the cursor near an endpoint, line, edge, origin, etc. it will "snap" to it. With the "Centerline" tool now selected, click in one corner of the rectangle, click in the opposite corner as shown, and press the "Esc" key to finish the centerline. Notice the yellow endpoint feedback icon.

L 3.24

2.8. - Next we want to make the midpoint of the new centerline coincident to the part's origin; for this step we will add a "Midpoint" geometric relation between the centerline we just drew and the part's origin. Select the "Add Relation" command from the menu "Tools, Relations, Add," the "Add Relation" icon from the "Display/Delete Relations" drop-down icon, or from the Right-mouse-button menu. By adding this relation, the centerline's midpoint will be forced to coincide with the origin; this way the rectangle (and the part) will be centered about the origin. Centering the part about the origin and the model's planes will be useful in future operations.

-L Display/Delete Relations

c

2 (

Repair Sketch

Rapid Insl Sketch

•

•

^J^^^TspTay7DeTe?^Stations I-,

Add Relation

^1

Dimensions Relations

i, Add...

\

^

Quick Snaps

•

"Add Relation" can also be accessed through the right mouse button menu, or be configured to be available in the Mouse Gestures shortcuts.

35


A word about the sketch right mouse button menu: The SOLIDWORKS shortcut menu includes most of the sketch entities and commands available, making the menu very long. To improve workflow, we can customize it to only include the commands we use more frequently. To customize it, make a right-mouse-click in the graphics area, click in the double down arrow at the bottom of the menu, and select "Customize Menu." The menu will change to show a checkbox next to each menu item; here we can click to turn commands on or off to fit our needs. Feel free to turn them on/off as we progress through the book. Relations Display/Delete Relations... [

View Sketch Relations

Scale Entities Qj.:

Fully Define Sketch...

Stretch Entities Sketch Tools

Sketch Entities

•

More Dimensions

•

Relations Sketch Tools

O

I,| Add Relation...

Make Path Display Grid

Display Grid

^^ûstomizeênu^j^^^

Display/Delete Relations...

0

Fully Define Sketch... Relations/Snaps Options-

•

Move Entities

2.9. - The "Add Relations" PropertyManager is displayed. The PropertyManager is the area where we will make our selections and choice of options for most commands. Select the previously made centerline and the part's origin by clicking on them in the graphics area (notice how they change color and get listed under the "Selected Entities" box). Click on "Midpoint" under the "Add Relations" box to add the relation.

li Add Relations

(f)

LineS

Point1@Origin

Existing Relations

JlT

0)

Under Defined

X V

Midpoint

36

Part Modeling

After we add the Midpoint relation, the center of the line is now coincident with the Origin. Click on OK (the green checkmark) to finish the command. To test the relation we just added, click-and-drag one corner of the rectangle. You will see the rectangle resizing symmetrically and centered about the origin because of the geometric relation we added. U Add Relations

©

•0 Selected Entities

LineS Point1@Origin f Existii [MidpointO

\ \ \

(J)

Under Defined

Add Relations Midpoint Coincident

2.10. - What we just did is we manually added a geometric relation; we also added some geometric relations automatically when we drew the rectangle and the centerline in the previous step. SOLIDWORKS allows us to view the existing relations between sketch elements graphically by going to the menu "View, Hide/Show, Sketch Relations," or from the "Hide/Show Items" drop down icon in the graphics area. This option is enabled by default.

E o So

CP

Sketches Sketch Dimensions

- Q -

© -D

-o Routing Points

at

L

Sketch Planes

S3

cki] Weld Bead Annotation Link Errors

IS

Annotation Link Variables

A

Decals

View Sketch Relations (R) Control the visibility of sketch relations.

h

Sketch Relations

Primary Planes

Si3D

37


2.11. - The geometric relations are represented graphically by small icons next to each sketch element. Notice that when we move the mouse pointer over a geometric relation icon, the entity or entities that share the relation are highlighted.

To delete a geometric relation select the relation icon in the screen and press the "Delete" key, or right-mouse-click on the Geometric Relation icon and select "Delete." (Do not delete any relations at this time!)

\

N

\ \

N

NL \

\

Vertical(Line4)

\ \ \ \

The Sketch Origin U- shows the sketch's Horizontal direction (short red arrow) and Vertical direction (long red arrow). This is important to know because, when we work in 3D, we may be looking at the part in a different orientation, and vertical may not necessarily be "up" on the screen. This is a convenient way for us to know where vertical direction ("up") is in the sketch regardless of which way we are looking at it. In SOLIDWORKS we have the following basic types of geometric relations for sketch entities: •l

1

•

^

| Vertical(Point8) \

| |

Vertical When a sketch line is parallel to the sketch vertical direction (long red arrow in the origin), or when two endpoints are aligned vertically.

m

IN.

Horizontal(Poirit8) |

Vertical

— Horizontal

Horizontal Parallel to the sketch horizontal direction (short red arrow in the sketch origin), or when two endpoints are aligned horizontally.

38

Part Modeling

rv

/\ Coincident

Coincident is when a sketch entity's endpoint touches another line, endpoint, arc, circle or model edge.

\

Midpoint

Midpoint is when a line's endpoint coincides with the middle of another line, arc or a model edge. A Midpoint relation implies it is also Coincident. Parallel

Parallel is when two or more lines or a line and a linear model edge are parallel to each other, regardless of their direction.

_L

Perpendicular

Perpendicular is when two lines (or a line and a model edge) are 90° from each other. Vertical and horizontal lines are perpendicular by definition. Note that the lines don't have to be coincident to each other in order to be perpendicular. |(Q)| Concentric @9

Concentric is when two arcs or circles share the same center. Concentric can also be between a point or a line's endpoint and an arc or circle's center. Tangent

<:>•

Tangent is when a line and an arc or circle, or two arcs or two circles are tangent to each other.

s Equal

G

O *10

Equal is when two or more lines are the same length, or two or more arcs or circles have the same diameter. Collinear

•^12^

Collinear is when two or more lines lie on the same direction. They don't have to be connected.

39


2.12. - Once we have added the "Midpoint" geometric relation, the next step is to define the size of the rectangle by adding dimensions. To avoid visual clutter in the screen we can turn off the geometric relation icons using the menu "View, Hide/Show, Sketch Relations." Click with the right mouse button in the graphics area and select "Smart Dimension" from the pop-up menu or select the "Smart Dimension" icon from the Sketch toolbar. Notice the cursor changes by adding a small dimension icon next to it. This icon will let us know the Smart Dimension tool is selected.

2-

pS SOLIDWORKS <0 Smart Sketlh Dimension

File

Features

pp.

OYI

Vi

X ' O " (\J " W--o-O' A (°~°) •*

•

Edit

"

Box Selection

Smart Dimension 1

Lasso Selection

•

•

Zoom/Pan/Rotate

•

Smart Dimension (D)

Recent Commands

•

Creates a dimension for one or more selected entities. p seiectea

fs=i

ilf,

m ;m

Sketch Fillet

Smart Dimension can also be activated from the Mouse Gestures (default right-mouse-click-and-drag up), or assign a shortcut key using the menu "Tools, Customize, Keyboard." Feel free to customize a shortcut that works for you. In the next image we'll add the shortcut key "D" to Smart Dimension.

\

o

'

/r

E

0

/

0

Macro

•

Evaluate

•

Add-lns...

C

a

40

Customize...

.

Part Modeling

Customize Toolbars

Shortcut Bars

Commands | Menus j Keyboard

Mouse Gestures | Customization

Category:

All Commands

v

Show:

All Commands

v

Print List-

Copy List

Reset to Defaults

Search for:

Remove Shortcut

Category

Shortcut(s)

Command

Search Shortcut

Tools Tools

Smart

Tools Tools

|"I Vertical..

Tools

Ordinate..

12 3 LJJ

Tools

a

Tools

-3

Tools

Horizontal Ordinate.. Vertical Ordinate.. Angular Running Dimension..

Tools

<£> Path Length..

Tools

^ Align Ordinate..

2.13. - Adding dimensions in SOLIDWORKS is simple and straight forward. After activating the Smart Dimension tool, click to select the right (or left) vertical line in the sketch and then click next to it to locate the dimension. SOLIDWORKS will show the "Modify" dialog box, where we can enter the 2.625" dimension and press "Enter" or click the green checkmark. Repeat with the top horizontal line and enter a dimension of 6". As soon as the dimension value is entered, the geometry updates to reflect the correct size. If your document is in metric units, you can override the default units by adding "in" or" at the end of the value in the Modify dialog box. If this is the case, type 2.625in or 2.625" for the vertical dimension, and 6in or 6" for the horizontal dimension to override the document's units to inches.

1 Modify

\

kJ %

-l

\ \

\

•I

V \

A

X

D1@Sketch1 2.625

Mil ILLLI' Li

\

41

°

±i


Another way to pick the units of measure is to move the mouse in the pop up "Units" menu directly under the value box and select the units of choice. Modify

•

X

§ / ^

D2@Sketch1

s A cm

\ \

ft

N,

2.6

uin um

\ \

mil mm

\

nm

\

To change a dimension after adding it, double click on it to display the "Modify" box and enter the new value. To change the document's units we can either 1) go to the menu "Tools, Options, Document Properties, Units," or 2) click in the status bar in the lower right corner to set the units from the quick pick menu, or 3) launch the "Edit Document Units..." options page to change units, decimal places, dual dimension units, etc.

MKS (meter, kilogram, second) CGS (centimeter, gram, second) MMGS (millimeter, gram, second) V

IPS (inch pound second) Edit Document Units... k

Editing Sketchl

5"""" ih:>

*

)

^

If needed, change the document's units to inches, using 3 decimal places.

42

Part Modeling

Document Properties - Units System Options

U Search Options

Document Properties

Drafting Standard

Unit system

(|) Annotations

O MKS (meter, kilogram, second)

E) Dimensions Virtual Sharps 1+ Tables (jj- DimXpert

O CGS (centimeter, gram, second)

O MMGS (millimeter, gram, second) (•) IPS (inch, pound, second)

O Custom

Detailing Unit

Decimals

Length

inches

.12

Dual Dimension Lentffh

millimeters

Type

Grid/Snap Units

Basic Units

ModelJ Material Properties Image Quality Sheet Metal

More

v| A

2

Angle

Weldments

Mass/Section Properties

Plane Display

Length

Configurations

Fractions

.12345 .123456 inches

^

Mass

pounds

Per Unit Volume

inchesA3

Motion Units Time

second

.12

Force

pound-force

.12

Power

watt

.12

Energy

BTU

.12

Most exercises in this book will be in inches with three decimal places unless otherwise noted. After dimensioning the lines, notice the sketch lines changed from Blue to Black. This is one way SOLIDWORKS lets us know that the geometry is defined, meaning that we have added enough information (dimensions and/or geometric relations) to completely define the geometry in the sketch. The status bar also shows "Fully Defined" in the lower right corner. This is the preferred state before creating a feature, since there is no information missing and the geometry has been accurately and completely described. 6.000

2.625

•4.

2.23in

4.653in

o\

Fully Defined

43

/diting Sketchl

8

IPS

-


More about the sketch's state. A sketch can be in one of several states; the three main ones are: •

Under Defined: (BLUE) Not enough dimensions and/or geometric relations have been provided to completely define the sketch. Sketch geometry is blue and lines/endpoints can be dragged with the left mouse button.

t

Fully Defined: (BLACK) The Sketch has all the necessary dimensions and/or geometric relations to completely define it. This is the desired state. Fully defined geometry is black. 4.000

k

2.625

Over Defined/Unsolvable: (RED/YELLOW) Redundant and/or conflicting dimensions and/or geometric relations have been added to the sketch. If an over-defining dimension or relation is added, SOLIDWORKS will immediately warn the user. If an over-defining geometric relation (or dimension) is added, delete it or use the menu, "Edit, Undo" or select the "Undo" icon. If an over-defining dimension is added, the user will "0 be offered an option to cancel it. 6.000

<£>

k B

44

Item Item

is Unsolvable Conflicts

Part Modeling

2.14. - Now that the sketch is fully defined, we will create the first solid feature of the 'Housing'] this is when we go from the 2D Sketch to a 3D feature. Select the Features tab in the CommandManager and click in the "Extrude" icon, or click in the "Exit Sketch" icon in the Sketch toolbar. In the second case, SOLIDWORKS remembers that we wanted to make an Extrusion when we first started this feature, and displays the Extrude command's PropertyManager after exiting the sketch. Notice that the first time we create a feature in a new part, SOLIDWORKS changes the view orientation to an Isometric view and gives us a preview of what the feature will look like when finished.

File

pS SOLIDWORKS

Swept Boss/Basi

3D extruded Boss/Base

Exit Sketch

Reiolved

i

i

— i

ODD III

contours in one or two directions to

i

1

Exit this sketch and keep any changes.

Extrudes a sketch or selected sketch

1

Smart Dimlnsion

h Exit Sketch

Extruded Boss/Base

create a solid feature.

/ ~ O' IV

c

Box Base

Fe<

File

SOLIDWORKS

l- n—•—

io

VP <

•

We will make the first extrusion 0.25" thick. To do this, use the default option "Blind" for the extrusion's end condition, and enter the 0.25" dimension indicated in the "Extrude" command. To create the extruded 3D feature, select the OK button or press the "Enter" key. Q Boss-Extrude

v

x

From

A

Sketch Plane

Dir Blind

%

k

End Condition: Blind

Vpi

0.2S0in

ys Bl

nr

Draft outward C Direction 2

V

Q Thin Feature

V

Selected Contours

V

45


2.15. - After the first extrusion is completed, notice that the "Boss-Extrude1" 3D feature has been added to the FeatureManager. The confirmation corner is no longer showing the Sketch icon, and the status bar now reads: "Editing Part" alerting us that we are now editing the 3D solid part and not a 2D sketch. ;! Right Plane

J

, Origin

(£$ Boss-Extrude1 Editing Part

IPS

Expanding the "Boss-Extrude1" feature in the FeatureManager by clicking on the arrow • on the left side of it, we see that "SketchV has been absorbed by the "Boss-Extrude1" feature. ;

Right Plane

Right Plane

J , Origin

Origin

Boss-Extrude1

Boss-Extrude1

*—

Sketchl

2.16. - The second 3D feature will be similar to the first one, but with different dimensions. To create the second extrusion, we need to make a new sketch. When we select the Extruded Boss/Base in the Features tab or the Sketch icon in the Sketch tab, SOLIDWORKS gives us a message in the PropertyManager asking us to select a Plane or a planar (flat) face in the 3D model to add the sketch to it. We'll select the top face of the previous extrusion to add the sketch for the next feature.

If a Plane or a flat face is pre-selected, the new Sketch is immediately created in that Plane or face without a message.

Extrude

Message

©

A

Select: 1) a plane, a planar face or an edge on which to sketch the feature cross-section

0" Boss-Extrude1

2) an existing sketch to use for the feature.

46

Part Modeling

2.17. - When we made the first sketch, the view was automatically oriented to be normal to the sketch plane (Top view in this case). To get subsequent sketches to be automatically oriented normal to the sketch plane and saving us from doing it manually, we can set the option "Auto-rotate view normal to sketch plane on sketch creation" found in the menu "Tools, Options, Sketch."

System Options - Sketch System Options

Document Properti 0 Auto-rotate view normal to sketch plane on sketch crea^r

General

I' Imllj iI»IiiiijJ_LLLLLU

Drawings ; Display Style

0 Display arc centerpoints in part/assembly sketches

Area Hatch/Fill

0 Display entity points in part/assembly sketches

Performance

0 Prompt to close sketch

Colors

O Create sketch on new part d Override dimensions on drag/move

Relations/Snaps

If you are not looking at the part from the Top view after selecting the top face, or chose not to turn on the previous option, manually change to a Top View to see the part from the top using the "View Orientation" icon or the default keyboard shortcut "Ctrl+5," as indicated in the tooltip. Notice that when we place the mouse over a view orientation, we get a pop-up preview of it. In SOLIDWORKS we are free to work in any orientation we like as long as we can see what we are doing. Re-orienting the view helps us get used to 3D in a more familiar way by looking at our models in 2D.

| [ j- - h - b -L Q |© cc -xsr -a a; -- «—

-L

• I

Top (Ctrl+5)

Display/Delete Relations

L

€3

®"

- •

Rotates and zooms the model to the top view orientation.

Tiew Orientation Changes the current view orientation or number of viewports.

0 W A~A

47

t£>

{


2.18.-Notice that after starting the second sketch, the Sketch tab in the CommandManager is automatically selected. For the second sketch we'll use the "Center Rectangle" command; by making the rectangle using this option, the rectangle will be automatically centered about the start point, in our case, the part's origin. Click in the Rectangle's tool drop down menu in the Sketch tab, and select "Center Rectangle"; if you selected the rectangle as in the previous step, you can select the "Center Rectangle" option from the Rectangle's PropertyManager.

To make a Center Rectangle click in the Origin first, then on the top edge of the first extrusion (or the bottom; it really doesn't matter) to finish it. Notice the yellow Coincident icon as the pointer is in the origin and then on the model edge. By doing the rectangle this way we automatically add coincident relations to the origin and the top edge. The "Center Rectangle" command saves us from adding the centerlines and midpoint relations making the rectangle centere

p S SOLIDWORKS

FILE

ED,T

VIEV

t O / 'G ~ ( V '

Smart Exit Sketch Dimension

•-

A

Insert

Irim Entities

C E

•

r°"f Center Rectangle

J LIDVW

©

<5

n

3 Point Center Rectangle

J2

Parallelogram

about the origin in a single operation. ©

I 1 Rectangle

In the different types of options available to draw a rectangle, we can see green numbers; these numbers indicate the number and order of clicks needed to complete each type of rectangle.

<• Rectangle Type

n

o

u

«/ Add construction lines (•) From Corners OFron Midpoints

_ x=-2£65<.y 5.2,625

Sx

8oss-Extrude1

48

Part Modeling

2.19. - Select the "Smart Dimension" tool (toolbar, right mouse menu, Mouse Gesture or keyboard shortcut), and dimension the rectangle 4" wide by selecting the top (or bottom) line and locating the dimension above. Adding this dimension will fully define the sketch since we had added automatic geometric relations to the origin and the top edge when the rectangle was created.

2

ps

IDWORKS

c

Vi

[13

/

^ - O - Jh ' ©

Features

Edit

^ O ~ f\J*

Smart Dimension

Skefch

File

V • H

J Smart Dimension (D) Creates a dimension for one or more

f-s.

I

0

n

a selected entities.

S§l I 1=1 I IH=] I Wnrrn Note: The assigned keyboard shortcut ("D") is displayed in the tooltip. Modify

*

• x |l P D1@Sketch2

I.I n ^ \

X t / /

/

7

\ \

2.20. - We are now ready to make the second extruded feature. Select the "Extrude" command in the Features tab of the CommandManager (or "Exit Sketch" if you initially selected "Extrude") and make the extrusion 3.5" high. Also notice the part does not rotate to show an isometric view as it did in the first extrusion, and there is no option to make it do so. Therefore, we have to rotate the view ourselves to see a preview. From the Standard Views icon, select the Isometric view ("Ctrl+7" shortcut or Mouse Gesture) to see the preview of the second extrusion. Click OK to complete the command.

49


p S SOLIDWORKS

File

Q-

r ®*

Swept Boss/Base

W

Extruded Revolved Boss/Base Boss/Base

c

®®®®

~i—

i

Extruded Boss/Base

•sm

1

Extrudes a sketch or selected sketch contours in one or two directions to create a solid feature.

Isometric (Ctrl+7)

V

Rotates and zooms the model to the isometric view orientation.

JJJ Boss-Extrude >/

X

^

From Sketch Plane

Direction 1 Blind

3.500in

-

4.000

@ Merge result

til Draft outward • Direction 2 • Thin Feature Selected Contours

2.21. -The next step is to round the edges of the two extrusions. To do this, we will select the "Fillet" command. The Fillet is what's called an applied feature; we don't need a sketch to create it, and it's applied directly to the solid model. Select the "Fillet" icon from the Features Tab of the CommandManager. By default, "Constant Radius" type is selected. Change the radius to 0.25" and select the eight vertical corners indicated in the preview. SOLIDWORKS highlights the model edges when we place the cursor on top of them to let us know what we'll be selecting. If an edge to be se ected is not visible, rotate the model using the menu RnhpFp Rotate

"View, Modify, Rotate." Click-and-drag in the graphics area to rotate the part. Another way to rotate the model is by holding down the middle mouse button (scroll wheel), and dragging in the graphics area, or using the arrow keys. Click OK when the eight edges are selected to complete the command.

50

Part Modeling

IS Fillet

Rib e ji

em

b.i Draft Shell

Rffl

WraP

y

Intersec

Mirror

Fillet Creates a rounded internal or external face along one or more edges in solid or surface feature.

To use the mouse wheel's button to rotate the model, you may have to configure the middle mouse button to change it from the default "Scroll" mode to "Middle Mouse Button." If a model edge or face is mistakenly selected, simply click on it again to de select it. Select the "Full preview" option to see the resulting fillets in the graphics area as we select the edges.

3 Fillet V

X | Manual | FilletXpert]

Fillet Type

0 000 i'Vm

ii >-t

Edge<2> Edge<3» Edge<4> Edge<5> Edge<6> Edge<7> Edge<8> Edge<1> Radius 0.25in 3 Tangent propagation (ft) Full preview

A

^Partial preview^r

Fillet Parameters Symmetric

f\ |o.250in Q Multiple radius fillet Profile: Circular

m x

JU

51


A handy feature is the "Magnifying Glass" to selectively zoom in only one area of the model. To activate it, use the default shortcut "G" in the keyboard. To make multiple selections with it, hold down the "Ctrl" key, otherwise, the Magnifying Glass will turn off after making the first selection or after pressing "G' again. Scrolling with the mouse wheel will zoom inside the Magnifying Glass for more or less magnification.

Alternative: Instead of selecting the Fillet command first and then selecting the edges to round, we can select one or more model edges (using the Ctrl key while selecting) and then select the Fillet command from the fly-out features toolbar.

f

Fillet

52

Part Modeling

•§>

/+> ka VP 4 •

E

7 Qj Parti (Default-: _Display Stat •

j§) History fo] Sensors

*

5) Annotations s Material Front Plane Top Plane Right Plane

I- Origin Boss-Extrude1 de2 l3 F'Het!

2.22. - Repeat the Fillet command to add a 0.125" radius fillet at the base of the 'Housing' but instead of edges we'll select the faces indicated. When we select a face, SOLIDWORKS rounds all the edges connected to it. Click OK to continue. © Fillet V

X Manual

FilletXpert

Fillet Type

® © Items To Fillet Face<1>

@ Tangent propagation (•) Full preview O Partial preview O No preview fJJGX Parameters Symmetric 0.125in

1 i

Multiple radius Wret

Radius: 0.125m

Circular

53


Notice how the new fillets are blended with the previous vertical fillets.

We can change the appearance of tangent edges (the edges where two tangent faces meet) by selecting the menu, "View, Display" and selecting the display option desired: Visible, as Phantom or Removed. Explore the different options to find the one you feel more comfortable with. In this book Phantom lines will be used for clarity, unless otherwise noted. 2.23. - We will now remove material from the model using the "Extruded Cut" command. Switch to a Top View using the View Orientation toolbar, Mouse Gesture or shortcut Ctrl+5 to make the next feature. Fillet

Linear

Top (Ctrl+5)

Pattern

[

/ & P Ca Rotates and zooms the model ijhe top view orientation.

[0

m

e

Edit

View

Insert

u Tools

ase Extruded Cut

lase

w

ard

ss/Base jate

DimX|

<§) Parti

Window

Revolved Cut

P n • m ffl

Help

Swept C

Lofted C

6ounda

Extruded Cut Cuts a solid model by extruding a sketched profile in one or two directions.

b

Select the "Extruded Cut" command from the Features tab; you will be asked to select a face or planar face just as with the "Extruded Boss." Select the top most face to create a new Sketch in it, and using the "Corner Rectangle" tool from the now visible Sketch toolbar, draw a rectangle inside the top face.

54

Part Modeling

,r

' lM

k\

>i

rV

V Boss-Extrude2

pS SOUDWORKS

c

Exit Sketch

Smart Dimensi

•

File

Edit

0 •0 *60 J

Corner Rectangle

t

Sketches a rectangle. Features

Sketch | Direct Editing

Evaluate

Dim)

If the option "Auto-rotate view normal to sketch plane on sketch creation" is set, the model will automatically rotate to a Top View after selecting the top face without having to change the model's view.

L

i..

Jii 2.24. - To add the dimensions select the "Smart Dimension" tool; we can add dimensions from sketch geometry to model edges simply by selecting them. Select a Sketch line, click on a model edge parallel to it, and finally click to locate the dimension in the screen. When asked, enter a 0.375" dimension. Repeat to add the other three dimensions and also make them 0.375".

55


p S SOLIDWORKS

File

Edit

Vi

\ 0

/•Q-f\JExit Smart mart Sketch Dimension lensii

"

0

u a

Creates a dimension for one or more selected entities. I I

E

•

•P

Smart Dimension (D)

|a —

A

A (°~°) "

Features

c

l l n

I

1 1 Ji

i

I

1.7 Boss-Extrude2

L

L

Second Selection

First selection

Modify

*

X 1/ %

D1@Sketch3 37S|

M

t

Locate and enter dimension value

56

Part Modeling

.375 —

1.

A .375 —1

If needed, switch to a "Hidden Lines Removed" mode from the View Style icon to view the model without shading to facilitate visualization. This change can be done at any time during modeling.

' rP

&

Display Style menu

©

Q

Display Style Changes the display style for the active view.

4

0

Shaded with Edges

U

Shaded

0

Hidden Lines Removed

m

Hidden Lines Visible

©

Wireframe

2.25. - In this feature, we will round the corners in the sketch using a Sketch Fillet. We can add the fillets to the 3D model as applied features like before, but in this step we chose to show you how to round the corners in the Sketch before making the "Extruded Cut" feature. Select the "Sketch Fillet" icon from the Sketch toolbar.

p S SOLIDWORKS *—

c

o

Features

•

Sketch

• CD •

Edit

View

/ - Q ' (\J'

Exit Smart Sketch Dimension

•

File

° J *

QI

•

/

Evalu

Tools

Window

U © (C 1 /A\

•

Direct Editing

Insert

Trim Entities

Convert Entities

•

•

, j\e Entities

Sketch Fillet Rounds the corner at the intersection of two sketch entities, creating a tangent arc.

57


Set the fillet radius to 0.150", and click on the corners of the sketch lines as indicated to round them. Notice the preview in the screen. After clicking on all 4 corners, click OK to finish the Sketch Fillet command. Adding multiple fillets at the same time results in only one dimension being added; the reason is that SOLIDWORKS adds an equal relation from each fillet to the dimensioned one. .375 —

.375

Sketch Fillet

-.375

" *0 Message

+

Select a sketch vertex or entities to fillet. Entities to Fillet Fillet<1> Fillet<2>

L

Fillet<3>

jPret Parameters ^

^

0.150in

pl Keep constrained corne

o/ 2:

I Dimension each filljlr

.375—1

.375

.375 —

r

&

.375

=7

=

f—10 +

t

•lVjb-

.375—1

150

After adding the sketch fillets, we can see the number of geometric relations are starting to clutter the screen. To help clear up the screen, we can turn geometric relations ON or OFF. Select the menu "View, Hide/Show, Sketch Relations," or from the "Hide/Show Items" dropdown icon, turn off "View Sketch Relations." In this case the keyboard shortcut "R" has been added to the "View Sketch Relations" command.

58

Part Modeling

•xvll View Sketch Relations (R)

D

; Control the visibility of sketch i relations.

Hide/Show Items Changes the visibility of items in the graphics area.

K fî

2.26. - Now we select the "Extruded Cut" icon from the Features tab in the CommandManager to remove material. Opposite to the Boss Extrude feature that adds material, the Cut feature, as its name implies, removes material from the model.

%

Extruded Cut

Revolved Cut

-

DimX

Extruded Cut Cuts a solid model by extruding a sketched profile in one ortwo directions.

tM

a

Change the view to Isometric

Isometric (Ctrl+7

0

•am Rotates and zooms the model to the isometric view orientation.

Shaded With Edges

Displays a shaded view of the model with its edges.

... and Shaded with Edges for better visualization.

59


Make the cut 3.5" deep and click on OK to finish the cut. 75

|§l Cut-Extrude •

X

'W

/

Sketch Plane

Direction 1

0

r

n.l

150 1$;

3.500in

b> Draft outward U Direction 2 • Thin Feature Selected Contours

Features can be Renamed in the FeatureManager for easier identification. To rename a feature, slowly double-click the feature, or select it and press F2, and type a new name (just like renaming files in Windows Explorer). © Filletl © Fillet2

• (jtSl Cut-Extrude1f[^ Select Feature

\J

© Filletl © Fillet2

0

© Filletl

-*-~y


© Fillet2

CHll&]|Cut-Extrudel|

1

Click again...(or F2)

•

@| Top Cut

|

Type a new name

•

l@ Top Cut

Finish

2.27. - In the next step we will add a round boss to the front of the 'Housing'. Switch to a Front View using the "View Orientation" toolbar, Mouse Gestures or shortcut Ctrl+1.

t? ® *

ri+1)

Rotates and zooms the model to the front view orientation.

60

Part Modeling

Select the "Sketch" icon from the Sketch tab in the CommandManager and click in the front face, or the reverse order: select the face first, and then click in the "Sketch" icon.

7<-

File

pS SOLIDWORKS

fV Imart

Sketch

_

View

&

.

CO - A

Dimension

c°~°)» h

Edit

,» aluate

Sketch

•

DimXpert

Creates a new sketch, or edits an ~1 existing sketch.

|

stj | liel i ih3 | wf

&

€

33

_U'

2.28. - Once we have the sketch created select the "Circle" tool from the Sketch tab in the CommandManager or using the Mouse Gestures. Draw a circle approximately as shown; click near the middle of the part to locate the center of the circle, and click again to set its size. (You can also click-and-drag from the center to draw the circle.) Don't worry about the size; we'll dimension it in the next step.

pS SOLIDWORKS

r

Sketch

File

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

Smart Dimension

Convert ketches a circle. Select the center of

© Features

Sketch

m

e

©

©

o /

-6

the circle, then drag to set its radius.

Direct Editing

Evaluate *

DimXpert

/

0

SOLIDWORKS A

"tijl Parti (Default<.,

•kpp-t'

61

a


R =1

y .

=r

.4-

To define the circle's location, select the "Smart Dimension" tool. Click on either the center of the circle or its perimeter, and then on the top edge of the 'Housing'. Finally, locate the dimension and enter the value of 1.875". For the Diameter, select the circle and locate the 3.25" diameter dimension as shown.

Boss-Extrude2

% 3 £

.875

1.875

o

3 £

r

1.875

.875

£e

33 £

62

03.250

R

Part Modeling

2.29. - To make the circle horizontally centered in the part, we will manually add a Vertical Relation between the center of the circle and the part's origin. SOLIDWORKS allows us to align sketch elements to each other or to existing model geometry (edges, faces, vertices, planes, origin, etc.). From the right mouse button menu, select "Add Relation" or use the menu "Tools, Relations, Add."

Trim Entities

_l

Sketch Entities

•

More Dimensions

•

Add Relation Relati

C

Sketch Tools

•

Sketch Settings

•

Blocks

•

Spline Tools

•

Dimensions

•

Relations

Add...

k

J

Fully Define Sketch... y Equations...

Sketch Tools

Quick Snaps

•

Customize Menu

Display Grid

»i

Select the circle's center (not the perimeter!) and the origin. Click on "Vertical" to add the relation and make the circle's center vertical in relation to the origin. When done click OK to finish. Adding this relation fully defines our sketch. Note the origin's Vertical direction identified by the long red arrow. (The horizontal is the short red arrow.)

q

i ]

u

_k Add Relations

03.250

Selected Entities

1.875

Existing Relations

_Ll~~

(J) Under Defined Add Relations

vertical

E

h

63


Alternatively we can add the vertical relation by pre-selecting the origin and the circle's center, and then selecting the "Vertical" relation from the pop-up menu.

— 03.250 1.875

/ Make Vertical

\ 3

03.250

1.875

.i

E

r

2.30. - Instead of making an extrusion like we did before, we are going to add material using a different technique. After adding the Vertical geometric relation, exit the sketch. We'll use a time saving feature called "Instant 3D" to make the extrusion. It should be active by default in the Features tab in the CommandManager; otherwise, click to activate it.

64

Part Modeling

pS SOUDWORKS m • l_

O

[,it

Smart

Sketch

6h -

File

IP

/~ O~ f\J

Reference Geometry

Part...

?

-

1S( Curves lnstant3D 1

mension n - ^ - CO

•

q ' <3>

> & r q -

Exit Sketch Exit this sketch arid keep any changes.

on t /t\ \rm\

,fPl

•

lnstant3D Enable dragging of handles, dimensions, and sketches to dynamically modify features.

To make the extrusion, switch to an isometric view using the View Orientation toolbar, and select the circle of the previously made sketch. Be aware that now we are editing the part, we left the sketch editing environment. Once the sketch circle is selected, click-and-drag on the arrow that appears in it; this is the handle to extrude the sketch. You will immediately see a dynamic ruler that will show the size of the extrusion as you drag it. Make sure to extrude it 0.250". When you release the handle, a new extrusion will be created. To modify this (or any other) extrusion, simply select the front face of the extrusion and drag again on the handle to a new size. You can control the size of the extrusion with more precision by dragging the handle over the ruler's marks, this way the handle will snap to the markers. The smaller step in the ruler is controlled by the default increment in the spin box settings. Go to the menu "Tools, Options, Spin Box Increments." For convenience, we have set the length increment to 0.125" for English units and 2.5mm for metric units.

•

System Options - Spin Box Increments

i System Options Document Properties General

Length increments

Drawings

English units:

0.125in

Metric units:

2.500mm

Angle increments:

1.00*

Time increments:

0.10s

Display Style Area Hatch/Fill Performance Colors Sketch i~ Relations/Snaps Display/Selection Performance Assemblies External References Default Templates File Locations FeatureManager 1 Spin Box Increments View Backup/Recover

65


/

/ 875

f

%

©3.250

/">

l

2.31.-Rename this extrusion as "Front Boss" by slowly double-clicking the feature's name in the FeatureManager, or selecting it and then pressing F2. •

Ij5|) Boss-Extrude2 13 Fillet! 3 Fillet2

•

|p Top Cut

•

^jj| Front Bossj

2.32. - The next step is to create an identical extrusion in the opposite side of the 'Housing'. To make it we'll use the "Mirror" command. It will make an identical 3D copy of the extrusion we just made. Switch to an Isometric view to help us visualize the Mirror's preview and make sure we are getting what we want. Select the "Mirror" icon from the Features toolbar in the CommandManager.

D

& - I B ® '

© $

Fillet

Linear Pattern

u

Wrap

lS^\ Draft

rsect

Reference Geometry

Curves

lnstant3D

(|^| sh/l t|<] mirror

3

p 13-

or Mirrors features, faces, and bodies about a face or a plane.

66

Part Modeling

2.33. - From the Mirror's PropertyManager, we have to make two selections. The first one is the Mirror Face or Plane and the second is the feature(s) we want to make a mirror of. The face or plane that will be used to mirror the feature has to be in the middle between the original feature and the desired mirrored copy. Making the first extrusion centered about the origin caused the built in "Front Plane" of the 'Housing' to be in the middle of the part, making it the best (and only) option for a Mirror Plane in this case. To select the "Front Plane" (make sure the "Mirror Face/Plane" selection box is highlighted, this means it is the active selection box), click on the " •" sign next to the part's name to reveal a fly-out FeatureManager, from where we can select the "Front Plane." Features

Sketch

Direct Editing

firfstuar^3imXpert

BOD

<8

iii

o

Parti (Default<...

R d>

Ca|li] Mirror V

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

X

Mirror Face/Plane

a Features to Mirror

<5

Parti (Default<

r

o/?

•

[*3| History

•

m Annotations

GU Sensors

Mirror V

X

Mirror Face/Plane

J Material Front Plane

©

[jj Right Plane Features to Mirror ©

Origin Boss-Extrude1 Boss-Extrude2

Faces to Mirror Bodies to Mirror

© Filletl © Filiet2

a

H Top Cut Options

Front Boss

P Geometry Pattern @ Propagate visual properties

O Full preview

rr

(8) Partial preview

67


2.34. - After selecting the "Front Plane" from the fly-out FeatureManager, SOLIDWORKS automatically activates the "Features to Mirror" selection box (now highlighted) and is ready for us to select the feature(s) we want to mirror. If the 'Front Boss' extrusion is pre-selected before activating the Mirror command, it is automatically added to the "Features to Mirror" selection box, otherwise we have to select it either from the FeatureManager or in the graphics area. When selecting features from the graphics area be sure to select a face that belongs to the feature. When traversing the FeatureManager, notice how SOLIDWORKS highlights the features in the screen before selecting it. Notice the preview after making your selections and click OK. Rotate the view to inspect the mirrored feature. v

o— a— Q

H

•sjfcj Parti (Default<.., •

£
)

CÎlI Mirror

(<9| History

rront

Annotations V

x

it specifi

J Mirror Face/Plane

>

Front Plane

A |

Front Plane |J1 Right Plane \ '

Features to Mirror

©

Front Boss

L Origin •

Boss-Extrude1

o

Boss-Extrude2

Faces to Mirror

v

Bodies to Mirror

v

® Filletl 0 Fillet2

Options

Front Boss

O Geometry Pattern @ Propagate visual properties

y

O Full preview Parti (Default<_Display Stat *

(S) History

F

OD Annotations

fol Sensors

Material , i Front ,

Top Plane Right Plane

I- Origin Boss-Extrude1 •

i® Boss-Extrude2 0 Filletl 0 Fillet2

*

|J§I Top Cut

a

• I® Front 6|f0 Mirror!

68

Part Modeling

2.35. - In the next step we'll add the small boss at the right side of the 'Housing'. Switch to a Right view using the View Orientation toolbar (Shortcut Ctrl+4), and select the "Sketch" icon from the CommandManager's Sketch tab. Select the rightmost face to create the Sketch (or select the face and then the Sketch command), draw a circle using the "Circle" tool, and add the dimensions shown. Just as we did with the front cylindrical boss, add a Vertical Relation between the center of the circle and the part's origin. From the right mouse button menu or the Sketch toolbar, select "Add Relation," select the center of the circle and the origin, and add a "Vertical" relation between them by selecting it in the "Add Relations" box. Optionally, pre-select both and select "Make Vertical" from the pop-up menu. 01.000

i .750

V 8oss-Extrude2

•

i1

m

h

1«

Draw & dimension circle

Select Sketch plane

01.000 750

- i,a Make Vertical

m Add vertical relation

When adding relations, if you accidentally select more entities than needed, you can unselect them in the screen, or select them in the selection box and delete them using the "Delete" key.

69


2.36. - Now we are ready to extrude the sketch to make X the side boss. We'll use the "Instant 3D" function as we did in the previous extrusion. Exit the Sketch by selecting "Exit Sketch" in the CommandManager's Sketch tab or the Sketch icon in the confirmation corner (not the red X), a and change to an Isometric view. In the graphics area select the circle of the sketch we just drew, and click-anddrag the arrow along the ruler markers to make the extrusion 0.5" long. Rename this extrusion 'Side Boss' in the FeatureManager.

ft

* ©

ft

®0

13 Fillet2 •

p Top Cut Front Boss Mirrorl

•

Side Boss

2.37. - Just like we did with the front circular boss, we'll mirror this Rib Wrap "cP 7f ^ extrusion about the "Right Plane" Reference Curves Instant? (which is also in the middle of the Geometry Draft Intersect (0 part). Select the "Mirror" command from the Features tab in Shel m Mirror the CommandManager, using the fly-out FeatureManager, select the Mirror "Right Plane" as the "Mirror * 63 w Mirrors features, faces, and bodies Face/Plane" and the 'Side Boss' about a face or a plane. extrusion in the "Features to Mirror" selection box to complete the Mirror command.

70

Part Modeling

L

m hd

zt> a w < > ©

Mirror

•

• [§ History Sensors

• [A] Annotations

X

Material
A

Mirror Face/Plane

©

(§3 Parti (Default<...

/

£

Right Plane

Right Plane A

Features to Mirror BEHEST

Boss-Extrude1 o

• m Boss-Extrude2

Faces to Mirror

V

Bodies to Mirror

V

0 Fillet! 0 Fillet2 •

Options

@ Top Cut

• ^ Front Boss

[~l Geometry Pattern @ Propagate visual properties Wl Side Bos

O Full preview ® Partial preview

2.38. - We'll now make the circular cut in the front of the 'Housing'. Change to a Front view for easier visualization. Select the "Sketch" icon from the Sketch tab and click in the round front face of the part (or select the face first, and then the Sketch icon).

pS SOUDWORKS

c Sketch

o /' 0 • i

Smart Dimension

c°~°)' (^y Sketch Creates a new sketch, or edits an existing sketch.

i ia=i i us i

/

[

f.l

V

| Front Boss \

A

*»

J.--

71


Draw a circle using the "Circle" tool and dimension it 2.250" in diameter.

pS SOLIDWORKS

File

Edit

View

C o /(~0~

Exit Sketch

Smart Dimension a ^

Insert

Trim

Tools

©

Convert

Circ w

Sketches a circle. Select the center of ^ the circle, then drag to set its radius.

pS SOLIDWORKS C/ c V / -

Exit 1 Smart Sketc# Dimension

N

-

J J'

L ^ |\^» y

To locate the circle in the center of the circular face, we'll add a "Concentric Relation." Select the "Add Relation" icon from the right mouse button menu; select the circle we just drew and the edge of the circular face. Click "Concentric" to add the relation and center the circle. Click OK to finish the command. In

Add Relations

5) 02.250

s/ 0 Selected Entities Arcl

Existing Relations

(J) Under Defined

Add Relations i

Coradial

@

Concentric

B

Another way to add a concentric relation is to pre-select the circle and the edge of the"Front Boss" (hold down the Ctrl key while selecting), and select Concentric from the pop-up menu or the PropertyManager. When adding a single geometric relation this is usually a faster way to do it.

72

Part Modeling

02.250

Concentric

a 02.250

s

a

•-

r~i

2.39. - Now that the circle is concentric with the boss, we'll make the cut. Select the "Extruded Cut" command from the Features tab and switch to an isometric view for better visualization. From the "Extruded Cut' properties select the "Through All" option and OK to finish; by using this end condition the cut will go through the entire part regardless of its size. In other words, if we change the 'Housing' to be wider, the cut will still go through it. Rename the new feature "Front Cut."

p5> SOUDWORKS

Features

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

Swept Boss/Base

3) Extruded Boss/Base

File

C3 •— o

Extruded Cut

Direct Editing

Evaluate

Help

W

Revolved Boss/Base

Sketch

Window

DimX|

Revolved Cut

Extruded Cut

Cuts a solid model by extruding a sketched profile in one or two directions.

4*

73


(kjl Cut-Extrude V

X

©

^

From Sketch Plane

directior^^^^ '

1

Through All

End Condition : Through All •Flip side to cut

ft

-

Draft outward

A

CI

Direction 2

V

CI

Thin Feature

V

v

Selected Contours

2.40. - We will now make a hole in the boss added in step 37 for a shaft. Switch to a Right view and create a new sketch on the small circular face of the "Side Boss" by selecting the "Sketch" icon and then the circular face to locate it.

(

V

]* i

| Side Boss |

74

Part Modeling

We know that we want the hole to be concentric with the boss. In order to do this we can draw the circle and add a concentric relation as we did before; however, this is a two-step process. Instead, we will do it in one step as follows: Select the "Circle" tool icon and before drawing the circle, move the cursor and rest it on top of the circular edge as shown, the center of the circular edge is revealed in a fraction of a second. DO NOT CLICK ON THE EDGE. This highlight works only if you have a drawing tool active (Line, Circle, Arc, etc.). This technique can be used to reveal any circular edge's center and reference any other model edges.

2.41. - Once the circular edge's center is revealed, click in it to start drawing the circle automatically capturing a concentric relation with the center of the boss. Finish the circle and dimension it 0.575" in diameter. Now the sketch is fully defined.

0.575

2.42. - Since this hole will be used for a shaft, we need to add a bilateral tolerance to the dimension. Select the 0.575" dimension in the graphics area, and from the dimension's PropertyManager, under "Tolerance/Precision" select "Bilateral." Now we can add the tolerances. Notice that the dimension changes immediately in the graphics area. This tolerance will be transferred to the Housing's detail drawing later on. If needed, tolerances can also be added later in the detail drawing.

75


©

^ Dimension

Leaders

Value

Other

©

57?

JU5

JIJIJ

Style

Of n % v n lerance/Preasion Bilateral

O.QOSin

Tolerance Type —-p-.

O.OQOin arentheses .123 (Document) so,

Same as nominal (Docum* v

Primary Value

2.43. - Now we can make a Cut with the "Through AM" option using the "Extruded Cut' command. Switch to an isometric view if needed. Rename the finished Feature "Shaft hole." |J§] Cut-Extrude •

X

From Sketch Plane

+ .005 .575 -.COO

Through All

6

End Condition : Through All

CI Flip side to cut -

|

i Draft outward

d Direction 2

V

• Thin Feature

V

Selected Contours

L

76

Part Modeling

2.44. - To try a different approach using the "Instant 3D" feature, select the "Shaft Hole" feature and delete it, but do not delete the sketch. To use "Instant 3D" to make a cut, click in the "Exit Sketch" icon, change to an Isometric view for clarity, and just like we did for the Extrusion, select the sketch circle and click-and-drag the handle ijito the part. You Confirm Delete how the part is cut as the arrow is dragged. The only disadvantage to Delete the following item? Yes making the cut using this technique is Shaft Hole ( Feature ) Yes to A that the "Through AN" option is not And all dependent items: available, it will be a defined distance No only. Cancel

Uj|bj ivnrrori •

Mirror2 ^ > •

© Front CiC © Shaft Hole

Help

Parent/Child...

^ Side Boss

JS^^^wrfi^rMêature X

Delete....

}

l~l Delete absorbed features

Advanced

iwmluluulhn

"•fV

iiiliil In "UTTiiii

(§1

Save Selection

Pn

Add to New Folder

l~1 Don't show again

•Ul

+ .005 0.575 -.000

/fiiY 77


2.45. - For the next feature we'll make a 20 tapped hole in the front face. SOLIDWORKS provides us with a tool to automate the creation of simple, Countersunk and Counterbore holes, slots, tap and Pipe taps by simply selecting a fastener size, depth, and location. The "Hole Wizard" command is a two-step process: in the first step we define the hole's type and size, and in the second step we define the location of the hole(s). To add the tapped hole, switch to a Front view. The Hole Wizard is a special type of feature that uses 2 sketches that are automatically created, so there is no need to add a sketch first; in fact, it works very much like an applied feature. Change to a Front View for clarity, and select the "Hole Wizard" icon from the Features tab in the CommandManager. The first thing we'll do is to define the hole's type and size. Select "Tap" for "Hole Type," "ANSI Inch" for Standard, "Tapped Hole" for Screw type and from the drop down selection list pick "%-20" for size. Change the "End Condition" to "Up to Swept Cut Next," this will make the tapped hole's [jyj]/ 1 Fille depth up to the next face where it makes a ExtrudA Hole Rarolved rCffi Wizard /Cut IjJD Lofted Cut Cut complete round hole. At the bottom \ activate the button to add Cosmetic Boundary Cut • L.Ci sr Threads. nXpert

S< ^ Hole Wizard Inserts a hole using a pre-defined cross-section.

Hole Specification

V

X

SI Type

\£_

Positions j

Hole Type

1® i t ® 'ffi )B i# m » 3D V

ANSI Inch Type: Tapped hole

V A

Hole Specifications Size:

[1/4-20 • Show custom sizing A

End Condition ^

Up To Next

V

Thread: Up To Next

V

<

Options

0 I-! With threart

Cosmetic thread i

•Front

78

Part Modeling

2.46. - The second step of the "Hole Wizard" is to define the hole's location. After selecting the type of hole we want to make, activate the "Positions" tab at the top of the properties, SOLIDWORKS will ask you to select a flat face to locate the hole(s). Select the round face at the front of the part. Hole Position

•

7i

X

«I

Typ

T? Positions

Hole Position(s) Select the face for the hole or slot position. To create holes on multiple faces, dick 3D Sketch.

Front Boss

EE

±3

Immediately after selecting the face, SOLIDWORKS will automatically select the "Sketch Point" tool and we are ready to define the hole's location. Anywhere we add a sketch point, the Hole Wizard will add a hole. For this exercise we only need to make one, and in order to locate it we'll use regular sketch tools (dimensions and geometric relations; notice that we are working in a Sketch). We want this hole to be located in the middle of the flat face's width; to locate it, first draw a "Centerline" by selecting it from the drop-down menu in the "Line" command. Start drawing the centerline at the right quadrant of the outer circular edge, and finish it in the same quadrant of the inner circular edge. The quadrants are activated after selecting the Centerline tool and touching (not clicking!) the circular edges. (Notice the reference icons after touching the edges.) Hit the Esc key once to finish the Centerline command. pS SOLIDWORKS

File

Edit

View

/I-Q-A7* Smart

Dimension Centerline

79

I

A


.

XX

Click for Start of centerline

r"

0.5. t

X-

Click for End of centerline

When the centerline is complete, select the "Sketch Point" command from the Sketch tab in the CommandManager. The idea behind this technique is to make sure the hole is centered in the circular face. To add the sketch point that will define the hole's location, touch the centerline for a split second to reveal its midpoint (like we just did with the circular edges), and click in its center to add the sketch point.

Finished Centerline

AJ Trim Entities

0

©

Convert Entities

0 iluate

qp

Point Sketches a point.

->Ad. >

• - -x

—

—

Now the hole will be located in the middle of the Centerline. Click OK to finish the Hole Wizard.

80

Part Modeling

If the point had been added in a different location, we could add the midpoint relation by Window-Selecting the "Point" and the "Centerline," and from the pop-up toolbar selecting "Make Midpoint." If we had pre-selected the face before selecting the hole wizard command we would have seen this scenario.

i

\

£

A

\

Make Midpoint

x3

/

Window select entities

Add Midpoint relation from pop-up menu

The "Cosmetic Thread" option adds a threaded texture to the holes, instead of an actual thread for looks and performance purposes. To show or hide the "Cosmetic Threads" right-mouse-click in the "Annotations" folder at the top of the FeatureManager, select "Details" and toggle the options "Cosmetic Threads" and "Shaded Cosmetic Parti (Default<_Display Stat Threads." Remember that these are not real threads in the model. Real helical • [©) History Sensors threads can be made, but it's mostly unnecessary in these cases. Later in the FT! Annotatioi = Details book we'll learn how to model real 1 ^ Material threads. Front Plane Top Plane Right Plane

0 0

Annotation Properties Display filter 0 Cosmetic threads

0 Shaded cosmetic threads

0 Datums

0 Datum targets 0 Reference dimensions

0 Notes 0 Surface finish 0 Welds

1 I DimXpert dimensions

O Display all types

1 I Feature dimensions

Text scale:

1:1

[Vl Alwavs riisnlavtext

at the samp si7P

81

Display Annotations

Show Feature Dimensions Show Reference Dimensions


The difference between the two types is: 1. Cosmetic thread is the annotation that shows up in a 2D drawing to indicate a thread. 2. Shaded cosmetic thread is a texture added to the holes to give the 3D model the appearance of a thread and it's only for visual effect. This is the finished %"-20 Tapped Hole with cosmetic threads.

s

Parti (Default<_Display Stat •

History fp*l Sensors

*

03 Annotations Material
•

P Top Cut Front Boss 6|f3 Mirrorl

•

Side Boss fcl|fl Mirror2 @ Front Cut

fit IIUIH

—

•0 1/4-20 Tapped Holel

2.47. -After making the Tapped hole, we suddenly realize that the walls of the 'Housing' need to be thinner, and we need to make a change to our design. In order to do this, we find the feature that we want to modify in the FeatureManager (Top Cut' in our case) or in the graphics area and select it. From the pop-up toolbar, select the "Edit Sketch" icon. This will allow us to go back to the original sketch and make changes to it. Notice the selected feature is highlighted in the screen. There is no real purpose to this dimensional change but to show the reader how to change an existing feature's sketch if needed. While editing a sketch, dimensions, geometry, and geometric relations can be added, edited or removed as needed.

82

Part Modeling

Parti (Default< _Display Stat | History | Sensors | Annotations (35 Material ;

Front Plane

[p Top Plane Right Plane

lorigin Boss-Extfed-1

51 5TO

0 Filletl

0 Fillet2 M Top Cut

tcii?

i-r- e t c h

Front Boss Mirrorl <63 Side Boss

%

CajlO Mirror2 (P Front Cut

L

/•

/

(P Shaft Hole

/

i 1/4-20 Tapped Holel .•*/

375

375

.375

£

375 .150

Selecting the "Edit Feature" icon will show the Cut Extrude command options; this is where we can change the cut's depth and other feature's parameters.

•

(63 Boss-j ©

5V\

Fillet1

(J) Fillet2

@ Top Cut

Edit Feature

Front Boss

If we select the feature with a right-mouse-click, we will see the pop-up toolbar along with an options menu. The most commonly used commands are already in the pop-up toolbar. If the "Instant 3D" command is activated, selecting a feature will show its dimensions on the screen (more about that later).

83


2.48. - What we just did was to go back to editing the feature's Sketch, just like when we first created it. Switch to a Top view if needed for better visualization. To change a dimension's value double click on it to display the "Modify" dialog box. Change the two dimensions indicated from 0.375" to 0.25" as shown. .375

.375 —

/x= Modify

X

V>

L

l| S ±0$, A

D4@Ske 0.250in|

-/J • r.150

.250

f

To arrange the dimensions just click-and-drag to move them around.

2.49. - After changing the dimensions we cannot select "Cut Extrude" because we had already made a cut; what we have to do now is select "Exit Sketch" or "Rebuild" the part (Ctrl+B) to update the model with the new dimensions.

/ ' O ' (V

c Exit Sketch

art Dinfension

• —

•— •—

a- ^ - < 9 o~ o

Quick Snaps

^

2 E

05 -

Ske...

9

(Ctrl+B) Rebuilds the part, assembly, or drawing.

lnst

Sketch

_fj Exit Sketch Exit this sketch and keep any changes.

Another way we can make these changes is using the "lnstant3D" functionality. The way it works is very simple: nstant3D instead of having to edit the sketch, we select the feature that we want to modify either in the FeatureManager or the graphics area (in this case one of the inside faces which were made with the Cut Extrude) and click-and-drag the blue dots at each of the dimensions that need to be modified until we get the desired value, without having to edit the sketch. Dragging the mouse pointer over the ruler markers will give you values in exact increments. Depending on the speed of your PC and the feature being modified, lnstant3D may be slow, as the model is being dynamically updated.

84

Part Modeling

75

/

.

\

/

/C\

A third option to change the dimensions is to click on the dimension's value and type a new one. If lnstant3D is not active, double-click the feature to show its dimensions, and double click a dimension to change its value; after changing the dimension's value we need to rebuild the model.

2.50. - Now we will add more tapped holes to complete the flange's mounting holes. We'll use the first hole as a "seed" to make copies of it using the "Circular Pattern" command. In the Features tab, select the drop-down list below the "Linear Pattern" to reveal the drop down menu and select "Circular Pattern" or use the menu insert, Pattern/Mirror, Circular Pattern." Note that commands are grouped by similar functionality.

I Linear Pattern

ft

Wrap

Rib

Draft

&

Shell

Circular Pattern

momlrrot™™"" Mirror Curve Driven Pattern

85

Intersect

Mirror


2.51.-To create a "Circular Pattern" we need to select a circular edge, a cylindrical surface or an axis as a reference for the direction of the pattern. Click inside the Parameters selection box to activate it, and then select the edge indicated for the pattern axis. •n|0 Crcular Pattern •

X

îir |^B

l

&

•$* 13 @ Equal spacing 0Features and Faces

«N

9 I I Bodies Instances to Skip Options • Geometry pattern @ Propagate visual properties

Any circular edge or cylindrical face that shares the same axis can be used for a direction, as shown in the following images.

0

A

0,

\

Another option for Pattern Axis is a temporary axis. Every cylindrical surface has a "Temporary Axis" that runs through its center. To see the temporary axes in a model select the menu "View, Hide/Show, Temporary Axes" or turn them ON in the "Hide/Show Items" toolbar.

86

Part Modeling

Temporary axes (and other auxiliary geometry) can be turned on or off while a command is in progress. In this picture we can see that the shortcut letter "T" has been assigned to toggle the temporary axes on and off.

© CP T -i

Temporary Axes (T) Control the visibility of temporary

o

1 axes.

LJ

V7--

2.52. -After selecting the Pattern Axis click inside the "Features and Faces" selection box to activate it (notice it gets highlighted). Select the "1A-20 Tapped Holel" feature from the fly-out FeatureManager; change the number of copies to six (this value includes the original), and make sure the "Equal spacing" option is selected to equally space the copies in 360 degrees. Notice the preview in the graphics area and click OK to finish the command. History Sensors Circular Pattern

Annotations

•y x

o Material
/+

Direction 1

Front Plane

Parameters

Edge<1

3 360.00deg

Top Plane

Spacing:

Right Plane

Instances: 6

360de 360deg

6

*

©

L Origin

@ iikmffntiinb

to Boss-Extrude! to Boss-fcxtrude2 3 Fillet! 3 Fillet2

©

t0

y Equal spacing Features and Faces

Top Cut Front Boss

,±.i Mirror! Side Bo Mn»6f2-.«.

LJ Bodies

/ >

. bv Instances to Skip Options

P

^

1/4-20 Tapped Hole!

/ s/

/ A ijc 3c... ,
• Geometry pattern fvl Propagate visual properties

O Full preview (•) Partial preview • Instances to Vary

87

/


The feature to be patterned can also be selected from the graphics area; in this case a face of the feature needs to be selected. Sometimes a face can be difficult to select because it may be small, like this hole. In this case, we can use the "Magnifying Glass" (Default shortcut "G") to make selection easier.

v/

1/4 20 Tapped Holel

*

/

,

x

•ODll

mil

2.53. - Since we need to have the same six tapped holes in the other side of the 'Housing', we will use the "Mirror" command to copy the Circular Pattern about the "Front P/ane." Make this mirror about the "Front Plane" and mirror the"CirPatternl" feature created in the previous step. Click OK to finish.

<5 e]|l3 Mirror v x

jio hb

£a) Annotations GS Material
Mirror Face/Plane

©

]

Front Plane

A

Features to Mirror

©

j§) History a Sensors

CirPatternl

[ |;

Front Plane]

[jJ Top Plane Right Plane Origin Q^jj) Boss-Extruae1

©

Boss-Extru'de2

Faces to Mirror

V

Bodies to Mirror

V

0 Filletl ® Fillets

@ Top Cut Options •Geometry Pattern @ Propagate visual properties

O Pull preview (•) Partial preview

Front Boss Mirrorl Side Boss Mirn

@ fror^l^'"-;.c j Hole

i>n
88

Part Modeling

After mirroring the circular pattern our part looks like this (Cosmetic Threads have been turned off for clarity):

©

2.54. - We will now add four #6-32 tapped holes to the topmost face using the Hole Wizard. Switch to a Top view (Ctrl+5 or Mouse Gestures) for visibility and select the "Hole Wizard" icon.

S3 5^

Hole Revolved Wizard Cut

3^ so

Swept Cut

Lofted Cut

Boundary Cut

Hole Wizard Inserts a hole using a pre-defined cross-section.

TT

89


2.55. - In the Hole Wizard's PropertyManager, select the "Tap" Hole Specification icon, and select the options shown for a #6-32 Tapped Hole. The "Blind" condition tells SOLIDWORKS to make the hole an exact depth. (]|5> Hole Specification V

X

|j]| Type

[j~j]

Positions |

Hole Type

®

/v

~r

Z

m

I,®

0D m Standard: ANSI Inch Type: Tapped hole Holloedfications

I

*6-32

J

sizir 1:11 :

r Blind (2 * DIA)

Tlf

0.276in

r

'''Top

2.56. - Click in the "Positions" tab to define the hole locations. Select the top face to add the tapped holes, and notice that immediately after we select the face the "Sketch Point" tool is automatically selected, we are editing a sketch and the Sketch toolbar is activated. Hole Position

V

X t??

Positions

tf

Hole Position(s) Select the face for the hole or slot position.

To create holes on multiple faces, dick 3D Sketch.

Boss-ExtrudeZ

j Jd

90

Part Modeling

2.57. - With the "Point" tool active, touch each of the round corner edges to reveal their centers, and then click in their centers to add a point in each one; this way we'll make the points concentric to each corner fillet's center. Click OK to finish the Hole Wizard.

l—jf i I

0

L

p|[

L

-®ox

• Touch the edge

Click on Center

Point added

X L

X

A

91


2.58. - We are now ready to make the slots at the base of the 'Housing'. For this task it will be easier to switch to a Top view. To add a new sketch, we can select the "Sketch" command and click on the selected face as before, but in this case we'll learn how to use the pop-up toolbar. Select the face indicated, and from the pop-up toolbar, select "Sketch." Notice there are two similar looking icons: the one on top is "Edit Sketch" and is used to modify the sketch of the feature we selected, the one below is "Sketch" used to create a new sketch on the selected flat face.

o C sketch

q

0

• _ c3 X

If "Edit Sketch" is selected instead of "Sketch," simply click on the red "X" in the confirmation corner in the upper right corner of the graphics area to cancel any changes made to the sketch and go back to editing the model.

X p=x

To make the slot, we'll use the "Straight Slot" command from the Sketch tab in the CommandManager. This tool will create a slot by first drawing a construction line and then defining the width of the slot. Select the "Straight Slot" icon and activate the "Add Dimensions" option. It will automatically add the slot's dimensions when we finish.

o Smart Dimension

/ " O * f\J" -'^ -

V

(° °)

1

; | SketctN o 1

1

Ow A

j0

°

1*aiqht Slot

^

Sketches a straight slot. n t—.

i

ii«

First click to locate the center of one arc, click to locate the second (this is a construction line), and click a third time to define the slot's width. When finished, double click the dimensions and change them to make the slot 0.375" long and 0.250" wide.

92

Part Modeling

© Slot

v Slot Types

^1

.503, 90' ia

Pi ] Add dimensions

1, gCi T 1

i)

J.

= .<•

i

v.,

•>

T

A

J-

Add dimension option

v.

A

v

Locate first center

Locate second Center

9 o .375

i w

•

•

a

62

250

Vic Define the slot width

Automatic dimensions added

Corrected dimensions

The "Slot" command has more options, including arc slots and overall slot length dimension. To enable auto dimension while adding other sketch elements, select the menu "Tools, Options, System Options, Sketch" and activate: 0Enable on screen numeric input on entity creation

Another way to activate this option is by right-mouse-clicking and turning on "Sketch Numeric Input." This option will allow you to type the dimensions (entity size) as you sketch. To automatically add the dimensions select a sketch tool (line, arc, circle, etc.) right-mouse-click and turn on the option "Add Dimension."

g

<$>
r~

\

Sketch Numeric Input |

d> select

Lasso Selection

93

Add Dimension

i


After the slot's size is defined, locate the slot by adding two 0.5" dimensions to the lower and left edges of the base as shown. Finish the slot by making an "Extruded Cut" using the "Through All" end condition. Rename this feature "Slot." Slots can also be made using the Hole Wizard

.375

_l .250 .500

O)

• .500 —•

/?

2.59. - We will now create a "Linear Pattern" of the slot. A linear pattern allows us to make copies of one or more features along one or two directions (usually along model edges). Select the "Linear Pattern" command from the Features tab in the CommandManager or the menu "Insert, Pattern/Mirror, Linear Pattern."

: Cut

©

Fillet 1 Cut

dary Cut

Rib Linear Pattern g} Draft

®she"

Wrap

Intersect

"cp Reference Geometry

Mirror

Linear Pattern Patterns features, faces, and bodies in one or two linear directions.

Using the Mirror command keeps the design intent better, but we chose to show the user how to use the Linear Pattern command instead.

94

Part Modeling

2.60. - In the Linear Pattern's Property-Manager, the "Direction 1" selection box is active; select the edge indicated for the direction of the copies. Using the "Spacing and Instances" option we can define the number of copies and the spacing between them. Select an edge for the direction of the pattern. Any linear edge can be used as long as it is in the desired direction. © —t;V

Spacing and instances O Up to reference

|0-125in

a3

Boss-Extrude!

(•) Spacing and instances

O Up to reference 0.125in

Ai •Pattern seed only 0 Features and Faces

©

Once the edge is selected, an arrow indicates the direction in which the copies will be made. If the Direction Arrow in the graphics area is pointing in the wrong direction click in the "Reverse Direction" button next to the "Direction 1" selection box.

p~| [ EdgtJ ^^••^^pacing and instances

he. t'.it

.hen Direction

O Up to reference

Spacing:

0-125in

0.12! 125in

Instances: 3

(•: Spacing and instances

O Up to reference 0.125ln

\

A1 [~l Pattern seed only 0 Features and Faces

k

95

A.


2.61. - Now click inside the "Features and Faces" selection box to activate it and select the slot feature either from the fly-out FeatureManager or the graphics area. Change the spacing between the copies to 1.25" and total copies to 2. This value includes the original just like in the Circular Pattern. Click OK to finish the command. [£[£ Linear Pattern

v x Direction 1 Edged > (•) Spacing and instances

Direction 1

1.250in

j* 2

Spacing:

1,25ir

Instances: 2

(§• Spacing and instances

O Up to reference

only

,

-rn

A

Sfw V

Features and Faces

SDD"-

2.62. - We need the mounting slots on both sides of the 'Housing', so we'll copy the previous linear pattern to the other side of the 'Housing' using the "Mirror" command about the "Right Plane." Click on the "Mirror" icon in the Features tab of the CommandManager; select the "Right Plane" as the mirror plane and the "LPatternl" in the "Features to Mirror" selection box to copy the slots. [Q| Sensors bjd Mirror V

(yCl Annotations

X

£0 Material
Minor Face/Plane

w

I Right Piane

Ijjl Right Plane Features to Mirror Boss-Extrude! * Boss-Extrude2 0 Fillet!

Faces to Mirror

© Fillet2

Bodies to Mirror

IP Top Cut Options O Geometry Pattern 0 Propagate visual properties O Full preview ® Partial preview

1

*6) Front Boss Mirrorl Side Boss Gl|fi Mirror? 1^1 Front Cut IP Shaft Hole @ 1/4-20 Tap)

I !,;

a

A

•y3 CirPattern tyC Mirror3 #6-32 Tapped Hole!

1•

96

Part Modeling

9

Selecting the Linear Pattern feature for the mirror also includes the pattern's seed feature, the "Slot."

s

2.63. - Using the "Fillet" command from the * Features tab, add a 0.125" radius fillet to the edges y Cut indicated as a finishing touch. Rotate the model using the middle mouse button and/or change the display style to "Hidden Lines Visible" mode to make selection easier. Click OK to finish.

0 filet V

Wrap

Fillet

ft

Draft

Interse

[g Shell

|>|<] Mirror

Fillet

Creates a rounded internal or external face along one or more edges in solid or surface feature.

9 Q>

X | Manual | FilletXpert

Radius: u.125in

o

Fillet Type

/

s i s Items To Fillet

/

0 edges 1

Edge<1> Edge<2> Edge<3>

0 Tangent propagation [•) Full preview

O Partial preview O No preview Fillet Parameters Symmetric

(\ j0.125in

/

,cs

•Multiple radiu

Profile: Circular

97


r

/

2.64. - Now that the model is finished, we can easily determine its physical properties, such as Weight, Volume, Center of Mass and Moments of Inertia. SOLIDWORKS includes a built in material library with many different metals and alloys, plastics, woods, composite materials and others like air, glass and water. The library includes mechanical and thermal properties such as: • • • • • • •

Mass density Elastic and Shear modulus Tensile, Compressive and Yield strengths Poisson's ratio Thermal expansion coefficient Thermal conductivity Specific heat These properties are used by SOLIDWORKS to determine a part's weight, or determine if a component will fail under a given set of loading conditions using SimulationXpress (the built in structural analysis software).

98

Part Modeling

To assign a material to a component, right-mouse-click in the "Material" icon at the top of the FeatureManager, and select "Edit Material" or pick one of the materials listed. The list of favorites can be changed in the "Favorites" tab in the Materials library. For this part select "Cast Alloy Steel" from the "Steel" library. Click on "Apply" to accept the material and Close the library.

^ Parti (Defauft<. Display S •

fj] History

*

OS Annotations

fp\ Sensors

Material
[Jl Front Plane i

Top Plane

; Right Plane Origin •

5e|] Boss-Extrudel

• l@ Boss-Extrude2

• •

Edit Material

k

Configure Material Manag^Tavontes Plain Carbon Steel Cast Alloy Steel ABS PC

® Filletl

Malleable Cast Iron

55 Filled

1060 Alloy

P Top Cut

Brass

Front Boss

Copper

[tj|£| Mirrorl

PBT General Purpose

•

tî[] Side Boss

Nickel

•

P Front Cut

•

P Shaft Hole

•

Cs|eO Mirror2

1/4-20 Tapped Hole" CirPatternl

x\

Rubber

7#

Hide/Show Tree Items,

/

Collapse Items

x

Customize Menu

99

/


Material

0 AIS11015 Steel, Cold Drawn (SS)

'

Properties

Appearance

CrossHatch

Custom

Application Data

Favorites

o AISI 1020

Material properties

0 AIS11020 Steel, Cold Rolled

Materials in the default library can not be edited. You must first copy the material to a custom library to edit it.

0 AIS11035 Steel (SS) 0 AIS11045 Steel, cold drawn 0 AISI 304 0 AISI 316 Annealed Stainless Steel Be 0 AISI 316 Stainless Steel Sheet (SS) 0 AISI 321 Annealed Stainless Steel (Si AISI 347 Annealed Stainless Steel (SI

0 AISI 4130 Steel, annealed at 865C 0 AISI 4130 Steel, normalized at 870C 0 AISI 4340 Steel, annealed 0 AISI 4340 Steel, normalized 0 AISI Type 316L stainless steel

0 AISI Type A2 Tool Steel O Alloy Steel

0 Alloy Steel (SS) Alloy

English (IPS)

Category:

Steel

Name:

Cast Alloy Steel

Description: Source: Sustainability:

Defined

Property

Value

Units

Elastic Modulus

27557170.16

psi

Poisson's Ratio

0.26

N/A

Shear Modulus

11312943.54

psi

Mass Density

0.263729

lb/Ina 3

Tensile Strength

64988.87209

psi

Steel

A

psi

Yield Strength

Steel

0

Linear Elastic Isotropic

Units:

Compressive Strength

ASTM /

0 Cast

Model Type:

34994.00916

psi

Thermal Expansion Coefficient 8.333333333e-006 /*F Thermal Conductivity

Btu/(in-sec-°F)

0.000503241

V

Cast Stainless Steel Config...

Apply I

Help

f j In the Properties tab we can select the units to display the material V/ properties 2.65. - Now the FeatureManager reads "Cast Alloy Steer instead of"Material" Select "Mass Properties" from the Evaluate tab in the CommandManager. We'll see the Density (provided by the material selection), Mass (Calculated from the volume and density), Volume, Surface Area and Center of Mass coordinates relative to the origin (also indicated by a magenta triad in the graphics area), Principal Axes of inertia and Moments of inertia about the Center of Mass and the part's origin all listed in a new window, where we can copy the text for later use in reports. Parti (Default<_DisplayS

•

Sensors

#

ft

• m Annotations Cast Alloy Steel [j] Front Plane

7-

pS SOLIDWORKS

History

k

Design Study

Measure

Mass Properties

File

Edit

2 0

s] ction

Prd jerties

View

Insert

is

Sensor Performance Evaluation

•£ rC Ijj

[JJ Top Plane [jj Right Plane J , Origin *

Boss-Extrude1

^

^0 Boss-Extrude2

•

Features

Sketch

Mass Properties ©

(fft. i 100

Calculates the mass properties of the

IF

model.

.101

Part Modeling

Mass Properties

Override Mass Properties..,

Recalcu

@ Include hidden bodies/components Q Create Center of Mass feature I IShow weld bead mass Report coordinate values relative to: -- default — Mass properties of Parti Configuration: Default Coordinate system: - default Density = 0.26 pounds per cubic Inch Mass = 4.37 pounds Volume - 16.56 cubic inches Surface area = 120.74 square Inches Center of mass: (inches) X- 0.00 V- 1.59 Z = 0.01

17

Principal axes of inertia and principal moments of inertia: {pounds * square inches j Taken at the center of mass. Ix - {1.00, 0.00, 0.00) Px - 10.61 ly= (0,00, 1.00, 0.00) Py= 14.91 lz = <0,00, 0.00, 1.00) Pz-17.45

/ .

Moments of inertia: (pounds ' square inches) Taken at the center of mass and aligned with the output coordinate system. Lxx • 10.61 Lxy * 0.00 Lxz • 0.00 Lyx - 0.00 lyy - 14.91 lyz - 0.01 Lzx = 0.00 Lzy = 0,01 Lzz= 17.45 Moments of inertia: {pounds * square inches) Taken at the output coordinate system, lxx-21.69 lxy-0.00 lyx = 0.00 lyy - 14.91 lzx = 0.00 lzy = 0.04 Help

Print.,,

lxz - 0,00 lyz = 0.04 Izz = 28.54 Copy to Clipboard

Mass properties are referenced to the part's origin by default, but they can also be referenced to a user defined coordinate system by selecting one from the "Output coordinate system" drop down list. In the "Options" button we can change the units we want the results to be displayed with; by default mass properties are displayed using the document's units. Save the finished part as 'Housing' and close the file.

o

\

\

©

o U.J1

101

*lmage made using RealView Graphics


Exercises: Build the following parts using the knowledge acquired in this lesson. Try to use the most efficient method to complete each model. High resolution images are included on the exercise files. Exercise 1 DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: AISI 1020 Use default settings for 1/2"-20 ANSI Thread depth

2.000

2.000

cp

0

CP R 1.000

O

01.500

.375

rt>

t-j-1

2.500

J

t-

6.500

5.000

Fy^roKP1 9

t_

250

DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: 6061 Alloy

— 6.000 R.500

0.750 .250

.500 TYP.

_L T

.500

.500

d d d

c_

si"

~T

3

1.250 TYP

3 3

1

ib • 2.000 —

1 .000

•1.500'

102

4.500

<§>

Part Modeling

Fxprrkp ^

DIMENSIONS: Millimeters MATERIAL: Copper

J r-*1

R2.5 TYP.

rr34

+

t-

15

4^

020

M 12x1.5 Tapped Hole Default deplh settings (4X)

0115

080

0150 25

ex0fcis0 4

DIMENSIONS: Millimeters MATERIAL: ABS

§ §

l 40

LTD j1

IS) 00

— 10

•

TYP.

••

n

20

40

M6xl.O Tapped Hole Default depth (2X)

160

:n 40

R10

15

15

25 • 40

103


Engine Project Parts: Make the following components to build the engine. Save the parts using the name provided. High resolution images atwww.mechanicad.com

Connecting Rod Bottom DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Plain Carbon Steel

2X 0 .266THRU ALL ~l I 0 .563 TF .165

"(©

1

—1

1.150 —

01.753

01.COO

\

S\

/

1

1

I

1

1

lr—j

.375

1

1'

|

1

R.125-

.750

Cylinder Gasket DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: VITON

5.500

+ R .250

2.818

4.000

©

©

R .500 03.150

104

.020 •

Part Modeling

Head Gasket DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: VITON

03.550

.025 0.340

0.750

500

+

02.750

105


Notes:

106

0 /

0


Notes:

108

Part Modeling

In making the 'Side Cover' part we will learn the following features and commands: Revolved Feature, Sketch Trim, and Extend and construction geometry. We will also review some of the commands previously learned in the 'Housing' part. The sequence of features we'll follow for the 'Side Cover' is:

(ax-jk

!v) Revolved Feature

j

vJ Cut

Hole

Circular Pattern

\<$

Fillet

3.1. - Let's make a new part. Select the "Part" template and click OK. Be sure to change the units to Inches and three decimal places.

v]^

•

N6w (Ctrl+N) Creates a new document.

New SOUDWORKS Document

••

a 30 representation of a single design component

a 30 arrangement of parts and/or other assemblies

OK

109

engineering drawing, typically of a part or assembly

Cancel

Help


3.2. - The first feature we'll create is a Revolved Feature. As its name implies, it is created by revolving a sketch about an axis. Select the "Revolved Boss/Base" icon from the Features tab in the CommandManager. When asked to select a plane for the sketch, select the 11 Right Plane" (no particular reason to choose this plane except to have a good looking isometric view ©).

fr °nt pS SOLIDWORKS

E • t'.i Boss/Blse

Features <->. I \|j

File

Edit

P|qn

Vie

R|ghtP|aneJ

o 4

Revolved Boss/Base

Revolved Boss/Base

Revolves a sketch or selected sketch . contours around an axis to create a solid feature.

3.3. - Select the "Corner Rectangle" command from the Sketch toolbar and draw the following sketch using two rectangles, click-and-drag starting at the origin and to the left (there will be two lines overlapping in the middle). Don't be too concerned with their size; we'll add the correct dimensions later.

pS SOLIDWORKS Exit Sketch

Smart

Dimensio

0J QRectangle

x = 0.96, y = Lol

a x = O.o5, y

110

Edit

Sketches a rectangle. Features I Sketch

.j

•

File

1.18

Direct Editinq FEvaluate ! Di

Part Modeling

3.4. - It is a good practice to have single, non-intersecting profiles in the sketch, and no more than 2 lines sharing an endpoint. It is possible to use a sketch with intersecting lines using a function called "Contours." Contours can be a powerful tool when used properly. This command is covered in the Level II book. In general it is a good idea to work with single contour sketches and advance to other techniques like Contours later on. To clean up the sketch, we will use the "Trim" command from the Sketch toolbar, from the lower left corner in the Mouse Gestures or the menu "Tools, Sketch Tools, Trim."

©

E

Trim Entities

vert ities

Mirror Entitle

tc Offset Entities

OOO OOO Linear Sketch OOO

0

Move Entitie;

JimXpert

0

i

Trim Entities Trims or extends a sketch entity to be coincident to another, or deletes a sketch entity.

3.5. - The Trim tool allows us to cut sketch entities using other geometric elements as a trim boundary. After selecting the "Trim Entities" icon, select the "Power Trim" option from the PropertyManager. The Power Trim allows us to click-and-drag across the entities that we want to trim. Click-and-drag the cursor crossing the two lines indicated next. Notice the lines are trimmed as you cross them.

^ Trim

Message

A

To trim entities, hold down and drag your cursor across the entities, or pick on an entity and then pick on a bounding entity or anywhere on the screen. To extend entities, hold down the shift key and drag your cursor across the entities.

)f

Power trim

2.- FINISH HERE

r

1.- CLICK-AND-DRAG STARTING HERE

111

Corner


3.6. - The next step is to extend the short line to close the sketch and have a single closed profile. Select the "Extend Entities" icon from the drop down menu under "Trim Entities" or if the "Trim Entities" command is enabled, from the rightmouse-button menu. Click on the short line indicated; a preview will show you how the line will be extended. If the extension does not cross a line, you will not get a preview. Extend Entities can also be accessed with the right mouse button menu when using the Trim Entities command.

H"3 KS °r 888 ©

Irim Entities

(c

Entities

Box Selection

ooo

^

Lasso Selection

Dj-

Select Extend Entities

Extend Entities Redraw

Another way to extend the line is to click-and-drag its endpoint onto other entities without selecting any tool. 3.7. - Add the following dimensions to the sketch using the "Smart Dimension" tool from the Sketch tab in the CommandManager, or the Mouse Gestures.

c Exit Sketch

Features

/•O-PJ-

<0 Smart Dimension

a - ^ - O - A

*© 1* ° ~rrr i _ _ Smart Dimension (D) ~ •

-

^

•

[

-

.p

Creates a dimension for one or more selected entities,

©i i i: i

iu=i

xn . .

112

1

Part Modeling

.125

—

.625

r .500

i .750 —— If needed, change the document's units to inches, 3 decimal places. MKS (meter, kilogram, second) CGS (centimeter, gram, second)

0

MMGS (millimeter, gram, second) IPS (inch, pound, second) Edit Document Units...

Fully Defined

Editing Sketch)

0

IPS

3.8. - After adding the dimensions, the Sketch is fully defined and we can make the Revolved Boss/Base. Select "Exit Sketch" or the Revolved Boss/Base icon from the Features tab.

pS SOLIDWORKS

4^1 Exit Sketch

c

2

File

275 SO

/-(D*(\J Extrude Boss/Ba

Smart mension

~O Exit Sketch

"^1 e

Features

Exit this sketch and keep any changes. itn

<5

/-k nr

113

3

WORKS

File

Edit

Swept Boss/Base

Revolved Boss/Base

- Revolved Boss/Base Revolves a sketch or selected sketch contours around an axis to create a solid feature.

Viev


3.9. - The Revolve Property-Manager is presented and waits for us to select a line or centerline to make the revolved feature about it; if the sketch has a single centerline, it is automatically selected as the default axis of rotation. Select the line that we extended as the axis of rotation to make the revolved base. ©

Revolve •

X

Axis of Revolution

i

i

Directionl

125

A

|/~v

Blind

[T

360.00deg

1.625

V

si

• Direction2

• Thin Feature Selected Contours

yt .500

3.10. - After selecting the line, notice the preview in the graphics area. The default setting for a revolved feature is 360°. Click OK to complete the revolved feature and rename it"Flange Base."

125

.500

1.625

/

114

Part Modeling

3.11. - Now switch to a Front view. We'll make a hole in the center of the cover for a shaft. Create a new sketch in the front most face of the cover (Small round face), or, select the small face and click in the "Sketch" icon from the pop-up toolbar. Draw a circle starting at the origin and dimension as indicated. Make a cut using the "Extruded Cut" command using the "Through All" option.

^" & 625 Sketch

3.12. - The next step will be to make the first File Edit hole for the screws to pass through. We'll SOUDWORKS make one hole, and then use a Circular Pattern to make the rest as we did in the c O / " * © * A 'Housing', but in this case we'll use the "Cut Exit Smart Extrude" feature and not the "Hole Wizard" Sketch Dimension. Centerline to show a different approach. To make this hole switch to a Front view, select the large circular face and create a new sketch. Draw •Aitiirer 0t i nira T a centerline from the origin towards the right, and at the end of the centerline draw a circle. Dimension as shown and make a cut using the "Through AH" option as in the previous step.

pS

115


The centerline is used as reference geometry to locate the center of the circle. Optionally we can add a Horizontal relation between the circle's center and the origin to fully define it.

j®

® <0

Sketch

0.250

1.3/5

©

A different way to do this sketch is to draw a circle and then convert it to construction geometry, this way you can dimension the circle's diameter. To convert any sketch element to construction geometry, simply select it in the graphics area and activate the "For construction" check box in the element's PropertyManager or click the "Construction Geometry" icon from the pop-up toolbar. After changing it the circle is displayed as construction geometry. Change to "Hidden Lines Removed" if necessary for clarity as we did in this step.

116

Part Modeling

O Circle

©

• Grde Type

;oExisting Relations

Jx

(J) Under Defined

Add Relations

A

Fix Options

A

I I For construction k Parameter 4

(\

0.000 0.000

A

I I V

A

ia ia

I V

tK

1.078509S6

12 Construction Geometry

.

Now that the location circle is defined as construction geometry (also known as reference geometry), draw the circle for the hole making its center coincident with one of the quadrants of the reference circle as shown. Dimension the sketch and make the extruded cut.

117


02.750

0.250

I

I®"-

An advantage of making the sketch using this approach is that you can add a diameter dimension to the circle locating the holes.

3.13. - To complete the rest of the holes, we'll make a circular pattern. Select the "Circular Pattern" icon from the Features tab in the CommandManager and select any circular edge for the pattern direction.

^ 11 &t> S Fillet

Linear Pattern

Rib

st} °raft fp Intersect (^l Shell

[>£<] Circular Pattern

Curve Driven Pattern •ya Circular Pattern •y

x

|V 360.00deg

e

6 0 Equal spacing 0 Features and Faces

o

9 Flange Base • Bodies Instances to Skip Options

[~l Geometry pattern 0 Propagate visual properties

O Pull preview ® Partial preview

118

Wrap

©

Mirror

Part Modeling

Now click inside the "Features and Faces" selection box. Instead of selecting a feature to pattern, we'll select a model face. When patterning faces, we just have to be sure that the newly created faces will be exactly the same as the original face, otherwise the pattern will fail. Select the inside face of the hole in the graphics area, if needed, use the "Magnifying Glass" (Shortcut "G"). Change the number of copies to 6 (Including the original) and click OK to complete. cya Circular Pattern

V

X

Parameters Edge<1 IV

360.00deg Direction 1 Spacing: @ Equal spacing

360de 360deg

Instances: 6 6

t

fi

0 Features and Faces

y

llj LJ Bodies Instances to Skip Options I I Geometry pattern 0 Propagate visual properties

Using faces to make patterns is particularly useful when we don't have a feature to use as a seed; this is common with imported geometry. 3.14. - Now select the Fillet command and round the edge as shown with a 0.125" fillet radius. ® Fife* V

©

X [ Manual ] Finetxpert|

mm

Pi in

©

0.125m

<3

Items To Fillet

© 0 Tangent propagation (§) Full preview

O Partial preview O No preview

/

-illet Parameters

<3

Symmetric (C 0.12Sin 5 fillet

119

©


3.15. - Edit the material for the part, and assign AISI-1020 steel. If it is not in the materials favorite list, select it from the library.

tp , ,

/t> a w < •

<^3 Parti (Default* _Display Stat

•(§3 Parti (Default* _Display Stat

|H

v

7 (§) History

y

*

[©) History Sensors

f^Tl Sensors 5) Annotations

y

-o AISI 1020

-O Material
-o Edit Material

Top Plane

ia Top Plane Manage Favorites

Right Plane t , Origin • w

^ Right Plane 1_» Origin

Plain Carbon Steel

Flange Base

^) Flange Base

Cast Alloy Steel

fifsl

fTrnl

Save the finished component as 'Side Cover' and close the file.

© (3 (3

/ (3

(3

120

<3

Part Modeling

Exercises: Build the following parts using the knowledge acquired so far. Try to use the most efficient method to complete each model. Exercise 5 DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL:

$

0.250 (12X)

0.500 (12X)

02.000

04.500

SSf

xa

0 s

a

0 e

.375

o

0

-©-

J

0

4

&

HINT

0

.250

1

03.000

06.000

1.000

.625 3.000 .250

.250 1.000

.750

Y 7t—r xi i A section a-a

it j

1.500

.750

tt 250

m&xl.o (sx)

r

21mm deep

4 *•

r100 66 12.500

o

o 7

©

jSECTION A-A

121

Exercise 6 DIMENSIONS: Millimeters MATERIAL:


Engine Project Parts: Make the following components to build the engine. Save the parts using the name provided. High resolution images are included on the exercise files.

The 'Oil Seal' is made using a single feature.

01.095

—— .240 ——

01.500

%

• R.025 R.040 45° 01.200 01.350

.080-

Ha

v 0.

%

.215 DETAIL B SCALE 4 :

SECTION A-A Oil Seal DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL:

122

Part Modeling

The Top Cover

*8

« r>5>v

agTBStSR

mm

M&B m

% %

i.t:

123


Notes:

124

Part Modeling

For the Top Cover' part we will follow the next sequence of features. In this part we will learn a new feature called Shell, new options for Fillet, new end conditions for features (Boss, Cut, Revolve, etc.) and we'll practice some of the previously learned features and options.

Base Extrude

Top Extrude

Corner cuts

Corner Fillet

Shell

Bottom Extrude

Top Fillet

Shell Fillet

Holes

4.1. - We'll start by making a new document selecting the Part template from the "New Document" command, and just like we did with the 'Housing', we'll create a new sketch. Select the "Extruded Boss" command and then select the "Top Plane." If needed, change the part's units to inches with three decimal places.

Fr ont

Pi

'osC>

c>

Top Plane

125


4.2. - Draw a rectangle using the "Center Rectangle" command; first click in the origin to locate the center and then outside to complete the rectangle. Add the dimensions shown with the "Smart Dimension" tool and round the corners with the "Sketch Fillet" command using a 0.25" radius.

pS SOLIDWORKS C

Edit

View

lnse

/•©•AJ-

o


Features

FHe

n - ^ - O

l~°1 Center Rectangle SkefSn,^

-A K

Trim Entities

Edit

View

)• f\J-

Insert

Tools

P

Trim Convert Entities Entities

* „

Window

G . , n

"V"1 Entities

<; C c

J

J L

Retch Fillet

o

Rounds the corner at the intersection of two sketch entities, creating a tangent arc.

3 Point Center Rectangle

H

File

£2

Parallelogram

A slightly different way of making this sketch (or any sketch) is by using the "Sketch Numeric Input." What this option does is to allow us to define geometry's exact size as we sketch, making it the correct size from the start. This option can be turned on in the menu "Tools, Options, Sketch, Enable on screen numeric input on entity creation," or the right mouse button menu. If this option is enabled, it may also be a good idea to activate the "Add Dimension" option (this option is only available if a sketch tool is active). The differences are: Sketch Numeric Input allows the user to enter the exact size of geometry. Add Dimension will add the dimensions to the geometry created. Add Dimension is only available when Sketch Numeric Input is activated and a sketch drawing tool is selected, as seen in the following images.

if [)>

n Select

Sketch Numeric Input

Select

Add Dimension

Sketch Entities

•

Sketch Entities

•

Recent Commands

•

Recent Commands

•

More Dimensions

•

More Dimensions

•

Select the "Center Rectangle" tool and then activate both of the previous options; click to locate the center of the rectangle (do not click-and-drag). Notice the value boxes are immediately displayed as we move the mouse pointer. Now start typing the dimensions for each side of the rectangle followed by Enter, no need to click again.

126

Part Modeling

4.U.:'i

^l

2.625||

*.

•

A Click on center and move the mouse

Type vertical dimension, press Enter

31

2.625

4.lUU

nl

Type horizontaMimension, press

Fjnjshed rec(ang|e wj(h dimensjons

4.3. - Using the "Sketch Fillet" command round the corners 0.25". T Sketch Fillet

Message

©

4.000

*

Select a sketch vertex or entities to fillet. Entities to Fillet

7^

'

/

\

Fillet< 1> Fillet<2> Fillet< 3>

2.625 \ Rllet Parameters

\

^ [ 0.250in

\

[/] Keep constrained corners 0 Dimension each fillet

127


4.4. - To make the first extrusion, click on "Exit Sketch" or "Extruded Boss/Base" and set the distance to 0.25". Rename the extrusion 'Base'. (£3 Boss-Extrude V

X ^

From

4.000 .

Sketch Plane

Direction 1 Blind

0.250m

Draft outward • Direction 2

V

n

V

Thin Feature

Selected Contours

.250

V

4.5. - For the second feature, we'll make an extrusion of similar shape to the first one, but smaller. For this feature we will use the "Offset Entities" function, this way the sketch will be created automatically by offsetting the edges of the previous feature face's edge. Click in the top face of the model and select the "Sketch" command from the pop-up toolbar to create a new sketch.

Sketch

4.6. - After creating the sketch, notice the top face of the first feature remains selected (in highlighted color); while it is selected activate the "Offset Entities" icon in the Sketch tab of the CommandManager. A preview of the offset geometry is immediately visible.

© &

Conve Entitie

Offset Entities

)L|DWORKSAC

3ase:

•

oo

O Linear Sketch Pattern OO

m Offset Entities

Adds sketch entities by offsetting faces, edges, curves, or sketch entities a specified distance.

Qt> (_ Sketch!

128

<] Mirror Entities Di:

Part Modeling

[C. Offset Entities V

X

-H

Parameters I 0-12Sin Add dimensions I I Reverse Select chain •Bi-directional Cap ends • Arcs Lines Construction geometry: Base geometry • Offset geometry

4.7. - Change the offset value to 0.375" and then click in the "Reverse" checkbox to make the offset inside, not outside. Notice that when we change the direction the preview updates accordingly. Click OK when done. [C. Offset Entities V

X

-H

" 375m v Add dimensions @ Reverse k Select chATt

Cap ends • Arcs Lines Construction geometry: Base geometry • Offset geometry

4.8. - The Sketch is now Fully Defined (all geometry is black) because the sketch geometry is related to the edges of the face and only the offset dimension is added. Notice the offset command is powerful enough to eliminate the rounds in the corners if needed.

129


4.9. - To make the second feature select "Extruded Boss" from the Features toolbar in the CommandManager and extrude it 0.25". Rename the feature "Top Boss." Boss-Extrude •

X

From Sketch Plane

Direction 1 Blind

IV
.375

Draft outward

• Direction 2

l~~l Thin Feature

4.10. - For the next feature, we'll make round cuts in the corners of the top extrusion to allow space for a screw head, washer, and tools. Switch to a Top view and create a sketch in the topmost face. Make a circle as shown making sure the center is coincident to the corner. Feel free to use the Sketch Numeric Input in this sketch. Add two centerlines starting in the origin, one vertical, and one horizontal; they'll be used in the next step. The model view was changed to Flidden Lines Removed mode for clarity. The sketch grid can be turned on or off for better visualization if needed, from the right mouse button menu. _|-j_

Add Relation... Display/Delete Relations... Display Grid

130

*

Part Modeling

The "Sketch Numeric Input" option can be left on or turned off as the reader sees fit. It will be turned off in the following exercises to make explanation easier. 0.500

L

4.11.-We will now use the "Mirror Entities" from the Sketch tab in the CommandManager. This tool will help us make an exact copy of any sketch entity, in this case the circle, about any line, edge, or for our example, the vertical centerline; then we'll copy both circles about the horizontal centerline to make a total of four equal circles. Select the "Mirror Entities" icon. Window

Help

Mirror Entities — °ff5et

Entities

—~—"K Mirror Entities Mirrors selected entities about a Move Er centerline.

OOO LfnVsar S ooo

^

i

—

In the "Entities to Mirror" selection box select the circle. Then click inside the "Mirror About" selection box to activate it (it will be highlighted) and select the vertical centerline. Click OK to complete the first sketch mirror. In certain commands after making a selection, the mouse pointer will change to indicate to us that pressing the Right Mouse Button will activate either the next selection box or finish the command, helping us reduce mouse travel and work more efficiently. If we ignore the Right Mouse Button nothing happens and it will be dismissed.

bg

kg

Next Step

Finish/OK

131


G+a Mirror V

X

©

0.500

-H

Message

A

Select entities to mirror and a sketch line or linear model edge to mirror about Options Entities to mirror. Arc1

@Coi Mirror about:

r 4.12. - Now repeat the "Mirror Entities" command selecting both circles in the "Entities to Mirror" selection box, and using the Horizontal centerline in the "Mirror About" selection box. Click OK to finish the Mirror. Since the new circles are mirror copies of the original, and the original was fully defined, the sketch is therefore fully defined. The mirrored circles have an automatically generated "Symmetric" geometric relation about the mirror centerline. 0|0 •

Mirror X

0.5CO

-*

Message

A

Select entities to mirror and a sketch line or linear model edge to mirror about Options Entities to mirror:

/

Arc1 Arc2

0Copy Mirror about:

4.13. - We are now ready to make the cut. In this step we'll cut all four corners at the same time. SOLIDWORKS allows us to have multiple closed contours in a sketch for one operation as long as they don't intersect or touch each other in one point. To add intelligence to our model (Design intent) we'll use an end condition for the cut called Up to Surface; with this end condition we can define the stopping face for the cut instead of giving it a depth. Select the "Extruded Cut" icon and select "Up To Surface" from the "Direction 1" options drop down selection box. A new selection box is displayed and activated; this is where we'll select the face where we want the cut to stop. Select the face indicated as the end condition and click OK to finish the feature and rename it"Corner Cuts."

132

Part Modeling

Cut-Extrude •

X

<16

Fro Sketch Plane

Dir.

A

Up To Surface

LJ Flip side to cut i Draft outward

• Direction 2

• Thin Feature

The reason for selecting a face as an end condition is that if the height of the "Top Boss" changes, the cut will still go up to the intended depth. This is how design intent is maintained and intelligence added to our model. Our part should now look like this:

4.14. - Using the "Fillet" command add a 0.25" radius fillet to the edges indicated in the corner cuts. There are eight (8) edges to be rounded. To make the selection easier, SOLIDWORKS has a built in tool to help us select multiple edges. After selecting the first edge, a pop-up toolbar gives the user options to select different groups of edges. By moving the mouse over the different selection options highlights the edges that would be selected. For this example select the "Connected to end loop" option is exactly the edges we are interested in. In subsequent exercises the user will be able to explore other selection options. After clicking in the icon to select the rest of the edges, the mouse changes to give us the OK/Finish in the right mouse button.

133


*Sl da]

da] 0 ^

|| ^^^connectedtoênchoopêdge^j

If selecting small edges is difficult, try using the "Magnifying Glass" to make selection easier (default shortcut "G"). 4.15. - Since this is going to be a cast part, we want to remove some material from the inside, and make its walls a constant thickness (common practice for castings and injection molded plastic parts). In this case the "Shell" command is the best tool for the job. The Shell creates a constant thickness part by removing one or more faces from the model. Select the "Shell" icon from the Features tab in the CommandManager. This is an applied feature, which means it does not require a sketch.

© BS

Fillet

Linear Pattern

Rib

Wrap

Draft

Shell

Intersect

&

"0

I

Reference Cui Geometry

Mirror

Shell Removes material from a solid body to create a thin-walled feature.

In the Shell's PropertyManager under "Parameters" set the wall thickness to 0.125", rotate the part and select the bottom face; this is the face that will be removed making the remaining faces in the part 0.125" thick. Click OK to finish the command. Since we only have one shell feature in this part, there is no need to rename it.

134

Part Modeling

(jdsmm x x Parameters, 0.125in

•Shell outward Base

•Show preview Multi-thickness Settings ^ 0.125in

*1

r If no faces are selected the "Shell" command creates a hollow part.

With the finished shell operation the part looks like this, with every face in the part 0.125" thick.

/fA *

4.16. - How can we tell if the walls are really 0.125" thick? Using the "Measure" tool. It is located under the Evaluate tab in the CommandManager. This tool is like a digital measuring tape, where we can select faces, edges, vertices, axes, planes, coordinate systems, or sketch entities to measure to and from.

pS SOLIDWORKS

Features

Measure

Edit

0 (5

:o Desiln Stu

File

.lass Section bperties Properties

XX . 1 _ Measure (M)

.

Sensor

1

Calculates the distance between c selected items. In—i—i—•• —- i iii i i

135

1


Activate the "Measure" tool and select the indicated face and edge; for better visibility expand the Measure box clicking in the double arrow icon. Notice the result in the Measure window as well as the tag (Dist. 125in) in the graphics area giving the distance in all three X, Y and Z axes, as well as the normal distance between the selected entities. The dX, dY, and dZ dimensions are measured distances between the points we selected. In this case we are interested in the dZ or the Normal Distance values, which are the same.

£2

?

Measure - Parti

*

mm

XY, ^ z

4 [3 "M

A

A

I I

Edge<1> 1 Face<1>

I

The two selected items are parallel. Normal Distance: 0.125in Distance: 0.134in Delta X: 0.029in Delta Y: 0.040in Delta Z: 0.125in

,134in

To measure a different set of entities, click on an empty area of the graphics window, or make a rightmouse-click inside the selection box, and select "Clear Selections." This option works with every selection box.

File: Partl.SLDPRTTo: Parti.SLDPRT

Measure ^

in mm

Parti

# SI-A

'V z

Face<1>

Clear Selectic

De The two selected items are par; Normal Distance: 0.125in Distance: 0.134in Delta X: 0.029in Delta Y: 0.040in Delta Z: 0.125in

Customize Menu

File: Partl.SLDPRTTo: Parti.SLDPRT

If the Point-to-Point option is turned off, we only get the distance between the selected entities, regardless of where they were selected.

easure - Parti in

-

mm oint Face<1>

TU«

136

r

;*

ta

Point

Part Modeling

4.17. - To select a hidden face without having to rotate the component, make a right-mouse-click close to the face that we want to select, and use the "Select Other" command from the pop-up menu. Measure - Parti in mm

T?z\4> \ & - M \

i ^ :| Box Selection ^ Lasso Selection

Select Other talog Clear Selections

When we use the "Select Other" command, SOLIDWORKS automatically hides the face we made a right-mouse-click on. Now we can see the faces behind it. When we touch them they are highlighted, and this way we know which face we are selecting. We also get a list of faces behind the one removed where we can select the one we need. If we still cannot see the face we need right-mouse-click in any visible faces to hide them as needed. When the face we want to select is visible, left-mouse-click to select it. After a face is selected, all hidden faces are made visible again. Right-mouse-click to hide the front face as indicated, and then left-mouseclick to select the inner shell face. Feel free to make different measurements between Edge-Face, Edge-Vertex, Edge-Edge, Face-Vertex, and Vertex-Vertex to see the results.

Select Oth...

Select Oth... Q

g Face@Shell1@|

• Face@Shell1@|

• Faee@Shell1©||

• Face@Shell1@|

Face@Base®[P |

• Face@Base@[P

<

Right mouse button to hide face

>

Left mouse button to select hidden face

137


When we select a face first we are immediately presented with the area and perimeter of the selected face. Selecting a second face gives the distance between them plus the total area of both faces.

P

Measure - Parti •

Area:

.438 in A 2

in mm

XY

Vz

s -M

I

Perimeter: 7.250in Area: .438in A2 Perimeter 7.250in ^ BarjlSHWT Fil??ar^T!JflTRffiefauIt

/ /

P

Measure - Parti

in mm

xy z

'V- Z

s-

[23s3

]Face<2>

The two selected items are parallel. Normal Distance: 0.125in Distance: 0.139in Delta X: 0.004in 125in r *.i Total .vea

:i:

F i e Pa it

138

inches

LDP ig: Default

LDPRT

h

Part Modeling

In the "Measure" tool options, we can change the units of measure and precision if needed. Measure Units/Precision (•) Use custom settin

Inches

Measure - Parti in mm

IP-z 4 > c3 • M

*

Face<2>

PI Scientific Notation (#) Decimal

Decimal places

o Fractions

Denominator:

-

2

:

Round to nearest fraction The two selected items are parallel. Normal Distance: 0.125in Distance: 0.139in Delta X: O.OQ4in Delta Y: O.OfcOin Delta Z:0.125in Total area: 1.313 inchesA2

• Use Dual Units Angular unit Degrees Decimal places:

File: Parti.SLDPRTTo: Parti.SLDPRT File: Parti Config: Default

Accuracy level Lower (faster)

Q=— OK

Cancel

Higher (slower)

Help

4.18. - The Shell operation made the outside corners thin, therefore we need to add material to reinforce them and have enough support for screws in the corners. Switch to a Bottom view (Ctrl+6) and create a sketch on the bottommost face as indicated, and draw four circles concentric to the corner fillets. Do not worry about the size of the circles; we'll take care of that in the next step. Remember to touch the round edges to reveal their centers, and then draw the circles starting in the center to automatically add a concentric relation.

•ketch

139


l

4.19. - In order to maintain the design intent, we are going to make the circles the same size as the corner fillets using an Equal geometric relation. Select the "Add Relation" icon from the Sketch Tab in the CommandManager or from the right mouse button pop up menu. Select all four circles and under "Add Relations", select Equal to make all circles the same size. U Add Relations V 0 Selected Entities AfCI Aic2 Arc3 Arc4

Existing Relations

_l

I

CD Under Defined Add Relations Coradial

0 Equal Equal Curve length

140

-l

c

Display/Delete Repair Relations Sketch

Rapi Sketc

•

lations

.l

Add Relation

Part Modeling

Now that all circles are the same size, select one of them and make it either "Coradial" (same size and concentric) or "Equal" to a rounded corner to fully define the sketch. Jx Add Relations

•0 Selected Entities

Edge<1>

Existing Relations

_l

Under Defined

Coradial

[Basel

trie

=

Equal

L

141


4.20. - We will now make the extrusion using the "Up to Surface" end condition as we did in the last cut. Select the "Extrude Boss/Base" command from the Features tab, and use the option "Up to Surface". Select the face indicated as the end condition and click OK. By doing the extrusion this way we can be sure that our design will update as expected if any of the previous features changes. Boss-Extrude •

X

'V

From Sketch Plane

D^RTonl Shelll y

Up To Surface

*

i result

ft Draft outward • Direction 2 I Thin Feature Selected Contours

Shortcut: By double-clicking a face automatically sets the end condition to "Up to Surface" using the selected face. Our part should now look like this:

142

Part Modeling

4.21. - Add a 0.031" radius fillet using the "Fillet" command from the Features tab. Select the two faces on top of the cover as indicated. Notice all the edges on the top side of the part are rounded with only two selections, maintaining our design intent and making our job easier at the same time. CP Fltet V

X

Fillet Type

l a i s

V Tangent propagation

f) Partial preview No preview

4.22. - To add fillets to all the inside edges of the part we will use a slightly different approach. Instead of individually selecting the inside edges or faces, we will only select the "ShelH" feature from the fly-out FeatureManager, and add a 0.031" radius. Adding the fillet using this technique will round every edge of the "ShelH" feature, making it much faster and convenient, not to mention that it maintains the design intent better. |f9| History

w

® Fiiet •

x

jo*! Sensors

©

Fa] Annotations Material
Manual I Filletxpert

jH FrontPlane [jJ Top Plane

Fillet Type

i

,. Right Plane

0©u

L_ Origin Base «6j] Top Boss M Corner CutsL

3Tangent propagation ® Fullpreview

ICS Shein |f\ 0 Fillet2

0 Partial preview 0 No preview

LJ Multiple radius fillet Profile:

Selecting a feature to fillet as in this example can only be done using the fly-out FeatureManager or pre-selecting it in the FeatureManager before selecting the "Fillet" command.

143


Now every edge inside is rounded in one operation with a single selection.

• ••;—£

3 \'"y-

\

\

4.23. - Now we need to add four clearance holes for #6-32 screws in the corners. We'll use the "Hole Wizard" feature from the Features tab. Switch to a Top view for visibility and select the "Hole Wizard" icon.

e

Edit

View

Tools

Window

m

ase

ase

Insert

Extrude Cut

Swept Cut

Hole Wizard

Boundary Cut

;s/Base uate

Help

DimXpert

SO

Hole Wizard Inserts a hole using a pre-defined cross-section.

144

Part Modeling

In the first step select the "Hole" specification icon. From the "Type" drop down list select "Screw Clearances." From the "Size" selection list pick "# 6" and from "End Condition" select "Through All." This will create a hole big enough for a #6 size screw to pass freely through it. QiiJ Hole Specification X

ef

type

i '

m 85 t® Standard: ANSI Inch

Type: Screw Clearances Hole Specifications Size:

Normal O Show custom sizing

4.24. - For the second step, click in the "Positions" tab and select the face indicated to add the hole's location sketch. After selecting the face, the "Point" tool is automatically selected and we are ready to add four points for the holes' centers. Touch the round corner edges to reveal their centers as we did in the 'Housing' part, and click in one center to locate the hole. Repeat in the remaining corners to add all four holes. Hole Position V

©

X

I7J Type(

[|JI

Positions

l> Hole Position(s)

-

Select the face for the hole or slot position. To create holes on multiple faces, click 3D Sketch.

3D Sketch

145

w


'oX

I^BaseJj

/

/

.

Hole Position •

X

fjj|

Type

rrr^

I Q1

c

*

Positions |

Hole Position(s)

Use the dimensions and other sketch tools to position the hole or slot.

i

Click on the Type tab to define the hole or slot specification and size.

Click OK to finish the "Hole Wizard." 4.25. - Change the part's material to "Cast Alloy Steel" as a final step. Save the part as 'Top Cover' and close the file. Parti (Default<_Display Stat •

f|U History fo\ Sensors

•

2) Annotations Material ^ Front Plane

Configure Material

Top Plane

Manage Favorites

Right Plane l-» Origin •

l£|) Base

•

I5^|) Top Boss

•

(pll Corner Cuts 13 Filletl 131 Shell1

•

§10 Edit Material

. Q

Plain Carbon Stee^^w Cast Alloy Steel

Malleable Cast Iron 1060 Alloy Brass

146

Part Modeling

The finished part should look like this.

o

o

//% w/ -:-yA //

^

1

i I //

O /A

o

"v

o

147

/ /

/// / /./

"X-

//


Exercises: Build the following parts using the knowledge acquired in this lesson. Try to use the most efficient method to complete the model.

FYPrr*i^P 7

DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: AISI 1020

02.000

R.500

r 500 4.000

T

2.000

.125 Thick

6.000

SECTION A-A

R.250 01.500

R 125

|— .500

^

1.500

t

R.12S

148

Part Modeling

R.125 750

Exercise 8 DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: ABS

000 SECTION A-A

3.000

.750

.625

T

.750

1.500

L

2.000

.1

£

i

t_ ,500 .500

R500

1.000

2.000

r

r

rl

h

U

M

|-»

—

fr-Ti

I•

1

i i " Tt ~ri JJ

7.000

II II

l'

-

II II

u

3.500

149

--f-rII II

'j


Engine Project Parts: Make the following components to build the engine. Save the parts using the name provided. High resolution images are included on the accompanying files. -2.150 —

0.266 THRU

— 1.200

— .250

5.500

3.500 — .125

-.005

R 1.250

Oil Pan Gasket DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: 0 .1 50 — 125

6 INSTANCES

0 1.750

01.050

i \

01.500

e

Shaft Seal Cover DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Plain Carbon Steel

02 .000 .015 01.250

Shaft Seal Gasket DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: VITON

150

Part Modeling

The Offset Shaft

151


Notes:

152

Part Modeling

For the 'Offset Shaft' we'll follow the next sequence of operations. In this part we only need a few features. We'll learn how to make polygons in the sketch, a new option for the "Cut Extrude" feature, auxiliary planes and a Revolved cut.

Boss Extrude

Offset Plane

Cut Revolve

*£ia> Second Cut

Hex cut

5.1. - Start by making a new document selecting the Part template. For the first feature in this part create a sketch in the "Right Plane". A different way to create a sketch to how we've been doing it so far is to select the "Right Plane" in the FeatureManager, and from the pop-up toolbar select "Sketch." Part3 (Default<_Display Stat Rg] Histoiy

Fq| Sensors *

a] Annotations

[

O-

S-o Material

^ Front Pla Top Pla

Right Plan U Origin

Sketch

The view will be oriented to the Right view automatically. Draw a circle starting at the origin and dimension it 0.600" using the "Smart Dimension" tool. Since this shaft will need to meet certain tolerances for assembly, we will give a tolerance to the diameter. 0.600

L

153


5.2. - To add (or change) the tolerance of the shaft's diameter, select the dimension in the graphics area. Notice the dimension's properties are displayed in the PropertyManager. This is where we can change the tolerance type. For this shaft select "Bilateral" from the "Tolerance/Precision" options box and add +0.000"/-0.005".

©

^ Dimension

_

Value

Leaders

Other

/

„

„... + I II' )l I

_ no.5

Style

&%%

%

Tolerance/Precision

Bilateral

L

V

O.OOOin -O.OOSin

S arentheses

5.3. - When finished with the tolerance, extrude the shaft 6.5" using "Extruded Boss/Base" from the Features tab. 0 Boss-Extrude V

1* -^+:oo5

X

T

Direction 1 Blind

<© 6.500in

Draft outward

l~l Direction 2

• Thin Feature

Selected Contours

154

Part Modeling

5.4. - For the second feature we'll make a "Revolved Cut." As its name implies, we'll remove material from the part similar to a turning (Lathe) operation. Switch to a Front view and select the "Front Plane" from the FeatureManager. From the pop up menu select the "Sketch" icon as before to create a new sketch on it. Draw the following sketch and be sure to add the centerline. This is the profile that will be used as a "cutting tool". The centerline will be automatically selected as the axis of revolution for the cut. Part3 (Default<_Display Stat •

History Sensors

(

| AI Annotatio

Material <

JM

c

-

i

l

Front Plane

•J

Right Plane L*

0ri9ir

Boss-Extrude1

The reason for selecting the "Front Plane" for this sketch is because there are no flat model faces that could be used to create the sketch in this orientation.

.063 .500

r

155

.063


5.5. - Now that we are finished with the sketch, select the "Revolved Cut" icon from the Features toolbar.

Insert

I led

Tools

Window

Help

/IsT I Revolved Cut [ 3^ ] Boundary Cut

S0LIDW0RK"

•

V

Revolved Cut Cuts a solid model by revolving a sketched profile around an axis.

Since we only have one centerline in the sketch, SOLIDWORKS automatically selects it as the axis to make the revolved cut about it. By default a revolved cut is 360 degrees. Rotate the view to see the preview. Feel free to use the value spin box to change the number of degrees to cut, this will illustrate the effect of a revolve cut very clearly. Click OK to complete the feature and rename it 'Groove'. Cut-Revolve •

063

X

.500 Axis of Revolution S

Dirt

Line7

tioni Blind

[3;

360.00deg

LJ IDirection2

<-4

:

LJ Thin Feature Selected Contours

If there are two or more centerlines in the sketch or none at all, we will be asked to select a line or model edge to use for the axis of revolution.

156

Part Modeling

Our part now looks like this.

5.6. - For the next feature, we need to make a cut exactly like the one we just did, but in the right side of the shaft. We could have done it at the same time with the previously made Revolved Cut feature by adding an extra profile, but we'll show a different way to make it and learn additional functionality at the same time. For this feature, we'll create an auxiliary plane for a new sketch. Auxiliary Planes help us to locate a sketch where we don't have any flat faces or planes to use. To create an auxiliary plane, select "Reference Geometry, Plane" from the Features tab in the CommandManager or from the menu "Insert, Reference Geometry, Plane." Planes can be defined using many different options using model vertices, edges, faces, sketch geometry, existing planes, and/or axes.

"S-^ &c>

&&

Rib

Pattern ^ Draft

Wrap Intersect

- |) E Dcp Reference Geometry

If

Curves

InstantSD

Mirror

[~p

® * s3-

Plane

•w'" Axis Coordinate System •

Point Center of Mass

0|| Mate Reference

As we start selecting references to define a new plane, the possible ways to define it are dynamically shown in the PropertyManager, along with a preview of the plane in the graphics area. Some plane definitions require 1, 2, or 3 references depending on each case, but SOLIDWORKS helps us by letting us know when the necessary options have been selected with a "Fully Defined" message at the top of the PropertyManager.

157


Notice that references are color coded in the PropertyManager and matched in the graphics area to easily identify them. Here are some of the most common ways to define an auxiliary plane:

Q

Through Lines/Points - Select 3 non-collinear vertices, or one straight edge and one non-collinear vertex. Two or three references are needed. [j3 Plane

V X -N Message Fully defined First Reference ^

J|Vertex<1:

a Coincident

[xi project ©|°

Second Reference |vertex<2> Coincident X Project

Qo

Third Reference

(g ^vertex<3>~ a Coincident

<4. | Project

s°

Parallel Plane at Point - Select an existing Plane or a flat face and a point. Note that when we select a Plane or flat face we get additional options like Parallel, Perpendicular, Coincident, at angle or distance. Two references are needed. ?

Plane • X ^ Message

/\

First

Right Plane

I I | Perpendicular

a Coincident I—I Mid Plane

x.

Second Reference

v © l|Vertex<3> |/\| Coincident

x] projtt Third Reference

158

Part Modeling

At an angle - Select a Plane or flat face and an Edge and enter the angle. The Plane's direction can be reversed using the "Flip" checkbox. In this case the face in the back was selected and the Edge indicated. The Edge acts as a "hinge" to the new plane. Change the angle using the value spin box to see the effect. The "Flip" checkbox will change the direction of the plane. Two references are needed. \0 Plane • X -H Message Fully defined hirst Reference Face<1>

|\v Parallel |

Perpendicular

/g45.00d*9 0 Flip offset

J

[<&j 2 m*" |=| Mid Plane Second Reference

0 [edge<1> | I , Perpendicular |Coincident

1

inject

Offset Distance - Select a Plane or flat face, and define the distance from it to create the new Plane. "Flip offset" can be used to change the side on which the new plane is created. In this case the side face was selected and the new plane created to the right. We can optionally create multiple parallel planes changing the number of planes to create (default is 1). One reference is needed. kp Plane • X -H Message Fully defined First Reference

©i

Faced >

Parallel Perpendicular Coincident "ft.OOde 0.875in 0 Flip offset

)

m

i

— Mid Plane

159


Normal to Curve - The plane is created by selecting an edge and a vertex (or a point) in the edge. The plane created is perpendicular to the curve at the vertex (point). In this case we selected the curved edge and the vertex indicated. Two references are needed. • Plane

• X "H Message Jy defined First Reference

Ijl

Edge<2>

m Perpendicular

EH Set origin on curve LA. Coincident Second Reference

firl IB Vertex <2 > pq Coincident 9

© On Surface - The plane is created selecting a surface (any surface) and a vertex (or sketch point/endpoint) on the surface. In this case the face is curved and the resulting plane is tangent to the face at the selected vertex. Two references are needed. ?

Plane V" X -H Message

A

Fully defined First Reference 55 |Face<2>

A

—

^

Tangent

^

Second Reference (jrj BVertex<2>

^

/\ Coincident Project O.OOin Third Reference

A

©I 160

Part Modeling

Mid Plane - The plane is created between two selected planes or faces. If the planes and/or faces are not parallel the new plane will be created at an angle half the angle between the reference planes/faces. [Ja) Plane

•x x Message Fully defined First Reference 0 |Face<3> Parallel Perpendicular Coincident 45.00deg 0.875in Mid Plane Second Reference |Face<1> Parallel LL Perpendicular

A

Coincident

|Y 90.00deg 0.125in =

Mid Plane

When creating auxiliary planes, we can use as references existing Planes, W Faces, Vertices, sketch elements, Axes and Temporary Axes, the Origin, etc. • To make sketch elements visible, expand a feature in the FeatureManager, select the sketch that we want to make visible, and from the pop-up toolbar select the Show/Hide icon. If the sketch is hidden, it will be made visible and vice versa. Part4 (Oefault<_Display Stat

(Q Part4 (Default<_Display Stat •

•

f^) History

FqI Sensors f £a) Annotations

fo\ Sensors

a] Annotations

• [

SIJ Material < not specified>

Material Front Plane

Front Plane

Top Plane

Top Plane

m Right Plane t_«, Origin w

History

Boss-Extrude

^ Right Plane

<1 o

Origin (^[) Boss-Extrude

\,;-

§> .-t

(-) Sketch

\ (-) Sketch

Hide

Show

161

-


5.7. - Back to our part, we'll make an Auxiliary Plane parallel to a face of the groove. Select "Auxiliary Geometry, Plane" from the Features tab. We'll make an auxiliary plane a set distance from the right face of the groove. Using the "Select Other" function (right mouse button menu or pop-up icon), select the indicated face below (hidden in this view).

0

Plane

• X -H Message Select references and constraints First Reference Box Selection Second Reference

Select Other .

0|

j

Zoom/Pan/Rotate

•

Third Reference

el Options

• X

OK

X

Cancel Pin Dialog

Flip normal

0 Plane

V

Clear Selections

7

*

Message

A

Select references and constraints

First Reference

/\

Second Reference

/\

©I

•

I

Third Reference

©I

Select Othe

• Face@Cut-Revolve1@ • Face@Boss-Extrude1 a

/\

I

Options Flip normal

Notice the mouse pointer changes, letting us know that the left button is to select a face, and the right button to hide a face.

162

Part Modeling

Set the distance to 5" and select the "Flip offset" checkbox if necessary. Notice the preview. After creating the plane, rename it to "Offset Plane". £{3 Plane X -H Message Fully defined First Reference

0l Parallel Perpendicular

90.00deg 5.000in Flip offset

1 Mid Plane Second Reference

If the new plane is not visible, use the "Hide/Show Items" command. "Front Plane", "Top Plane" and "Right Plane" are hidden by default; you can hide and show any plane the same way we did with the sketch. Note we added the keyboard shortcut "P" to hide/show the planes.

$

^

' ^3 iiJ ViewlPlanes

(P)

Control the visibility of planes.

iail i 4 u"

o

:bci -h.

Km

163


5.8. - Switch to an Isometric view (for visibility) and select the "Offset Plane" in the graphics area; from the pop-up toolbar click on "Sketch" to create a new sketch on it.

C

P

etch

The "Convert Entities" command is used to project existing geometric entities onto a sketch, such as model edges or other sketch entities and convert them to new sketch entities at the same time. Click on "Convert Entities" from the Sketch tab in the CommandManager; select the two edges indicated from the "Groove" feature and click OK to finish.

Insert

Tools

Window

Trinr

Convert Entities

D

(xiMirror Entities

0

Entiti

Help

set ities

OOO OOO Linear Sketch Pattern OOO

SOLID V Convert Entities Converts selected model edges or sketch entities into sketch segments.

0 Convert Entities

©t ©

•y x -» Entities to Convert Edges1> Edge<2>

I I Select chain O Inner loops one by one Select all inner loops

164

Part Modeling

5.9. - The two edges are projected onto the sketch plane and are automatically fully defined since they are a projected copy of the edges they came from adding an "On Edge" geometric relation; if the original geometry changes, so will the converted entities. Make an "Extruded Cut" feature 0.063" deep, going to the right. Rename the feature "Offset Groove."

O Circle Existing Relations

l mm

o Q) Fully Defined Add Relations

£

Fix

Options

[I] For construction

IJlJJ Cut-Extrude •

X ^

MP

oi

From Sketch Plane

I

Direction 1

3

Blind

0.063in

*

L_j Flip side to cut

Li, Draft outward

Part3 (Default<_Display Stat •

History m Sensors

*

OD Annotations Material
et

E*, Origin •

îjj Boss-Extrude1

*

f$|) Groove

Offset Groove

165


5.10. - For the last feature, we'll add a hexagonal cut at the right end of the shaft. Hide the "Offset Plane" (or turn off all planes) for easier visibility and switch to a Right view. Insert a sketch in the rightmost face of the shaft as indicated.

rHj^ •

View Planes (P) ^ Control the visibility of planes.

0 P\ - -

k &

P

0 0©

Sketch

/

5.11. - We can make a polygon using lines, dimensions and geometric relations, but we really want to make it easy, so we'll use the "Polygon" tool. Go to the menu, "Tools, Sketch Entities, Polygon" or select the "Polygon" tool from the Sketch tab in the CommandManager.

pS SOLIDWORKS o Exit Sketch

Smart Dimension

File

Sketch

View

(v*

EJ

»

0 Features

Edit

Direct

i

Insert

Tools

©

/A

Trim Convert Entities Entities

•on Sketches a polygon. You can change > the number of sides after sketching the polygon.

Window

(c Offset Entities

""5 Add-lns >...

v Part3 (Default<_Display Stat • (©) History

SOLIDWORKS toolbars can be customized to add or remove icons as needed. Right-mouse-click on any toolbar, select "Customize" and from the "Commands" tab drag the commands needed to and from toolbars.

166

Part Modeling

5.12. - After we select the "Polygon" tool, we are presented with the options in the PropertyManager. This tool helps us to create a polygon by making it either inscribed or circumscribed to a circle. For this exercise we'll select the "Circumscribed circle" with 6 sides in the "Parameters" options. Don't worry too much about the rest of the options, as we'll fully define the hexagon using two additional geometric relations. (jj) Polygon

Options 0 For construction

arameters

© O Inscribed circle

©x

(•) Circumscribed circle

© l° 000 7.87401575

be

A V

0.00° New Polygon

Since the polygon is defined by a circle (Inscribed or circumscribed), it is drawn like a circle. Start at the center of the shaft as shown and notice that we immediately get a preview of the hexagon, its radius and angle of rotation. 0 Polygon

Options For construction

,256,

©

Parameters

^

6

k

Inscribed circle • Circumscribed circle

(js 0.000 0.000 @

0.51162879 39.63729184= New Polygon

167


Draw the circle a little smaller (or larger) than the shaft, the idea is to make the construction circle the same size as the shaft using a geometric relation. Hit "Esc" or OK to finish the polygon tool when done.

L

5.13. - Now select the "Add Relation" tool from the Sketch tab and select the polygon's construction circle and the edge of the shaft; add an "Equal" geometric relation to make them the same size. Remember that the "Add Relation" tool can also be found in the right mouse button menu or by pre-selecting geometric elements. k Add Relations

Selected Entities Arc!

Existng Relations

Jxf

(j^) Under Defined

add rdatkmw o

168

Part Modeling

5.14.-Now select one of the hexagon's lines (anyone will do) and add a "Horizontal" relation to fully define the sketch. Ii Add Relations

• [7] Selected Entities

L

Existing Relations

_l

HorizontalO PatterncdO

CD Fully C

5.15. - Now we are ready to make the cut. For this operation we'll use a seldom used but very powerful option in SOLIDWORKS. Select the "Extruded Cut" icon from the Features tab as before, but now activate the checkbox "Flip side to cut". This option will make the cut outside of the sketch, not inside. Notice the arrow indicating which side of the sketch will be used to cut. Make the cut 0.5" deep. Rename the feature 'Hex Cut'.

(jSi

©

Cut-Extrude

•

X

»»

From Sketch Plane

Direction 1 >

Blind

500in

0 flip side

cut

Change the side to be cut | I I Draft outward • Direction 2

169


CjJ) Part3 (Default<_Display Stat m History fo) Sensors

fXl Annotations Material N«| Front Plane \ Top Plane Right Plane Origin Boss-Extrudel lift Groove [Jl Offset Plane @ Offset Groove @ Hex Cut

5.16. - Edit the material for this shaft and select "Chrome Stainless Steel" from the materials library (or from the Favorites list if available). Q— Alloy Steel

Part3 (Default<_Display Stat •

History fol Sensors

*

£5 Material

\ Top Plane Right Plane Origin • *

Groove

•

@ Offset Groove

•

(pl Hex Cut

Source: Sustainabilit

?— Cast Carbon Steel

stee^^^^^^

Edit Material

Cast Stainless Steel

Configure Material

Chrome Stainless ess Steel*. St

^ r nifiniTffl "itf i

Manage Favorites Plain Carbon Steel Cast Alloy Steel ^ÂBs PL Chrome Stainless Steel

Property Elastic Modui Poisson's Rati

Name: 'Chrome Stainless Steel' Description: Stainless Steel (ferritic) Source: 1 Wrought Stainless Stet Appearance: 'chromium plate XHatch: 'ANSI32 (Steel)'

filT| Iron Mr

[jj] Aluminium Alloys [§j] Copper Alloys

mfin

^

Plain Carbon Steel

QSjj) Boss-Extrude1

|jjj Offset Plane

Description:

ASTM A36 Steel §— Cast Alloy Steel

fXl Annotations

^ Front Plane

Alloy Steel (SS)

f^=> TU

Allnw

Save the part as 'Offset Shaft' and close the file.

170

Yield Strengtt Thermal Expai Thermal Cone

Part Modeling

Auxiliary Geometry: Auxiliary geometry includes Planes, Axes, Coordinate Systems, Points, Mate References and Center of Mass. Both of these can be created from the "Reference Geometry" icon in the Features tab in the CommandManager. Reference geometry can be used for a number of reasons, including locating features and components, as reference, or to use as part of a feature, an axis can be used to define the direction for a circular pattern and planes to add sketch geometry. Rib Fillet

Linear Pattern ft

wrap

Draft

jjpi IInterse

0] Shell

|>|<] Mirror A

bta Reference Geometry

[$

Plane

/

Axis

instantSD

Coordinate System o ^

Point Center of Mass

0|) Mate Reference

We covered the main options to create Planes previously; here are other types of Reference Geometry. An Axis can be made using the following options:

/

Axis

One Line/Edge/Axis - Any linear edge, sketch line, or axis. Every cylindrical and conical face has an axis (Temporary Axis) running through it. To reveal it use the menu "View, Temporary Axis." / Axis

•

X

-H

Selections

©

Edge<1>

One Line/tdge/Axis

Two Planes

E>.tr

r-

l~ \ v

Two Points/Vertices Cylindrical/Conical Face Point and Face/Plane

171

/

;


Two Planes - An axis can be created at the intersection of any two planes and/or faces. |

/

Axis

V

X

| v—vi iiivtauyi i j

Sensors -H

y\

Front Plane Selections ©

Front Plane

Right Plane

Right Plane

CS5|) Extrudel

/' One Line/Edge/Axis

L f \ r-—- -i

Extrude2

Two Planes

i

([OSl Cut-Extrude2 0 Filletl

^ Two Points/Vertices

© Flllet2

|jj Cylindrical/Conical Pace 9

<2>

l^| Extrude3

Point and Face/Plane

Two pointsA/ertices - Using any two vertices and/or sketch points/endpoints. / Axis

v

xt^

x -m

Selections ©

Vertex< 1>

/

y

hi •

tkes^^

Two Points/Vertices

JA

.—•

One Line/Edge/Axis

\

/

/ mH w i; \

Cyiindiical/Comcal Face Point and Face/Plane

172

y c

/* y.

/ / /

,

Part Modeling

Cylindrical/Conical Face - Selecting any cylindrical or conical face will make an axis using the face's temporary axis.

0

/' Axis V

X

Selections

0

Face< 1>

One Line/Edge/Axis Two Planes

aice^^

Cylindrical/Conical Face

9 •c>

Point and Face/Plane

r Point and Face/Plane- Selecting a point, sketch point, endpoint, or vertex and a flat face or plane will make an axis perpendicular to the face/plane that passes through the point/vertex.

©

/ Axis >/

X

Selections

0

Faces 3>

One Line/Edge/Axis

& Two Planes % Two Points/Vertices

/ U

Face Point and Face Plane

173


Coordinate Systems can be used for a number of things including to calculate a component's center of mass referenced to a specific location, or when we have to export parts for manufacturing on computer controlled machines using Computer Assisted Manufacturing (CAM). More often than not the origin the designer used for the component is not the best location for the CAM operator to program the machining equipment. To create a Coordinate System we need to select a vertex or point, and define two axis directions (X, Y or Z) using linear edges, axes or sketch lines; the third direction is defined automatically. Notice that an axis direction can be reversed using the "Reverse direction" icon to the left of each selection box. Coordinate System

Coordinate System •

X

©

-H

Selections

^

2* X axis:

e

Edged > Y axis:

Edge<2>

U

Z axis:

•

l

Point

A Point can be added and used as a reference for other features, auxiliary for other reference geometry, sketches, etc. Some of the methods to create points are: Arc Center - Adds a point in the center of a planar arc, either a circular model edge or a sketch arc. Only one reference is needed. Point V

X

Selections

efll Arc Center

^ intersection ^

Projection On point

DLl25tn

174

Part Modeling

Center of Face - Creates a point at the center of mass of the selected face, either a planar or non-planar face. Only one reference is needed. ° V

©

Point X

-N

Selections

\

©

-V"

Jo] Center of Face

p\J Intersection

| Face center reference point

Projection

v

On point

:

T

0.12Sin

Intersection - Creates a point at the intersection of edges, curves or sketch segments. Two references are needed.

•

X

\

©

° Point -X

Selections

©

Edge<3> Edge<4> f

(*

Arc Center

,

•—t

of Face Intersection

* \ / \

Projection 0n

point

0.125in

Center of Mass

k

0|||l Mate Reference % jhe Center of Mass (COM) adds a visual marker at the center of mass of the model, as well as a Center of Mass feature. After adding the COM we can add a Center of Mass Reference Point by right mouse clicking in the COM feature and selecting the COM Reference Point that can be used to dimension features from it.

175


^ Kriob (Default-! _Di5pl •

f?5) History

*

El Annotations fol Sensors ABS Front Plane Top Plane

//If

/ i[w< •A l V—r*I •o

Right Plane

Origin Center of Ma Mass

•

Ccjj) Extrude2 ( TL S) Cut-Extrude2

•

@ Filletl © Fillet2

• fiSfl

Extrude3

EJ Annotations

•Qj} Knob (Default<_Displ I • Si History

Sensors

*

(A) Annotations

ABS

Si Sensors

Front Plane

ABS

Top Plane

m Right Plane u Origin

Front Plane Top Plane ^ Right Plane

Center of Mass

Origin Center of Mass Reference PointI

•ip Center of Mass

Extrudel

Feature (Center of Mass)

rr

Cut-Extrude2

Configure Feature

Extrude2


Comment

@ Cut-Extrude2

13 fihetl

X

3 Fillet2

fa)

Extrude3

€) Extrudel <^£l Extrude2

Delete...

uulj

Add to Favorites

4PIII

Save Selection

Center of Mass Reference Pointl

Important: The "COM Reference Point" is not dynamic, after it is added it will be fixed; what this means is that if the model is modified, the COM will change, the COM Reference Point will not. Remember that we can use sketch geometry from any sketch to create reference geometry (Planes, Axes and Coordinate Systems), but before we can use it, we need to make the sketch visible using the "Show/Hide" button in the pop-up toolbar. Top Plane

^ Top Plane

^ Right Plane

^js, Right Plane

t , Origin

J , Origin

©

^j] Extrudel

^j] Extrudel

Sketch' Extrude2

( Show ||

Sketchl

€l ExtrudeZ

1^) Cut-Extrude2

|^g) Cut-Extrude2

176

Hide

Part Modeling

Exercises: Build the following parts using the knowledge acquired in this lesson. Try to use the most efficient method to complete the model. C-'

Exercise 9 DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: 6061-T4 (SS)

750

VEWA-A 750 .500

1.000

-

rppi

4.000

tjj

.500

i i

01.000

65

50

1.000

r-t Kr-H

.500

2.000 — 2.000 750 .750

5/16-18 UNC (2X) VIEW B-B

177

THRU


HINT: Draw a sketch with centerlines ("Sketch2"), exit the sketch, and use it as a layout to make the auxiliary planes ("Planer and "Plane2") needed. Hide the layout sketch when finished.

9 v

Exercise 9 (Default<_[ • E) History El Sensors * El Annotations

\0

%•$ 6061-T4 (SS) ^ Front Plane

\

\ Top Plane

\

^ Right Plane

\

I , Origin •

Boss-Extr^Je1

(r

3l shelly ^ ^ e. sk»rfch2^ [^planel tp Plane2—

9

— ""

To make the cylindrical extrusions indicated in the auxiliary views, activate the "Direction 2" option box when making the extrusion. Use the "Up to Next" end condition to match the curvature of the base.

^ Boss-Extrude2

v

—•

©

x

From

Sketch Plane Direction 1 Blind

A

I O.SOOin @ Merge result

Draft outward

0 Direction 2 Up To Next

A

v

178

Part Modeling

Exercise 10 DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: 2024-0 4.000

0 .625

3.000

01.500

0

0

# 4X

2.000

VIEW B-B

R.30Q

0 .266 THRU ALL 0 .438 T .250

.750

o 45° B

n—r1 I I

2.000

I

I

o

o

.500

© ©

R.188 GROOVE

HINT: Draw a sketch ("Sketch2") with a centerline, exit the sketch, and use it to add an auxiliary plane ("PlaneT') perpendicular to it. Add the hexagonal sketch ("Sketch3") in this plane and extrude it using the "Up to Surface" end condition. Hide the layout sketch when finished. Q; Exercise 10 (Default<. * (©) History

$\o

fjfl Sensors • U) Annotations Iqj 2024-0

•

Front Plane Top Plane ^ Right Plane I , Origin

.

8oss-Extrude1 k

Sketch2

^

1

|jj Planel "••• """* """" f

p-

Sketch3

179


Engine Project Parts: Make the following components to build the engine. Save the parts using the name provided. High resolution images are included on the accompanying exercise files.

o

R500

&

©

03.550

0

.492 THRU ALL

o

o

M14X1.5-6H THRU ALL

o

05.500

375

T

,

3Z

R.050

.25

SECTION A-A

03.000

©

© DETAIL B

0 Cylinder Head DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Cast Alloy Steel

© 0.750 0.332 THRU

180

Part Modeling

The Worm Gear

k

/

1 1

\N

m

181


Notes:

182

Part Modeling

For the 'Worm Gear' we will make a simplified version of a gear without teeth, and after covering the Sweep feature it will be modified to add the gear. The intent of this book is not to go into gear design, but rather to help the user understand and learn how to use basic SOLIDWORKS functionality. With this part we'll learn a new extrusion (or cut) end condition called "Mid Plane", how to chamfer the edges of a model, a special dimensioning technique to add a diameter dimension to a sketch used for a revolved feature, and how to add a dimension to a circle's perimeter. We'll also practice previously learned commands. For the 'Worm Gear'\Ne will follow the next sequence of features.

r m:

> Mid Plane Extrusion

i

Revolved Cut 1

Revolved Cut 2

Tic

Chamfer

—

Mirror

\

Keyway Cut

Fillet

6.1. - Start by making a new part document and create the following sketch in the "Front Plane." 02.250

0.625

L

183


6.2. - In this case we want the part to be symmetrical about the "Front Plane." To achieve this, we'll make an "Extruded Boss/Base" using the "Mid Plane" end condition; this condition extrudes half of the distance in one direction and half in the second direction. Change the end condition to "Mid Plane" and extrude it 1". (The result will be 0.5" going to the front and 0.5" going to the back.) Rename the feature "Base." Boss-Extrude

•

X

0.625 02.250

Sketch Plane Directi Mid Plane

End Condition : Mid Plane \

j

^5 1.000in

Draft outward • Thin Feature Selected Contours

6.3. - For the second feature we will use a "Revolved Cut" to make the slot around the part. Change to a Right view, select the "Right Plane" from the FeatureManager, and click on the "Sketch" icon from the pop-up toolbar as shown. Make the center of the circle coincident to the Midpoint of the cylinder's top edge and don't forget to add the centerline. <0) Part6 (Default<_Display Stat •

[§| History

~

fol Sensors *

5) Annotations SZJ Material
aecified>

V Front Plaii

\ Right Plane

1— Origii •

Base

184

Part Modeling

0.625

L 6.4. - Select the "Revolved Cut" command from the Features tab to complete the feature using the default settings. Rename the feature 'Groove'. View

Insert

Tools

Window

Help

X

ase

Extruded

Revolved

Cut

Cut

jate j DimXpert r 1

SOLIDWO.... _ — Revolved Cut Cuts a solid model by revolving a sketched profile around an axis.

^ Cut-Revotve •

0.625

X

Axis ot Revolution

\

Line2 Directionl

r\

Blind

H1

360.00deg

[2

Drrection2

• Thin Feature

A

V

f^] V

V

Selected Contours

185


'

6.5. - Make a second revolved cut to remove material from one side of the part. Switch to a Right view, and create a new sketch in the "Right Plane" as before

using the following dimensions. Remember, it is a closed Sketch (four lines; don't forget the vertical line in the right side). If needed, turn off the Sketch Grid and change to "Wireframe" view mode for clarity. .430

D u id 250

Wireframe Displays all edges of the model.

6.6. - We'll now use a new dimensioning technique to add diameter dimensions for Revolved Features, this way we will have a diameter dimension in the revolved feature when finished. Select the "Smart Dimension" tool, and add a dimension from the Centerline (not an endpoint!) to the top endpoint of the sketch. Before locating the dimension, cross the centerline and notice how the dimension value doubles. Locate the dimension, and change it to 2". Immediately after adding the first dimension the Smart Dimension tool remains in Doubled dimension mode. Select the bottom horizontal line to add a 1" dimension from the centerline.

mi

186

Part Modeling

• .430 • — .4d0 —

.250

250

1.000

2.000

6.7. - In the next step we will make a "Sketch Mirror" to make the same profile in the other [>!<] Mirror Entities -u DisDlav/Delete side of the part. Draw a vertical centerline at OOO OOO Linear SI Mirrorr Entitie Entities the origin as shown and select the "Sketch OOO Mirrors selected entities about a Mirror" command from the Sketch tab. Select Move Er centerline. the profile lines in the "Entities to mirror" selection box and the vertical centerline in the 1 Mirror about:" selection box. frjfl

Mirror

•

X

— .430

-H

Message Select entities to mirror and a sketch line

or linear model edge to mirror about Options

'2C .250

Entities to mirror: Line5 Line!

Line3 Line4

0Copy Mirror about

1.000 2.000

187

•ep ket


6.8. - Select the "Revolved Cut" command from the Features tab in the CommandManager. In previous operations we only had one centerline and it was automatically selected, in this case we have to select the horizontal centerline to make the revolved cut about it. Notice the doubled diameter dimensions, their purpose is more obvious in this image. ©

Cut-Revolve V

OCT

X

Axis of Revolution

A

|E|Pi Line6 Direction 1

|*y

A

Blind

V

360.00deg

-

• Direction2

V

Q Thin Feature

V

Selected Contours

V

\a

m

J

6.9. - To eliminate the sharp edges on the outside perimeter we'll add a 0.1" x 45° "Chamfer." The Chamfer is an applied feature similar to the Fillet, but instead of rounding an edge, it adds a bevel to it. Select it from the drop down menu under "Fillet" in the Features tab or in the menu "Insert, Features, Chamfer." Window

a

Help

Swept Cut

©

Fillet

r ($ Lofted Cut

&0 fri> Linear Pattern

Wrap

I

P

Intersect

b|
Boundary Cut idd-lns [0]

Chamfer

188

Part Modeling

Set the chamfer type to "Angle distance," make it 0.1" x 45° and select the two edges indicated. Click OK to finish. CD

^3 Chamfer

•y x

Distance:

0.1in

Angle:

45deg

gj

Chamfer Parameters 0 Edge<2> Edge<1>

• Angle distance *

Vertex

irection [aiOOin

\

45.00deg J Select

J

fg| @1

through faces

I~1 Keep features @ Tangent propagation (•) Full preview

/*


189


6.10. - Add a 0.0625" radius fillet to the four inside edges. Selecting the two inside faces will make selection easier. 0 fillet V

©f © Radius 0.062 Sin

X Manual

FilletXpert

Fillet Type

@18 Items To Fillet Faces 1>

m

(>

<0* 0 Tangent propagation ® Full preview


y


0.0625in • Multiple radius fillet Profile: Circular

\

190

,

Part Modeling

6.11. - For the last step, we'll make the keyway. Switch to a Front view and make a sketch in the "Front Plane." Draw a rectangle and add a Midpoint relation between the rectangle's bottom line and the part's Origin.

[A! Arinotati S3; -O Material Front Pla \ Top Plane Right Plane

Sketch Jj

l. origin In Add Relations

0 Selected Entities Lne3 Point! ©Origin

Existing Relations

1 (J) Under Defined

\

Midpoint ,

«

\

We could have made the sketch in the front face, but we placed it in the "Front Plane" to show additional functionality.

6.12. - By adding the Midpoint relation, the rectangle will be coincident to, and centered with the origin. Add a 0.188" width dimension as indicated. If the top horizontal line (blue) is below the center hole's edge, click-and-drag it until it's above the circle as shown. This will allow us to add a dimension to the circular edge in the next step. r

188

191


6.13. - Now we need to add a dimension from the top of the circular edge to the horizontal line. Before adding the dimension, press and hold the "Shift" key, by doing this we'll be able to add a dimension tangent to the hole's edge to the top line of the rectangle. Add the dimension between the top of the circular edge and the horizontal line, click for the location and release the "Shift" key; change the dimension's value to 0.094". If we don't hold the "Shift" key the dimension will be referenced to the circular edge's center instead. x ^

x^

P

•—m 082

o

Base

188

188

x 094

188

\

192

1

Part Modeling

6.14. - To finish the part we need to make a "Cut Extrude." Since the sketch is located in the "Front Plane" (in the middle of the part); making a cut "Through All" will only go from the center to one side. In this case we need to activate the "Direction 2" checkbox, and set the end condition to "Through All" for both "Direction 1" and "Direction 2". Being able to select different end conditions for each direction is very useful and a powerful tool. Rename the feature "Keyway." ©

IjBj Cut-Extrude V

X

^

From

Sketch Plane " Direction 1 Through

x1 5 ( I Flip side to cut

\

u

ard

0 Direction 2 Through All

a

:


M Cut-Extrude

Notice the single and double arrows in the graphics area, indicating "Direction 1", and "Direction 2". Any "End Condition" can be used for either direction as needed.

>/

(d

X

From Sketch Plane Direction 1

A Starting in SOLIDWORKS 2014 the end condition "Through All - Both" was added to the Cut Extrude command. When expanding "Direction 2" the End Condition is automatically set to "Through All"

Through All - Both

A l~~l Flip side to cut

Draft outward

0 Direction 2 Through All

0

193

m


6.15. - Change the material to "AIS11020" steel. Save the part as 'Worm Gear' and close the file. Part6 (Default<_Display Stat *

fS) History fol Sensors

•

[a] Annotations

Iqj Material < not specifi |= ^ Front Plane Top Plane

EdjtMateria|

Configure Material Manage Favorites

m Right Plane Origin

Plain Carbon Steel

^ Base

Cast Alloy Steel

(J[jj Groove

ABS PC

m Cut-Revolve2

Chrome Stainless Steel

Chamferl 0 Filletl

tJron Alb I 1C2C

@ Keyway

j

Brass Copper PBT General Purpose Nickel

\

9 /-

194

Part Modeling

Exercises: Build the following part using the knowledge acquired in this lesson. Try to use the most efficient method to complete the model.

Exercise 11 DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Chrome Stainless Steel

0 .201 THRU /4-20UNC THRU

/

.850

.500

b"

T

02 250 _ I .500

.525 SECTION A-A

R.200

.750 -A 06.000

.075 X 45c 04.000

03.000

H ,250 02.000

1.500 4.000 —

6X 0 .201 THRU ALL I I 0 .375 TP" .190 (Counterbore for 10-32 Socket Head Cap Screw)

195

05.000


Engine Project Parts: Make the following components to build the engine. Save the parts using the name provided. High resolution images at mechanicad.com.

Bushing Top Con Rod DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Brass 0.7501.002

.500 •

.563 -.003

-.000

.015X45'o

^

Con Rod Crankshaft Half Bushing DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Brass R.5001.002 +.002 R.313 -.000

.015X45°

750

196

.250

Exhaust Base DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: AISI 1020

1 /4" Screw Clearance Hole (4X)

.750

01.000

.03 X 45a

SECTION A-A


Pin Con Rod-Piston DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Alloy Steel 0.250

l .800 •

0.562

45° \ r I

\ x

— 2.2

,

1

o 0

.015 —

Connecting Rod DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: 7075-0 (SS)

e

2X 0 .213 THRU ALL 1/4-28 UNF THRU ALL —|

0.750

01.125

rn

|— .500

HI

.350 OFFSET 5.000 5.00°

/

R.250

02.000

.250

.500

A

—""|.75of-"— R.500

SECTION A-A

198

Part Modeling

.125-

i.ooo-

Crankshaft_ DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Alloy Steel

.850

.875R.125-

id SECTION A-A

J

.200——| i-

z65°

6.570-3.230r\

.480r\

- 2.200

il J

J

EEL

.025 X 45°

R.025-

DETAIL B A/ SCALE 1 : V

-R.125

C-

.135

R.750

1.000— .750-

r

1.125

_l r

f .300-

0.940

.625

R.250

h)

R2.000

C-

SECTION C-C

199


Notes:

200

Part Modeling

The Worm Gear Shaft

201


Notes:

202

Part Modeling

For the 'Worm Gear Shaft'we will review the Revolved Feature previously learned, the sketch Polygon tool, and a Mid Plane cut.

Keyway cut

Revolve

Hex cut

7.1. - In this part we only need to make three features. The first feature will be a revolved extrusion. Make a new part file and insert a sketch in the "Front Plane" as shown. It's very important to add the centerline, as we'll need it to add the diameter dimensions as we did in the previous part. Select the "Revolved Boss" command to complete the first feature. Rename the feature 'Base'. Notice the three doubled diameter dimensions using the centerline.

In a sketch like this it is better to add the smaller dimensions before the larger ones. The reason is if the large dimensions are added first, when the geometry updates, the small features may behave unexpectedly. Add a "Collinear" relation between the two lines indicated before dimensioning. Existing Relations

X

(d u»<

ider Defined

\

"\dd Relations Horizontal

z Parallel = Equal

fc* Fix

-5.250- 4.625 .063 —

.500 -

-.250

L

.063

1.000

.500-

— .625

203


7.2. - The second feature is the keyway. Select the "Front Plane" from the FeatureManager and click in the "Sketch" icon from the pop-up toolbar. In this sketch it's OK to leave the top line of the sketch under defined. What we'll do is make a cut using the "Mid Plane" end condition. Making the top line beyond the top of the part allows us to "cut air"; this way we are sure we will cut the part. This is a common practice and is OK as long as we make the sketch big enough to accommodate possible future changes. Adding a dimension to ensure the sketch extends past the part is a good idea too. The problem that may occur depending on the geometry and the feature being made if we don't extend the sketch upward is that the top line could generate a "zero thickness" face error and would not let us continue. Remember that we can use Mouse Gestures (right mouse click-and-drag) W for the most commonly used commands, or configure it for the tools we use ^ most to help us speed up the design process. A useful option when drawing lines, is to transition from drawing a line to a tangent arc. To do this we can use the default shortcut key MA" or move the mouse back to the last endpoint. After moving the mouse back, a tangent arc will be started. Depending on the direction that we move out, that's the direction the tangent arc will be created. Select the "Line" tool and draw a line, then click in one location, click in the second point to complete the first line, and instead of clicking a third time to add a second line, move back to the second endpoint and move out to add a tangent arc. Press the "A" key to toggle between arc, and line. jW

>

,

0.677. Ifi0°

1

yy/

0

0.448

GT

/-

First click...

second click...

move out (or press A)...

+ . •

^

A = 58.58°

n

/<§>

\ \

1

+

back to second point...

and out going up...

t v ...or straight up...

or out going down... ...

A = 53.13s R =

204

A = 71.61° R = 0.473

V A = 72.86' R

...or straight down...

58.3' /

...or back.

Part Modeling

Note the sketch feedback as we draw the profile

A = 90° R = 0.361

~J_

/z

A = 90* R = 0.375

/a-

.375

2.750

.094 .250

R, 125

The 0.250" dimension's only purpose is to make sure the sketch cuts through the part by extending the sketch beyond the part. Since this dimension will not be required in the detail drawing, we will turn off the dimension's "Mark for Drawing" option. This option controls which dimensions are imported or not later on. To change this option, right mouse click in the 0.25" dimension and uncheck it. The default setting is checked. Notice that dimensions not marked for drawing are displayed using a different color. Dimension (D4@Sketch2@Part2.SLDPRT)

Dimension (D4@Sketch2@Part2.SLDPRT)

Link Values

Link Values

Reverse Direction

Reverse Direction

•fltwe

Driven

ark For Drawing

Mark For Drawing Display Options

Annotations

Annotations

Selected Entity (Dimension)

Selected Entity (Dimension)

205

ir


7.3. - Select the "Cut Extrude" command from the Features tab and use the "Mid Plane" end condition with a dimension of 0.1875"; this way the keyway will be exactly at the center of the shaft. Notice that the "Direction 2" option box is unavailable when we select the Mid Plane end condition. Rename this feature "Keyway". Cut-Extrude V

X ^

375

From

JJS4-

Sketch Plane

Mid Plane

250 0.187Sin

£-|

•Flip side to cut

ftl

a

25

Draft outward


7.4. - For the last feature we'll make a w Q w ( V © hexagonal cut just as we did in the 'Offset S Conver Irim Shaft'. Switch to a Left view, select the round Entities Entities face, and add a sketch. Using the "Polygon" tool from the Sketch tab draw a Circumscribed ~v hexagon and make the construction circle Direct Ed Polygon coincident to the edge at the shaft's end as Sketches a polygon. You can change seen. We changed to Flidden Lines Removed the number of sides after sketching "V the polygon. for clarity. '

© Polygon

Options For construction

Parameters

<&

6 Inscribed circle • Circumscribed circle

w

0.wu 0.500 42.44871302s New Polygon

206

Part Modeling

Finally select one line and add a horizontal relation to fully define the sketch. Make Horizontal i

7.5. - Make a "Cut Extrude" using the "Up to Surface" end condition as indicated and activate the option "Flip side to cut" to cut outside the hexagon. |p) Cut-Extrude •

X

<9-

From

A

I Sketch Plane iHfEction

1

V

A

Up To Surface

Base

0Flip side to cut SI i» i

IftT Draft outward CD Direction 2

V

f~l Thin Feature

V

7.6. - Change the material to "Chrome Stainless Steel." Feel free to add the most commonly used materials using the "Manage Favorites" option in the "Edit Material" menu.

Fa] Annotations Material
Edit Material Configure Material Manage Favorites Plain Carbon Steel Cast Alloy Steel

ypl

-


207


7.7. - Save the part as 'Worm Gear Shaft' and close the file.

208

Part Modeling

Engine Project Parts: Make the following components to build the engine. Save the parts using the name provided. High resolution images are included in the exercise files. The following part is shown in three steps for clarity Seoled Needle Bearing DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL:

or« .250

.500

-100 SZI

0 1.500 0 1.300

.015X45° SECTION A-A

0.155

.400

20 INSTANCES

+ 0 1.000

A SECTION A-A .400

0 1.000

.040 A SECTION A-A

209


Internal Retaining Ring DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Alloy Steel

^

|— ^ ^

I

t"

120

i .170

w, • R.020

60u

0.047

R.030

.035

Retaining Ring Crankshaft Bearing DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Alloy Steel

01.100

0.944

.025

.025

.122

R.050 o

.063

— .050 .140

.042" 67

210

R.020

DETAIL A SCALE 4 : 1

Part Modeling

Here is a suggested sequence of features to build the Piston Head for reference.

u

Revolved base

First cut

First bottom cut

Second bottom cut

Groove cut

Mirror grove cut

O Round inside edges

Side Cut

211

+.000

02.7501.001

2.450 -.002

.050

E

02.550

02.000

SECTION B-B

ho ro

T~

1.515

(V R.125

2.350

P?

.125

I

T

FTT K'J

.500

.350 \

/

I • 2.000

SECTION A-A 120 —

.525

1.000

.125

.600 —

/

w

0.562

.051

.155

;^xr.005 ~f~j[— -080 J-

.500 R.050

.125

.125

r

DETAIL C SCALE 1 : 1

0.596 i

.039 DETAIL D SCALE 1 : 1

Piston Head DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: 6063-0

Special Features

Special Features: Sweep, Loft and Wrap There are times when we need to design components that cannot be easily defined by prismatic shapes. For those features that have 'curvy' shapes we can use Sweep and Loft features, which let us create almost any shape we can think of. These are the features that allow us to design consumer products, which, more often than not, have to be visually attractive and pleasant to touch, making extensive use of curvature and organic shapes. These products include things like your remote control, a computer mouse, a coffee maker, perfume bottles, telephones, etc., and more often than not, their commercial success can be directly attributed to their appearance. They have to look nice, 'feel' right, and of course perform the task that they were intended for. Sweeps and Lofts (also used to create "organic" shapes like those found in nature) are widely used in the automotive, consumer products and aerospace industry, where cosmetics, aerodynamics, and ergonomics are very important in the design. Sweeps and Lofts have many different options that allow us to create anything from relatively simple to extremely complex shapes. In light of the vast number of variations and possibilities for these features, we'll keep these examples as simple as possible without sacrificing functionality, to give the reader a good idea as to what can be achieved. Sweeps and Lofts are usually referred to as advanced features, since they usually require more work to complete, and a better understanding of the basic concepts of solid modeling. Having said that, these exercises will assume that commands that we have done more than a couple of times up to this point, like creating a sketch, are already understood and we'll simply direct the reader to create it providing the necessary details. This way we'll be able to focus more on the specifics and options of the new features. The Wrap feature is a special tool that helps us, as the name implies, to 'wrap' a sketch around a cylindrical surface, this tool helps us create features like cylindrical cams, slots on cylinders or cylindrical surfaces, etc.

213


These are some examples of designs made using advanced modeling techniques.

214

Special Features

Sweep: Cup and Springs

215


Notes:

216

Special Features

The Cup For this exercise we are going to make a simple cup. In this exercise we will learn a new option when creating features called "Thin Feature," the Sweep command, a new Fillet option to create a Full Round fillet and a review of auxiliary Planes. The sequence of features to complete the cup is:

n n Revolve Thin

Create Path Sketch

Make Sweep

Cut inside of Cup

Afill g ( S \

i

Auxiliary Plane

Create Profile Path

Full Round Fillet

Handle Fillet

8.1. - For the first feature we will create a "Revolved Feature" using the "Thin Feature" option. This option makes a feature with a specified thickness based on the sketch that was drawn. Select the "Front Plane" and create the following sketch. Notice the sketch is an open profile with two lines, an arc and a centerline. (Remember to make the diameter dimension about the centerline.) ^

Thin Features can be made using either an open or closed sketch, but using an open sketch will always make a thin feature. 3.500

-

4.000

x—

217

R.250


8.2. - After selecting the "Revolve Boss/Base" command we get a warning telling us about the sketch being open. Since we want a thin revolved feature, select "No". SOLIDWORKS The sketch is currently open. A non-thin revolution feature requires a closed sketch, Would you like the sketch to be automatically closed?

Yes

No

In the "Revolve" options, "Thin Feature" is automatically activated. Since we want the dimensions we added to be external model dimensions, select the Thin Feature's "Reverse Direction" option to add the material inside the cup. Notice the preview showing the change. Click OK to finish the first feature. In the value box we typed 3/16; we can add a fraction and SOLIDWORKS changes it to the corresponding decimal value when we click OK. We can also type simple mathematic expressions including addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division in any value box where we can type a value.

^ Revolve •

X

Aids of Revolution Line5 Directionl Blind K1

360.00deg

0 Thin Feature One-I Direction 1 Thickness V

3/16

Units Select

Contours

218

Special Features

Our part looks like this and "Revolve-Thinf is added to the Feature Manager.

8.3. - Select the "Front Plane" and create the following sketch using an ellipse. Switch to a Front view and select the "Ellipse" command from the Sketch tab in the CommandManager, or from the menu "Tools, Sketch Entities, Ellipse". To draw an ellipse, first click to locate its center, click again to locate one axis and again to locate the other axis. Add the corresponding dimensions between the ellipse's points at the major and minor axes. Be sure to add a "Vertical" geometric relation between the top and bottom points of the ellipse (or "Horizontal" between left and right) to make them vertical (or horizontal) to each other to fully define the sketch. pS SOLIDWORKS

r

Exit Sketch

o Smart

Dimension

File

Edit

View

Insert

/-

Tools

©

to- ^ 0

Trim Entities

Convert Entities

Windov

(c Offset Entities

EHipse Features

Sketch

Sketches a complete ellipse. Select the Direct Editing j Evak ellipse center, then drag to set the major and minor axes.

When looking at a round surface's profile from an orthogonal view we can add a dimension to its silhouette.

219


jijuj

jU.UJ

zooo

Exit the sketch and rename it "Path Sketch." We will not use the sketch for a feature just yet. ?S SOLIDWORKS

1^1

File

•

[a] Annotations glj Material < not specified> ^ Front Plane

Exit Smart Sketch Din*nsion


^ -

Origin

Exit Sketch Exit this sketch and keep any changes. I

C Path Sketch

l

8.4. - Create an Auxiliary parallel plane using the "Right Plane" as the first

reference and the center of the ellipse as the second reference as shown. Click OK to finish the plane.

1e

-

Q|wrap

Intersect

Reference Geometry

Curves

. . lnstant3D

|^cQ Mirror

©*

jjJ

Plane

}

A x i s 2 * ^ Coordinate System o

Point Center of Mass Mate Reference

220

Special Features

• a

[p Plane

Annotations

o—

• X -H

Material
Message

Front Plane

pecifi

Fully defined Right Plane

First Reference ©

Right Plane

Revolve-Thin

CPath Sketch]

Parallel

/

I ] Perpendicular Coincident

cs 90.G0deg ^D1 0.125in

=

m

Mid Plane

Second Reference (jQ |Point2@Path Sketch Coincident

|j>| project W\ 0

v:

Third Reference

© 8.5. - Select the plane just created and draw the next sketch in it. Looking at the plane perpendicular to it helps us better visualize the sketch. After adding the sketch, select the plane and press the "Normal To" command (shortcut Ctrl+8). Pressing it again will show the reverse view. "Normal To" can also be selected from the pop-up menu after selecting the plane. Start the center of the new ellipse at the top point of the previous Norma To sketch's ellipse. Add a coincident relation if needed. Remember to add a horizontal relation between the points of the major (or vertical to the minor) axis.

iTjf

If necessary, rotate the view to have a better view and select the top point of the previous sketch's ellipse. Exit the sketch and rename it "Profile Sketch."

Planel —.750—~ t

H f

1

!

1*

221


plan®

^ .750 375

Material HI Front Plane \ Top Plane Right Plane Origin ^ Revolve-Thinl ^

Path Sketch

d Profile Sketch

8.6. - Select the "Sweep" icon from the Features tab in the CommandManager or from the menu "Insert, Boss/Base, Sweep." The sweep is a feature that requires a minimum of two sketches: one for the sweep's profile and one for the path. (For the path of the sweep instead of a sketch we can also use a model edge or a user defined curve that cross the profile.) File

pS SOLIDWQ

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

\

Swept Boss/Base Extruded Boss/Base

Revolved Boss/Base

.

.

Hole

_

7^

Lofte Swept Boss/Base Sweeps a closed profile along an open Bour

or

closed path to create a solid

feature.

Features

Sketch

Direct Editing

Evaluate

222

DimXpert

SOLIDWORKS Ac

Special Features

In the "Sweep" properties, select the "Profile Sketch" in the Profile selection box, and the "Path Sketch" in the Path selection box. Optionally, a Sweep can have guide curves and other parameters to better control the resulting shape; in this case we are making a simple sweep feature. Notice the preview and click OK when done to finish the sweep. Hide the auxiliary plane using the "Hide/Show Items" toolbar if so desired. ^ Sweep V

© © Profile Profile Sketch

X

Profile and Path ® Sketch Profile

niii^Snriirs^

V

Options

V

Start and End Tangency

V

Path(Path Sketch)

• Thin Feature Curvature Display

• Mesh preview • Zebra stripes [~1 Curvature combs

It may be necessary to turn on the "Merge Tangent Faces" checkbox under "Options" to have a single continuous sweep surface. 8.7. - Notice the sweep also goes inside the cup. To fix this we'll make a cut. Create a sketch in the flat face at the top of the cup.

& [£ Sketch \

223


Select the inside edge at the top and use "Convert Entities" from the Sketch tab to convert the edge to sketch geometry. Click OK to continue. df ©

^ Convert Entities -•

X

-*

Entities to Convert

k

I

• Select chain • Inner loops one by one

\

Select all inner loops

•

8.8. - Select the "Extruded Cut" icon and use the "Up to next" end condition from the drop down selection list. This end condition will make the cut until it finds the next face (the bottom) effectively cutting the part of the handle inside the cup. (pi Cut-Extrude V

X

@

^

From Sketch Plane

Dir

Up

Next nd Condition : Up To Next

• Flip side to cut

X

Draft outward

• Direction 2 • Thin Feature Selected Contours

224

T

Special Features

/ 8.9. - Now we need to round the flat face at the top lip of the cup. To do this we'll add a "Fillet" using the "Full Round Fillet" option. The full round will essentially remove the flat face at the top (the middle face), and replace it with a rounded face tangent to both the start and end faces.

Before

After

We need to select three faces, the middle face will be the one replaced by the fillet. After selecting the Fillet command, select the "Full round fillet" option to reveal the selection boxes. With the first selection box active select the outside face of the cup. Click inside the second selection box and select the top flat face of the cup. Click inside the third selection box and select the inside face of the cup. Note the selected faces are color coded. When done selecting faces click OK to apply the fillet.

225


0 Fillet V

X Manual

Side Face Set 1

FilletXpert

Fillet Type

© © SO Full Round Fillet

Items To Fillet

i) m

Center Face Set

Face<2>

|

Face<3>

0

Sicte Face Set 2

v @Tangent propagation (®) Full preview


8.10. - To finish the cup add a fillet to round the edges where the handle meets the

cup. Select the fillet command with the "Constant Radius" option, select the handle's surface, and change the radius to 0.25". Click OK to finish. ® Fillet

| Manual" FilletXpert] Fillet Type

a& » 8 Constant Size Fillet ^

© 0 Tangent propagation (ft) Full preview Radius: 0.25in

O Partial preview O No preview Fillet Parameters

/\ 0.250in

Circular

226

Special Features

8.11. - Save the finished part as 'Cup' and close.

\

227


Notes:

228

Special Features

Simple Spring In the next exercise we are going to show how to make a simple and a variable pitch spring. In order to make these springs we'll have to learn how to make a simple and a variable pitch helix to be used as a sweep path. The sequence of features to complete the springs are: Simple Spring i— 0i.25G

c. ]t 1:

Draw circle

Draw Spring Profile Sketch

Make Helix

i® Make Sweep

Variable Pitch Spring — d.lDO

Draw circle

Make Variable Pitch Helix

Draw Spring Profile sketch

Make Sweep and cut ends

9.1.- In order to make a helix, first we need to make a sketch with a circle. This circle is going to be the helix's diameter. Select the "Front Plane" and make a sketch using the following dimensions. Exit the sketch when done. 01.250

pS SOUDWORKS |tExit Sketch

L

O Smart Dimension

—4

^

/

w

O

File

w

(\) w

m" ^ ~ Q ~ q' <3 _T

Exit Sketch Exit this sketch and keep any changes.

•tpt i hh i oh i /+\ ]fM\

229

Ed

^' ~te

I


9.2. - In the Features tab select "Curves, Helix and Spiral" from the drop-down icon or the menu "Insert, Curve, Helix/Spiral." If asked to select a plane or a sketch, select the sketch we just drew. Helix/Spiral

IS Message

«•*'

Select 1) a plane on which to sketch a circle to define the helix cross-section. or 2) a sketch that contains a single circle.

^j|| Project Curve Pvj Composite Curve '2J' Curve Through XYZ Points Reference Points g Helix and Spiral

If we don't exit the sketch, we'll only have the "Helix and Spiral" option from the "Curves" command. If we select the "Helix and Spiral" before exiting the sketch, it will be automatically selected. The helix is defined from two parameters between Pitch, Revolutions, or Height, and the third parameter is automatically calculated from the other two. For this example we'll select "Pitch and Revolution" from the "Defined By:" drop down menu, make the pitch 0.325" with 6 Revolutions. The "Start Angle" value defines where the helix will start. By making it 90 degrees it will start at the top, coincident with the "Front Plane." If we had made it 0 degrees, it would be coincident to the "Top Plane" instead. (Feel free to explore the options.) Click OK to finish the helix. g He&c/Spiral «•

X

P: P:

Pitch and Revolution

Parameters

0,325in

Rev:

6

H:

1,95in

g

0.325in

Rev: 0

S

H:

Oin

Dia: 1.25in

Dia: 1.25in

(§) Constant pitch

O Variable pitch Pitch: 0.325in •Reverse direction Revolutions:

6 itart angle: 90.00deg (•) Clockwise

O Counterclockwise O Taper Helix |*^fl

O.OOdeg «/ Taper outward

Note the Helix command has options to make it Counterclockwise, Clockwise, Tapered, Variable pitch and reversed (going right or left).

230

Special Features

9.3. - Once the Helix is done, we need to make the profile sketch for the sweep. Switch to a Right view, and add a new sketch in the "Right Plane" as shown. Make the circle close to the Helix... 0.200

... and add a "Pierce" geometric relation between the center of the circle and the helix. This way the path will start at the beginning of the helix. This relation will make the sketch fully defined. Exit the sketch when done. In Add Relations

©

vg

0.200

Selected Entities

Existing Relations

JL

(J) Under Defined

Add Relations

» Pierce

A pierce relation is done between an element that is oblique or perpendicular to the sketch plane and a point in the sketch. Think of it as a needle piercing through a fabric, the sketch being the fabric and the helix (or curve, model edge or another sketch element) the needle. 231


9.4. - Select the Sweep command and make the sweep using the last sketch as a profile and the Helix as a Path. Note the Preview and click OK to finish. Sweep

<2f © Profiled ketch 2)

V

X


O Circular Profile

° IPSketch2 ||Helix/Spirat1 Guide Curves

V

Options

V

Start and End Tangeney

V

O Thin Feature

V

Curvature Display

V

Path[Helix/Spiral1]

Save as 'Spring' and close the finished spring.

232

Special Features

Variable Pitch Spring 10.1. - For the variable pitch spring we'll start the same way and make the following sketch in the "Front Plane". This will be the spring's outside diameter. 0.SOO

L

10.2. - While still editing the sketch, in the Features tab from the "Curves" drop down icon select "Helix and Spiral"; notice it is the only option available. OP »

In the Helix/Spiral command select "Pitch and Revolution" from the "Defined by:" selection box and "Variable Pitch" in the Parameters box. After selecting it we are presented with a table, fill in the values for the helix using the next table. Click OK when finished to build the helix.

a[ii

if

Reference Geometry

Curves

Sketchl of P

lnstarrt3D

| ]§ Helix arj^Spiral

)§ Helix/Spiral •

-h

X P:

Defined By:

Q.2in

1,

Rev:


H:

Paramefr

;

0.8575in

Dia: 0.8 in

;

P:

0.2in

H:

@ P:

m

Rev: 0.0575in

Dia: 0.8in

H:

;

P:

P

Rev

H

Dia

1

0.01in

0

Oin

0.8in

2

0.01in

0.5

0.005i

0.8in

3

0.2in

1

0.057

0.8in

0.857

0.8in

4

0.2in

5

5

0.01in

5.5

0.91in 0.8in

6

0.01in

6

0.915i 0.8in

0.01in

Rev: 6 H:

t

0.915in g

-H

P:

0.8in

7

•

P:

O.Olin

O Reverse direction

Rev: 5.5

Start angle:

H:

90.00deg

Oin

0.800

[g £g

Dia: 0.8 in

-f-1

Dia: 0.8in

O Constant pitch Region parameters:

0.01in

Rev: 0

C 1

0.91in

Dia: 0.8 in

0.01in

Rev: 0.5

H:

® Clockwise

O Counterclockwise

233

@

0.005in

Dia: 0.8in §

|ij

@ A


10.3. - After the helix is complete add a new sketch in the "Right Plane." Draw the circle first, then add a center rectangle, trim and dimension as needed. Locate the sketch to the either side of the helix. 0.100

0.100

0.100 y = 0.083

0A

V

A Add a centerline from the center to the top line (make sure it is coincident). Add a "Pierce" geometric relation between the top endpoint of the centerline and the helix to fully define the sketch. Exit the sketch and optionally rename it 'Profile'. 0.100

0.100

\

/

/ \

.055

U55

The Pierce relation allows us to fix the profile to the path, and can be added to any part of the sketch. We chose to add it to the top because the original sketch used for the helix is the spring's outside diameter. 10.4. - Just as we did before, select the "Sweep" command, add the path and profile as shown and click OK to finish. Sweep

V

Profile(Sketch2)

X


O Circular Profile

it

•

i

'*V

0 |fsketch2 Path(Helix/Spiral1)

c II Guide Curves Options Start and End Tangency • Thin Feature Curvature Display

k V V V 234

V

Special Features

10.5. - As a finishing touch we'll make a cut to flatten the sides of the spring. Change to a Right view and add a sketch in the "Right Plane." Draw a single line starting at the midpoint of the indicated edge and long enough to cross the part.

10.6. - Select the "Extruded Cut" command; if we use an open sketch to make a cut, selecting either the "Through All" or the "Through All - Both" option, automatically activates the "Direction 2" checkbox with the "Through All" end condition and one side of the model is cut using the open sketch. The small arrow located at the center of the line indicates which side of the model will be cut. Use the "Flip side to cut" option if needed to cut the left side. Click OK to complete the cut, and repeat the same sketch and cut-extrude in the right side. Note the cutting plane is shown in the graphics area. Cut-Extrude

y/

X

From Sketch Plane

Through

side to

to 0 Direction 2 Through AM

to LJ Thin Feature Selected Contours

235


When using an open sketch to cut a model, we can only use a single open profile. If we have multiple open profiles we cannot make the Cut Extrude using these options, we would get multiple thin cuts with a different behavior. 10.7. - Save the model as 'Variable Pitch Spring'.

236

Special Features

Thread Feature Threads can be added to a model either by adding a Sweep Boss with a helix, a Sweep Cut with a helix or using the "Thread" tool. When modeling screws and fasteners in general, it is almost always unnecessary to add a helical thread, as it consumes a large amount of computing resources, and a simple representation using a Revolved Boss/Cut or a Cosmetic Thread is usually enough. It is strongly advised to only add threads when required by the model, as in the bottle exercise in this lesson. 11.1. - To learn how to use the "Thread" command open the part ' Threads' from the accompanying files. This part has two cylinders, the first one (Blue) is the size of a %20 screw's minor diameter, and the second (Green) is the size of a %-20 screw's major diameter. The hole (Pink) is the size needed to make a %-20 tapped hole.

1/4-20 Thread Mayor Diameter

1/4-20 Thread Minor Diameter

1/4-20 Tapped Hole Minor Diameter

The "Threadcommand is located in the menu "Insert, Features, Thread." This command allows us to select a standard thread size and apply it either as an external thread (male) to a cylindrical boss or an internal thread (female) to a hole. Insert

Tools

Window

Help

jt

Boss/Base

•

Cut

•

Features

•

Pattern/Mirror

•

Fastening Feature

•

FeatureWorks Surface

^ •

d - ^ - a - s © gg S"

3 €

i

Fillet/Round... Chamfer...

gg Thread...

^ }

(?/

ri^TsmpleTr^

There are two ways to add an external (male) thread: The first way is to add (extrude) the thread in a cylinder the size of the thread's minor diameter. The second way is to start with a cylinder the same size as the screw's major diameter and cut away the thread. 237


Extrude Thread added to Minor Diameter

Cut Thread removed from Major Diameter

11.2. - Select the Blue cylinder's top edge to add the thread, in this case we'll add the thread using the following settings, click OK when done to finish the thread feature: • Thread Location is to the edge to start the thread. Select the top edge of the blue cylinder's face. • End Condition: The thread's length, number of revolutions or up to surface. Set to "Blind" and define its length to 0.375". • Specification is the standard and size of the thread. Select "Inch Tap" to add a thread, and "0.2500-20" to define the thread size as %-20. • In Thread Method use the "Extrude thread" to add the thread on top of the cylindrical face. • In Thread Options select Right-hand thread. ® Thread &0 V

X

Thread Location Q)| Edge<

idi

yN

A

Thread method:

IT Offset O.OOdeg

k

O Cut thread


® Extrude thread •Mirror Profile • Mirror horizontally

End Condition

si ^ |0.375in

Specification

Mirror vertically

I*!?

O.OOdeg

~i*i

Locate Profile Thread Options

Type:

Inch Tap

(§) Right-hand thread

O Left-hand thread

Size

0,2500-20

Preview Options ® Shaded preview

@ a.1875,n ti lO-OSOin

O Wireframe preview

O Partial preview

238

v

Special Features

Our first finished thread looks like this:

1/4-20 Thread Mavor Diameter


^^5

11.3.- The illustrate the second way to add an external thread, in this step the thread will be added to the green cylinder using the same settings as the previous one, except under "Specification" we'll use the "Inch Die" and "Cut thread" options to cut into the cylinder instead of adding material.

Specification Type: Inch Die

V

Size

0.2500-20

V

dd

0.250in

j-g

m

0.050in

[4-j

Thread method: ® Cut thread

O Extrude thread

Another option that will be changed in the second thread is to turn on the "Offset" option under "Thread Location," the reason to turn this option ON is to have a thread that starts to cut the cylinder outside, making a more true-to-life thread. Change the direction of the offset and make it 0.040" as indicated, this way the thread will be cut starting away from the face. Optionally we can also control the angle where the thread starts by changing the "Start Angle" value.

239


® Thread •

<27 <2>

X

Thread Location [|Edgt<1>

©1 0 Offset O.WOin ^

m

O.OOdeg

End Condition

A

Blind

y

0.375in

m

•Maintain thread length Specification

A

Type Inch Die

y

Size 0.2500-20

y

0 jo.250in

tU;

jo.050in

f*f

Thread method: (^3 Cut thread

Offset option OFF

Offset option ON

O Extrude thread

11.4. - The last thread we'll be making is the internal (tapped) thread. In this case

the hole in the part has a 0.201" diameter (#7 drill bit), this is the drill size we'd use in real life to make a %-20 tapped hole. Select the "Thread" command, and this time select the pink hole's edge. The options we'll use are: • • • • •

Thread Location, select the edge and turn on the "Offset" option to have the same result as in the previous step to start the thread outside the hole. In Specification select "Inch tap", size "0.2500-20" Thread Method use the "Cut thread" option to cut into the part. For End Condition select "Up To Selection," and select the face at the other end of the block to make the thread go through the entire block. Under Thread Method select "Cut thread"

240

Special Features

fjg| Thread

V

®
X

Thread Location ||Edge<1>

0 Offset

p*~j [o.Q40in

End Condition

©

1/4-20 Thread Mayor Diameter

1/4-20 Thread Minor Did

Face
[J Offset Type: Inch Tap

Size 0.2500-20

0.201 in

:

:. -

i

1/4-20 Tapped Ho Minor Diar»et€

ad method: (f)Cut thread

O Extrude thread

Looking at the part from a Top view using the Hidden Lines Visible option we can see that the external threads fit inside the tapped hole.

ft"'

f-£-

241


Notes:

242

Special Features

Sweep: Bottle For the next exercise we'll build the following bottle using a sweep feature with guide curves.

*lmage made using RealView graphics

In this model we'll use two sweep features, one for the body and one for the thread. For the body we'll make a sweep with two guide curves, so we need to make four sketches: Path, Guide Curve 1, Guide Curve 2 and Profile, in that order. The reason to make the Profile last is that it has to pierce the Path and both Guide Curves for the sweep feature to work as expected.

243


12.1. - Open a new part, set dimensions to inches, and three decimal places. Make the Path sketch in the "Front Plane" and Exit the sketch. Rename 'Path'.

7.000

12.2. - Add a second sketch in the "Front Plane." Make arcs and lines tangent to

each other; add centerlines as reference for tangency. All arcs are equal. Exit sketch and rename 'Guide V. .500

R 1.500

.500

.750

244

Special Features

12.3. - Add a third sketch in the "Right Plane." Add geometric relations to previous sketches to maintain design intent. Make the topmost endpoint Horizontal to the topmost endpoint of the 'Path' sketch. Arcs are equal size and tangent. Make the indicated endpoints horizontal. Only geometric relations and two dimensions are needed to fully define the sketch. Exit the sketch and rename it 'Guide 2.'

-.500

.500

-1.000 Right view

View between front and right

12.4. - Add a new sketch in the "Top Plane." Make an ellipse in the origin adding Pierce relations between the ellipse's major and minor axes to 'Guide T and 'Guide 2'. View is in Isometric for clarity. Exit the sketch and rename it 'Profile'.

Make Pierce i

245


12.5. - Select the "Sweep Boss/Base" icon, add the 'Path' sketch to the "Path" selection box and the 'Profile' sketch to the "Profile" selection box. Expand the "Guide Curves" selection box and add both guides to it. Click OK to finish. Sweep

37 ©

Profile and Path <•) Sketch Profile

O Circular Profile 0

]|Profile

C. I p*th Guide Curve(Guide 1)

Guild e Curves Guide 2

Path(Path)

5 0 Merge smooth faces

i Options

V


V

• Thin Feature Curvature Display

V

Profile Profile)

V

12.6. - Add a sketch on the top face, use "Convert Entities" to project the edge of the top circular face... 0 Convert Entities V

<8
X

4

Entities to Convert Face<1>

I

I Select chain

l~~l Inner loops one by one Select all Inner loops

246

•

Special Features

and extrude it 1". ©

QQ Boss-Extrude V

X

^

From

Direction 1 Blind Blin

I I.OOOin 0 Merge result

~m

ft Draft outward C Direction 2 • Thin Feature Selected Contours

12.7. - Using the fillet command, add an asymmetric fillet at the bottom edge. An asymmetric fillet allows us to define a different distance for each side of the fillet. Activate the option and set the first distance to 0.375" going up, and 0.25" at the bottom of the bottle.
© Fillet

>/ X Manual

FilletXpert

Fillet Type

© © ©0 Items To Fillet

0 0 Tangent propagation ©Radius 1: 0.375in

(•) Full preview


©Radius 2: 0.25in

I IIIlM 0H1III 11 I *

Asymmetric

T} 0.375in T) 0.250in

Profile Elliptic

247


12.8. - Add a 0.050" shell to the part removing the top face. (§ISheH2

•

®

X

Parameters O.OSOin

9|

| Boss-Extrude!

I I Shell outward • Show preview Multi-thickness Settings 0.125in

9l

12.9. - Add a parallel auxiliary plane 0.125" below the topmost face. 0 Plane

• x -* Message

First Reference

|face<1>

t

Parallel

_L Perpendicular S\'

Coincident

&

0.125in

\

0 Flip offset

\m> = Second Reference

©i Third Reference

©i

248

Special Features

12.10. - Add a sketch in the new plane. Use "Convert Entities" to project the top outside edge and make a Helix defined by Pitch and Revolution using 0.2" for pitch and 2.5 revolutions. Make sure the Start Angle is set at 0 degrees. ©

)§ Helix/Spiral •

X

P:

0.2in

Rev: 0

Defined By:

H:


Oin

Dia: Tin

Parameters <§) Constant pitch *

O Variable pitch Pitch:

0.200in [^1 Reverse direction Revolutions:

Start angle: | O.OOdeg (J) Clockwise

I J S

P:

O.iin

Reu: 2.5 H:

^^Ûfii«a«TOckwise

g @

O.Sin

Dia: 1in |

I I Taper Helix

A

O.OOdeg y Taper outward

12.11. - Rotate to a Right View and add the following sketch in the "Right Plane", this will be the thread's Profile. For the vertical line we'll use a "Midpoint Line", the point at the middle of the line will be used to add a horizontal relation with the arc's center point, and also a Pierce relation to the helix. Draw, dimension and add the geometric relations indicated, then Exit the sketch and make a sweep feature using the helix and this thread profile. After creating the sweep, if needed, hide the helix curve.

pS SOUDWORKS

File

Edit

View

0.09, 90°

o ZHOi/y /


\ Features

Sketch

/i

Line

Dir

A = ue .58° R

/

Midpoint Line DimXperl

249


.075

<5> o & Make Horizontal

25.0(7

R.040 Horizontal Relation

Add Dimensions

075

Affl

1

Make Pierce |[

25.00° R.040

\

Add Pierce Relation

qf

25.00

R.040

Finished Sketch

i

*

Hide

Hide the Helix (if needed

Finished Sweep

250

Special Features

12.12. - Add a sketch to the flat face at the beginning of the thread using "Convert Entities". Make a 120 degrees "Revolved Boss" using the vertical edge as axis of revolution. The reason to make it 120 degrees is to completely merge it with the body of the bottle. Add another sketch at the end of the thread and repeat the same process.

\

12.13. - Add a 0.02" fillet to the thread as a finishing touch. You may need to select multiple edges. Save the part as 'Bottle' and close it.

251


Engine Project Parts: Make the following components to build the engine. Save the parts using the name provided. High resolution images are included on the exercise files. Intake DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Chrome Stainless Steel

.035

0

1.000 0.750 R.125

.115 1.500

R-250

© l-l-^

.250

1.500 •

as

R 1.000

4X

0

©

.266 THRU ALL-

1). -©j

1.250 -

1.750 •

252

1.000

1.500

Special Features

R 1.000 R.250

.050 —

Exhaust Cover DIMENS I O N S : I N C H E S MATERIAL: AISI 1020

01.000

>1.750

01225

J .500-4.875-

SECTION A-A

-

r

-4—h~4-

253

1


THREAD PROFILE PITCH: 0.075" TURNS: 3

.035

0.450

ZZ R.010 .075 V.

.038 DETAIL B SCALE 4 : 1

.025

3

.028

DETAIL C SCALE 12 : 1

R.025

.250 4.000

R.025

90° .250

5.000

„ 45°

.150 .025

FULL RADIUS

SECTION A-A

254

Oil Dip Stick DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL:

Special Features

Loft: Bottle

255


Notes:

256

Special Features

The "Loft" feature requires at least two different sketches and/or faces and optionally guide curves to more accurately define the final shape. The Loft helps us design complex shapes with more control over the cross section. In this exercise we will make a bottle using a loft with four different sketches. 13.1. - Make a new part and create three auxiliary planes using the "Plane" command. Select the "Top Plane" as reference, change the number of planes to 3 and space them 2.5" as shown. Click OK when done.

is

As
?

pj Plane

Pol History BB Sensors • a Annotations Material
• X -*

(jj Front Plane

Message Fully defined

| [jJ Top Plant |

k

||j Right PlaneU^ First Reference

Origin

T°P Pfane

Parallel I

Perpendicular

/\ Coincident

:C0 Hip

offset

A Second Reference

i Third Reference

©i 13.2. - For clarity, select the "Top Plane" in the FeatureManager and show it using the "Hide/Show" command from the pop-up toolbar. Turn on Plane visibility if needed in the "Flide/Show Items" command. (§3 Part3 (Default< _Display Stat •

[§) History

•

[a] Annotations

Sensors o—

Material <| Front Plan \ Top Plane Right Plane L Origin |j»I Planel $ Plane2 $ Plane3

257

Show


13.3. - Switch to a Top view, select the "Top Plane" and draw the following sketch using the "Center Rectangle" and "Sketch Fillet" tools. Exit the sketch when finished. Plane visibility was turned off for clarity. -3.500-

2.000

R.503

~N.-

Turn off Plane visibility for clarity using the "Hide/Show Items" menu.

13 tfl VievV Planes (P) d Control the visibility of planes.

13.4. - Still in the Top view, select "Planel" in the FeatureManager and create the second sketch. Use the "Center Rectangle" tool; be sure to start in the origin and make the rectangle's corner coincident to the previous sketch's diagonal line. Add a 2.5" width dimension and the 0.5" "Sketch Fillet" to fully define the sketch. Exit the second sketch when finished.

|~a) Annotations o—

Material

fSl Front Plane

Hi Top P Rig

+1 c

[|j Plan [j3 Plane2

0

Plane3

f~ Sketchl

v.

258

Sketch

Special Features

/ x =+l .804, y

1.031

Sx

. -2.500 v*

*

st*-

R.50

13.5. - For the third profile, select "Plane2" from the FeatureManager and create a new sketch in it. This sketch will be exactly the same as the first one. To help us save time and maintain design intent, we'll use the "Convert Entities" tool. In the "Convert Entities" selection box, select "Sketch1" from the fly-out FeatureManager and click OK to project "Sketchf' in the new sketch. Exit the sketch when done.

IaI Annotations

View

Insert

Tools

Window

Help

Material
&

Right t_ O'g/

n Trim Entities

Convert Entities

•

-

[p Planll t [p PlaneN. [p Plane3

Sketch j

nXpert

E*fl Mirror Entities

(c Offset y\ l Entities

OOO OOO Linear Sketch Patten OOO

n H

SOLIDV'T^" Convert Entities Converts selected model edges or

Sketchl H

©

D

sketch entities into sketch segments.

Sketch2

259


^ Convert Entities >/

X

-*

Entities to Convert

®0

LSZJ

FaI Annotations °— o-O Material
0

Top Plane

*

[jj Right Plane Origin

•Select chain •Inner loops one by one Select all inner loops

0 Planel

0 1

Plane2 Sketch! ket (-) Sketch3

13.6. - For the last profile select "Plane3" from the FeatureManager and create a new sketch. Draw a circle and add a geometric relation to make it "Tangent" to the horizontal line in "Sketch2" as indicated. This relation will fully define the sketch. Exit the sketch to finish. |j=| Properties V

-H

Selected Entities

Arc1 Line3@Sketch2

Existing Relations

.k

(J) Under Defined

<^s Tangent

260

Special Features

The finished sketches will look like this with the planes visible:

7 Part3 (Default-: < Default* .Display Stat •

jjp) History

*

[a] Annotations

f?j) Sensors

Material
Sketch2

k

Sketch3

c* X

Sketch4

*X

x x

x

13.7. - Now we are ready, select the "Loft" icon from the Features tab. The loft feature requires two or more sketches and/or faces, and we'll use the four sketches we just made to build the bottle.

pS SOUDWORKS ' Extruded Boss/Base

Revolwd Boss/Bake

e

File

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

, " -' r

4 Lofted Boss/Base | Bour Lofted Boss/Base

Features

Sketch

Adds material between two or more Direct Editin; profiles to create a solid feature.

We will select the profiles in order starting with the first one we made at the bottom and finishing with the last one at the top (or from top to bottom, but in order). It is important to select the sketches thinking that where we select the profile will affect the result. Click in the graphics area near the indicated 'dots', this line indicates the segment of one profile that will be connected to the next profile. If we

261


select points randomly in the profiles, the loft could twist and produce undesirable results. Optionally guide curves can be added to improve control of the resulting shape. From the "Start/End Conditions" select "Normal to Profile" for both the "Start" and "End" constraint. Notice the difference in the preview after selecting the start and end constraints. Click OK when done. ©

^ loft

•y x Profiles

o

Sketchl Profile(Sketch4)

Sketch2 Sketch3 Sketch4

Start/End Constraints Start constraint:

ltj 0

Normal To Profile

V

O.OOdeg

A

1

£

*3 Apply to all End constraint:

Normal To Profile

V

O.OOdeg

A

1

A

7*,

0 Apply to all Guide Curves

V

Centeriine Parameters

V

Sketch Tools

Optionally, turn on the curvature display for the preview, this will allow you to better visualize the final shape using a mesh, zebra stripes and/or curvature combs. The zebra stripes helps us to better visualize the continuity of the curvature in surfaces, particularly useful in consumer product design. 0rvature Display 0 Mesh preview Mesh density:

4 0 Zebra stripes • Curvature combs

262

Special Features

13.8. - Add a 0.25" radius fillet in the bottom edge of the part to round it off.

Radius: 0.25in

13.9. - Add a 0.75" extrusion at the top of the bottle and finish using the "Shelf' command removing the top face making the wall thickness 0.125." Boss-Extrude •

Blind

*

®

X ^

v

1 [0.750in 0 Merge result

Draft outward D Direction 2

Shelll

7

ters

\ci

125in

11

Boss-Extrude!

I I Shell outward O Show preview Multi-thickness Settings 0.125in

263


f

Image using Real View

264

Special Features

13.10. - To view the inside of the part, select the "Section View" icon from the View toolbar or the menu "View, Display, Section View". We can define which plane to cut the model with, the depth of the cut and optionally add a second or third section. If we click OK in the Section View, the model will be displayed as cut, but this is only for display purposes; the part is not actually cut. To turn off the Section View, select its icon or menu command again. This section view can be used along with the "Measure" tool to inspect the part.

- |D -

^

&

Section View Displays a cutaway of a part or assembly using one or more cross section planes.

The depth of the section can be changed by changing the distance in the PropertyManager or by dragging the arrow in the center of the plane. The section view plane's rotation can also be changed by dragging the rotation handles or entering a value in the rotation value boxes. ©* ©

01 Section View V

X

Drawing section view £:ii

A

A

Section Method

A

® Planar Ozonal Section Option

V

Section 1

A

is bt

O.OOOin

IA I

v

O.OOdeg

I

A

O.OOdeg

] *

I

A

V

S-

IV

Edit Color

EH

Section 2

v

EH

Selected bodies

v

Preview

L

|

.J

Save the part as 'Bottle Loft and close.

265

V


Notes:

266

Special Features

Wrap Feature

is

The wrap feature helps us create cylindrical cams or slots on cylindrical surfaces using a sketch on a plane tangent to the surface we want to make the wrap on. 14.1. - Make a new part, set units to inches with three decimal places; add this sketch on the "Front Plane" and extrude it 3". Be sure to add a Point at the top of the circle, this point will be used later to add an auxiliary plane.

01.500

L

267


14.2. - The next step is to make the sketch that will be used for the wrap feature. For the sketch plane we'll make a new plane parallel to the "Top Plane" tangent to the cylindrical surface. Make the sketch of the first feature visible, and add a new plane parallel to the "Top Plane" and coincident to the point in the first sketch. Hide the first sketch when done. [p Plane

7

Fully defined

ftl

Front Plane

\ Top Plane Right Plane L Origin

5 fy? 1° *1

Boss-Extruc^ \ Sketchl

Show

Annotations Material
• X -» Message

Material

Front Plane

/\ _

LjJ Top Plane | Right Plane

First Reference llop Plane

Origin Boss'Extrudel

l^l Parallel I

Perpendicular

j/\ Coincident

90.00deg 0.125.O [ Mid Plane Second Reference Hpoint4©Sketch1 |/\| Coincident

|X projK' @jr° 14.3. - Add a new sketch in the new plane and draw the following profile. Make sure it's symmetrical about the centerline. All arcs are equal radii. The top dimension's value is entered as 1.5 * pi, since we want the sketch to wrap completely around the cylinder. After entering the equation the resulting value is calculated. To make the sketch symmetrical as we draw it, draw the centerline first, pre select it, and turn on the "Dynamic Mirror" command in the menu "Tools, Sketch Tools, Dynamic Mirror." To know that we have a Dynamic Mirror active SOLIDWORKS adds an equal (=) sign at both ends of the mirror centerline. When the mirror is active, everything we draw on either side of the mirror line will be automatically duplicated in the other side adding a Symmetric geometric relation at the same time. [| * j| Construction Geometry Find/Modify

•

Design Checker

•

O Make Path

^ Format Painter... cfl Dynamic Mirror V ^wStretch • Move... • *<> Rotate... • e-,i»

Sketch Entities Sketch Tools Sketch Settings

nil

Blocks

268

Jk

Special Features

i For the Dynamic Mirror command we can pre-select a centerline, line or a model's linear edge Modify

of

x

[Si / % Distance

I .750

1.790

R.500

1 2.000

269


14.4. - So far the sketch is the centerline of the slot we are going to wrap around the cylinder. Select the "Offset" command from the Sketch tab and turn on the following options: • • • •

"Select chain" to automatically select the entire centerline when we pick only one segment "Bi-directional" to make the offset in both directions "Make base construction" to change the selected line (or chain) to construction geometry And after selecting a segment of the sketch the "Cap ends" option is enabled, letting us choose to cap the offset with either Arcs or Lines.

Making the offset 0.25" will give us a 0.5" wide slot. Click OK to complete the offset. Note how the previously drawn sketch lines are now changed to construction geometry and now we have a closed (capped) profile. Exit the sketch when done.

[C. Offset Entities •S

4.7 2

X

Parametejf^*

•.

A

ttf^0.2S0in g f

0 Add dimensions

A

.750

\

i Reverse 0 Select chain

\

•s

;\

1

0 Bi-directional 0 Cap ends OArcs

i

(•) Lines i \

OS

Construction geometry: M 0 Base geometry

•s •s

M

1.750

•Offset geometry f

— R.500

4

2.000

14.5. - Select the "Wrap" feature from the Features tab or the menu "Insert, Features, Wrap."

T

* Wrap

$ Reference

Draft

is Curves

Wrap Wraps closed sketch contour(s) onto a

Shell

270

face-

Special Features

If the sketch is not pre-selected, select the sketch from the graphics area or the fly-out FeatureManager. Message

©

message Select: 1) a plane (or planar face) on which to sketch closed contour(s)

!> ,:>D

\

or 2) an existing sketch to use for the feature.

/

\

In the "Warp" command properties select the "Deboss" option to make a cut in the part. (The "Emboss" option will add material and "Scribe" will split the face.) Select the cylinder's face in the "Face for Wrap Feature" selection box, and make the depth 0.1". Click OK to finish. *As of the writing of this book if the option "Reverse Direction" is not activated, the Wrap feature fails in this case. §3 Wrapl V

X

Wrap Parameters

O Emboss @ Deboss

O Scribe

9

J

Face< 1>

/ ^

I 0.100in

/

@ Reverse direction Pull Direction

*

1

Source Sketch

[~

J**

r

Sketch2

271

V


14.6. - Add a 0.02" fillet to the wrap feature to finish the part and save it as 'Cylindrical Cam'.

9©

@ Fillet V

X

HJ»| OCII»UI>

El Annotations Material
| Manual "| Filletxpertj

$ Front Plane [p Top Plane

Fillet Type

[jj Right Plane Origin till Boss-Extrude1 ill Planel

Items To Fillet ©

Wrap!

Wrapl

x

@Tangent propagation ® Full preview

O Partial preview O No preview Fillet Parameters

Symmetric 0.020in • Multiple radius fillet Profile:

*Finished part image made using Real View

272

Special Features

Exercises: Build the following parts using the knowledge acquired in this lesson. Try to use the most efficient method to complete the model. Eccentric Coupler Notes: • • • •

X T

Both circles are centered horizontally (Right view). Add a guide sketch at the bottom. Set the Start and End Conditions for the loft to "Normal to Profile" Make as Thin Feature or Shell it after making the loft feature.

.125

6.000

04.000 02.000

HINTS: Draw the 1" circle in the "Right Plane". Make an Auxiliary Plane 6" parallel to the "Right Plane". Draw a 2" circle in the Auxiliary Plane. Draw a sketch in the "Front Plane" to make the guide curve. Select the guide sketch in the "Guide Curves" selection box.

273

Guide sketch


Bent Coupler Build the following part using a Loft feature and a shell. The part is 0.15" thick. Notes: • • •

Add a guide sketch along the right side of the part. Start and End Conditions "Normal to Profile". Make as Thin Feature or Shell after loft. 03.000

35" R3.000

12.000

- 4.000 —

R.500 •

T

3.000

J

HINTS: • Make Rectangular sketch first. • Make Guide sketch. • Make Auxiliary Plane perpendicular to Guide sketch at the end point. • Make circular sketch in Auxiliary Plane. • Make Loft using Guide sketch as a guide curve. • Shell the part.

274

Guide sketch

\

Special Features

Challenge Exercises: Build the 'Worm Gear' and 'Offset Shaft' complete gears using the knowledge learned so far with the information given. High resolution images at www.mechanicad.com and www.sdcpublications.com.

Worm Gear Shaft Complete DISCLOSURE: The gears modeled in this tutorial are not intended for manufacturing, nor is this tutorial meant to be a gear design guide. Its sole purpose is to show the reader how to apply the learned knowledge using a simplified version of the gears.

w

15.1. - Offset Shaft: Open the previously made 'Offset Shaft and add the following sketch in the "Front Plane"] Exit the sketch and rename it "Gear Width". This will be the length of the full size helix.

-2.625-

1.000-

15.2. - Add two reference planes parallel to the "Right Plane," one at each end of the "Gear Width" sketch.

£lJ

275


15.3. - Add the gear's profile sketch in the"Front Plane", at the left side of the "Gear Width" sketch. Exit the sketch and rename it"Thread Profile." .031 —

R.020 .075

+

+

.75

15.4. - In the plane located at the left of the "Gear Width" sketch add a new sketch; use the "Convert Entities" drop down icon to select "Intersection Curve", this command will create sketch entities at the intersection of the selected surface(s) and the current sketch plane. This tool is particularly useful when we have irregular surfaces intersecting the sketch plane. In this case it works the same as "Convert Entities", but for oblique or irregular surfaces it's the best option to obtain the intersection of the surface and the sketch plane.

© Convert Entities

Offset Entities

•X

\o

ffiy Boss-Extrude1

276

OOO OOO Linear Sketc OOO

Intersection Curve

it-}- Intersection Curves

Select Entities

Mirror Entiti

(q

Special Features

15.5. - Use the Height and Pitch option to make the Helix 1" High with a 0.25" Pitch. )§ Helix/Spiral

•

©

X

Defined By; Height and Pitch

A

H:

Oin

P:

0.25in

Rev: 0

V

Dia: 0.6in

Parameters

A

® Constant pitch

O Variable pitch Height: 1.000in

A V

Start angle: 90.00deg ® Clockwise

O Counterclockwise • Taper Helix O.OOdeg «/ Taper outward

15.6. - Make the first sweep using the profile and the first helix.

V

@

P:

0.25in

;

Dia: 0.6iri A

•Reverse direction

{J" Sweep

1in

Rev: 4

Pitch:

0.250in

H:

©t © Profileffliread Profile)

X

Profile and Path

(•) Sketch Profile

O Circular Profile

°ii

Thread Profile

c IHelix/Spirall Guide Curves

V

Options

V


V

D Thin Feature

V

Curvature Display

V

'ill

277

wilmii ml


15.7. - In the plane at the right of the "Gear Width" sketch add a sketch for a second Helix using "Convert Entities" using the round edge of the shaft, and make the helix using the "Taper Helix" option with a 7deg taper to continue the previous helix. )§ Hetix/SpiraJ >/

®

X

A

Defined By: Height and Pitch

H:

Oin

P:

0.25in

Rev: 0

V

Dia: 0.6in

Parameters

A A

(•) Constant pitch

O Variable pitch Height: 0.625in

A V

UL

Pitch: 0.250in

A

I

I I Reverse direction Start angle: 90.00deg

® Clockwise

O Counterclockwise 0 Taper Helix

H:

0.625in

P:

0.25in

t g

Rev: 2.5

[*^j | 7.00deg

Dia: 0.447in

• Taper outward

15.8. - Add a sketch at the flat end of the thread using "Convert Entities" to use as the profile for the tapered helix (Rear view), and make the sweep. '

vk '

! hi

Ii !

278

Special Features

Profile(Sketch9j

\ \

m

m

Path(Helix/Spiral2)

15.9. - Repeat a helix and sweep for the other side

k Q.tir

J

0.625in 0.25ln

g]

0.447m

Profile(Sketchll)

M i i> i • i H

SV X

u

Path(Helix/5piral3)

279

m

230

Special Features

Worm Gear Complete 16.1. - Worm Gear: Open the 'Worm Gear1 part and change "Filletf to a 0.031" radius. © Filletl V

X

Items To Fillet

©

Face<2>

0 Tangent propagation ® Full preview

O Partial preview

1

O No preview Fillet Parameters Symmetric (\ 0.031in D Multiple radius fillet Profile: Circular

Radius 0.031in

Setback Parameters Fillet Options

16.2. - Modify the following dimensions from the "Cut-Revolved2" feature and rebuild the model to continue. 4IX

.100

01.500

01.coo

281


16.3. - Add a new plane 0.95" parallel above the "Top Plane." tati -——

^1 Plane

• m Annotations AIS11020

• X -H

[jj Front Plane

Message

;

Fully defined

i

Top Planej Right Plane

First Reference

L Origin

© !]T°p Plane

Parallel I

•

(£j[) Base

*

($£) Groove

•

(JSP Cut-Revolve2

Perpendicular

(^) Chamferl

/\ Coincident [^f

@ Filletl •

45.00deg 0.950in

t

|J^) Keyway

ll j

D Flip offset

Mid Plane Second Reference © Third Reference

© [ 16.4. - Add the following sketch in the plane previously made; use the Midpoint Line tool and Exit the sketch. Rename it "Path."

0' f\Jw

/

Une

Centerline Midpoint Line Direct Editing

• 7.00°

P aneJ

.125-

282

Eval

Din

Special Features

16.5. - Add a new auxiliary plane perpendicular to the "Path" sketch. Rename it "Profile Plane." [jtl Plane

• X -N Message Fully defined First Reference |ljne1@Path [ | | Perpendicular

5>

CI Set origin on curve

A

a

Coincident

^ Project Second Reference

A

BPoint2@Path |/^| Coincident |4» Project

Third Reference

idi

16.6. - Add this sketch in the "Right Plane" and make a revolved cut. Notice the doubled diameter dimension about the centerline. (Auxiliary planes have been turned off for clarity.)

7

7

1.700

r 700

HI 283


16.7. - In the "Profile Plane" add the following sketch. This will be the profile to make the gear cut. Press Ctrl+8 to view the plane normal to the screen. Locate the profile sketch adding a pierce relation to the "Path" sketch at the indicated point. Exit the sketch and rename "Gear Profile."

.185

.075 .055

_L Add Relations

©

*

Selected Entities

185

Line1@Path Pointl

Existing Relations Midpointl

(7)

Under Defined

Add Relations Piere

.185 *

.118

.075

284

Special Features

16.8. - Make a "Cut Sweep" using the "Path" and "Gear Profile" sketches. (In this particular case a "Cut Extrude" would give us the same result.)

Swept Cut [\l

0 NU-

& C3

Fillet

Linear

J

Ril —-

Swept Cut

Cuts a solid model by sweeping a B closed profile along an open or closed path.

IjjS Cut-Sweep •

©* © Path Path)

X

Profile and Path

ileif

<§) Sketch Profile

Profile(Gear Profile)

O Circular Profile O Solid Profile

°lGear Profile cI Guide Curves

V

Options

V


V

f~l Thin Feature

16.9. - Add a 0.015" fillet at the bottom of the sweep cut.

^Radius: 0.015in

285


16.10. - Make a circular pattern with 22 copies of the Cut-Sweep and the fillet.

y

16.11. - After the pattern is complete add a 0.015" fillet to the "Groove" and "CutRevolve3" features to finish the gear. Save as 'Worm Gear Complete' and close. ivi

0 Fillet V

[a1 Annotations

X

AJSI1020 | Manual | FilletXpert |

Fillet Type

WW Items To Fillet ©

Groove

[P Front Plane [p

Top Plane

[p

Right Plane

y

/

Origin ^|[) Base mGroove |

y

Cut-Revo Ive2 Chamferl ® Filletl

@ Tangent propagation (•) Full preview


@ Keyway ^1 Planel

v

Profile Plane

HI

Cut-Revo Ive3 Cut-Sweep1


® Fillet2

/

CirPatternl

^ 0.015in n Multiple radius fillet

A

Profile:

w

Circular

286

r

Special Features

Engine Project Parts: Make the following components to build the engine. Save the parts using the name provided. High resolution images are included on the exercise files. Hint: Make a revolved boss with the option "Thin Feature." Note the dimensions given are external.

o o o

o

lo CN

o lo

o <

n-

o o

o u co

CN

ol < OH LU < CL <

OH LO o -O po

•

a lo

<

u co

Jo 0

o

o o o

nc — lo n

0 o 0

O

o o CO o

o

o ln o

CN

OH

OH

LU

lo

< LU

< lfju

co

OH

Q_

«/>

±

®> •—

o< =

C £
u5

.= d)

£

s< * sqsu

287


The 3 compression rings for the piston head. -.030 .040 —

y

.030

.02 X 45°

.01 X 45"

.040 —

• R.010

+ .002

.070 -.000

SECTION A-A SCALE 8 : 1

SECTION B-B SCALE 8 : 1

.002 — .070 .000

02.775+003

02.775±.oo3

02.45O+.OO3

02.45o±.oo3

.085

.085

+

T

+

Middle Compression Ring DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: AISI 1045 Steel, cold drawn

Top Compression Ring DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: AISI 1045 Steel, cold drawn

11:j

j

02.775+.003

-.100

.010

1

r.010 -

.055

(20x)

1

22w ~1 Z .060-

SECTION C-C SCALE 12:1

Oil Control Ring DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: AISI 1045 Steel, cold drawn

288

0.100

detail d scale 4 : 1

Special Features

Final Parts for the Engine Project: The following components are the last required to complete the engine. Save the parts using the name provided. Suggested sequence of features for the Crank case top

Main body

Corner Fillets

Flange

Bearing mount boss

i Mirror bearing mount

Shell part

Top cut

add 0.375" offset plane inside

Add inside bosses. Use Intersecting curve

Add front reinforcement

Add rear reinforcement

Add bearing mount

Add plane for oil dipstick

Add reference sketch for dipstick

Add plane at top of reference sketch

Add dipstick extrusion

Add fillets

Add holes and threads

mj.

Make hole for dipstick

Add sweep cut for threaded cap

289

3.900 —

.750 R.500

02.750 rx

01.500

R.875

.375

5.500 .250-

2.500

n .375^"£ ll.,

E

r

-4.000-

15

L

R.125


3.000

6X 0 .266 THRU ALL

n> CD o

o d>

.250

6c

.500

.750

1.000

o fi> 3

02.000

.125

.250

CD CD tf>

.250

6.500 .250

3lr ». 'i •

1

.dV

J. -i ffir .750

R.250 575

'

2.150

1.250

jl .325

.200

4X 0 .313 THRU ALL 3/8-16 UNC THRU ALL

.685

.125

Crank Case Top DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Cast Alloy Steel

.750

PAGE 1 OF 2

CD

"io •d 03

3

SECTION C-C

w CD h o ~o d 3 3

DETAIL B SCALE 1 :2

o

1.250

o o

— R.050

o

1.500

o

G k>

10°

CD

030 010

.040

DETAIL D SCALE 1 : 1

THREAD PITCH 0.075" 3.5 TURNS FILLET THREAD R.010

THREAD PROFILE .395

DETAIL E SCALE 4 :

0 275

Crank Case Top DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Cast Alloy Steel

PAGE 2 OF 2


Oil Pan

w Base extrusion

Fillet corners

Base flange

Bearing mount boss

feii Shell the part

Reinforcement

* Add bearing mount

Add threads and screws

292

Screw mount reinforcements

Fillets

16X 0 .213 THRU 1/4-28 UNF THRU

5.500

>0

-8.000-

.125 .250

.200 70

TO R.050

n> CD CO

.250

L

R.125

2.000

4.000

R.500

.250—^

6.500

.750 .750

2.150

"1

60

.375

/

02.000

1.250 01.500

.750

0.450

SECTION B-B

3.000

16X 0 .213 THRU 1/4-28 UNF THRU

R.050

.325

.200 —

2.500

Oil Pan DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Cast Alloy Steel


3X 0 .107 7F .432 6-32 UNC V .276


Engine Block

Main body

First fin

Cuts for Intake/Exhaust

Fin's Pattern

n

la

X

i Base extrusion

ir-

Intake mount

Exhaust mount

j

Cylinder Bore

s

s.

a

-<

Mounting holes

Screw holes

Exhaust mount hole

Head mounting holes

Intake vent hole

Chamfer bottom holes

294

Intake mount hole

Round all edges

Engine Block DIMENSIONS: INCHES MATERIAL: Cast Alloy Steel

05.500 A

4X 0 .272 ^ .834 5/16-24 UNF TF .625 01.000 THRU 1.26047.125

.3751-750

OL

02.75

.125

.125

II T

l 1.250 1.750

k> CD ul

qqq

I

0.750 THRU I 01.O1OTF.125

1.750 \

1.250

1.500 1.000

5.000

3.225

3.100

4X 0 .213 0 .607 1/4-28 UNF TF .500

R.250

TB

1.250

.750

z

.125 —=.=t

1.750

.125x45° SECTION A-A

R.100

000

R.500

03.550

R.050

<0

0.375

4.000

3.000

: /

4X 0 .213 TF .607 1/4-28 UNF TF .500

5.500

2.150

2.150

I

0

0^

4X 0 .397 THRU

00.750

4.500

R.500 SECTION B-B


Extra Credit: Visit our web site to download details for the Gas Grill project as well as the finished parts for this book, higher resolution images of the exercises and some extra topics not covered in the book. Build these components and after the Assembly lesson make the Gas Grill assembly.

http://www.mechanicad.com/download.html

:(

v

296

Detail Drawing

Detail Drawing Now that we have completed modeling the components, it's time to make the 2D detail drawings for manufacturing. In SOLIDWORKS, the first step is to make the 3D models, and from those models we can generate their 2D drawings. By deriving the drawing from the solid model, the 2D drawing is linked and associated to the 3D model. This means that if the part is changed, the drawing will be updated and vice versa. Detail drawing files in SOLIDWORKS have the extension *.slddrw and each drawing can contain multiple sheets; each corresponding to a different printed page of the same or different 3D models (parts and/or assemblies). SOLIDWORKS offers an easy to use environment where we can quickly create 2D drawings of parts and assemblies. In this section we'll cover Part drawings only. Assembly drawings will be covered after the assembly section. We will add all the different model views, annotations, dimensions, section and detail views, necessary for a manufacturing department to fabricate the component without missing any details. In this section we will also introduce a new concept called Configurations, which allow us to have different versions of the same part using the same 3D model, for example, a version of the part as it comes out of a foundry and a version for the machine shop with all the details to machine the finished part. 2D detail drawings can be made using any of the many dimensioning standards available in the industry. In this book we will use the ANSI standard. After, or while creating a detail drawing, the dimensioning standard can be easily changed to a different one by going to the menu "Tools, Options" and selecting the "Document Properties" tab. In the Drafting Standard section a different standard can then be selected. It is important to note that after changing to a different standard, SOLIDWORKS updates the dimension styles, arrow head type, etc. accordingly. For more information about changing units and dimensioning standards see the Appendix. The detail drawing environment in SOLIDWORKS is a true What-You-SeeIs-What-You-Get interface. When we make a new drawing, we are asked to define the size of drawing sheet we want to use, unless we use a template with a predefined sheet size, which corresponds to the printed sheet size. Do not be too concerned about selecting the correct sheet size at first, as it can also be changed to either a larger or smaller size at any time, should we find our drawing would fit better otherwise; also, any drawing can be scaled up or down to fit the available printer size.

297


Notes:

298

Detail Drawing

Drawing One: The Housing

.250

f

3= 2.425 (?) crri

IS

+-^05

550. ooo

'j .250 —1

j

-r.250

R.150

.250 —1

detail b scale 1 : 1 02.200

03250

- 01.000

3.500

r.125 .250

6.000

..L

J

section a-a

0

0.575+-ssx

1.250

1

.250

ZZ-2^

R.150 Ml: DETAIL D —

DETAIL E SCALE 1 : 1

02,250 03.250

• 01.000

!

f=

i

L

••Mr,

6X 0 .201 THRU 1/4-20 UNC THRU SECTION C-C

299


Notes:

300

Detail Drawing

In this lesson we'll learn how to make multiple configurations of a part, how to make a multi-sheet drawing with the different configurations, add main views, sections and details, change a drawing's view display style, move the views within the drawing sheet, import model dimensions and manipulate them. The detail drawing of the 'Housing' part will follow the next sequence.

Add Configuration

Make new drawing

Insert drawing views

mmm Add Section view

Add Detail view

Import Annotations

Shaded Isometric

: &• Arrange Annotations

5 I IA Sheetl I QjSheet2 |~7T

gt

Premium 2013 x64 Edition

Add drawing sheet

Change Configuration

Add new Detail view

Import Missing Annotations

17.1. - The first thing we need to do is to make a new Configuration of the 'Housing' part. SOLIDWORKS' Configurations allow us to make slightly or considerably different versions of a part without having to make a new part, in order to show or document different states of a part or a different but similar component. In our example, we'll have a configuration of the 'Housing' as it comes out of the foundry, and another of the finished part for the machine shop including all the details that need to be machined in the cast part. Using configurations we can control different aspects of a component including dimensions, tolerance, suppressed features, etc. Features

Open the 'Housing' part and activate the "ConfigurationManager" tab. The Configuration Manager is where we can add, delete and change between the different configurations of a part. We can find it at the top of the FeatureManager as indicated.

Sketch

Evaluate

r\ y

ConfigurationManager

•(§) Housing (Default< Lreiaun-»_r;ispmy an History Sensors

301

Direct Editing


There is always one configuration called 'Default'. Once the ConfigurationManager is selected, we can add a new configuration by rightmouse-clicking at the top of the ConfigurationManager in the part's name, in this case 'Housing', and selecting the "Add Configuration..." option. Name the new configuration "Forge" and click OK. Adding comments and/or descriptions is optional.

<5

0 'iff Configurations

Q) Housing C

Part (Housing)

^ D< Hidden Tree Items Add to Library Open Drawing Comment Kee Display Add Configuration...

iq

<3>

fd

/£. ia f « I•

©

Add Configuration •

X

Configuration Properties rnnfinnratinn mmy

Forge Description: Model for Foundry HI Use in bill of materials Comment:

After adding the configuration you may be asked if you'd like to link the display state to show the material's appearance in the configuration. Press "Yes" to continue. SOLIDWORKS | *

The appearance for this material is different than the existing appearance. Would you like to link display states to configurations to show the materials appearance in each configuration?

Yes

302

No

Detail Drawing

17.2. - After adding the new configuration, we'll rename the "Default" configuration. Right-mouseclick in it, select "Properties" and change its name to "Machined". As before, adding a description is optional. Click OK when finished.

B IS 0
Default ( He

1

Show Configuration

J=© ^ Forge [ Hou

To Add Derived ConfigurationShow Preview «•*

Delete

k J mill r"hnilrliifl*H^l"iri-

m Properties...

jj°® Configuration Properties V

Go To...

X

Configuration Properties Configuration name: Machined Description: Machine Shop Model • Use in bill of materials

Comment:

Configurations can also be renamed using the slow double click method.

17.3.- I n t h e C o n f i g u r a t i o n M a n a g e r t h e currently active configuration is the one with the green checkmark; all other configurations are grayed out. To switch to a different configuration we can double-click an inactive configuration's name, or right-mouse-click and select "Show Configuration" from the pop-up menu.

go

/£, Ira

Id

Configurations

V
figuration^) (Forge)

•

Forg

bsing ]

Tachined [ Housing )

to Configurations

Configurations

Housing Configuration(s) (Machine

<(y Housing Configuration(s) (Forge) ^ Forge [ Housing ] |p®

r® •

Machined [ Show Configuration % Add Derived ConfigurationShow Preview

303

Machined [ Housing


17.4. - Activate the "Forge" configuration (it will have the green checkmark), and change to the FeatureManager tab. Notice that next to the name of the part at the top of the FeatureManager now we can see the name of the currently active configuration.

O

0

0. 7 JJ

FeatureManager Design Tree Housing Configuration(s) (Forge) |f®

Forge [ Housing ]

|f®

Machined [ Housing

•n } Housirit (Forge) *

0§) History fp) Sensors

>

Fa) Annotations o-o Cast Alloy Steel

In the "Forge" configuration, we will "Suppress" all the features that cannot be made when casting the part, and make the holes smaller to machine them to size later. Essentially, suppressing a feature will tell SOLIDWORKS to NOT make it. It will still be listed in the FeatureManager, but it will be grayed out. For all practical purposes a suppressed feature doesn't exist in the model, and, since it is not created, the model's mass properties are affected.

17.5. - First, select the '1/4-20 Tapped Holel' from the FeatureManager (which cannot be made in a foundry), and from the pop-up toolbar select the "Suppress" icon. After suppressing a feature its name will be grayed out. Remember that we are not deleting it; it's still there, but it is suppressed. Origin

U Origin ^0 Boss-Extrude1

^ Boss-Extrude1

^l Boss-Extrude2

^ Boss-Extrude2

3 Filletl

3 Filletl

3 Fillet2

3 Fillet2

P Top Cut

IP Top Cut

l£U Front Boss

Front Boss

Mirrorl

fc|li] Mirrorl

IÔ Side Boss

^ Side Boss

Mirror2

b||j] Mirror2

P Front Cut P Shaft Hole

P Front Cut X

1/4-20 Tapped Ho e1| CyS CirPatternl

P Shaft Hole Suppress

1/4-20 Tapped Holel

*

Cyd CirPatternl

li|il Mirror3

Mirror3 |^ #6-32 Tapped Holel

#6-32 Tapped Holel (P Slot

P Slot

304

Detail Drawing

Notice that the two features after "%-20 Tapped Holel", "CirPatternl" and "Mirror3" were also suppressed. This is because these features are 'children' of the "1/4-20 Tapped Holel". Look at it this way: if there is no tapped hole, we cannot pattern it, and if there is no pattern, we cannot mirror it either. The "Parent/Child" relations are created when we add features that use or reference existing features in the model. For example, when a sketch is created in a face, the face becomes a parent to the sketch. If the face is deleted, so will the sketch and so on. ^ Parent/Child relations can be found two ways: By right-mouse-clicking on a J feature and selecting "Parent/Child" from the pop-up menu. I ^ I

I IOIIt

Right Plane 1 , Origin l^[| Boss-Extrude

(z

*1

x&

^t 1

Boss-Extrude,1 Feature (Boss-Extrude2) 13 Filletl

•

3 FiHet2 |J§I Top Cut

^ Parent/Child...^ Lonrigure Featured

[^) Front Boss [t|||l] Mirrorl

X

Dejete...

Or using the "Dynamic Reference Visualization (Parent/Child)" option, which is active by default and graphically indicates with arrows the Parent and Children features of any feature selected in the FeatureManager tree. This option can be turned On/Off by right-mouse-clicking at the top of the FeatureManager and switching either one ON or OFF. When the mouse hovers over a feature, the parent feature(s) above are indicated with blue arrows, and the child feature(s) below are indicated with purple arrows. <5

7

!•= ... /r

- > -IV T

•

g|h

< s > L 7

J 0)* 1.

L Dynamic Reference Visualization (Parent) I •

(2) s Part (Housing) Hidden Tree Items • Si a

•

•

S) His

SiSe" SiAn

He

Add to Library

*T

Comment

•

ISiTo

TSi" Lc

Tree Display

•

R'S

a-v

%

C

T

Dynamic Reference Visualization (Child)

Part (Housing) Hidden Tree Items

•

Add to Library Frc

Document Properties... Configuration Publisher...

MK

JL Lrf/ I

Open Drawing

•

0— I [O s= 1 =n

• .

Open Drawing Comment

•

Tree Display

•

L O r

Document Properties...

<@Bo -6^ „

Configuration Publisher...

305


Boss-Extrudel

®j[] Boss-Extrudel

Boss-Extrude2

^jjf] Boss-Extru de2

13 Filletl

3 Filletl

3 Fillet2

3 Fillet2

P Top Cut

(P Top Cut

^ Front Boss

C^j] Front Boss

Mirrorl

£]|[3 Mirrorl

Side Boss

t£j|) Side Boss

Mirror2

cC||E3 Mirror2

fit§) Front Cut

(P Front Cut

C3) Shaft Hole

(P Shaft Hole

m 1/4-20Tapped Holel

4-^lviaf bg3 c,7p3^1

lei

CirPatl ern1

C3|eD Mirror

Ld|bJ Mirror3

#6-32 Tapped Holel

(j^ *6-32 Tapped Holel

fffill Cl«<-

(1^1 ci„*

17.6. - Now suppress the "#6-32 Tapped Holel" and the "Slot" features. All the children features of "Slot" are suppressed as well. (pl Front Cut

(P Shaft Hole

(P Shaft Hole

rtsl 1/4-20 TappedZ/folel

- 1

1/4-20 Tapped Ho

fe|l3 Mil

£]|£l Mirror3

(^#6-

R$ #6-32 Tapped Hole!

P

c£ r

Bya Cir

CyO CirPatternl

uPPre5j

Slot

(P

— S u p p r e s s

Slot

[>[> LPafccrrr

gg LPatteml

iijjiLI Mirror4

rU_n . ..

Shaft Hole Q® 1/4-20 Tapped Hole G»n
306

Detail Drawing

The reverse process to Suppressing a feature is "Unsuppress." Select a suppressed feature and click on the "Unsuppress" icon (the icon with the arrow pointing up). Do not Unsuppress any features at this time; this is just an explanation of how it's done, we'll get to it later.

(||l Front Cut |jt|) Shaft Hole |J£ 1/4-20 Tap

to

CirPattern1| Mirror3 Hole!

m

Unsuppress

Slot

Our "Forge" configuration now looks like this:

[>£, LPatternl Mirror4 0 Fillet3

0

.cs

When a feature with children is Unsuppressed in the FeatureManager, the child features need to be Unsuppressed individually. To Unsuppress a feature and its children, select the feature and use the menu "Edit, Unsuppress with Dependents." When a child feature is unsuppressed, all the features needed for it to exist (its parent features) will be automatically unsuppressed. 17.7. - The next step is to change the size of the two circular cuts in the "Forge" configuration. Make sure the "Forge" configuration is active. If the "Instant 3D" command is active, select a face of the "Front Cut' in the screen, OR double click in the feature in the FeatureManager, or in one of its faces in the graphics area to reveal the feature's dimensions. Right-mouse-click in the diameter dimension and select the "Configure Dimension" option from the pop-up menu.

307


/

02

N |j

/

s /.

! !

j| Box Selection

bi

Lasso Selection Select Other Zoom/Pan/Rotate

\ Dimension (D1@Sketch6@Housing.SLDPR...) Link Values Driven as Config

Dimension

Smart Dimension Annotations

In the "Modify Configurations" table, change the value of the diameter in the "Forge" configuration to 2.200". The idea is to have a smaller hole made in the forge, and machine it to size later (Machined configuration). Leave the "Machined" configuration value as 2.250" and click "OK" to finish. Notice the change in the hole size. A big advantage of using this approach is that we can change multiple dimension's values for multiple configurations at the same time regardless of the active configuration.

©

_ a

Modify Configurations Configuration Name

Sketch6 y] D1

Forge

2 200in

Machined

2.250in

< Creates s new configuration- >

m

•— •— •—

OK

308

Cancel

Apply

Help

Detail Drawing

17.8. - A different way to configure dimensions is by double-clicking a dimension,

and when the "Modify" dialog comes up we can select which configurations to modify; when a component has configurations, the "Modify" dialog adds a configuration icon at the end of the value box. This icon helps us define if we want to change the dimension's value for "This Configuration", "All Configurations" or "Specify Configurations." Keep in mind that this icon will only be visible IF we have more than one configuration in the part. Double-click the "Shaft Hole" feature to display its dimensions, double-click the diameter dimension, and change the value to 0.55". Make sure we are only changing the value of this configuration by selecting the configuration button and selecting "This Configuration". Click OK to finish. Using "This Configuration" affects only the active configuration, in our case "Forge".

(t) k7c+-005

"P-^-.OQO

/f

Modify

//

/X8i?(S Dl@Sketch7

/ Y

0.55in,|

ir

t \

E:

//

309

This Configuration A(l ^

f

Specify Configurations...

$

R

II!

17.9. - An easy way to work with configurations is by viewing both the FeatureManager and the ConfigurationManager at the same time by

ODD


7 CA|FL Mirrorl splitting the FeatureManager pane. Place the Side Boss mouse pointer at the top of the FeatureManager • Mirror2 and look for the "split" feedback icon, then clickFront Cut and-drag down. Select the FeatureManager in the Shaft Hole top pane and the ConfigurationManager in the 1/4-20 Tapped Holel bottom pane. c§o CirPatternl Mirror3

Boundary Boss/i

#6-32 Tapped Holel

Features

nq

Sketch

Slot

tvaluat

&i> cd LPatternl Mirror4

HO

4

<5

Qj Housing (Forges Display State-2>) •

Fillet3

>

0 f" Configurations

^|ij History *•

fjf) Sensors

^ Housing Configuration(s) (Forge) |p® V* Forge [ Housing ]

• [A ] Annotations

[p® - Machined [ Housing ]

9.ZZ Cast Allov Steel

Now that we have made some changes to the "Forge" configuration, double click on each configuration to activate it and see what each one of them looks like. Notice the missing features (suppressed) and different sizes of the holes in the "Forge" configuration. Save the changes to the 'Housing' part.

k\ *1 i

oklo o: / /

o /

V/ /

Forge

/y

Machined

We can add as many configurations as needed, but when we have more than 2 or 3 configurations it is usually easier to manage them with a table. Design Tables are very powerful and will be covered later in the book. 310

Detail Drawing

17.10. - After adding the configurations to the 'Housing' we'll make its detail drawing. Make sure the "Forge" configuration is active and select the menu "File, Make Drawing from Part" or from the "New" document drop-down command. This way the first drawing will be made n using the "Forge" configuration. We'll add JSII Make Drawing from Part/Assembly the "Machined" configuration drawing later. Assembly from Part/Assemble If asked to select a template, select the default drawing template named "Drawing." (fj]she" c+fl Mirror

Q-fe-

New SOUDWORKS Document

17.11. - After selecting the drawing template we are asked to select a sheet size to use for this drawing. For Sheet Size select "B-Landscape", and turn off the "Display Sheet Format" option

a 3D representation of a single design component

a 3D arrangement of parts and/or other assemblies Assembly

an


Drawing

Advanced

ncel

Help

Sheet Format/Size ® Standard sheet size Preview:

0 Only show standard formats A I Fa (ANSI) Portrait* ' B (ANSI) Landscape

I

D (ANSI) Landscape E (ANSI) Landscape AO fAMCH lanrtcran*

V

b - landscape.slddrt

Browse... Width: 17.00in

I I Display sheet format

Height: 11.00in

O Custom sKeeHize Width:

Height:

OK

Cancel

Help

lr The "Sheet Format" is the part of the drawing that contains the title block and related annotations. It will be covered in detail later. We are not including it at this time to focus on basic drawing functionality instead. 311


«

17.12. - After selecting the sheet size, a new drawing file is opened and SOLIDWORKS is ready for us to choose the views that we want in the drawing.

The "View Palette" is automatically displayed; make sure the "Auto-start projected view" option is active, as this option will help us save time when locating the views in the drawing.

View Palette

Housing.SLDPRT

* .... Z

X

Options LD Import Annotations i Design

Annotations

DimXpert Annotations Include items from hidden features

an lb

c?

From the "View Palette" drag-and-drop the "Front" view onto the sheet, in the lower left quadrant of the sheet.

@ Auto-start projected view

Drag views onto drawing sheet.

0Q0 (A) Top

O Front

(A) Right

*

'EL D •Back

•Left

'Bottom

•Isometric

•Dimetric

•Trimetric

U

•

I/ Sheet!

•Current

17.13. - Adding this view in the lower left of the sheet will give us enough room to add the rest of the views. After locating the "Front" view on the sheet, SOLIDWORKS automatically starts the "Projected View" command; to add the rest of the views, move the mouse in the direction of the view needed, and click to locate it on the sheet. As a guide, after adding the "Front" view, move the mouse pointer above it and click to locate the "Top" view (you will be able to see a preview), then click above to the right where the Isometric view will be added and finally click to the right to locate the "Right" view. After adding the views click "OK" or press the "Esc" key to finish. Your drawing should now look approximately like this:

312

Detail Drawing

Vi - -

\

0

\ .

-J

,

a

•

x

i

•*>

i

-

Depending on the system options, your drawing may look slightly different; these options and differences will be explained in the next few steps.

Adding standard and projected drawing views

313

•

_

I

T3

tSt

View Palette Click to display this task pane tab.

/!

|

c IILJSI III

To activate the View Palette, click in the View Palette icon from the Task Pane on the right side of the screen to display it.

EH

BBS

When we make a new drawing from a part using the menu "Make Drawing from Part', SOLIDWORKS automatically displays the "View Palette". However, if we make a new drawing using the "New Document' icon, we get a different behavior. To test it, select the "New Document' icon and create a Drawing by selecting the "Drawing" template using the same settings as before. In this case, we are presented with an empty drawing. (If the "Model View" command is loaded, cancel it.)

1


«

View Palette

L

-H

^y||_. z

x Once the "View Palette" is displayed, we can browse for a part or assembly or select one of the open documents from the drop-down list. After selecting a part or assembly we can drag and drop model views onto the sheet as we did in the previous step.

frit

n D ISrl Drag views onto drawing sheet.

9 rs=i Q

|o—I

17.14. - Click to Select the "Front" view in the graphics area and, if different, change the Display Style to "Hidden Lines Visible" from the view's PropertyManager at the left. Since the rest of the views were projected from the "Front" view, this change will update the rest of them because by default a projected view uses the parent view's display style. Orientation Standard views:

ed q" qb[db cd More views:

B

"Dimetric •Trimetric

r-

Import options

/

Display State Display State-2

Display

s Stale

L L

c Hidden Lines Visibl^l

(•) Use sneentare

1

O Use custom scale 1:2

v

314

1

^

Detail Drawing

The option to set the default display and tangent edge style for new views can be changed in the menu "Tools, Options, System Options" under "Display Style." System Options - Display Style System Options

Document Properties Display style

General

Display Style

O Wireframe O Hidden lines visible

Area Hatch/Fill

(8) Hidden lines removed

Drawings

Performance Colors Sketch

O Shaded with edges O Shaded Tangent edges

i Relations/Snaps Display/Selection Performance Assemblies External References

O Visible (8) Use font Q Hide ends Removed

Default Templates

Edge quality for wireframe and hidden views

File Locations

(8) High quality

FeatureManager Spin Box Increments View

O Draft quality Edge quality for shaded edge views Ohligh quality

Backup/Recover

(8) Draft quality

Touch

17.15. - Now that we have the views in place, we want to show the Isometric view in "Shaded with Edges" mode. Click to select the "Isometric" view on the screen, and click the "Shaded with Edges" icon either in the "Display Style" toolbar or in the PropertyManager as we did in the previous step. Notice the dotted line around the view indicating us the view is selected. Using this procedure, we can change any drawing view to any display mode as needed.

2>p

Display State

•• -

©

Display State-2

With Edges Displays a shaded view of the model with its edges. M--'

Display Style

T] Use parent

(®) High qual

O Draft quality

Shaded With Edges

y

Scale

315


17.16. - In the drawing views we may or may not want to see the tangent edges of a model. A tangent edge is where a curved face and a flat face have a tangent transition, as in fillets. SOLIDWORKS has three different ways to show them: Visible, With Font, or Removed. Right-mouse-click inside the Front view, and from the pop-up menu select the option "Tangent Edge, Tangent Edges Removed". Repeat for the Top and Right views. Box Selection

13

^

Lasso Selection

tjjp

Select Other Zoom/Pan/Rotate Recent Commands

+

View (Drawing ViewD Lock View Position Lock View Focus Alignment Reset sketch visibility Tangent Edges Visible

Tangent Edge Comment

Tang

Replace Model

Edg

Removed

Convert View to Sketch X

Hide Ends

Delete

The differences between tangent edge display types are visible next. "Tangent Edges Visible" shows all model edges with a solid line, "Tangent Edges with Font" shows tangent edges with a dashed line, and "Tangent Edges Removed" eliminates the tangent edges from the view.

~

1

~

1

Jr Tangent Edges Visible

cn

t

r'J

J.

Tangent Edges With Font

Tangent Edges Removed

The default Tangent Edge display settings can also be changed in the menu "Tools, Options, System Options, Drawings, Display Style."

316

Detail Drawing

17.17. - The next thing we want to do in the drawing is to move the views to arrange them in the sheet. To move a view, click-and-drag it, either from the border or any model edge in the view. Projected views are automatically aligned to their parent view, therefore the Top view can only be moved up and down, and the Right view from side to side. The Isometric view is free.

w *3

& To break a view's alignment to the parent view, right mouse click in it and select "Alignment, Break Alignment."

Select Other Zoom/Pan/Rotate Recent Commands View (Drawing View4) Lock View Position Lock View Focus Alignment

Break Alignment

Reset sketch visibility

gin

Tangent Edge

Align Vertical by Origin

Jump to Parent View

Align Horizontal by Center

Comment

Align Vertical by Center

Replace Model

Default Alignment

Convert View to Sketch

317


17.18. - Click-and-drag the drawing views in the drawing sheet and arrange them as shown, with "Tangent Edges Removed" for all views, and the Isometric with "Shaded with Edges" display. This layout will allow enough space to import the dimensions into the drawing. Make sure the drawing's units are set to inches and three decimal places.

V\

&

E Notice the toolbars available in the CommandManager were automatically changed to match the detail drawing environment in which we are now. The Features tab was replaced by View Layout and Annotation, detailing and annotation tools. 17.19. - In order to make the drawing easier to read and add more information, we'll add a section of the Right view. Select the "Section View" command from the View Layout tab in the CommandManager. ?<-

File

pS SOLIDWORKS Q=a Standard 3 View

L^J

D

Model Projected View View

Edit

View

Q>7 Auxililry View

Section View

Detlil Viet/

Insert

Tools

g

bsi

Broken-out Section

Break

Window

Help

Crop View

tj View Layout

Annotation

Sketch

Section View

i ..

Adds a section viewfaligned section

•• fid

view, or half section view by cutting y

the parent view with a section line.

318

ormat

Detail Drawing

From the "Section View" properties, select "Vertical" from the "Cutting Line" options. In the graphics area move the mouse pointer close to the center of the "Right" view. To set the section line, click when the section line snaps in the middle of the 'Housing'. £ Section View Assist

v

0

x [~ Section

r

| Half Section]

Message

n

•*"

Select Cutting Line and place it on a Options: Use the Section View popup to add offsets to the Cutting line. OR

Select Auto-start section view for immediate preview and placement of the section view.

ai

Cutting Line

m

r

'V

J

L.

if V

H Auto-start section view

We can zoom in or out in the Drawing using the mouse scroll wheel while adding a section view. SOLIDWORKS will zoom in or out at the location of the mouse pointer. 17.20. - Immediately after locating the section line, move the mouse to see a dynamic preview showing the section of the 'Housing' overlapping the Right view.

rz

z

'

7

z

zz

319


The last thing to do is to locate the section view in the sheet. Move the mouse to the right side of the drawing, and click to the right of the Right view to locate it. If needed, after locating the Section view move the other views to arrange and space them. Notice the section view's alignment is locked to the Right view.

s z: i.

7—A

Z2.

Z2.

Z

Using the mouse wheel we can manipulate the drawing sheet's view. Use the wheel to zoom in and out and the middle mouse button (Press the wheel down) to move the drawing sheet (Pan). We can do this while positioning the section view or any other view. 17.21. - Selecting the Section View we can see its Properties, where we can change different options such as the Section Label, reverse the section direction ("Flip Direction"), Display Style, Scale, etc. Change the Section View's display style to "Hidden Lines Removed" for clarity if needed. By default, the section will inherit the display style of the view from which it was made. J Section View A-A

Display Style

v

•Use parent style

©•9 u

Section Line

a-h a-*l A"*!

Flip Direction

A-»l L

Scale

A

® Use parent scale

O Use sheet scale O Use custom scale

0 Document font Font...

1:2 Section View

A 1:2

Q Partial section Q Slice section

Dimension Type

•Auto hatching

(•) Projected OTrue

Surface Bodies

V

• Section Depth

V

Cosmetic Thread Display

import annotation from

V

O High quality

Display State

A

D

(#) Draft quality Save View as...

Display State-2

More Properties..

320

Detail Drawing

17.22. - The next step is to add a "Detail View" to allow us to zoom in an area of the drawing. From the View Layout tab in the CommandManager, select the "Detail View" icon. After selecting it we are asked to draw a circle in the area that we want to make a detail of.

7<-

pS SOUDWORKS i-D

File

Edit

DEB ill

•

CA

g

Detail View

Brfken-out action

Evaluate

re

cr

Standard Model Projected Auxiliary 3 View View View View

view Layout

Annotation

Sketch

Insert

Seclon ViAv

CD

111

View

Tools

Window

Help

• us Break

Crop View

Alternate Position View

Detail View Adds a detail view to show a portion of a view, usually at an enlarged scale.

To draw sketch elements without automatically adding geometric relations to other geometry, hold down the "Ctrl" key while drawing them. This technique works in the part, assembly, and detailing environments. Draw a circle in the upper left area of the "Section" view we just made. When drawing the circle try not to add automatic relations to existing geometry by holding the Ctrl key while drawing it, and just like the "Section" view...

7C"-

z

R = 1.I7

0* m.

z /

cz

/

/ /

/ /

SECTION A-A

321

/


...move the mouse to locate the Detail above the section using the dynamic preview. By default, detail views are two times bigger than the view they came from. This option can be changed in the menu "Tools, Options, System Options, Drawings" and change the "Detail view scaling" factor to multiply the scale of the view the detail came from. If the detail area is not as big as needed, click-and-drag the detail's circle to resize it. If the location of the detail needs to be redefined, drag its center to move the detail area; the Detail view will update dynamically, that is the reason why we don't want to add any geometric relations when drawing the detail's circle, to be able to move and resize it if needed.

DETAIL B SCALE I : l

Alternatively we can draw the circle (or any closed contour like an ellipse, a polygon, or a spline) and then select the "Detail View" icon and use that profile for the detail view. 17.23. - Now that we have all the views needed in the drawing, the next step is to import the 'Housing's' dimensions from the part (the 3D model) into the drawing sheet (the 2D drawing). If you remember, when we modeled the part we added all the necessary dimensions to define it, and now we can import those dimensions into the detail drawing, reducing the amount of work needed to complete this task.

Select "Model Items" from the Annotation tab in the CommandManager or go to the menu "Insert, Model Items".

pS SOLIDWORKS

Sma Dimens

& c Model

Items

> ft tpell Format flecker Pa.nter

File

Edit

••

Insert

Tools

Window

Help

Surface Finish

A *** ^Balloon

^!

Note

/T7< Weld Symbol /

Note pattern

\ View Layout

View

^

r~r-

lie Auto Balloon /? Magnetic Line OWORKS Add-lns

Model Items Imports dimensions, annotations, and reference geometry from the referenced model into the selected view.

322

[_J0 Hole Callout Sheet Format

Detail Drawing

In the "Model Items" options select the type of dimensions and annotations we want to import into the drawing. For this exercise select the options listed below. Remember to select "Source: Entire Model" to import the dimensions of the entire 'Housing', and activate the checkbox "Import items into all views" to add all dimensions to all views. "Dimensions Marked for Drawing" is selected by default, optionally we can activate "Hole Wizard Locations" to import the location of holes made using the Hole Wizard command, "Hole Callout" to add the machining annotations to the holes made with the Hole Wizard, and Tolerenced Dimensions to import dimensions with tolerances. 3D model items available for import into a detail drawing include notes, datum, welding annotations, Geometric Tolerances (GD&T), reference geometry (axes, planes, coordinate axes, etc.), surfaces, center of mass and others. Click OK to continue and import all annotations. hdp

Model Items V

X

Message Source/Destination

/

Source: Entire model

v

Dimensions marked for drawing

@ Import items into all views

Dimensions

Tolerenced Dimensions

|[§i 1^1 IP

U0

Hole callout

V Eliminate dup

Hole Wizard Locations

Annotations • select all

A J 1?

EBB)

MM

m <$ Reference Geometry •Select all

10BE 323


17.24. - SOLIDWORKS will import the dimensions and annotations to all views, attempting to arrange them automatically in the view that displays it better. Dimensions are added first to Detail views, then to Section views, and finally main views. The reason for this order is because Detail Views show more model details, Section Views often show otherwise hidden features, and finally the main views show the major features. While SOLIDWORKS makes a good job at adding dimensions to views, they are not always added to the view that best displays it, and here is where we have to do some work. Move the Isometric view to the right, and the Detail view to the middle as shown.

^tt-l 2.625 .250-

rfc

6'.T<

r.2e350

\\

a

detail b scale l : l

ET

t QE5-

SECTION A-A

If the drawing's dimensions are not the desired units and/or decimal places, they can be changed in the menu "Tools, Options, Document Properties, Units" or from the Unit System button in the status bar.

MKS (meter, kilogram, second) CGS (centimeter, gram, second) MMGS (millimeter, gram, second) • IPS (inch, pound, second) Edit Document Units... n

Oin

Fully Defined

Editing Sheetl

1:2

324

IPS

*

Detail Drawing

17.25. - All the dimensions that were added to the part when we made it, including sketch and feature dimensions have now been imported into the drawing. Now we need to arrange them in order to make our drawing easier to read. To arrange annotations in the drawing click-and-drag to locate them as needed.

Some of the imported dimensions may have been incorrectly added to a drawing view, and we'll need to move them to a different view. One way to tell which dimensions belong to a view is to move the view. All of the annotations attached to it will move at the same time. To move a dimension from one view to another, hold down the "Shift" key, and while holding it down, click-and-drag the dimension to the view where we want it. Remember that a dimension has to be dragged inside the border of the view. Keep in mind that a dimension can only be moved to another view if the dimension can be correctly displayed in it. Arrange the annotations as needed to make the drawing easy to read. .250

?.5n

i r

i

I

2.625

>

2.625

zl

^

i

lbfc

J

.250—1

Dimensions as imported

i i

'j

1

s

,5C "

.250 —|

i =p-r2.425

.250 —1 —I

.250

• R

—R.150 -i 1 .250— oevi 1 Dimensions manually arranged

j

.250 oc;n —I

$

0.55ot$§

a

- R.250 • R.150

DETAIL B

SCALE 1 : 1

— 01.000

02.200 —\

03.250

.375 — —

1.575 3.500 :'.5u0 • R.125

.250

6.000

4.000 SECTION A-A

325


17.26. - If center marks are missing they can be added using the "Center Mark" command from the Annotation toolbar by selecting the "Center Mark" icon and clicking on the circular edges as needed. Click OK to finish when done.

D -ft"

"I

• — • —

Oc'

w

Housing

<*• Center Mark

|q| 0.31 Geometric Tolerance

9

•—

Blocks Datum Feature

Tables

Center Mark Adds a center mark on a circular Ar edge, slot edge or sketch entity.

Datum Target

02.200

.375

Z

<•>

3.500

z .250

zz

z

zz

4.000

02.200

.375

Z Z 3.500

.250

4.000

326

Detail Drawing

17.27. - Another annotation that may be missing from our drawing are the centerlines to indicate a cylindrical surface. ^ To add centerlines to our drawing select 1„ Q v C£\ J N LI f#i [gfl PqK ^ H the "Centerline" command from the ^ ^ ^^ Annotation tab in the CommandManager, or the menu "Insert, Annotations, Centerline". To add a centerline, select Revision Cloud s3 Centerline two edges or sketch segments, a Centerline cylindrical (as is our case) or a conical Adds centerlines to a view or to surface. Add the missing centerlines to all selected entities. drawing views and click OK to finish.

at

03.250

{J3 Centerline V

X

1.875

Message To manually insert centerlines, select two edges or sketch segments, or a single cylindrical, conical, toroidal, or swept face.

3.500

To automatically insert centerlines for entire views, select the auto insert option and then select one or more drawing views. Auto Insert • Select View

6.000

#cj {J3 Centerline

•y

03.250 ©

k

x

Message

A

\

1.875

To manually insert centerlines, select two edges or sketch segments, or a single cylindrical, conical, toroidal, or swept face. To automatically insert centerlines for entire views, select the auto insert option and then select one or more drawing views. Auto Insert

.500

A

I I Select View

6.000

The "Select View" option under Auto Insert will add a centerline to every cylindrical face in the selected view.

327


17.28. - When arranging the dimensions in a drawing we may want (or need) to reverse the arrows of a dimension. To do this, select the dimension and click on the dots in the arrow heads to reverse them.

*

h

75 +

+

An extension line can be dragged to change its location.

50(

.sm p

/ +.005

0 .550 - . 0 0 0

n

+.005

0 .550 - . 0 0 0

A leader can be reversed by selecting the leader's corner.

3.500

3.500

.t . ID

r

D

ez

A

m—*—a-

0 i^250"

i

,250<

Wi

-*

+-Lxx

f-to

D1@Boss-Extrudel of Housing"^

328

Detail Drawing

Diameter dimensions displayed with a linear witness lines can be changed to Diameter witness lines. Select the dimension, in the PropertyManager select the "Leaders" tab, and activate the "Diameter" option under Witness/Leader Display. ©

Dimension

to ® ^ 1.000^

• Vail

Leaders

Witness/Leader Display

0

IP Diameter \ 1~1 Use document bend length 0.250in

0 Extend bent leader to text Leader/Dimension Line Style 0 Use document display

©

^ Dimension V Value

Leaders

Other

01.00 A


* o d 0|^l®

- -I

Diameter L 0 Use document secona arrow

0

k-

|~1 Use document bend length 0.250in

0 Extend bent leader to text Leader/Dimension Line Style

0 Use document display

-1

h-

To delete a duplicate or unwanted dimension select it and hit the "Delete" key. Note that we are only deleting it from the drawing and not from the 3D model. If the annotations and dimensions are re-imported into a drawing, SOLIDWORKS will only add the missing (deleted) dimensions.

329


17.29. - Notice the tolerance for the "Shaft Hole" was carried over to the drawing from the 3D model. If we need to add tolerance, change a dimension's precision or other parameters we can change them using either the PropertyManager or the "Dimension Palette." In the Dimension Palette we can change the precision, tolerance, add notes, parentheses, etc. Select a dimension, and move the mouse to the Dimension Palette icon to expand it and access dimension options.

wera re- Tyoe

(jog

+x+ (xx)

— •=•

•

n -r

-,250.< i

_i

1 i

i

Expand the Dimension Palette

Change Tolerances

Unit PrecisionI

?2s?

Oog «• (xx) ^

: .5.

-xx* Add nventness

,2so I

-

L

4

I .

-

-

r—rn

_i_

Change Precision

Add Parenthesis

125

(jog

Center Dimension

.250-' i

XX

Inspection Dimension

..-O « —

>

Center Dimension Between Arrows

•

i

^r

Mark As Inspection Dimension

330

Detail Drawing

Your finished drawing for the "Forge" configuration should look like the next image. .500

2.625

0.55o*-00^ 'j

j

.250 —1 —I

m

- R.250 • R. 150

.250 o=:n —1

DETAIL B SCALE 1 :1

02.200 —v

• 01.000

03.250

.375 —

—

1.875

-R.125 ^ / 6.000

4.000

.250

| -|

SECTION A-A

17.30. - Now that the Forge configuration drawing is finished, we need to add a second sheet to the drawing for the Machined configuration details and complete the 'Housing's' detail drawing. We can add a second sheet and add views and dimensions just as we did in the first sheet. A quicker way to do this is to copy the drawing sheet we just finished, paste it into a new sheet and modify it to add the missing details. In the FeatureManager, right-mouse-click in "Sheetl" and select "Copy", then repeat and select "Paste" or select the menu "Edit, Paste" (shortcut Ctrl+V). ••

7

I

llaH Housing

IHfl Housing

FaI Annotations

FA) Annotations Sheetl

] Sheet! Sheet (Sheetl)

m oj HI o dr aj n r o ur — ??.

n.

De

Ljj

Display Grid

c3

Edit Sheet Format

Sheet (Sheetl) I DrDisplay Grid

dr

g

Lock Sheet Focus

1 Edit Sheet Format pr

Lock Sheet Focus Add Sheet...

Copy Qj Paste Properties... |f=] Properties,

Relations/Snaps Options..

331


After selecting "Paste" from the menu, the "Insert Paste" dialog box is presented. Select the "After selected sheet" option to add the new sheet after the first one. When asked about renaming the drawing views, click 'Yes'; this option will rename the section and detail views to use the next available view labels, in our case the new section will become "C" and the new detail will be "D". Insert Paste

View Rename Options

Insert

eet After selected sheet

There are some duplicate section, detail or auxiliary view names, do you want to rename them?

o

EH Don't show again forthis session

OK

17.31. - Now we have a second sheet in the same drawing exactly the same as the first one, except for the view labels. If needed, rebuild the drawing to update the views using the "Rebuild" command, or the Ctrl-B shortcut (A force-rebuild will update all geometry, not only what needs to be updated using Ctrl-Q).

r •— •—

No

J Sheetl (2) f^1 Drawing View7 CO

c3 CO a

Drawing View8 Drawing View9

g Drawing ViewlO Jj Section View C-C Detail View D (1 :1)

HS> Sheet! I D*Sheet1(2) O? * Housing-She

SOLIDWORKS Professional 2016x64 Edition

Rebuild (Ctrl-B) Rebuilds the part, assembly, or drawing.

Drawing sheets can be renamed by right-mouse-clicking the sheet's tab or in the FeatureManager and selecting "Properties" or "Rename". Rename "Sheetl"to "Forge" and "Sheetl(2)" to "Machined". •

• Drawing View9

•

q

•

£ Section View C-C

CD

•

^

Drawing ViewlO

Rename.

f V

|o—1

-1

"

(A Detail View D (1:1)

j V

V

Renames the Sheets.

MlN |[•IIW JL^ Forge , L^Machined Housing

332

© |

Detail Drawing

To change from one drawing sheet to the next select the sheet's tab at the bottom of the screen, or right-mouse-click in the feature manager and select "Activate." * Q Forge •

(Oi) Drawing Viewl

•

• Drawing View2

•

q Drawing View3

•

q Drawing View4

CD CD

• *

^ Section View A-A (A Detail View B (1:1) Machined

Sheet (Machined)

Drawn Activate

Drawi 4_! Sectio

•d

(~A Detail

fr

Copy Delete

17.32. - After adding the second sheet we need to tell SOLIDWORKS to show the "Machined" configuration in this sheet. If it's not already active, select the "Machined" sheet's tab on the lower left corner of the screen to activate it. Since this is a copy of the "Forge" drawing, we'll need to change the configuration displayed to "Machined". Select the Front view in the screen; in the drawing's properties select the "Reference Configuration" drop-down menu and select the "Machined" configuration. After selecting the new configuration the drawing view is automatically updated. The other views will have an option to select a new configuration or link it to their parent view, which in our case is the Front view. The Section and Detail views don't have this option because they are linked to their parent view. As soon as their parent view is updated they will be updated too. Drawing View7

<& ©

03.250

Reference Configuration

1.875

Forge "Model for Foundg v JForge 'Model for Foundry

[

3.500 ndard views:

mm

g qib co More views:

R

6.000

Dimetric

*Trim^tri/-

Front View

333


rj Drawing View8

.250 R.125

Forge 'Model for Foun • Forge "Model for Found hiarhinrrl "Mnrhinr Skrr

R.250

f

T:

A-M

A-*\

Options

2.625

U-k

Annotation view(s):

R.I50

0(A) Top

.250 —^

.250

Top View 17.33. - Change all views to the "Machined" configuration, repeat the "Model Items" command to import the missing dimensions and annotations of this configuration. Be sure to include the "Hole Wizard Locations" and "Hole Callout" buttons. The holes made with the Hole Wizard include annotations with machining information. Turning ON the "Eliminate duplicates" option to prevent the dimensions already in the drawing from being imported again. After the missing dimensions are added, arrange them as needed in the different drawing views as we did before.

7 pS

g A

& Dimelsion

Model Items

View Layout

••

File

WORKS

ll

Spdl Cheder

Format Painter

Note

i- .

Edit

•• £>ri

view

Linear Note Pattern

i

Model Items Imports dimensions, annotations, and reference geometry from the referenced model into the selected view.

0

^ Model Items

AAA AAA

S3 ui owe

•y x Message Source/Destination

Source: Entire model 01Import items into all views

Housing

Dimensions

fAl Annotations I

I Forge

1

[0)| Drawing Viewl

|

CD

q Drawing View2 § Drawing View3

@ Eliminate duplicates

CD

q Drawing View4

Annotations

J] Section View A-A

•select all

G4 Detail View B (1 :1) Machined

A] A B

|Qi| Drawing View7 OJ

• Drawing View8

334

Detail Drawing

17.34. - Add the missing center marks to the circular array of tapped holes. Select the "Center Mark" icon from the Annotation tab, click in one hole's edge, and then

click in the Propagate pop-up icon to add Center Marks to all the holes in the array of holes at the same time. SOLIDWORKS recognizes the pattern and adds the Circular Center Marks automatically. In the Property Manager we can see the additional options to manually add center marks and change their style if needed.

d -fe-h • a I

q q.31Geometric Tolerance

(§

1 /ol

Center Mark

b

'

H

1 Revision Symbol

Blocks*" [A] Datum Feature

y

Datum Target

f

Ce

Centef^Mark

Adds a center mark on a circular ^| Ar| edge, slot edge or sketch entity.

*r

P P & C

03.250

l.875

0

[Prop gate

3.500

o

Auto Insert

03.250

A

f 1 For all holes • For all fillets

3

• For all slots Manual Inserl—1 1

E CirculS

A

o

l .875

\

o

£5

°

3.500

•Radial linel Circular Center Mark

o

E Base center mark

o

/

E Slot center mark I—I

Slot center marks:

ol |cd

G3S

6X 0 .201 THRU 1/4-20 UNC THRU

Display Attributes E Use document defaults

335


17.35. - To make the slot dimensions easier to see, add a new detail view in the slot area. Move the Isometric and Detail views to the right, and locate the new detail next to the Top view. After the detail view is added, delete the imported slot Ca annotation and add the missing Seelon Detail 6rolen-out 6reak Crop Alternate dimensions using the "Smart Dimension" View sjction View Position View tool or move the imported dimensions from the Top viiew to the new detail view using rr~-_ I _ T Evaluate the "Shift-Drag" method. Oetail View Adds a detail view to show a portion of a view, usually at an enlarged scale.

.250

nm

tmr

q=

/S •n

2.625

T)

0 4x 0 .107 t .432 6-32 unc t .276

7"

1

.250

.250 .250

.250-

R.150

r DETAIL E SCALE 1 : 1

Add the missing "Center marks" to the slots, use the option "Slot Ends" as we'l need to add dimensions to locate them. •(+)• Center Mark V

X V

Style

/S

Auto Insert LJ For all holes [_J For all fillets LjForall slots

25

Manual Insert Options

1 .250

1^1 Connection lines M Slot center mark

50

Slot center c

3

s3

O

Display Attribu 0Use d

ults

336

Detail Drawing

17.36. - The missing dimensions can be manually added just like we would add dimensions in a sketch. Select the "Smart Dimension" command and add the missing dimensions to locate the slot. These are now reference and not parametric dimensions, the difference is that a parametric dimension can be changed by double clicking in the drawing, and the changes will be reflected in the 3D model and vice versa; reference dimensions cannot be changed, they are "read-only". .250 -V

t

I ji i ii •iVl I

nrn

•

>

II >

-h

m—*:

I« k o

0 0

a

h—rhr

.250

'

2.625 l .250

.375

R.250

250

t. 50

4X 0 .107 .432 6-32 UNC T .276

• i.i

.500 h»


17.37. - Depending on system and template settings, manually added dimensions (reference) and annotations are grey by default, whereas parametric dimensions and annotations are black. One way to change the color of the reference annotations is by adding a new "Layer" to the drawing, make the layer's color black, and then change the reference annotations to this layer.

If not visible, turn on the "Layer" toolbar. Go to the menu "View, Toolbars, Layer" or right-mouse-click in a toolbar and select "Layer". By default it is located in the lower left corner of the screen, but it can be moved for convenience. uispiay Mates (HU Drawing Explode Sketch $ Fastening Feature ©

Features

Layer (Qj

LdyULU fool:

== Line Format

rrsn ..

337


The "Layer Properties" command allows us to add, delete, and modify layers as needed. Layer Properties

HI Forg

Creates, edits, or deletes layers. Also, changes the properties and visibility of layers.

c3t < 3

-None-

In the "Layers" dialog select the "New" button to create a new layer. After it is created change its name to "Reference." The default color for new layers is black, so we don't need to change it. We'll add the reference annotations to this layer to display them using the layer color. Click OK to finish. Layers Name

Descript... for feLl

Style

Thickness

OK Cancel Help

New

Move

A

Layers Name

Reference

Description

dtr

r£a

ha

Style

Thickn..

OK Cancel Help

New Delete Move

A

In the "Layers" box we can change their name, optionally add a description, hide or show them in the screen, select them to print or not, change their color, the line style, and its thickness. 338

Detail Drawing

17.38. - To move annotations or models to a different layer select them in the graphics area and pick the new layer from the Layer toolbar. Select all reference annotations (individually or multiple at the same time using Ctrl+Select) and assign them to the new "Reference" layer. Notice their color updating after the change.

Value

Leaders

Other

Style

£

V

.500 A

Tolerance/Precision •.01 -.01

None

S/1

.01 .01

.123 (Document)

V

1.50

X.XXX

i 25

+ .005

0.575 -.000"

A

Primary Value

.250

RD2@Drawing View13 0.500in

•

250

O Override value: Dimension Text (XX)

.500

(XX)

•X*

•4

:# = 0

•

• ± v

U

-

•q

.

,500.


•XX* LxxJ xx XX I XX | *xx*

1 an

• Dual Dimension •ninci

.375

01.000 v

v

ns Forae [ Hb Machined

None

None

selected dimension(s).

5.264in

5.862in

Oin

Unde

17.39. - Move the views and rearrange them as needed to make room for dimensions and annotations. Delete any duplicate dimensions to make the drawing easier to read. Save the finished drawing as 'Housing' and close the file. Note the file extension for drawings is *.slddrw.

339


Finished Forge configuration drawing sheet.

J \\

<
z o o LU

'/c

CO

/

1i j

n «o

o o o

CM

© <£l_LI

uj <

—i

ou

n/ loo oo oo

—

CM x>

f

.

3

CO

I

o

co CM

CM

JI 11

i1 1

r

i'j-

s

±

nm

o «o

o o o

CM

o «o CM

J1 "tnr

co

o

mo

CM

340

Detail Drawing

Finished Machined configuration drawing sheet.

cs

\\

3 x

o• on

-4b

-4b

LU
qq iaSN-e

eb

n t4

r

:

O-

m

s

x 4

CM vO

n

o U

eu

ci io

341


Exercises: Make the detail drawings of the following Engine Project parts that were previously done in the Part Modeling section to match the drawing supplied to make each part. High resolution images are included with the accompanying files. Connecting Rod Bottom

Cylinder Gasket

£3

Head Gasket

Shaft Seal Cover

(!) (!)

(3 (3 (3 o Shaft Seal Gasket

342

Detail Drawing

Drawing Two: The Side Cover

i :

!

:

:

:

•

'

N N

i

l

l

o

R.125

SCALE 1 : 2

03250

.125 0-625

©

/ ©

\ /

jL

\

02.750

©

.750

/ 0250

/

©

/

/

01.000 ) SECTION A-A

343


Notes:

344

Detail Drawing

In this lesson we'll review material previously covered, including how to add standard views and importing annotations from the model to the drawing. We'll also learn how to add missing dimensions, change the format of dimensions, add an aligned section view, and change the sheet's and a view's scale. The drawing of the 'Side Cover' part will follow the next sequence.

tt+

•S t-

Make new drawing


Import dimensions

Aligned Section View

n •c Delete, add and arrange dimensions

Change Drawing and view scale

18.1. - We will repeat the process that we used with the 'Housing' by adding a configuration to reinforce the material just covered. Open the 'Side Cover' part and go to the Configuration Manager tab. Right-mouse-click in the part's name and select "Add Configuration." Enter the name "Forge" and click OK to continue.

zh. "si

m i>

7TT

4

Configurations

Confi Side Cover Configu

ConfigurationManager

Side Co\

ir® *

^ Default [ Side Cover ]

Part (Side Cover) Hidden Tree Items Add to Library Open Drawing Comment

Add Configuration..

frctu ml i'iuptlfittt-l Configuration Publisher.. Appearance

345


zfr rm

©

jr*£> Add Configuration V

V+7 ,

,

Configurations ^ Side Cover Configuration(s) (Forge

X

w Forge [ Side Cover]

Configuration Properties Configuration name: Forge Description: Foundry Model

0 Use in bill of materials

18.2. - Rename the "Default' configuration to "Machined' using the slow-double click method or the configuration properties.

zt\ £1 < >

A\ IZi , , Configurations "r

Configurations *

Qj Side Cover Configuration(s) (Forgi [p©

Side Cover Configuration(s) (Forge

Machined|

[p©

Forge [ Side Cover ]

Forge [ Side Cover ] c? Machined [ Side Cover ]

18.3. - Split the FeatureManager and show the Feature Manager at the top and the Configuration Manager at the bottom. With the "Forge" configuration active suppress the "Cut-Extrude2" feature, notice that the circular pattern is also suppressed because it's a child feature of " Cut-ExtrudeZ.

/t\ m <

a— a— a—

>

7

18

7

ix lOrigin

Right Plane

Right Plane

Origin

Flange Base >

© Cut-Extrude

•

© Cut-Extrude2

Flange Base

\

ut-txtrud Suppress

Cut-Extrude2

&,xj CirPatternl

CirPatternl

©

fx r* 7< »

Fillet!

WW Configurations

Configurations *•

Side Cover Configuration(s) (Forge

^ Side Cover Configuration(s) (Forge

jp® ^ Forge [ Side Cover)

|p® <# Forge [ Side Cover)

j®

[p®

Machined [ Side Cover]

346

Machined [ Side Cover]

Detail Drawing

18.4. - Double click in the center hole to reveal its diameter dimension and then double-click in the diameter. Change its value to 0.6" for the Forge configuration using the "This Configuration" button in the "Modify" value box.

Modify

• x |% D1@Sketch2 •

i||^y^qjmnn™^rrmnytm This Configuration

/

18.5. - Save the part, and with the "Forge" configuration active, select the menu "File, Make Drawing from Part" or the icon from the "New Document" drop :ut down menu to start the drawing.

/

|1

d-&--s m Make Drawing from Part/Assembly assembly

|\j e

ike Assembly from PartA

^

(J

ry Cut

|she"

IS

Curves

y

C+3 Mirror

For the 'Side Cover' part we'll use the "A-Landscape" drawing template without sheet format. After selecting the sheet size add the Front, Top and Isometric views. Drag the Front view from the View Palette and project the Top and Isometric views from it. Sheet Format/Size ® Standard sheet size Preview:

«•! Only show standard formats

B (ANSI) Landscape C (ANSI) Landscape D (ANSI) Landscape E (ANSI) Landscape AO fiMCIl I anrlcranA * •=-»

a - landscape.slddrt

Browse..

[~1 Display sheet format

Width: 279.40mm Height: 215.90mm

O Custom sheeîze Height:

OK

347

Cancel

Help


18.6. - From the "View Palette" drag and drop the Front view, and project the Top and Isometric views from it. Select the Front view, and if needed, change the Display Style to "Hidden Lines Visible" as we did in the previous exercise by selecting the view and changing it in the PropertyManager on the left. ©r ©

Drawing Viewl

Standard views:

—
UTl & p • B B|

•

More views:

B

Dimetric Trimetric

Import options Display State

.

+ Display

u Hidden Lines Visible (•> Use leetscale

O Use custom scale

For the Front and Top views change to "Tangent Edges Removed," and for the Isometric, choose the "Hidden Lines Removed" view mode and "Tangent Edges Visible"

Recent Commands View (Drawing Viewl) Lock View Position Lock View Focus .

Alignment

+

•

Reset sketch visibility Tangent Edge

Tangent Edges Visible

Comment Replace Model

Tangent Edges Removed

Convert View to Sketch X

Delete Change Layer Add View I ahel

348

Hide Ends

Detail Drawing

-h-r-

-

18.7. - Before adding the dimensions we need to add the centerline to the Top view. Select the "Centerline" command from the Annotations tab and click in the cylindrical surface of the Top view to add the centerline. Click OK to finish.

0> Q,3I Geometric Tolerance

++• Center Mark

|q|

$

Blocks Datum Feature

Centerline

is) Datum Target

) ^'

jj Revision Cloud

Ac Centerline — Adds centerlines to a view or to

P P - & C

••

selected entities.

349


1—r

2d

'$b

18.8. -To import the dimensions from the 3D model select "Model Items" from the Annotation tab or go to the menu "Insert, Model Items". For "Source/Destination" select "Entire Model", activate the checkbox "Import items into all views" and click OK to add the dimensions.

pS SOLIDWORKS &

c

c

Sma

Dimension

Model Items

File

Edit

AAA

Abe

AAA

v pell Format ecker Painter

Note

pS SOLIDWORKS

View

File

Edit

View

P

Linear Note Pattern

Checker

Pc

fl _n

View Layout

Model Items

•i

•i

DWOF

Imports dimensions, annotations, and reference geometry from the referenced model into the selected view.

pd

flr

View Layout

Annotation

Sketch

••

7

^ Model Items

m\ Side Cover

V

I

X

[a Annotations

Message

- ILa:;! Sheetl • |^) Drawing Viewl

Source/Destination

CD

q Drawing View2

•

•

rn

Source:

"(jj) Side Covers 12>

Entire model

q Drawing View3

@ Import items into all views Dimensions

350

Evaluate

SOLIDWOF

Detail Drawing

18.9. - If the document units are not in inches with three decimal places use the "Units" command in the lower right corner of the screen to change them. Delete and arrange the dimensions as shown. We'll add the diameter dimensions in the next step.

r.125

i

t ' 750

.f55

c .125

.125 •

0.600

625 CA"J

50

i

4-

Imported dimensions

Arranged Dimensions

18.10. - Select the "Smart Dimension" tool and manually add the missing diameter dimensions. Remember we can also select the Smart Dimension command using mouse gestures.

03.250 —K

0.600

+

01.000

351


18.11. - Add a new layer with the "Layer" command, make it color black and rename it "Reference". Change the newly added reference dimensions to it to show them in black. Arrange the views as shown to finish the "Forge" configuration. i

j

Layer Properties Creates, edits, or deletes layers. Also, changes the properties and visibility of

L^Shee

:

layers.

|-

-None—^

A different way to accomplish this step is by adding the layer first, selecting it in the Layer toolbar, and then adding dimensions and/or annotations; by pre-selecting the layer, any annotations, dimensions, center marks, centerlines, models, etc. will be automatically assigned to it.

•

Layer Reference

9

R.125

T'

tt 125

.750

_L

03.250 600

+

01.000

352

Detail Drawing

18.12. - Now we need to add a second sheet to our drawing to add the "Machined' configuration drawing. Instead of copying and pasting a complete sheet as we did with the 'Housing', we'll only copy the Front view. Select the "Add Sheet" icon in the lower left corner and rename the sheets "Forge" and "Machined' respectively to match the configurations.

GlSheet

s

H 4

Reference

^Forge

•

[^Machined I

Reference Add Sheet j

Add Sheet

Side Cover

18.13. - Activate the "Forge" sheet, select the Front view and either press Ctrl-C or the menu "Edit, Copy" to copy the view. Select the "Machined' sheet to activate it and press Ctrl-V or the menu "Edit, Paste" to paste the view. Select the newly added Front view and in the Property Manager select the "Machined" configuration from the "Reference Configuration" drop down list.

fid Drawing View4

<3f ©

03.250 625

O

Reference Configuration fo

Machine orae 'Foundry N

(&D ©

(•\_l b p h •l

©

9

0

*Dimetric •Trimetric

o

o

01.000

Import options

18.14. - To add the Top and Isometric views we'll use the "Projected View" command. Select the Front view, go to the View Layout tab, and click in the "Projected View" icon.

File

CD

CD

III

III

DEB

Standard MoJel 3 View Vie\

View Layout

Q Projected View

Anno

/\

\&> Ailciliary #iew

4-i 4-*

Section View

i- • i• .

Projected View

Edit

View

Tools

CA Detail View

i

Adds a projected view by unfolding a new view from an existing view.

353

Insert

Section

S Add-lns


After selecting the "Projected View" command with the Front view pre selected, move the mouse "up" to add the Top view, then to the top right and add the Isometric view. Click OK to finish. Change the Isometric view to "Hidden Lines Removed" and "Tangent Edges Visible."

0 ©3.250

o

0.625

o

o

o

o

o 0 1.000

18.15. - In the 1Side CoverJ, a vertical or horizontal section view would not cut through the bolt holes, in this case we can use an aligned section view using an angled cutting plane to include features that would not be visible using a regular section view. In an Aligned Section view the section plane is revolved and then projected to the side.

pS SOLIDWORKS •=b l2j

File

•

View

ca


View Layout

Edit

Annotation

Section Detail View View

Insert

Select the "Section View" command; under the "Cutting Line" section activate the "Aligned" option. The icon shows the sequence needed to create it by identifying the order of the selections with the numbers 1, 2 and 3.

X ^ Section

Cutting Line

vri

i.,° @ Auto-start s

354

Half Section

Message

i:

•Z

Adds a section view,aligned section view, or half section view by cutting the parent view with a section line.

J3 Section View Assist V

Break

— Section Sec tic View

^

Windov

a &)• 6roken-out Section

yJSr

Sketch

Tools

\ Aligned j

Crop View

"or

Detail Drawing

03.250

03.250 0.625

o

0.625

o

0

©

©

o

o

©

e

o

01.coo

1st selection: center of the Side Cover

o

01.coo

2nd selection: center of the top right hole

03.250

o

0.625

0.625

o

0

©

©

©

©

2z

o

o

o

0i.coo

3rd selection: make the second line vertical.

o

0] .000

Locate the section view to the right.

03250 0.625

o

£z:

©

© l2z"

o

o

01.000

SECTION A - A

355


18.16. - Use the "Center Mark" tool to add the center marks in the Front view. Select one of the holes, and then click in the "Propagate" icon to add the Circular Center Mark to every hole at the same time. Click OK to finish.

$53,250

03.250

0.625

0.625

£

Propagate ^

©

©

f

o

o

©

©

f

©

01.000

01.000

If missing, add the centerlines to the Top and Section views using the "Centerline" command.

IE

D - f e 3| 0.31 Geometric Tolerance

-

' *OI BlockJ

1~A] Datum Feature

oi

EE-

Datum Target

Centerline

Ar

Revision Cloud

Center! Adds centerlines to a view or to

fool

selected entities.

m

7w

-i 1 p •"—vi

SECTION A-A

356

Detail Drawing

18.17. - To import the missing dimensions and annotations for the "Machined" configuration drawing, select the "Model Items" command from the Annotation tab. Use the "Entire model" and "Import items into all views" options. In the "Dimensions" section include "Hole Wizard Locations", "Hole Callout" and "Toleranced Dimensions." Click OK to import the missing dimensions.

Model Items

Message Source/Destination Source: Entire model @ Import items into all views

Dimensions

f in i? epi U0 V Eliminate duplicates

03.250

.125 0.625

©

/

i

0 250

©

.500

/

T~

A

1.625 \ZZ.2 .750 _zr

01.000

SECTION A-A

18.18. - Before adding the missing dimensions and annotations select the "Reference" layer created earlier. If it was not renamed, it will be listed as "LayerO". By pre-selecting a layer, annotations added to the drawing will be automatically assigned to this layer. Note that there are two additional options; one is to define annotations based on the drafting standard selected and the other option is to not assign a layer. L^Forqe Reference

SO

-Per Standard-

Hi Machined ! S3 I

v

ional 2016 x64 Edition

357


After selecting the layer use the "Smart Dimension" tool add the missing diameter dimensions and delete the extra dimensions to match the next image. Note that by selecting the new layer, the new reference dimensions are added to it and shown in black (the layer's color).

03.250 0.625

©

/ 0.250

©

/

& 01.000

R1.375

18.19. - When the dimension for the circle of holes is added, a radius is added instead of a diameter. To change the dimension to show a diameter instead, rightmouse-click in the dimension, and from the pop-up menu select "Display Options, Display as Diameter", or from the "Leaders" section in the dimension's properties. If the "Smart Dimension" command is selected, the "Display As Diameter" option will be displayed immediately, otherwise the option will be listed under the "Display Options" sub-menu. Value

Dimension (RD3@Drawing View4) Hide Display Options

•

Smart Dimension

IV f

More Dimensions

•

Annotations

•

Drawing Views

•

T_l_l

k.

Leaders


•^

•

Display As Diameter^

Show as Inspection

I / / i

358

uther

r

a* Diameter

• Dimension t ETl I lea Me

Detail Drawing

03.250

©

0.625

/ 0.250

©

©

02.750

01.000

18.20. - Dimensions manually added to a drawing can be displayed with a parenthesis to indicate it is a Reference Dimension. Reference dimensions are used to provide additional information to the drawing, don't have a tolerance and often times their value depends on other dimensions. They should NOT to be used for manufacturing or inspection. For this component, the 1" diameter is not a critical dimension, so we'll mark it as a reference, meaning that its value is not critical to the design. To add a parenthesis, select the dimension and from the Property Manager click in the "Parenthesis" icon. . 12.0 luucumcnij

J

©

Primary Value RD1 ©Drawing View4 1.000in • Override value: Text

dmmxdwd

02.750

01 Q0U

Add Parenthesis I

=:

0 •

[#: E= -xi»co 1 V

a

+

u t <£ Parentheses can be added by default to reference (manually added) dimensions. This option is set in the menu "Tools, Options, Document Properties, Dimensions, Add parentheses by default". This is an option set by document or template and is not a system option. 359


18.21. - Another way to add or remove parentheses and other annotation options is to use the "Dimension Palette". When we select a dimension the dimension

palette appears near it; move the mouse over it to expand the window and modify the dimension's appearance. Here we can change a dimension's parameters including parenthesis, tolerance, precision, etc.

/

/ 0.250

0.250 •.01

.01

1.50 -.01

ft

.01

0

1.000

© tfd Parenthesis
>

« -* 0:1 -000,)

if i

18.22. - In certain instances, radial dimensions

Leaders may need to be modified to make the dimension easier to read, as is the case with the fillet dimension. To change it, select the dimension and from the "Leaders" tab in the r.125 dimension's properties, turn on the "Dimension to inside of arc" option, and reverse the direction of the arrow to point towards the radius by selecting the "Inside" option for the Leader display. ^ Dimension

Va u

her

~i J


o

Inside

•

r l_

r.l25<—•

&-—^ C@ Dimension to inside of arc

}

0U.L JULUIIILMl UlllU luiyTii 0.250in

360

n R.125

Detail Drawing

18.23. - Some times the drawing sheet is too big or too small to correctly fit the required drawing views. In order to make them fit better, we can change the sheet's scale. In this case, we need to change the sheet's scale to be 1:1. Make a rightmouse-click in the sheet (not a drawing view), or make a right-mouse-click in the sheet's name in the FeatureManager, and from the pop-up menu select "Properties". Tables

If the option you want is not visible in the pop-up menu, click at the bottom of the menu to expand the hidden options.

•c

Sheet (Machined) |H Display Grid

•

Machined

Change L

Sheet (Machined)

|Qi] Drawi11 CD

|^ | Edit Sheet Format

y Drawi

• <2) si

Lock Sheet Focus Add Sheet...

•

Copy

•

CD

• Drawi Sectio

111

Display Grid I Edit Sheet Format Lock Sheet Focus Add Sheet... Copy

m Properties Properties,. s Options

ps Options

Comment Smart Dimension

r nmment

In pop-up menus notice the commands are grouped under a heading; in this case the options for"Sheet (Machined)" are listed. From the options box, make sure we are using a scale of 1:1, "Third angle" projection to match the book images and click OK to finish. Sheet Properties Sheet Properties

Name.

zone Parameters

imachined^^hii 1

1

Type of projection

|

( J First angle (J) Third angle

Next view label:

B

Next datum label:

A

Sheet Fori?

O Standard sheet size

Preview

0 Only show standard format A (ANSI) Landscape A (ANSI) Portrait B (ANSI) Landscape C (ANSI) Landscape D (ANSI) Landscape E (ANSI) Landscape

Reload

AH fANKIt I anritranp '.drt

Browse-

Display sheet format

361


The "Type of projection" refers to how the views are projected from the 3D model. The "First angle" projection is widely used in Europe and the "Third angle" projection is more commonly used in America. This is a document property saved in the template. See the Appendix for more information in creating, modifying, and using templates.

+

Third Angle Projection

First Angle Projection

18.24. - After arranging the views and dimensions, we notice the Isometric view is too big to fit in our sheet, so we need to change the isometric view's scale.

i i !

! ! ! ^

r.l 25

•

<3 <3

03.250

.125

©

0.625 .750

/ 0.250

/

&

©

\

02.750

<3

/

©

zz"

© 01.000}

SECTION A-A

362

Detail Drawing

Select the Isometric view in the graphics area, and from its PropertyManager settings, change the view's scale to 1:2 from the "Use custom scale" drop down menu in the "Scale" options box. • Drawing View6

©

• Reference Configuration Machined

[]

Arrow

•

r.125

A-«

Display State Display State 1

.125

0.625

Display Style • Use parent style

.750

inmsfaiiui 0.250

Scale

O Use parent scale O Use sheet scale (8) Use custom scale

Dimi

77~y

zz

11:

1:12

If the option "Tools, Options, Document Properties, Views, Other, Add view label on view creation" is ON when the views are first added to the drawing, changing a view to a scale different than the sheet's scale, a note will be automatically added to the view indicating it's scale. System Options

Document Properties

Drafting Standard i± Annotations

Overall drafting standard ANSI

I- Borders (j Dimensions Centerlines/Center Marks DimXpert

O Add view label on view creation Apply to isometric, dimetric; trimetrilvvion-orthographic etrifcfuion and current model, orientation views.

(jj-Tables E| Views ... Auxiliary

Base other view standard

ANSI

... Detail Section - Orthographic Virtual Sharps

Label options Applying changes to these settings will reset existing view labels. [3 Per standard

363


18.25. - The drawing is finished. Save it as 'Side Cover1 and close the file.

1 1 1

1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1

J

J

1 1 •

! ^

I

l

l

•

R.125

SCALE 1 :2

03.250

.125

0.625

©

/

©

\

J.

0250

/

\

02.750

.750

/

©

17^/

zz" y /

©

/ /

01.000) SECTION A-A

364

Detail Drawing

Exercises: Make the detail drawings of the following Engine Project parts that were done in the Part Modeling section to match the drawing previously supplied to make each part. Intake

Oil Pan Gasket

0 r

o.

v

Sealed Needle Bearing

Add three configurations to show the different steps to model the part and match the original drawing suppressing features as needed in each configuration.

365


Notes:

366

Detail Drawing

Drawing Three: The Top Cover

.375

R.250 .125

~t^s'

SECTION A-A

w R.031

•4.000

^=5

V 2.625

.500 .375 .250 125

u 0.500

•

DETAIL B SCALE 1 : 1

A

All rounds 0.031" un/ess otherwise specified Material: Cast Alloy Steel Volume: 1.82 cu-in Weight: 0.48 Lb. Designer: Alejandro Reyes

-4X 0 .150 THRU ALL

367


Notes:

368

Detail Drawing

In this lesson we'll review previously covered material, add a section view using the "Display only surface" option, how to add Notes, use ordinate dimensions, and add custom file properties to part and assembly files for use in drawings and bills of materials. The drawing of the Top Cover' will follow the next sequence.

jiise . . i

'
u

— a»«1 m 11

tr^

• O

>

L

•

r I >

i J

(h)

J

i

a Make new drawing

SECTION A-A


Eft O

Section View .500

i

•tm

Detail View

375

.600

[ZL

\z

.375

\f7rr?*

Q ^ Import/Add Dimensions

DETAIL B SCALE 2: 1

250 125

0

ROUND ALL EDGES 0.031" VOLUME: 1.B2 cu-in MASS:0.4&LJb AAATERIAL: Cast Alloy Steel


Add Ordinate Dimensions

Add notes

19.1.-Open the 'Top Cover' part and select the "Make Drawing from Part/Assembly" icon as we've done before. Select the drawing template with an "A-Landscape" sheet size without sheet format. Sheet Format/Size (#) Standard sheet size Preview:

@ Only show standard formats

Ia (ansi) Landscape

1A

sMAUSjjPortrajt^^' B (ANSI) Landscape C (ANSI) Landscape D (ANSI) Landscape E (ANSI) Landscape AO fAWÎT 1 anHcranp


BrowseWidth: 279.40mm

CI I Display sheet formatJ

Height: 215.90mm

O Custom sheet size Width:

Height:

OK

369

Cancel

Help


19.2. -Click-and-drag the Front view from the "View Palette" onto the sheet, and add Top, Bottom, Right and Isometric views by projecting them from the Front view. Change the display style to "Hidden Lines" and "Tangent Edges Removed" for all views except the Isometric, which will have "Tangent Edges Visible."

\

±>

i? 19.3. - The next step is to make a section through the Top view to get more information about the cross section of the cover. Select the "Section View" icon from the View Layout tab, click in the "Horizontal" section icon, and place the section line approximately through the middle of the Top view as indicated. Finally, locate the new section view just below it.

If the "Auto-start section view" option is checked, the pop-up toolbar is not shown after locating the section line.

370

Detail Drawing

••

CDCD-

O-

r

Section View Assist

• x Section

n

Half Section

Message Cutting Line 4i ) to i 4-«

b,

Wl

Vsi

r

'v, 30 4-

J

L

0 Auto-start section view

19.4. - After locating the section view use the "Slice Section" option to show only the section's surface; using this option allows us to ignore the rest of the model behind the section line. To better illustrate this option, imagine we took a very thin slice of the model at the section line. Click OK when finished. £ Section View A-A

®

v Section Line a-m a-m

Flip Direction

A-M

@ Document font Font...

Section View

CP Partial section 0 Slice section ung

• Surface Bodies

SECTION A-A

D Section Depth

The direction of the section view can be reversed using the "Flip Direction" button or with a double click in the section line. If the section is reversed with the double click, the drawing needs to be rebuilt.

371

I


19.5. - To get an even better view of the cross section, we'll make a detail of the right side of "Section A-A." Select the "Detail View" icon and draw a circle as shown; locate the detail below the Right view and distribute the views evenly in the sheet. If center marks are automatically added, delete them for clarity.

t—i 4-! Section View

CA Detail View

I

a

Broken-out Section

R =0.6 iew

>—*•

\

"nj

TION A-A Every time a section or detail view is added, SOLIDWORKS increases the new view label value in the sheet's properties to the next available letter. If a view is deleted, say A-A, the next time we create a section or detail view it will be labeled B-B, even if view A-A is non-existent. To reuse deleted view labels we need to set the option in the menu "Tools, Options, System Options, Drawings, Reuse view letters from deleted auxiliary, detail, and section views." Section, detail, or auxiliary view's labels can be changed at any time by selecting the view and entering the new view's label in its properties.

(A Detail View B

®

v Detail Circle

a

a

t—71 y

Style:

g Per Standard

v

® Circle

^3

^^Prnfilp

P


IVI Document font

Font... o Detail View

A

372

Detail Drawing

19.6. - The next step is to import the model dimensions from the part. Go to the menu "Insert, Model Items" or the "Model Items" icon in the Annotation tab of the CommandManager. Remember to select the "Import items into all views" and "Entire Model" options, as well as the "Hole Callout" dimensions. Model Items

pS SOLIDWORKS

<\ SmartI Dimensil

*

\

Model Items

Slell Chlcker

File

Edit

View

AAA AAA

g

fi>

Ballo

Linear Note Pattern

Format Painter

Insert

Auto

View Layout

Model Items

X

Message Source/Destination Source:

£ft magt _J

V

WORKS A.

Imports dimensions, annotations, and reference geometry from the referenced model into the selected view.

Entire model @ Import items into all views Dimensions

0 Eliminate duplicates

2.62:t.

if ALL

- -

%250-

.125

SECTION A-A R.ijen-

V

/

^51 y

X

4X 0 .150 Til ?U ALL

T

/

D ETAIL E

4.000

373

©


19.7. - Delete and arrange the dimensions as needed to match the next image.

A n

T\ A

R.250 .125 ~l SECTION A-A R.031

-4.000

&

/

v

k_ w

/

2.625

s


4X 0 .150 THRU ALL

If a radial dimension is not shown correctly as in the following image, select the dimension, in the Property Manager select the "Leaders" tab and use the option "Dimension to inside of arc" from the Witness/Leader Display options. Value

Leaders

R.031

Other


O —• 0

s~

D 0

R.031

©

0 Dimension to inside Use

3 i:

lengt

374

Detail Drawing

19.8. - In the bottom view, add a (reference) dimension to the round edge indicated using the "Smart Dimension" tool. When an arc is dimensioned a radial dimension is added.

¥

\+

y

R.250

2.625

4

S: -4X

0

.150 THRU ALL

For our example we want to show a diameter dimension. To change the dimension, right-mouse-click in it, and from the pop-up toolbar select "Display options, Display as Diameter."

A

|[

;| Box Selection Lasso Selection

[!(J Select Other

A) ac

Zoom/Pan/Rotate

•

Recent Commands

•

Dimension (RD2@Drawing View3) Hide Display Options

•

^ Smart Dimension

mil Display As Diameter

More Dimensions

•

Annotations

•

Show as Inspection

To change the dimension to radial again repeat the previous step and select "Display as Radius." 375


R.250 .125 u=i SECT ON A-A

R.031

•4.000

&

M /

0.500

2.625


i?

S X

4X 0 .150 THRU ALL

19.9.- "Ordinate Dimensions" are used to dimension multiple features from a common origin or datum, and under certain circumstances we may need or want to add them to a drawing. In this case we have to add them manually (unless they were added to a sketch and are being imported). To add vertical ordinate dimensions, select the drop-downmenu under the "Smart Dimension" tool, or click anywhere in the graphics area with the right mouse button, and from the pop-up menu select "More Dimensions, Vertical Ordinate."

pS SOLIDWORKS C Smart Model Dimension Items

Spell Format Checker Painter

Smart Dimension n Horizontal Dimension • Vertical Dimension Baseline Dimension ^3 Ordinate Dimension ion

ar Runnin Chamfer Dimension

Edit

ai AJ

yr

||^| Vertical Ordinate Dimension

376

File

Note

Lin Nt Patl

Detail Drawing

DimXpert dimension toggle

1^1 Smart Dimension More Dimensions

M |~f jtjtj

>

Select Redraw

Vertical Baseline

Ordinate 13 3 .. . . . _ .. , i ^ j 1 lull nililll fill ||| 1 ll

Use Multi-jog Leader Lock Sheet Focus

Horizontal

Vertical Ordinate

1

j\

^S^ÂngularRunjjjiia^fUx^nsion Customize Menu

Path Length Chamfer

19.10. - To add ordinate dimensions to our drawing, first we need to select the entity that will be the zero reference or datum and locate it in the screen, and then select the rest of the entities to add ordinate dimensions to. The Ordinate Dimensions are automatically aligned and jogged if needed. In the Detail view, select the lower edge to be the zero reference, click to the right to locate it, and click in the rest of the edges to add the needed dimensions.

H

1/ ^

/

/ /

.500 375 250 .125 0

377


If after adding the ordinate dimensions a dimension is missed, right mouse click in any of the ordinate dimensions, select "Add to Ordinate" and click in the entity that was missed to add it to the ordinate dimensions. rvcLcin v_u111111011ub

Dimension (D5@Sketch30@Top Cover.SL...) Hide Add To Ordinate

Break Alignment Show Alignment ^

Smart Dimension

19.11. - After adding the dimensions we are going to add a note to the drawing. Notes are used in drawings to communicate important information, such as the type of material, surface finish, color, dates, designer, etc. To add notes to a drawing select the "Note" command from the Annotation tab or from the menu "Insert, Annotations, Note"...

pS SOLIDWORKS c Smart Dimension

Abe

Model Items

Spell Checker

Formlt Paintlr

File

A Note

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

Balloon

Annotation

Sketch

He

Surface

near

ote ttern

\-jf Auto Balloon

VORKS Add-lns

Note

/ k'S Weld S

'r

Magnetic Line

View Layout

Window

|_J0 Hole C Sheet Format

Adds a note.

...and click in the drawing to locate the note; the Formatting toolbar is automatically displayed next to the note (unless it's already visible). The text formatting toolbar works just like other applications to change font, color, justification, and style.

1 I

q

1

Century Gothic

v

12

v

0.125in

A B I u -S-

378

=- = -= a xx S? XX

jz 1—

Jz ?=

4= t= 1 J— = = 4-= |

Detail Drawing

After the note is located in the drawing, we can type and format the text just as we would in a word processor. If multiple notes are needed in the drawing, click in the drawing to locate the next note. Feel free to experiment with different fonts and styles for this note. Click OK in the PropertyManager or press the "Esc" key when you are finished adding notes. To modify an existing note double-click in it to activate the edit mode.

!12

v|

0.125in

A

B

jn a s i

=- -=- -=

eS

HUH

v

ll P 11* 1 ll P 11* 1

Century Gothic

l M III

•• XI X xl x

I

{All rounds 0.031" unless otherwise specified} 19.12. - In every Windows file we can store additional file information; this information can include document or software specific information; for example, picture files include information such as picture height, width, color depth, camera information, etc. SOLIDWORKS uses these "Document Properties" to store part, drawing or assembly specific information such as the designer's name, project, customer, part number, supplier, material, etc. as well as parametric information like the component's weight, volume, surface area, dimensions, etc. The advantage of storing this information in the document properties is that this data can be accessed in other areas of the software to help us simplify our work. To show this functionality we'll add Custom Properties to the 3D part file and then use them in the 2D drawing file. Open the Top Cover1 part file (Top Cover.sldprt) or, if it's already open, change to it; from the menu "File, Properties" select the "Summary Information" window and activate the "Custom" tab. This is where document properties are stored. In this example we'll add three parametric properties linked to the part's Volume, Weight, and Material, and a user defined property with the designer's name. To open a part file directly from the drawing, click in the part in any drawing view and select the "Open Part" command from the pop-up menu.

y

ii

Open Part (top cover.sldprt)

o

o

379


19.13. - After opening the 'Top Cover1 go to the menu "File, Properties," and select the "Custom" tab. In the "Property Name" column, click in the first cell and select "Material" from the drop down menu; in the "Type" column "Text" is automatically selected; click in the "Value/Text Expression" cell, and select "Material" from the drop down options. SOLIDWORKS will automatically fill in the correct expression to make the property's value equal to "Cast Alloy Steel," which is the material we had previously assigned to this part. Summary Information Summary

Custom

Configuration Specific BOM quantity: - None -

Property Name 1

Material

2

Type Text

Value / Text Expression v V

Evaluated Value vj

Material ' Mass Density Volume Surface Area Cost-Total Cost Cost - Material Cost Cost - Manufacturing Cost Cost - Material Name

A |

Summary Information Summary

Custom

Configuration Specific BOM quantity:

Property Name 1

Material

2

Type

Value / Text Expression "SW-Material@Top Cover.SLDPRT

Text

Evaluatetyjllue

^

Cast AIIAV Steel

V

After adding a custom property, a new empty row appears. For the second custom property type the name "Volume" and select "Volume" from the value drop down list; for the third property, type the name "Weight" and select "Mass" from the drop-down list. Finally, type' MyName" in the "Property Name" column and fill your name for the value. If the "Evaluated Value" column is not updated, click OK to close the Custom Properties. After re-opening it all, values will be automatically calculated and filled in. When finished save the Top Cover' part file. Summary Information Summary

Custom

Configuration Specific BOM quantity: Edit List

Property Name 1

Type

Value / Text Expression

Evaluated Value

Material

Text

V

•SW-Material@Top Cover.SLDPRT

Cast Alloy Steel

2

Volume

Text

V

*SW-Volume@Top Cover.SLDPRT*

1.82

3

Weight

Text

V

*SW-Mass@Top Cover.SLDPRT

0.48

4

MyName

Text

V

Alejandro Reyes

Alejandro Reyes

5

V

380

Detail Drawing

Property names not listed can be typed in. If these values will be used for other documents, select the "Edit List" button to add them to the drop down list of properties available for all components. 19.14. - After saving the changes, switch back to the Top Cover- SheetVdrawing using the "Window" menu. Now we are going to add a note and link it to the model's "Material" property. Add a new note below the previous one and type: "Material:" While still editing the note click in the "Link to Property" icon from the note's "Text Format" options. pS SOLIDWORKS

m

Revolved Boss/Base

Edit

View

Insert

Help

Tools

©

Swept Boss/Base

j

Extruded Boss/Base

File

j

Viewport q

•

New Window Cascade

Lofted Boss/Base

Tile Horizontally (?>^j Boundary Boss/Base

Features

Sketch

Direct Editing

Evaluate

Q Tile Vertically DimXpert

SOLIDWORKS

Arrange Icons Close All

!•— a— — a

R

vf7 «

, 2 Top Cover - Sheetl *

V

|\

o* Ctrl-Tab

Top Cover (Defaults _Displa> History

Customize Menu

Sensors

AAA

AAA

Format Painter

Linear Note Pattern

Note

&

vr

jketch

-

; ; £

Note Adds a note.

Formattinc

V

1 Text Format

w

A

Century Gothic

• HH1 i

v

12

w

0.125in

AB

I Hi

Material: .,

art ^linno^propertyj

From the "Link to Property" window, select the option "Model found here" and "Drawing view specified in Sheet Properties" to use the Custom Properties of the model in the drawing's note. Now select the "Material" property from the "Property name:" drop down list. Notice the "Evaluated value:" field now shows "Cast Alloy Steel," which is the Top Cover's defined material. Click OK to add the Material's property value to the note and continue.

381


Link to property Use custom properties from

O Current document ® Model found here Drawing view specified in Sheet Properties Selection: Top Cover

(

File Properties

Property name: Material

\

V

J

Evaluated value:

'/w

Date format:

Long

Short

V Showtime

Cancel

OK

Help

A

Depending on how SOLIDWORKS is configured, you may see in the note "$PRPSHEET: Materialthis is the code used by SOLIDWORKS to read part properties. If you see this code it will be replaced by the component's property value after the note is finished. Your note should now look like this:

[*£ O.OOdeg Century Gothic

us 'a

(a)

V Use document font

0.125in

A B I u -s-

|Material: Cast Alloy Steel]

Font...

19.15. - The rest of the parametric notes can be added the same way. Press "Enter" to add a new row in the note; type "Volume." and add a link to the "Volume" 1 Century Gothic v 0.125in v 12 property's value; in the third AB row of the note type "Weight." and add the link to the "Weight" property; finally, add Material: Cast Alloy Steel a fourth row to the note, type Volume: 1.82 "Designer." and add a link to Weight: 0.48 the "MyName" property.

Designer: Alejandro Reyes

382

Detail Drawing

A drawback of using parametric notes that return a numeric value is that the W units of measure are not listed, and they have to be either manually added ^ to the note or by adding a custom property to the part/assembly with the unit of measure. The values are always displayed using the units used in the part. In our example the volume is measured in cubic inches and the weight in pounds. We can manually add the units to the note. After formatting, the final notes will look like this:

All rounds 0.031" un/ess otherwise specified Material: Cast Alloy Steel Volume: 1.82 cu-in Weight: 0.48 Lb. Designer: Alejandro Reyes When a model's (part or assembly) custom properties change, the drawing notes which use those properties will also be updated to reflect their new value. For example, if the 3D model changes in size, both its volume and weight will be different, and both the volume and mass custom property values will be updated accordingly. 19.16. - Add a new layer (make its color black) and assign the reference dimensions to it. Save the drawing and close the file.

i Layer Properties

QShee •

-None-

Creates, edits, or deletes layers. Also, changes the properties and visibility of layers.

v

Add Sheet

Layers Name

Description for

cCa fcj

»

Style

•

Thickn..

OK

Cancel Help

New Delete Move

383

A\


.375

R.250 .125 SECTION A-A R.031

• 4.000

/

7 i/

-.500 -.375 -.250 -.125

-0 2.625

0.500


ft

All rounds 0.031" unless olherwise specified Material: Cast Alloy Steel Volume: 1.82 cu-in Weight: 0.48 Lb. Designer: Alejandro Reyes

•4X 0 .150 THRU ALL

Exercises: Make the detail drawing of the following Engine Project part that were done in the Part Modeling section to match the drawing previously supplied to make each part. High resolution images are included with the exercise files. Cylinder Head

384

Detail Drawing

Drawing Four: The Offset Shaft

.063

—

— .500 —

DETAIL A SCALE 2: 1 5.000 .5C0

0.600!;^-.

063

.063

/

b Material: Chrome Stainless Steel Weight: 0.51 Lb Volume: 1.80 cu-in Designer: Alejandro Reyes

6.500

Description: Part No. ABC-1234

385


Notes:

386

Detail Drawing

The 'Offset Shaft' drawing, although a simple drawing, will help us reinforce previously covered commands including standard and detail views, importing dimensions, manipulating and modifying a dimension's appearance, notes and custom file properties, and we'll learn how to add a break to a view following the next sequence:

P Make new drawing

acb

QLB II

DETAILA 5C*U ': 1

o

IH

II

DETAIL A SCALE 1:1

II H .

<5

•c :ZOB) Insert drawing views

Detail View

O

Broken View

--j.500

%•

fcL ^ nr cib

6

.«.

tm

it

6 ~

Import Dimensions

Arrange Dimensions

"bksnb"-wtitfo e«ei

Add custom properties and notes

20.1. - Since we have already done a few drawings, we'll ask you to make a new drawing using the "A-Landscape" sheet size and turn off the sheet format. Add the Front view by dragging it from the View Palette, and project the Right view. Change the display mode to "Hidden Lines Removed" as shown. Right mouse click in the sheet, select "Properties" and change the sheet's scale to 1:1. Add a detail view of the right side of the shaft as shown.


t o 387


20.2. - For long slender elements like shafts, it's common practice to add a Break to shorten the view and save space in the drawing. To add a break in the Front view, select the "Break" icon from the View Layout tab in the CommandManager or the menu "Insert, Drawing View, Break." pS SOLIDWORKS 1

CD

111

DEB

CD

|f$]

111

O

Cr

File

Edit

I

«-•

Section View

View Layout

Evaluate

Insert

CA Brokerlout Sectiln

Tools

Window

Help

ki Break

Crol Vie!

.


View

Annotation

Sketch

SOLIDWORKS Add-

Break Add break lines to selected view.

We are then presented with the "Broken View" dialog. If the Front view is not selected, click in it to tell SOLIDWORKS which view to break. The Vertical Break option is selected by default, and all we have to do is select where the breaks will be in the view. Click near the right side to locate the first break line, and a second click near the left side to add the second break. For this exercise we'll use the default settings for "Gap size" and "Break line style." Immediately after locating the second break line the view is broken. Click OK to finish the command. [}£) Broken View V

©

X

Message

A

Place the second segment of the break line inthe selected view Broken View Settings

Gap size:

To modify the broken view click-and-drag the break lines. To delete the broken view (un-break) select one of the break lines and delete it.

388

Detail Drawing

20.3. - You probably know what we are going to do now... Yes, import the dimensions from the 3D model. Go to the menu "Insert, Model Items"; remember to select the "Import items into all views" and "Entire Model" options. -.500'

5.000 •

•Arf-ar-

6.500 •

ETAIL A ALE 2 : 1

+ .000

j263

0.600 -.005

r < <

Arrange the imported dimensions as shown in the next image; remember to hold down the "Shift" key while moving dimensions from one view to another.

-- .500 —-

.063

DETAIL A SCALE 2 : 1 —v .500

.063

5.000

0 -600^005

.063

J

/ 6.500 —V

389


20.4. - Open the 'Offset Shaft' part file, and from the menu "File, Properties" add the same custom properties as we did in the Top Cover.' Add a new property called "Description" and fill in a description for the shaft. For this example any description will do. We'll use this description in the drawing and the bill of materials later. The "Summary Information" window should look like this when finished:

.063 •

43

— .500 —-

Open Part (offset shaft.sldprt)

+

DETAIL A SCALE 2 :1 Summary Information Summary

Custom

Configuration Specific BOM quantity: - None -

Property Name

Type


Evaluated Value

1

Material

Text

V

"SW-Material@Offset Shaft.SLDPRT


2

Weight

Text

V

*SW-Mass@Offset Shaft.SLDPRF

0.51

3

Volume

Text

V

4

MyName

Text

V

Alejandro Reyes

Alejandro Reyes

5

Description

Text

V

Part No. ABC-1234

Part No. ABC-1234

6

SW-Volume@Offset Shaft.SLDPRT'

1.80

V

If the values for volume and weight are shown as zeroes, you may have to close the file properties and rebuild the model. When you re-open the model's properties window these values will be populated. 20.5. - Save the 'Offset Shaft' part and go back to the drawing; add a note using the "Note" command from the Annotation tab, and type "Material:" "Volume:" "Weight:", "Designer" and "Description"] use the "Link to Property" function to add the corresponding property's value, and don't forget to add the units of measure.

pS SOLIDWORKS c Smart

Dimension

File

Edit

.

Spell Checker

Insert

Tools

Text Format

JD.' Balloon

Abe

Model Items

View

For Pain

Note

Lin

O.OOdec

$ Auto Balloon

1 | #•...

Magnetic Line View Layout

Annotation

Sketch

Note

— VORKS Add-lns

£

Sh

Link to Property |

Adds a note

390

Detail Drawing

The finished note will be:

Material: Chrome Stainless Steel Weight: 0.51 Lb Volume: 1.80cu-in Designer: Alejandro Reyes Description: Part No. ABC-1234 20.6. - Save and close the drawing file.

— .5c0 —

.063-

DETAIL A SCALE 2: 1 5.000 .500

+.000

0.600'

.063

/

.063

"b Material: Chrome Stainless Steel Weight: 0.51 Lb Volume: 1.80cu-in Designer: Alejandro Reyes

6.500 —'V


391


Notes:

392

Detail Drawing

Drawing Five: The Worm Gear

ASS

.11 v-

B

1.000 — 02.000 -

o

%\P

©2.250 0.625

01.000 •

0.625 -.1 X 45° SECTION A-A UNLESS OTHEitWBESPECIflED:

A

DMI 40-B Aft M WC-iS lOiEfANCIS:

TACIDNAu AMCUiAflMAC « ! HMO 3 IW'O »iACI OCCIuAi S l"*EI ••ACT OSCMAi •

I'tOf 1!Itttt WHCONII OINIM.I

< MSEEI COMU'C »«ME-SEE* E •IO-IIIID.

IOiE?AMCNC»E?: MAIEfhi AISI 1020

DO .JQI5CAII OfAWNG

393

•TAMS 1

OAK

Designer Alejandro Reyes

A

TITLE:

P/N AB-2468

,

SIZE

DWG. NO.

A Worm Gear

SCALE: 1:1

WEIGHT: 0.38

REV

SHEET 1 OF 1


Notes:

394

Detail Drawing

In this lesson we'll review previously covered material and a couple of new options, like adding angular dimensions, changing a dimension's precision and adding chamfer dimensions as well as cropping a view and modifying the Sheet Format. The detail drawing of the 'Worm Gear' will follow the next sequence.

p

U Add Custom Properties to part

Make new drawing

Add new view and Crop it

Add drawing views

jt"

f—h—.400

ife y SECTION A-A

Import and arrange Dimensions

Add Angular Dimension

Add chamfer Dimension

Modify Sheet format

21.1. - Just as we did in the previous drawing, we'll open the 'Worm Gear' model and add the following custom properties before making its detail drawing. With the 'Worm Gear' part's file open, select the menu "File, Properties" and complete it as shown in the next image. Summary Information Summary

Custom

Configuration Specific BOM quantity:

Delete

- None Property Name

1

Material


Type Text

V

'SW-Material@Worm Gear.SLDPRT

Evaluated Value AISI 1020

2

Weight

Text

V

•SW-Mass@Worm Gear.SLDPRT*

0.38

3

Volume

Text

V

'SW-Volume@Worm Gear.SLDPRT

1.32

4

MyName

Text

V

Alejandro Reyes

Alejandro Reyes

5

Description

Text

V

P/N A B-2468

P/N AB-2468

6

V

After adding the custom properties, select the "Make Drawing from Part/Assembly" icon. For the 'Worm Gear" use the Drawing Template with an "ALandscape" sheet size and leave the "Display Sheet Format" option checked in the "Sheet Format/Size" window. We'll learn how to use and edit the sheet format in this exercise.

395


Sheet Format/Size :•) Standard sheet size Preview:

ird formats |a (ansi) Landscape ^^NSIlPortrait^,,^^^ B(ANSI^n
n '

-

V

ift fiMÎI I anHtrariP


•

Browse...

"

Height: 215.90mm

Size

Height:

Width:

1

Width: 279.40mm

@ Display sheet format

O CustoTh

; : jjr.bti'r—

OK

Cancel

Help

21.2. - Just as we've done in previous drawings, first we'll add the main model views to the drawing. Add the Front view from the "View Palette," an Isometric view, and the section view as shown. This is a review of material previously covered. Use "Hidden Line" display mode and "Tangent Edge Removed" for the Front and Section views and "Tangent Edge Visible" for the Isometric view.

0

z

SECTION A-A UNLESS OTHEftVMSEtEECIFEt):

Kornrr«naup comii»un at l-t HrOOaAIIO.ICO-IIAWCOWl-I OfAWMC 6 l-ISSil »t0ntl'0' a nr nrtoDilCI DMN 'ANOfAS AW«Oit WIMODI I-I wfiiu.) »CVMCSONO> 6

OMi-ISD-TS ATI N It-IS lOlf VA t15: •lACIDXLl I A'lC-UlAC.MAC-S UNO S l-TII »|AC1 DICMAl 1

"ZL

iNiiremciOMHrc IOif*A-ICMI. •!»:

OA.

MAI,mi

ilSSDO-1

41*1 ASS' A».CAIOH

AIS11020

>NC00 t>lSCA.( MAW- NC

396

A

TITLE:

P/N AB-2468

(WUC ATM.

SITE

DWG. NO.

REV

A Worm Gear SCALE: 1:1 WEIGHT: 0.3B

SHEET 1 OF 1

Detail Drawing

21.3. - After adding the "Section" view, we need a close-up of the center of the part. We will add a second Front view using the "Model View" command from the View Layout tab and then it will be cropped. The reason for not adding a Detail view is that adding another circle may make the Front view confusing.

pS SQLIDWORKS m Standlrd 3 Vie

••

X

Next

Part/Assembly to Insert

0

m

Edit

i

Section View

m

Vi

CA Detail View

m

Model View Adds an orthogonal or named view

Model View

Message

q:'

Model Pifijected Auxiliary View iew View

View Layou

Select a part or assembly from which to create the view, then click Next.

•

File

based on an existing part or assembly. —I

i

From the "Model View" properties, select the 'Worm Gear' part from the list of currently open files (or Browse to select it) and click in the "Next" arrow at the top to go to the next step.

Worm Gear

Orientation

Browse...

vs

• Create multiple views Standard views:

In the next screen select the Front view from the "Standard views," and leave the "Create multiple views" checkbox cleared, as we only need to add one view; to help us visualize the result turn on the "Preview" checkbox at the bottom.

•

0] $ - In rr<

More views:

>

'Front

'Dimetric •Trimetric Current Model View

|V|Preview

Display Style

© ®•q (4 Scale

O Use sheet scale (•) Use custom scale

2:1

Before adding the view to the drawing, also change its view display style to "Hidden Lines Removed" and change the scale to 2:1 from the view's PropertyManager. Move the mouse pointer to the graphics area and locate the new Front view in the upper left corner. Click OK when done and change the new view's display to "Tangent Edges Removed."

397


21.4. - The second Front view is too big to fit in our page, and since we are only interested in the details near the center, we'll crop the view. In order to make a "Crop View," first we need to draw a closed profile using regular sketch tools. The closed profile can be any shape including circles, rectangles, polygons, ellipses, closed splines, etc. From the Sketch tab in the CommandManager select the "Ellipse" command. To draw an ellipse, click to locate the center, and then locate the major and minor axes. You'll see the preview as you go. Click OK when finished.

O Smart Dimension

/ * [tj - v g)"

(£}

0

Irim Entities

(L Offset Entities

Elli Sketches a complete ellipse. Select the

View Layout

Annotation

g c

Sket ellipse center, then drag to set the major and minor axes.

Start the ellipse

Locate major axis

Locate minor axis to finish

398

h

Detail Drawing

21.5. - Select the ellipse we just drew and click in the "Crop View" command from the View Layout tab. The view will be automatically cropped to the ellipse. pS SOUDWORKS

m

DEB Standard 3 View

i /ro|

fu

•

Edit

cr

Model Projected View View

View Layout

File

Annotation

Auxiliary View

Sketch

Section View

View

Insert

CA

a

Detail View

Broken-out Section

Evaluate

Tools

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

Window

Crop View

Help

Alter ate Pos

Crop View Crops an existing view to show only a portion of the view.

|5o] h=|

To change or delete the crop from a view, select the cropped view in the FeatureManager (it will have a crop icon in it) or in the screen, click with the right mouse button and from the pop-up menu select "Crop View, Edit Crop" or "Remove Crop." Ilfj Worm Gear a Annotations Ha;I Sheetl •

1: ^11 Sheet Formatl

•

(

•

Qi) Drawing Viewl § Drawing View2 ection Vie

l.jj Drawing Vie"'* ) (Drawing View4) £5^ Open Part (worm gear.sldprt) Edit Feature Lock View Position Lock View Focus

Crop View

Edit Crop

Reset slretrh vkihilitv

399


21.6. - After adding the main views, import the dimensions using "Model Items." Remember to select the options "Import items into all views" and "Entire Model." After importing the dimensions, delete and arrange them (Shift-drag) as needed to match the following image; you may have to change one or more dimensions to display as diameter by right-mouse-clicking in them and select "Display Options, Display as Diameter." Add any missing centerlines and center marks.

-.094

-1.000 —

.400 02.000 -

£

02.250

01.000 -

.250

z2

0.625 •

0.625

SECTION A-A LNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: Oki|>6l0>CA«tMMC-IS lOl 1TAKIC1S: MMCIOHAi!

AHCUIARMACH; UNO :

•KMI

DAK

DSAW-M C-tCtID

P/N AB-2468

!«.© *|ACS OICtuAi 3 l-Hf HACI DlCMAl •

COMMI HIS; SIZE

DWG. NO.

REV

A Worm Gear

? IMOD UCIOX II*Af IOTAS A *-Oll wil«Oill i-l^rni'i'sSMCSC'-iC" <«I»ICC3M*AHV>«.M1 »IM>6

DO .IOI5CA.I t>»A»l»C

SCALE: 1:1

WEIGHT:0.38

SHEET 1 OF 1

21.7. - Now we need to add an angular dimension to the inside faces. Using the "Smart Dimension" command select the two edges indicated to add the angular dimension.

32.01°

400

Detail Drawing

The dimension added is using the document's default precision, in this case with two decimal places showing the dimension as 32.01°. In reality, a dimension like this should not be displayed using a precision of hundredths of a degree and needs to be modified. To change the dimension's precision (Significant decimal numbers) select the dimension, move the mouse over the "Dimension Palette" and change the number of decimal places to "None" from the precision's pull-down menu. Click anywhere outside the Dimension Palette or hit the "Esc" key to finish.

None

boa *x+ q

.i-.-; XX

.1234

w

.12345

32.01°

123456 123456'

.12345678

\

.12 (Document)

32 O

*

Smart Model Dimension Items

21.8. -The next thing we need to do is to dimension the chamfered edge. To add a "Chamfer Dimension" either click in the graphics area with the right mouse button, and from the pop-up menu select "More Dimensions, Chamfer" or from the menu "Tools, Dimensions, Chamfer" or from the "Smart Dimension" drop-down icon.

n • b!

Spell Format Checker Painter

Smart Dimension Horizontal Dimension Vertical Dimension Baseline Dimension Ordinate Dimension

153

LL! Horizontal Ordinate Dimension 3

Vertical Ordinate Dimension

•v3 Angular Running

"t

401

M

Chamfer Dimension

ision

A Note

A.

a

Lir N Pal


Comment

•

^ Smart Dimension More Dimensions

•

Annotations

•

Drawing Views

•

Tables

•

Change Layer

n

• ©

Horizontal Vertical Baseline

Ordinate 12 3 Horizontal Ordinate !_U

a

Vertical Ordinate

J,2

&

Chamfer

1 K

To dimension the chamfer select the chamfered edge first, then the vertical (or horizontal) edge to measure the angle against it, and finally locate the dimension.

k 1

32°

-.100x45.00° 21.9. - We'll finish the Chamfer Dimension by changing the precision for both distance and angle. Select the chamfer dimension, and from the dimension's properties change the "Tolerance/Precision" to ".1" to change the dimension to one decimal place. In the "2nd Tolerance/Precision" select "None" to remove the decimal places from the angle dimension. We have to do this change in the PropertyManager, because the "Dimension Palette" can only change both values to the same precision and not individually.

402

Detail Drawing

Dimension

Value

Leaders

Other

Style

Tolerance/Precision 15?.

None

C .XXX

,1

2nd Tolerance/Precision None

-—•.1 X 45°

None

Primary Value

21.10. - When we started this drawing we chose to include the title block in it. The title block is the area of the drawing where important information is documented: company name, part number, material, etc. In SOLIDWORKS this is called the "Sheet Format." One characteristic of the sheet format is that it is "locked," and we cannot change it while we are working in the drawing views. To change the title block, right-mouse-click in the drawing area or in "Sheet Formatf in the Feature Manager, and from the pop-up menu select "Edit Sheet Format." /

ISn Worm Gear

--™ —

[|jP Select Other

(a) Annotations *• ICT) Sheetl

t I.

I Sheet Format!^ Sheet (Sheet FormatD

Qj) Drawing View

•

(

•

|ij Drawing Vi

•

S Section Vii

Zoom/Pan/Rotate

•

Recent Commands

•

Sheet (Sheetl)

CD

Edit Sheet Formaf^\ k

|iy I Edit Sheet Format

^

Q\ Drawing ViewAdd Sheet...

Add Sheet... [ft Copy

X g=l

Delete r,

W

ft

Copy

X

Delete

r:__

After selecting "Edit Sheet Format" we access the sheet format where we can make changes to it; while editing the sheet format all the sketch tools are available to modify it as needed. Notice that the drawing views are automatically hidden when editing the "Sheet Format." The default sheet format has a few parametric notes that are linked to the model's file properties like its name and material, and there are other parametric notes which are linked to the drawing's file properties, like the drawing's scale, sheet number, sheet size, etc.

403


UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANC ES:

TITLE:

FRACTIONAL 2 ANGULAR: MACH £

P/N AB-2468

BEND •

TWO PLACE DECIMAL

2

THREE PLAC E DECIMAL

t

MFG APPR.

INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER:

COMMENTS:

SIZE DWG. NO.

aisi 1020

A Worm Gear

SCALE: 1:1 WEIGHT: 0.38

DO NOTSCALE DRAWING

REV

SHEET 1 OF 1

21.11. - Edit the notes by double-clicking in them to change their font size and style as needed, and add a new note linked to your name. Note that the "Material," "Weight," "Description" {Title:) and component name are automatically filled in automatically from the 3D model's properties, and the scale and sheet number are filled in from the 2D drawing's properties. These parametric notes are already included in the default sheet format. Format the notes to fit correctly in the spaces provided in the Sheet Format.

Notes, like dimensions and other drawing elements, can also be assigned to a different layer to change their color.

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:


A

DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

TITLE:

TOLERANC ES: FRACTIONAL 2 ANGULAR: MACH £

BEND :

TWO PLACE DECIMAL

2

THREE PLAC E DECIMAL

±

P/N AB-2468

INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER: COMMENTS:

AISI 1020

DO NOTSCALE DRAWING

SIZE DWG. NO.

Worm Gear

SCALE: 1:1 WEIGHT: 0.38

REV

SHEET 1 OF 1

1 After we finish modifying the title block, exit the sheet format and return to editing the drawing by selecting "Edit Sheet" from the right mouse button menu in the drawing area, or clicking in the "Sheet Format" confirmation corner.

404

Detail Drawing

Zoom/Pan/RotBte

•

Recent Commands

•

x| MOL

Sheet (Sheet Formatl) ££] Title Block Fields... ^^^Htemafa^prder... Edit Sheet

Idol

\&n

^ >.

e t£| Copy X

Delete

1

Relations/Snaps Options...

If we modify an empty drawing's Sheet Format and save it as a template, the title block changes will be saved with the template and be available for new drawings based on this template. See the Appendix for more information on creating new templates and modifying existing ones. 21.12. - Change the reference dimensions (grey) to the "Format" layer to change their color to black, save and close the drawing file.

1 MV-

0 1.000 — 4i'II

02.000

02.250 0.625

01.000

0.625 1 X45° SECTION A-A LMLESS OTHEtVUBE SPECIFIED:

..

Designer Alejandro Reyes TITLE:

P/N AB-2468 PROPHIMM
fOlECAHCNC »Ef: AISI 1020

tEPKJDllCIDIW PAriO*ASAU*Oll

WI»Olll l-E v>PilE-|P|rwED'IO' -PGEflCOMPAH-HVAl "StEi-E »IG-»IIIO,

DO MQISCAI1 PWWMC

405

SIZE

DWG. NO.

A Worm Gear

SCALE: 1:1

WEIGHT: 0,38

REV

SHEET 1 OF 1


Exercises: Make the detail drawing of the following Engine Project parts that were done in the Part Modeling section to match the drawings previously supplied to make each part. High resolution images are included on the exercise files. Connecting Rod

Crankshaft

Con Rod Crankshaft Half Bushing

Bushing Top Con Rod

\

Oil Seal

Pin ConRod-Piston

\ \ \ \ •.

0

406

czy Top Compression Ring

Detail Drawing

Middle Compression Ring

i

TIP: Using the Section View command's default behavior makes a section the full width of the view; since we only need a section of one side of the ring to show its profile, after adding the Top view, draw a line using the sketch Line tool as indicated, and with the line selected, select the "Section View" command. Turn on the "Slice section" option to show only the section's surface.

a Section View

Detail View

m Baa Broken-out Section

Break

Crop View

Section View Adds a section view,aligned section view, or half section view by cutting the parent view with a section line.

After making the section view it will be aligned to the Top view and have the same scale. To get a bigger view of the compression ring's profile, right-mouse-click in it and select "Alignment, Break Alignment" to un-lock the view's alignment and allow us to reposition it. Locate the section view centered above the Top view and change its scale to 8:1; continue adding dimensions and annotations as needed to complete the drawing.

407


Box Selection

1 SECTION A-A rf SCALE 8 : 1

Lasso Selection Select Other Zoom/Pan/Rotate Recent Commands

View (Drawing View2)

Lock View Position Lock View Focus Isometric Section View Alignment Reset sketch visibility

Break Alignment bylojigin

Tangent Edge

AJign Vertical by Origin

Jump to Parent View

Align Horizontal by Center

Comment

Align Vertical by Center

Replace Model Convert View to Sketch

SECTION A-A SCALE 8 : 1

408

Detail Drawing

Drawing Six: The Worm Gear Shaft

-2.750-

-1375-

£ .500

.188

-5.250 -4.625 -

t\ \ \

0.425

.250

.043 •

0.500

V ) py

1 /

.094

•j..^gg2z[

JA

I

R.125 '

UNLEtt OTHERIMS! SPECIFIED: TOLERANCE!: ANCUAR: MACHt t£ND ! THREE PLACE DECIMAL ! Miirrni cioMiitc IOIEIA'CNC »FF: MAILIIAI

MtOlPHIlA«Y AMDCOhlflDEWTIAl

Chiom e Stainless Steel

WI-OUI l«E"
»ro»«mo.

01.000

'1MB"

MKI «sr A*»l EAl DM

DO MOISCAll DTAVNC

409

NAME DRAWN

DATE


EN<3 APPR. WfCAPrtt.

Shalt with Hex Drive

OA. SEE

^

DWG

NO.

REV

W orm Gear S haft

SCALE: 1:1

WEIGHT: 0.42

SHEET 1 OF 1


Notes:

410

Detail Drawing

Just as we did with the 'Offset Shaft' drawing, we'll reinforce making new drawings, adding views, importing dimensions, moving dimensions from one view to another and changing a diameter's display style. In this lesson we will learn how to use the Property Tab Builder to help us add custom properties more efficiently. For our drawing we'll add Left, Front, and Top views, and import and arrange the model dimensions. To complete the drawing we'll learn how to make a new type of view called "Broken-Out Section" which is regularly used to look into an area of the model without having to make a section view. 22.1. - The first thing we are going to do is to add several custom properties to the 'Worm Gear Shaft' 3D model, including Material, Weight, Description ("Shaft with hex drive") and "MyName." A quick way to add custom properties to a model is by using the "Custom Properties Tab" located towards the bottom of the Task Pane. When used for the first time we need to create a new template with the properties we want to add to a model, drawing, or assembly file, but once we have made our custom templates, adding properties to a file is very quick. Select the "Custom Properties Tab." To create a new template, press the "Create Now..." button to launch the "Property Tab Builder" program separately from SOLIDWORKS.

••

(3

x

a

jl &

«

Custom Properties Apply

a

©

Custom Properties Click to display this task pane tab.

D laul

?

|

Reset

A property page for part files was not found. Click 'Create now..." to launch the Property Tab Builder. If you already have a template, place it in the folder specified in Tools Options - File Locations - Custom Property Files. Press F5 to refresh the page.

Create now...

411

-X

n

j


The Property Tab Builder is an easy to use stand-alone program to create forms containing the custom properties we want to add to our models using a dragand-drop interface. In the "Control Attributes" side we can define if this template is for a part, a drawing, an assembly, or a weldment. In this example we are going to make a Part template. Property l ab Builder

Q

?- - • x

y Control Attributes

Custom Properties

Groupbox

Message:

Groupbox

Textbox

List

i

B

Assembly Drawing

Weldment

Number

22.2.- First select the "Groupbox" in the form and change its caption to "Exercise Properties" in the Control Attributes pane.

q 0 h

El© Property I aD Buiiaer

?' - • X Control Attributes

Custom Properties

Groupbox

J

Exercise Properties

I

A

i

Capbr <1:

Exercise Properties

Custom Property Attributes

Textbox

Defaufc

I Expanded Collapsed

List

22.3.- The next step is to add a "Textbox" to the form by dragging it into the group box and changing its properties.

• & y

Ijj@L Property i ao builder Groupbox

?' - • X Control Attributes

Custom Properties Exercise Properties

.

Caption:

Exercise Properties

*

Textbox

Custom Property Attributes k

—LzJ

Expanded Collapsed

412

Detail Drawing

Type "Material" in the Caption to know what the property is. From the Name drop down list select "Material"; this will be the name of the property. The Type of property is Text, and for the Value of the property select "[SW-Material]" from the drop-down list as we did before with the part files.

• t* h-

£0 Property I ab builder -

Groupbox

1" - lj Control Attributes

Custom Properties Exercise Properties

Material

Custom Property Attributes Textbox

Name:

Material

• u

List SW-Material

Number

One important detail to keep in mind is Configurations: that Custom Properties can be configuration specific or model specific. At h the bottom of the Control Attributes pane select the "Show on Custom Tab" option for all properties in this example, otherwise the properties will be added to the "Configuration Specific" tab and to use them later we would have to remember to call the configuration properties instead. 22.4.- Drag a second Textbox into the form; the other textbox will move to make room for it. Drop it right under the Material textbox at the bottom and fill in the control attributes. Type "Weight" in the Caption, select "Weight" from the Name drop-down list and "[SW-Mass]" from the Value drop-down list Property I ab builder Groupbox

Q & 0 Control Attributes

Custom Properties

Caption:

Exercise Properties

Material

Material


[SW-Material] extbc •

Name:

Material

Type:

Text

Value;

[SW-Material]

Configurations: Number

413


22.5. - Add three more text boxes for the "Volume," "Designer," (MyName property name) and "Description" as shown next. [j© Property i ao builder

Control Attributes

Custom Properties

Groupbox

d a

Q & U Caption:

Exercise Properties

Weight

Material


[SW-Material] Textbox

Name:

| Weight

Vatue:

| [SW-Mass]

Weight [SW-Mass]

List

0

Configurations: |jlj]

Number

11' j

m

If the property name is not listed in the "Name" drop-down list, we can type it ourselves, as is the case with the Volume property. Property I aD builder

Control Attributes

Custom Properties

Groupbox

?• - d x

Q & y* Caption:

Exercise Properties

Volume

Material



Name:

Weight

, Volume

Type:

Text

Value:

[SW-Volume]

[SW-Mass]

List

h Number

Volume Configurations:

[SW-Volume]

m

In the next property use the caption "Designer" to label it, type "MyName" in the custom property Name box, and enter your name in it. This value can be changed later, but for now it will be pre-set to help us save time.

414

Detail Drawing

Ejfil Property I at> builder -

- el x

Q ^ U Control Attributes

Custom Properties

Groupbox

Caption:

Exercise Properties

Designer

Material



Weight

Name:

MyName

Type:

Text

Value:

Alejandro Reyes

[SW-Mass] List

0

Volume Configurations:

' impl IjSW-VoluggL,

Number

m Checkbox

|"


f

For the last property leave the Value field empty; this value will be typed when we add the custom properties to the part files later on EgJ Property i ao builder .

- El x

Q $ H Control Attributes

Custom Properties

Groupbox

Exercise Properties

*

Caption:

Description

Material



Weight

Name:

Description

Type:

Text

[SW-Mass] Volume Configurations:

[SW-Volume] Designer Checkbox

E

IS *.

Alejandro Reves Description

Radio

'

G

Other controls that can be added to a Property Tab template include drop down lists (with typed items, linked to text files, excel spreadsheets, or data bases), numbers using spin boxes, checkboxes and radio buttons for multiple selection items.

415


22.6. - Now we need to save this template. Press the "Save" command and save it in the default custom property folder: C:\Program Files\SOLIDWORKS Corp\SOLIDWORKS\lang\english Close the Property Tab Builder and return to SOLIDWORKS. Ejgl Property I aD builder ^ Groupbox

11 •

?' - • x

• £|'M Control Attributes

Custom Properti Exercise Properties

Caption:

Description

A

Material



Name:

Description

Save SolidWorks Properties template

©

v c

« lang • english

Organize •

Search english

New folder rA

Name

Date modified

Type

sheetformat

8/27/2015 9:22 PM

File folder

weldments

12/23/2014 9:32 AM

File folder

File name: Exercise Properties]

V

Save as type: SolidWorks part properties template (*.prtprp)

V

Save

Hide Folders

&

Cancel

IMPORTANT: If the template is saved in a different location due to file permissions or system settings, go to the menu "Tools Options, System Options, File Locations" and from the drop-down list select "Custom Property Files" and change it to point to the new location with user read and write permissions. 22.7. - Switch back to SOLIDWORKS, and open the "Custom Properties" tab. (If the template is not visible select inside the tab and press "F5" to refresh and load the template we just made.) The properties added to the template are ready for us to apply to the part. The "Material" property is taken from the assigned part's material, "Weight" and "Volume" are automatically calculated and filled, "Designer" is preset with the value we entered in the template (but can be changed if needed), and the only thing we need to do is to type a description, which was intentionally left empty to enter a different value for each part. Type a description for the 'Worm Gear Shaft,' press "Apply" to add the properties to the 3D model and save the file. 416

Detail Drawing

«

Custom Properties Apply

Properties Apply

Reset

Exercise Properties

A

A -


Material

I®


Weight

0.52

Weight

0.52

Volume

1.86

Volume

1.86

Designer

Designer

Alejandro Reyes

e

ft

Exercise Properties

Material

oq
Reset

Alejandro Reyes

0

Description

Description Shaft with Hex Drive

22.8. - Now that we have added the custom properties to the 'Worm Gear Shaft,' make a new drawing using the "A-Landscape" drawing template including the sheet format. Add the Front view from the View Palette; click above it to add a Top view, and to the left to add the Left view. Use "Hidden Lines Removed" mode for all 3 views. Change the sheet scale to 1:1, edit the Sheet Format to add the missing custom property notes and change their formatting to fit in the spaces provided. I Worm Gear Shaft

Ian Worm Gear Shaft

IaI Annotations

I Annotations Sheet! •

Sh

' F~l Sheet!

Sheet (Sheet 1)

| Sheet Format"

•

H| Display Grid

• |Ca) Drawing View

|^"l Edit Sheet Format

•

Lock Sheet Focus

•

Sheet (Sheet Formatl)

•ptm

m

• Drawing V» m

• Drawing Vii

Is 1 Edit Sheet Format

Add Sheet... Add Sheet...

Copy

Copy Properties...

X

3?

Delete

|s=| Properties...

Relations/Snaps Options...

Relations/Snaps Options-

Sheet Properties Sheet Properties

Zone Parameters Type of projection

Scale

O First angle

Next view label:

A

(•) Third angle

Next datum label:

A

Sheet Format/Size (§) Standard sheet size

Preview

0 Only show standard format

417


INLB 8 OTHOttMlf iPECIflffr:


Shaft with Hex Drive

IICIQMillC

HOtllSIAtl AMOCOWMMWIAt

OA. SIZE

^

DWG. NO.

REV

Worm Gear Shaft

SCALE: 1:1

WEIGHT:0.52

SHEET I OF 1

22.9. - Import the dimensions from the model...

-5.250-

-2.750 -

•ma-n

.063-

r

.063

R.125

li.3/&4

-.250

=F • 0.625

J

01.000

jr

t

LNtB* OTHHWAE SfECIflEP:



MfQWHAKTAMBCWMIMUTIAl mi NKBf I D*JCOMIAWIPWI"fi DWWIMGG I"! 5C-.Ir»WO' -iMJUICOMPAirmMC HR|>, AV PI'TOPJCIOI NfAfl Of ASA»«Oi I

SIZE

^

DWG

NO

REV

Worm Gear Shaft

wimow i»i»«nt«'ifMesoio>
00 *OI SCAll PIAWHC

418

SCALE: 1:1

WEIGHT:0.52

SHEET I OF 1

A

Detail Drawing

22.10. - And arrange them. • 1.3 75 '

-2.750 '

.500 •

- 5.250 063 -

0.625

- 4.625 -

r

+

.063

.250

.094

R.I 25

£_

J

Y

01000

0.600 22.11. - One more thing we need to add to the drawing are the centerlines. SOLIDWORKS allows us to add a centerline to every cylindrical face of the model. To add centerlines to our drawing views, select the "Centerline" command from the Annotation Tab, and click in the cylindrical surface that we need to add a centerline to. When finished adding centerlines click OK to finish. ark

A Bio

R™ Centerline

Revision Cloud

enterline

Adds centerlines to a view or to selected entities.

1.375

2.750

Q.

419


1.375 •

"2.750

.500 •

- 5.250 X>63 •

0.625

- 4.625 •

r

JZ

.063

I

+

— .250

1

.094

01x100

r.i 25 —

0.500

22.12. - Instead of changing the Front view display to "Hidden Lines Visible" to see the CA H ft Broken-out eak Crop details of the keyway, we will make a "Broken- Detai View Section View Out Section" view. What the broken out section does is to cut-out a region of the view to a SOLDW specific depth in order to reveal details otherwise Broken-out Section Adds a broken-out section to an hidden, without having to make a section view. existing view exposing inner details of Select the "Broken-Out Section" command a model. from the "View Layout" tab, and similar to the "Detail" view, where the circle tool is automatically selected to define the detail area, in the Broken-out-Section the "Spline" tool is selected in order for us to define the region to break out. The Spline is a smooth polynomial curve connected by multiple points. To draw the "Spline" add points approximately as shown around the keyway area in the Front view to surround it. Splines can be open curves, but in this case we need a closed spline; to close the spline the last point has to be made coincident to the first one.

2 pS SOLIDWORKS

O

/•

Smart Dimension

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

ooo

OOO linear S OOO

Sketches a spline. Click to add spline points that shape the curve. Sketch

F

Mirror E

Trim

Annotation

Window

Pd Spline

(Z) " (jy View Layout

File

Evaluate

420

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

1—

Sheet Format

Detail Drawing

063

4.625

L

250

.063

r

.094

01.0

R.l 25

If we want to define the region for the Broken-Out Section using a different tool, such as lines, arcs, or ellipses, the only condition we have to meet is the profile has to be a closed profile and needs to be pre-selected before activating the "Broken-Out Section" command. 22.13. - When the last point of the Spline is added, we get the "Broken-Out Section" properties, where we are asked to enter a depth to make the cut or select an edge of the model to define the depth. Select the vertical edge indicated in the Top view to define how deep the cut will be. By selecting the vertical edge, the section's depth is set to its midpoint, effectively making the cut go up to the center of the part. Activating the "Preview" option will allow us to see the resulting section. •• - 2.750

-1.375 •

.188

pUJ Broken-out Section •

X

Wt

Depth ©

500-

ai25in

-5.250-4.625-

.063 -

n Preview

.063

_c

— .250

JZ

.094

J-

01.000

R.l 25

1.500

Click OK to finish the Broken-out Section. .063

•4.625

£2

.250

.063 -77

c

.094

01.000

R.l 25

To edit or delete the "Broken-Out Section," right-mouse-click inside the section's region and from the "Broken-Out Section" menu select "Delete," "Edit Definition" (to change its depth) or "Edit Sketch" to modify the cut-out area.

421


.094 H. out Section! of Worm Gear Shaft-SectionPart-1 j

/

i

i

Box Selection 7^Lasso Selection

[JP

Select Other Zoom/Pan/Rotate

•

Recent Commands

•

Broken-out Section

•

a OC

Components

Delete Edit Definition

Show/Hide

k

Component Line Font...

I

Edit Sketch

^

22.14. - In this drawing, it may be a good idea to manually add a reference dimension for the hexagonal cut, and add a parenthesis to it. To show the construction circle we can make the sketch for the hexagonal cut visible. Expand the Left View in the FeatureManager, right-mouse-click in the cut's sketch and select "Show" from the pop-up menu. Save the drawing and close the file.

|^j Drawing ViewZ Worm Gear Shaft<12>

w

•

[§) History

•

|~T| Annotations

fo*| Sensors

0.625

O-

0^5 Chrome Stainless Steel \ Front Plane

+

Top Plane Right Plane Origin •

Base

•

Cut-Extrude1

w

IIS] Cut-Extrude2

Drawing View3 ^§3 Worm Gea

0

0.500

Show

422

Detail Drawing

-2.750 -

1.375 -

— .188

-5.250-

.600-

.063 .625

-4.625 -

— .250

r

.063

£_

.094

01.000

R.125 •

0.500

LHLESS 01HE8VW5E SPECIFIED:

A


•wc ID'iai:

TITLE:

A nodi Af!MAC« " HMD WO 1ACI OIC MAi •

COMMI HIS

DfAWItjCG I HE ScJil PfOHJirQl

»1M». AMI" mfODiCIO-i W*A(IOfASA W*3P(

••"II-QUI l"|v>FIII>l»-!fMESOMQ'

B


Hiir»(iiciOMiirc

FtDHlSTASff *U6 COUHOEMn Al

Chiome Stainless Steel

•miASf

lis ID o>i A»iCAIOH

DO .ICISCA.E DMAI'C

423

SIZE

^

DWG. NO.

REV

Worm Gear Shaft

SCALE: 1:1

WEIGHT:0.52

SHEET 1 OF 1


Exercises: Make the detail drawing of the following Engine Project parts that were done in the Part Modeling section to match the drawings previously supplied for each part. These will complete the Engine Project drawings. High resolution images are included with the exercise files. Internal Retaining Ring

Retaining Ring Crankshaft Bearing

Muffler

Oil Dip Stick

3

0

0 30

Engine Block

Piston Head

< "

o o

Oil Control Ring

Exhaust Cover

424

Detail Drawing

Oil Pan

Crank Case Top

425


Extra Credit: Using the parts made for the gas grill project make the corresponding detail drawings. The finished components can be downloaded from http://www.mechanicad.com/download.html.

R.I 25

a .400

R.750

0.250

1.000 01.000

0.750 si

0.625

Ui

1 1

— .875-

1.250 1.000

rn

60°

000 I

0.500 R.500

1.500

8.000

2.000

1

3.000

-f^f r

/

R1.500

1.500 R8.000

DETAIL B SCALE 1 :2

r.500

1.875

0.375

0.125

' 5°

4.000

7 303

.125

3.000

R.250

426

Assembly Modeling

Assembly Modeling The next step in the design after making the parts and drawings is to get all the parts together into an assembly. The process of designing the parts first and then assembling them is known as "Bottom-Up Design." Think of it as buying a bicycle; when you open the box, you get all the pieces needed ready for assembly. A different approach known as "Top-Down Design" is where the parts are designed while working in the assembly; this is a very powerful tool that allows us to match parts to each other, changing a part if another component is modified. In this book we'll cover the Bottom-Up Design technique, since it is easier to understand and is also the basis for the advanced Top-Down Design, which is covered in the Beginner's Guide to SOLIDWORKS Level II book. In general, it's a good idea to design the parts, make the assembly to make sure everything fits and works as expected (Form, Fit and Function), and then make the drawings of the parts and assemblies; this way the drawings are done at the end, when you are sure everything works correctly. So far, we've been working on parts, single components that are the building blocks of an assembly. In an assembly we have multiple components, either parts or other assemblies (in this case called sub-assemblies). The way we tell SOLIDWORKS how to relate components (parts and/or sub-assemblies) together is by using Mates (or relations) between them. Mates in the assembly are similar to the geometric relations in the sketch, but in the assembly we use faces, planes, edges, axes, vertices and even sketch geometry from the features in the components in order to mate them to each other. To make an assembly we add components one at a time until we complete the design. Every component in an assembly has six degrees of freedom, meaning that they can move and rotate six different ways: three translations along the X, Y and Z axes, and three rotations about the X, Y, and Z axes. By mating components to each other we are essentially restricting how they move in relation to one another based on which degrees of freedom are constrained. This is the basis for assembly motion and simulation. The first component we add to the assembly has all six degrees of freedom fixed by default. Therefore, it's a good idea to make sure the first component added to the assembly is one that will be a reference for the rest of the components. For example, if we make a bicycle assembly, the first component added to the assembly would be the frame. For the gear box we are designing, the first component added to the assembly will be the 'Housing,' as the rest of the components will be attached to it.

427


Notes:

428

a29


Notes:

430

Assembly Modeling

In making the 'Gear Housing' assembly, we will learn about assembly tools and operations, including making new assemblies, adding components, adding Mating relations between them and adding fasteners. We'll cover component design tables, interference detection, assembly exploded views, and how to change a part's dimensions while working in the assembly. The sequence to follow while making the 'Gear Housing' assembly is the following: £5^ Begin Assembly

o

Part/Assembly to Insert Open documents:

New Assembly

Add the Housing; change configuration

Add and mate the first Side Cover

Add and mate the second Side Cover

Add and mate the Worm Gear Shaft

Change component colors

Add and mate the Worm Gear

Add and mate the Offset Shaft

Add and mate the Top Cover

Add screws

Find interferences and correct them

Make exploded view

23.1. - The first thing we need to make a new assembly is to select the "New" document command, select the Assembly template, and click OK. y

D -^5? New

(Ctrl+N)

Crea tes a new document.

431


New SOLIDWORKS Document

••

a 30 representation of a single design component

Assiniibiv

Drawing

a 3D arrangement of parts and/or other assemblies


23.2. -The first thing we see when we make a new assembly is the "Begin Assembly" dialog to start adding components. As we discussed previously, the 'Housing' will be the first component to be added. Click "Browse" to locate the 'Housing' part file, select it in the "Open" dialog box making sure we are using the "Machined" configuration in the "Configurations" drop-down menu. If you cannot see the component that you want, make sure you are looking in the correct folder and have the "Files of Type" set to "Part' in the "Quick Filter." Click "Open" when done. If you have the "Graphics Preview" option box checked, you will see a preview of the component being added. ffl [Pip Begin Assembly V

X

-M

Open

(£)

-w

Organize •

^

v c

Jjj « 2016-1 • Book Files • Finished Files

Search Finished Files

New folder

, 1 *

Part/Assembly to Insert

Open documents:

^ DV a HC

Bottle.SLDPRT

Bottle

Cup.SLDPRT

Cylindrical

Housing.SLDPRT

Cam.SLDPRT

Loft.SLDPRT

ju t Mf

Na

Offset Shaft

Browse..

%

I\

c_a Wl

Complete.SLDPR

Offset

Side

Shaft.SLDPRT

Cover.SLDPRT

Spring.SLDPRT

Threads-Finished .SLDPRT

T Thumbnail Preview

l^l Start command when creating new '—'assembly @ Graphics preview

Top fpr SI nPRT

Variable Pitch Snrinn SI nPRT

Mode: [

Worm Gear IptP SI nPR Display States:

Worm Gear Shaft SI nPRT

Worm (Spar si nPRT

.Display St v

OMake virtual Configurator^ Machined "Machine

l~1 Envelope Quick Filter

@ Show Rotate context toolbar File name: Housing.SLDPRT

SOLIDWORKS Files (\sldprt; *.sl Ope«\

\-r

k

432

1

Assembly Modeling

23.3. - After selecting the 'Housing' we have to locate it in the assembly; when we move the mouse the part's preview follows it. What we want to do is to locate the 'Housing' at the assembly's origin. If you cannot see the assembly's origin (which is hidden in the default assembly template), turn it on by selecting the menu "View, Hide/Show, Origins" (this can be done while you are inserting a component). The reason to locate the 'Housing' at the assembly's origin is to have the Housing's planes and origin aligned with the assembly's planes and origin. To add the 'Housing' AND align it with the assembly's origin, click the OK button or move the mouse pointer to the assembly's origin and click in it. (The cursor will have a double origin next to it and you will see the 'Housing' "snap" in place before clicking.)

o i

& If the 'Housing' is mistakenly added using the "Forge" configuration, do not worry, as it can be changed. Select the "Housing" part in the FeatureManager, select the "Machined" configuration from the pop-up toolbar and accept the change with the green OK checkmark. ^ Asseml (Default) •

^ Asseml (Default)

k

[©) History fijl

8) History fo) Sensors

Sensors

Annnratinnt

Forge

Model for Foundry"

\j Machined 'Machine Shop Model*

0

ic

V

&b *

"sj (f) Housing<1> (Forge
'sj) W Housing<1> (Forge
Origin *

^5 (f) Housing
f# Mates

433

fll


If the component added to the assembly has configurations, the selected configuration's name is shown next to the component's name in the FeatureManager in parentheses. 23.4.-Once in the Assembly environment, the toolbars are changed in the CommandManager; now we have an Assembly tab. Also notice at the bottom of the Assembly FeatureManager a special folder called "Mates." This is where the relations between components are stored.

pS SOLIDWORKS s9

Insert Components

Assembly

Layout

File

Edit

View

111! qd

%

insert

Tools

im

Window

^

Move Linear Smart Component Fasteners Component Pattern

Mate

Sketch

k- I I

d

Help

id Show Hidden Components

Assembly Reference Features Geometry

New Motion Study

Bill of Materials

q"

Exploded View

lnstant3D

Update Speedpak

p pa

SOLIDWORKS Ada-Ins

r\

^9 v-

As5em1 (Default) *

o

^1History \p\ Sensors

>

©

a Annotations Front Plane Top Plane

^^ÎÔrigin * h.

^ (f) Housing<1> (Machined<
2

o

^

©

©

o o %

&

V

E & To the left of the 'Housing' in the FeatureManager, we can see a letter "f; this means that the part is "Fixed" and all six degrees of freedom are constrained, therefore it cannot move or rotate about any axis. The first component in the assembly is always automatically fixed and subsequent components are not.

ffl Ho sing< 1> (Machined<
434

Assembly Modeling

23.5. - To add the second component to our assembly, click in the "Insert Components" command in the Assembly tab or the menu "Insert, Component, Existing Part/Assembly"; browse to the folder where the 'Side Cover' part was saved, and open it. As with the 'Housing,' make sure the "Machined" configuration is selected before opening the 'Side Cover.'

pS SOUQWORKS Insert

File

te

Components

Edit

View

gcj gjq

Cor

Linear Component Pattern

u? Assembly

Insert Components Adds an existing part or subassembly

is 1 Insert

Tools

Window

— thea"embly;

Help

Component ^

& Existing Part/Assembly...

Mate,,, Mate Controller,..

New Assembly.,. Insert Part from Block...

Component Pattern...

Assembly from [Selected]

Mirror Components...

Copy with Mates...

Smart Fasteners... jy] Smart Features...

Customize Menu

ijjj® Exploded View...

Open 'f Organize

t

«< 2016-1 • Book Files • Finished Files

v

C,

Search Finished Files fi

is - SI ®

New folder

£ Al

i-

t ®

be

h be i 1

Bottle Loft.SLDPRT

Bottle.SLDPRT

Offset Shaft Complete.SLDPR

Offset Shaft.SLDPRT

13® Cup.SLDPRT

"

TEES

Mode: I p,

'

Housing.SLOPRT

Spring.SLOPRT

Threads-Finished .SLDPRT

m

Side Cover.SLDPRT

v

Cylindrical Cam.SLDPRT

Display States: .Display St v

^rî

Configuf

^Hin^

Quick Filter:

v

File name: Side Cover.SLDPRT

SOLIDWORKS Files (\sldprt; *.sl ' Open

435

l*§|

W

Cancel


Place the 'Side Cover' next to the 'Housing' as seen in the next image. Don't worry about the exact location; we'll locate it accurately in the next step using mates.

<8

isa 0

n

Insert Component <•

X

-N

Message Part/Assembly to Insert Open documents: Aft Side Cover

©

\

!

v.

1;

Configuration: Machined

A

Browse-

Thumbnail Preview

rî Start command when creating new —' assembly 0 Graphics preview 0 Make virtual 1

I Envelope

@ Show Rotate context toolbar

23.6. - Notice that after adding the 'Side Cover' to the assembly, its name is preceded by a (-) in the FeatureManager; this means that the part has at least one unconstrained (free) degree of freedom. Since this part was just added, all six degrees of freedom are unconstrained (free) and the part can move in any direction and rotate about all three axes.

A) Annotations Front Plane Top Plane Right Plane Origin 1> (Machined<(IVlachined <
23.7. - Now that we have two components in the assembly, we are ready to add the mates (Relations) between the 'Housing' and the 'Side Cover.' The mates will help us reference one component File Edit View Insert To< to another, locating and restricting pS SOLIDWORKS their motion. As explained earlier, qq components can be mated using CJCS their faces, planes, edges, Insert Linear Mate Smart Component Components vertices, axes, and sketch Fasteners Pattern geometry. Click on the "Mate" icon in the Assembly tab or select the Assembly Layout Sketc menu "Insert, Mate" to locate the Mate 'Side Cover' on the 'Housing.' Positions two components relative to

%

one another.

436

Assembly Modeling

9

Whenever possible, select model faces as your first option for mates; faces are easier to select and visualize most of the time.

For the first mate, select the two cylindrical faces indicated in the next picture. ® ©

^ Mate •

X

^0 Analysis

^ Mates |

Mate Selections

9-, © \ \

Faced > @Side Cover-1

©

.

Standard Mates Coincident

|^| Parallel

\

w

©

I I I Perpendicular

Tangent

|(§)| Concentric

©

is i lock \h\

I.OOOin

Z5-

331OOdeg

<3^

Mate alignment

5? 55 After the first face is selected the component is automatically made transparent; this is an option that can be set at the bottom of the "Mate" command options. Options

a

D Add to new folder 0 Show popup dialog 0 Show preview 1

I Use for positioning only

0 Make first selection transparent

When the face of the second component is selected, SOLIDWORKS recognizes that both faces are cylindrical and automatically "snaps" them with a Concentric Mate. (SOLIDWORKS defaults to concentric as it is the most logical option for this selection.) The 'Side Cover' moves towards the 'Housing' because it is the part with unconstrained degrees of freedom, in other words, it's free to move. Remember the 'Housing' was fixed when it was inserted because it was the first component, and therefore, it cannot move. The Concentric Mate is pre-selected, and since this is what we intend to do, click the OK button in the pop-up toolbar or in the PropertyManager to add this mate between the two components.

437


entrici

^0 ates

Analysis

x

Mate Selections Face<1>@Side Cover-1 Fac«<2>@Housing-1

lî±i»baimiîf

\

\

Q Lock rotation

Standard Mates

Add' Finish Mate /\ Coincident

|^| Parallel

©

iiyi

| | I Perpendicular

-

!(^s. Tangent ^ jConcentril

! /

7i

•Lock rotation

W-, :

a

jl\ | O.OOdeg

23.8.-Note the pop-up toolbar shows multiple options to mate the entities selected. (These options are listed in the PropertyManager, too.) The pop-up toolbar helps us to be more productive by minimizing mouse travel. The following table shows the standard (basic) mate options available: Standard Mates

A

Entities that can be mated

Coincident Parallel

J

Perpendicular

CS

Tangent

1Concentric O Lock rotation

fij] Lock H

1.OOOin O Flip dimension

jg

Two Faces, Planes, Edges, Vertices, Axes, Sketch points/endpoints, or any combination. Two flat Faces, Planes, linear Edges, Axes, or any combination. Two flat Faces, Planes, Edges, Axes, or any combination. Two cylindrical Faces; one flat Face and one cylindrical; a cylindrical Face and one linear Edge. Two cylindrical Faces, two round Edges, two linear Edges or Axes, one cylindrical Face and one round Edge, one cylindrical Face and one linear Edge. This option constrains all degrees of freedom of the component, locking it in place. Specify a distance between any two valid entities for Coincident or Parallel mates. "Flip dimension" reverses the direction to one side or the other. Using this mate on two flat Faces or Planes will also make them parallel.

438

Assembly Modeling

a

Specify an angle between any two flat entities for Coincident, Parallel, or Concentric mates. "Flip dimension" will reverse the direction of the angular dimension.

O.OOdeg Z] Flip dimension

Mate alignment:

99 96

•••i

or

H

Reverses the orientation of the components being mated. For two Faces, to look at each other or in the same direction.

After adding the first mate, the dialog remains visible; this means that we are ready to add more mates. It will remain active until we click Cancel or hit "Esc" on the keyboard. Notice that the mate added is listed under the "Mates" box in at the bottom of the PropertyManager. We'll continue adding mates at this time; do not exit the "Mate" command yet.

Mates

© Concentrid (Housing<1>,5

23.9. - For the second mate, select the two cylindrical faces indicated (one from the 'Side Cover,' and one from the 'Housing). SOLIDWORKS defaults again to a Concentric mate and rotates the 'Side Cover' to align the holes; this mate will prevent the 'Side Cover' from rotating. Remember we can use the "Magnifying Glass" (Shortcut "G") as we did to make selection of small faces easier. Click OK to add the mate. IF the 'Side Cover' is inside the 'Housing,' click-and-drag it with the left mouse button to move it out and add the remaining mates.

x

i

<3? ®

^ Mate V

^[7]

Mates

© /•' s

AS? Analysis

Mate Selections

I

©

(5)

\ \

Standard Mates j/\J Coincident

Parallel

|_j_J Perpendicular 1/4-20 Tapped Holei of Housing<1> I

^—7—1

(g) Concentric

qkock

m

1,000in

©

30.00deg

The "Lock Rotation" option in the concentric mate prevents the mated parts from rotating. Checking this option in the first concentric mate would eliminate the need to add the second concentric mate.

439


In this case a Concentric mate works as expected because both holes are located exactly at the same distance from the center in both parts; in reality, if the holes were not exactly aligned, SOLIDWORKS would give us an error message letting us know that the mate cannot be added. In that case, it is better to align the two components using component Planes and/or Faces, with either a Parallel or Coincident mate, as will be shown later. 23.10. - The last mate will be a Coincident mate between the back face of the 'Side Cover' and the front face of the 'Housing' to make the faces touch; use "Select Other" or rotate the view to select the faces if needed. (If the 'Side Cover' is inside the 'Housing,' click-and-drag it to move it out.) After selecting the faces the cover will move until the faces touch; the Coincident mate option will be pre selected. Click OK to add the mate and finish the "Mate" command by either clicking OK, Cancel or pressing the "Esc" key.

»

n

\v !i

V

I

I*

,

j| Box Selection

^ Lasso Selection

0

^^^lear selection Select Othjv

Select Other Face@Flange Baseis>[Side Co

• I X

Face@Top Cut@[Houslng< 1;

OK

Face@Boss-Extrude2®[Hou5

Cancel

| v | Pin Dialog

Right-mouse-click in the 'Side Cover1

o 0

Select back face of the 'Side Cover1

r

Of FrontBM^fHousing<1» I

0

Select the front face of the 'Housing'

Click OK to add mate

Using the "Select Other" tool allows us to select hidden component faces without having to rotate the view.

440

Assembly Modeling

23.11. - Looking at the FeatureManager we can see that the 'Side Cover' is no longer preceded by a (-) sign; this means that all six degrees of freedom of the 'Side Cover' have been constrained using mates, therefore it cannot move or rotate about any axis anymore.

Asseml (Default)

* os) histofy foi Sensors *

Annotations m Front Plane ^ Top Plane

o

^}s[ Right Plane U Origin

Notice that the "Mates" folder now includes the two Concentric and one Coincident mate we just added; SOLIDWORKS adds the names of the mated components in each mate for reference. We can change the width of the FeatureManager as needed to see the names of the mated components.

*

n£) (f) Housing<1> (Machined<_Display

•

lsjJ)

v

d(| Mates

SideCover<1> (Machined<_Display!

© Concentricl (Housing<1>,Side Cover<1> © Concentric2 (Housing<1>,Side Coverd Coincident3 (Housing<1>,Side Cover<1>)

IMPORTANT: If a (+) sign precedes a component name in the FeatureManager, you probably also received an error message alerting you that the assembly had been over defined. If this is the case, it means you added conflicting mates that cannot be solved, or inadvertently selected the wrong faces or edges when adding mates. The easiest way to correct this error is to either hit the Undo button or delete the last mate in the "Mates" folder; you will be able to identify the ^7 conflicting mate because it will have an error icon next to it and will be colored either red or yellow. If multiple mates have errors, start deleting the last mate at the bottom (the last mate added); chances are this is the cause of the problem. If you still have errors, keep deleting mates with errors from the bottom up until you clear all the errors. It's not a good idea to proceed with errors, as it will only get worse. 23.12. - We are now ready to add the second 'Side Cover' to our assembly. Repeat the "Insert Component" command to add a second 'Side Cover' and locate it on the other side of the 'Housing' as shown. Remember to use the "Machined" configuration. Don't worry too much about the exact location; in the next step we'll move and rotate the part closer to its final location.

7 pSs

File

ORKS

Edit

View

Insert

clb cj d Insert Components

Assembly

Linear Component Pattern

ate

I -

-

T

Insert Components Adds an existing part or subassembly

r'm

441

to the assembly.

Smart Fasteners

dd-lns


0

0

X A quick way to add a copy of a component is to hold down the "Ctrl" key and click-and-drag the part to be copied within the assembly's window. 23.13. - When the second 'Side Cover' is inserted, it has a (-) sign next to it in the FeatureManager; remember this means that it has at least one unconstrained Degree of Freedom (DOF). Since this part was just added to the assembly, all six DOF are unconstrained, and the component can be moved and rotated. Turn off the "Origins" if needed (menu "View, Hide/Show, Origins") and rotate the view just as we did with parts to look at the assembly from the back. To "Move" a component click-and-drag it with the left mouse button. To "Rotate" it, click-anddrag it with the right mouse button. "Move" and "Rotate" the second 'Side Cover' as needed to align it approximately as shown. Remember, we'll add mates to locate it precisely.

0) /

0

0

0

Q Q

i\

Q

vn Move Component Left mouse Click-and Drag

Rotate Component Right mouse Click-and Drag

442

Assembly Modeling

23.14. - Now we need to mate the second cover as we did the first 'Side Cover.' Rotate the view (not the part) to get a better view of the faces to select. A different way to add mates is to select one of the faces to be mated, and from the pop-up toolbar select the "Mate" command; once the command is opened this face will be pre-selected. Select the second face and add the next Concentric mate. Selecting the face of the 'Side Cover" first makes the component transparent (the option is at the bottom of the Mate Command), making it easier for us to make other selections through the transparent component.

Machined

Q)

0 Q.

/

f /

o

.

9 \ * I fr

w

Mate

0 Q)

11 M i k I 0 m©

Concentric3 •

X

c^[y]

% Mates |

Analysis

Mate Selections Face<1>®Side Cover-2

#

7s

o a

Standard Mates

,7

V)

(2)

/\ Coincident

0.

|\^sj Parallel

0

| | Perpendicular Tanaent |(0) Concentric

A

1o-

n Lock rotation

Add/Finish Mate

Lock

0.8125in

w

O.OOdeg

&h

Lock rotation

: :

Before adding the second concentric mate, click-and-drag the cover. Notice that it can move and rotate about its axis; under-constrained components are the basis for SOLIDWORKS to simulate motion.

443


23.15. - Now add a new concentric mate to align the screw holes between the 'Side Cover'and the 'Housing.' Since the part is symmetrical, in this case it doesn't really matter which two holes are selected. If the cover had a feature that needed to be aligned, then orientating the part correctly would be important. Use the "Magnifying Lens" if needed to select small faces (The hole's edges can be used to add mates too).

m®

Concentric6

v x ^0 Mates

Analysis

Mate Selections

$$

"

Fa <3: Face<3>@Side Cover-2

/

0

Standard Mates

dD

/

i/ /

/\ Coincident ^ Parallel

i

_L Perpendicular

/

0

i^

H&

Tangent

M Lock rotation

(5) Concentric

Add/Finish Mate f~l Lock rotation

(s

lock

7

M\o,16975832in

23.16. - Finally add a Coincident mate between the flat face of the 'Housing' and the second 'Side Cover'as we did with the first cover. Use "Select Other" to select the hidden face, or rotate the view as needed. Click OK to continue.

f

/

. /

©

&

i/ i

Box Selection

&

i n

Lasso Selection

\

Select Oth

© 3:7

Undo •

X

OK

Select Other

0

^ Face@Flange Base@[Side C< Face@Top Cut@[Housing<1 ^ Face@Boss-Extrude2@[Hou:

Cancel Pin Dialog

444

Assembly Modeling

llZ «i

W, 0

*

Add/F

nish

0

Mate

m

\\ •£.

v

o

Origin

It is important to know that these mates could have been added in any order; we chose this order to make it easier for the reader to see the effect of each mate on each part. Whichever order you select, you will end up with both 'Side Cover' parts fully defined (no free DOF) and six mates in the "Mates" folder as listed next.

(f) Housing<1> (Machined*_Di5play SideCover<1> (Machined* _Display S SideCover<2> (Machined*_Display S || Mates © Concentrid (Housing*1>,Side Cover<1>) © Concentric2 (Housing* 1>,Side Cover<1>) Coincidentl (Housing* 1>,Side Cover<1>) © Concentric3 (Housing*1>,Side Cover<2>) © Concentric4 (Housing* 1>,Side Cover* 2>) Coincident2 (Housing* 1>,Side Cover* 2>)

23.17. - Now that we have correctly mated both 'Side Covers,' switch to an isometric view for clarity, add the 'Worm Gear Shaft' using the "Insert Components" command as before, and locate it somewhere above the 'Housing.'

o

o

\ O /

/o 445

A


23.18. - With four different components in the assembly, it's a good idea to change their appearance to make it easier to identify them. To change a component's color, select the component in the FeatureManager or the graphics area, and from the pop-up toolbar select the "Appearance" icon. From the drop-down list, select HT> • the first option to change the Right Plane part's color at the assembly I , Origin level only. This means that • •Cjj) (f) Housing<1> (Mact o the color will change only in • SideCover<1> (Machi the assembly and not in the • Side Cover<2> (Machi part file. The second option • (-) Worm Gear Shaft<1> (Drfdtff
i %^n

X Remove All Part Appear...

We can change a part's appearance in the assembly, or in the part file. Picture it like this: We can paint the part before we assemble it, or we paint it after we assemble it. In the first case we assemble a painted part, in the second case the part is painted after it is assembled. For this example, we want to change the color at the assembly level. Now we are ready to change the part's color. Select the desired color from the color swatch selection box to change it and click OK to finish. ©

color V

X

-» Basic

Advanced

Color/Image

Selected Geometry (•) Apply at component level

O Apply at part document level

o

Worm Gear Shaft-1@Assem1

o

Remove Appearance

\

0,

m

LQ

o

&

446

Assembly Modeling

Change the color of both covers to your liking and continue adding mates. (It does look better in color!)

0 &

n d?

23.19. - The "Move with triad" command is a very useful command to help us move a component along a specific direction, on a plane, or to rotate about an axis. To move the 'Worm Gear Shaft using the triad, right-mouse-click in it and select "Move with Triad" from the pop-up menu; drag along the X, Y or Z axes, about the XY, XZ or YZ planes, or about the X, Y or Z ring's axis.

Configure Component Component Display

Jjt*

Move with Triad

•

.

S^TOlTPBTSî^Group L-^ Form New Subassembly

bo

IkJUU..

0

I %

Move Along X axis

«

Move Along Y axis

Move along Z axis

.

&

Move about XY plane

I 1%

Move about XZ plane

447

1

Move about YZ plane


n

h.

*

Rotate about X axis

Rotate about Y axis

Rotate about Z axis

Rotate the shaft 90° to the back about the Y axis; use the on-screen ruler as a guide. If the mouse pointer is near the ruler it will snap to the values. Feel free to explore the different options to manipulate models using the triad. Clicking in an empty area of the screen removes the triad.

<5
7,
7 0

&

6? (si

/O

23.20. - Another way to add mates is by pre-selecting the faces to be mated and selecting the mate to be added from the pop-up toolbar. Only standard mates appropriate for the selected entities are available using this approach. Rotate the 'Worm Gear Shaft' towards the back, press and hold the "Ctrl" key, and pre-select the two cylindrical faces; after releasing the "Ctrl" key the context toolbar is displayed showing the available options for the selections. Selecting the Concentric mate immediately mates the parts.

448

//cj X

Q n

Assembly Modeling

0 \i

/

o

0 [f #sl^00

0

0

m pmlz*

tci* y

jj

%

Concentric

0 Repeat the same process but now pre-select the flat faces to add a Coincident mate. Use "Select Other" to select the hidden face or rotate the model.

s /

T

f>\® i°

0 0 0

_lqh& a

/

Coincident

o 0. 0

Notice that the 'Worm Gear Shaft' is not yet fully defined; it still has a (-) sign before its name in the FeatureManager. In this case the only DOF left unconstrained is to rotate about its axis, and that is exactly what we want; the 'Worm Gear Shaft' is supposed to rotate. If we click-and-drag it, we'll see it rotate. (Look at the keyway while rotating it.)

449


yAsseml (Defaults Display State-1>) •

[Y] History [Y| Sensors

*

5) Annotations Front Plane \ Top Plane

0

^ Right Plane L Origin

0

(f) Housing<1> (MachinedssDef.

0

^ SideCovers1> (MachinedssDefa SideCover<2> (MachinedssDefa

0

(-) Worm Gear Shafts 1> (Defaults

l|| mat?

0 0

23.21. - Next add the 'Worm Gear' part. Use the "Insert Component" command as before and place it in the assembly as shown. And now that you know how, change its color too.

0

$ 0

o
450

Assembly Modeling

23.22. - To locate the 'Worm Gear' in place use either of the two methods presented to add a concentric mate with the 'Worm Gear Shaft.' Select the cylindrical inside face of the 'Worm Gear' and the outside face of the 'Worm Gear Shaft.' Drag the 'Worm Gear' and see how it moves along the shaft and rotates about it.

Concentric

* 23.23. - Now we need to center the 'Worm Gear' inside the 'Housing.'To do this we can use the "Front Plane" of the 'Worm Gear' and either the "Front Plane" of the 'Housing' or the assembly, which are conveniently located in the center of the 'Housing.' (Remember we made the 'Housing' symmetrical about the origin. ©) Select the Mate command if it's not already open (The mate context toolbar option is not available when mating planes) and add a Coincident mate selecting the "Front Plane" of the 'Housing' (or the assembly) and the "Front Plane" of the 'Worm Gear' from the fly-out FeatureManager. Expand the parts' feature trees to select the planes. In the following image the 'Worm Gear' was moved outside for visibility purposes. Mate X

^

Annotation

0

^ Mates I

Front Plane J^Top Plai

Analysis |

,

Right Plane Origin

Mate Selections

0

*

(f) Housing <1 > (Mac

*

Side Cover<1> (Mac..

•

<§, Side Cover<2> (Mac..

•

<&(-) Worm Gear Shaft<.

*•

Coincident

(•) Worm Gear<1> (D. • •

| |

Perpendicular

•

Mates in Asseml f§) History

si

Sensors

f^) Annotation^

Aiy

j(^| Tangent

Front

(O) Concentric Lock

Mt

|jj Right PI; T

"I.OOOin

|3Q.Q0deg Mate alignment:

f? 5s

Origin

•

Bait

*

Groove Cut-RevoIve2 1^) Chamferl

1^1 Fiiun

451


After adding this mate, the 'Worm Gear' is now centered inside the 'Housing.' What we need to do now is to make the 'Worm Gear Shaft' and the 'Worm Gear' to rotate together. To accomplish this, we'll have to add either a Coincident mate using the corresponding planes from the parts, or a Parallel mate between the faces of the keyways. We'll add a Parallel mate in this step and let the reader explore the other option. 23.24. - In order to add the necessary mate, we need to hide the 'Housing' to have a better view of the keyways. Exit the "Mate" command if it's still active, and select the 'Housing' in the FeatureManager or in the graphics area; from the pop-up toolbar selecting the "Hide/Show" command will essentially make the part invisible; with the part hidden we'll be able to see the rest of the components to add the next mate. Keep in mind that the part is only hidden, it was not deleted from the assembly. After we are done mating the parts we'll make it visible again. <£®l Asseml (Defaults Display State-1>) ''

HD History

Machined 'MatJ^Fie STVc Model"

v

Sensors ''

5) Annotati Front Pla Top Plan ^ Right Pla Origin

| ie % Machined

Machine Shop Model

W#

• f c ^ s r a c Hide Components

%

\

&

&h

Hide Components l1^) (f) Housing<1> (MachinedssDef? SideCover<1> (Machined< (Machined<
q

(•) Worm Gear Shafts 1> (Defaults ^3 (-) Worm Gear<1> (Defaults
23.25. - As soon as the part is hidden it disappears from the screen and we can see inside without obstructions. The 'Housing' icon in the FeatureManager changes to white, letting us know the part is hidden. ) *

(5) History

0)

fo| Sensors

*

5) Annotations

q>

\ Front Plane \ Top Plane \ Right Plane

tr

^

(f) Housings 1 —-

•

sDefi

0

Defa

^ SideCovers2> (MachinedssDefa

•

(-) Worm Gear Shafts1> (Defaults

*

Q) (-) Worm Gears 1> (Defaults
•

00 Mates

452

a

\

Assembly Modeling

23.26. - Add a new "Mate" using the flat faces of the 'Worm Gear Shaft's and 'Worm Gear's keyway. In this case, using a Parallel mate will help us absorb any small dimensional differences in case the mated faces are not exactly aligned, which would cause an error message. Making them parallel allows us to absorb those differences and still obtain the desired result. In general, a parallel mate is a more forgiving option and should be used in cases when other options would cause a conflict. Click OK to add the parallel mate and continue.

%

\ v1-

00 V,

,

-

Parallel

l

After adding the parallel mate, click-and-drag either the 'Worm Gear' or the 'Worm Gear Shaft'] see how both of them rotate at the same time, as if they had a keyway. When the 'Housing' is hidden the rest of the components are still attached to it and behave accordingly. Extra credit: Add a keyway to the assembly, delete the parallel mate and mate the 'Worm Gear Shaft' to the keyway, and the keyway to the 'Worm Gear.' 23.27. - To make the 'Housing' visible again select it in the FeatureManager and select the "Show Component" command from the pop-up toolbar. If a component is hidden, you will see the "Show Component" command, if it is visible, you will see the "Hide Component" command. Alternatively, selecting the "Show Hidden Components" command will hide all currently visible components, and all hidden components will become visible. Selecting a component will make it visible when the "Exit show-hidden" button is pressed.

453

Beginner's Guide to SQLIDWORKS 2016 - Level I

ffFl Sensors FX) Annotations Machined "Machine Shop Model"

\ Front Plane Top Plane

''ST

'{5}^ Right Plane

1c

Origin

|j sh°W C°mP°nents

\ (f) Housing<1>(Machined< (Machined< (Machined< (Defaults

['0 Show Hidden Components

ssembly Reference eatures Geometry

%o

i &

New Motion Study

Show HiriHpn

t

Undl

Exit Show-iHidden

@ Show Hidden envelopes

w Hidden Components Temporarily show all hidden components and make selected hidden components visible.

v

23.28. - Now add the 'Offset Shaft' to the assembly using the "Insert Component' command and change its color for visibility.

o

o

0,

6/

d?

V

&

454

Assembly Modeling

23.29. - Add mates by selecting one of the model faces to be mated, and from the pop-up toolbar, select the "Mate" icon. When the "Mate" command is displayed, the model face is pre-selected and we only need to select the other face to add a concentric mate, or pre-select both faces and select the "Concentric" mate from the pop-up menu. Do not use the "Lock Rotation" option, we need it to rotate.

f $ $ $

/

\

m

^_l

v!

Concentric

$ $

7

23.30. - Now we need to add a coincident mate to prevent the shaft from moving along its axis. We'll use the groove in the 'Shaft' for this mate. In this case, we can use either the flat face or the edge of the groove; selecting the edge may be easier than selecting the face. Remember we can use the "Magnifying Glass" tool to zoom in and make our selections. Click OK to finish the mate.

&<$

p \ „

_L

i i %

\\

Coincident

m

\i 455

H


r \

\ & 0.

23.31. - The last component we're adding is the 'Top Cover.' Add it to the assembly and change its color. Add the first concentric mate to align one of the holes of the cover to the corresponding hole in the 'Housing'] press and hold the Ctrl key, select both faces indicated, and release the Ctrl key. From the pop-up menu select the concentric mate command. We can select either faces or circular edges for this mate. An interesting detail to know is that a concentric mate removes four DOF from the component: two translations and two rotations when mated to a fixed or fully defined reference.

/a

<=> a

....
"i

:X~-

P oncentric

/

/

/ / X

456

\

/

?

Assembly Modeling

23.32. - Check the remaining two DOF by dragging the 'Top Cover' with the left mouse button; it will rotate about the hole we mated and move up and down. By adding a coincident mate between the bottom face of the Top Cover' and the top face of the 'Housing'we remove one more DOF.

o

—

//

\

^

Ait

t

i

r - 1 Coincident |

—.

w

i /

/m 23.33. - If we click-and-drag the 'Top Cover,' it will turn; now we only have one DOF left. To finish constraining the Top Cover' we'll add a Parallel mate between the 'Top Cover' and the 'Housing.' As we explained earlier, the reason for the Parallel mate is that sometimes components don't match exactly, and if we add a Coincident mate, we may be forcing a condition that cannot be met, over defining the assembly and getting an error message. The Parallel mate can be added between Faces, Planes, and/or Edges. In this particular case, we can use either a Coincident or Parallel mate since the parts were designed to match exactly. However, in real life they may not; that's why we chose a Parallel mate.

P \<»

_L CS H Coincident

\

\ \ \

>

\ 457

l®i0

co

uo

qj w)

CO

o

o >-

Assembly Modeling

SmartMates SmartMates are a quick and easy way to add certain mate types between components simply by dragging parts or assemblies onto each other using flat, cylindrical or conical faces, circular or linear edges, vertices, or temporary axes. It works by holding down the "Alt" key while we drag the face, edge or vertex of the component to be mated onto the face, edge or vertex of the other component. We'll re-create the entire assembly up to this point using the SmartMates approach, now that the concept of mates has been explained and we have a better understanding of the process. The next table shows the types of SmartMates available and their corresponding feedback icon when used. When SmartMates is enabled the icon will change to a clip attached to the face, edge, or vertex being dragged and the component being dragged will become transparent. Entities to be mated/ Feedback icon 2 Flat Faces

Coincident Faces

2 Linear Edges

Coincident Edges

Resulting Mate

•

Is

459

v


Entities to be mated/ Feedback icon 2 Cylindrical / Conical Faces

Resulting Mate Concentric

&

2 Round Edges

Peg-in-Hole

lii

/

(Adds 1 Concentric mate between the cylindrical/conical faces and 1 Coincident Mate between the flat faces) Coincident Vertices

2 vertices

o .•*

o

460

Assembly Modeling

24.1.- T o learn and practice SmartMates functionality, close the assembly without saving it; we'll recreate it using SmartMates. An alternate way to start an assembly is similar to the way we made the detail drawings. Open the 'Housing' part, and from the "New" document icon select "Make Assembly from Part/Assembly," or the menu "File, Make Assembly from 1—j Part." Make sure "Machined" is the active ' 3' dr configuration before making the l""^ New assembly. Just as we did previously, add [aoi .. I .- n«Bn ' - n..i 'ft li :e the 'Housing' at the assembly's origin. If Make Assembly from Part/Assembly^) y the origin is hidden, turn it on in the menu "View, Hide/Show, Origins." „ ® Shi. 0|cQ Mirror •

v \

& d?

& 24.2. - Now, bring in the 'Side Cover' with the "Insert Component" command and put it next to the 'Housing' with the "Machined" configuration, just as we did before up to this point.

o 7.

o\.

o

o

© o

/

d? d?

461


24.3. - Now we can start using the SmartMates functionality. Press and hold the "Alt" key on the keyboard and, while holding it down, click-and-drag the 'Side Cover' from the indicated edge. Notice that as soon as we start moving it, the "Mate" icon appears next to the mouse pointer, and the 'Side Cover1 becomes transparent.

0,

q v v

6?

Keep dragging the 'Side Coved until we touch the flat face or the round edge in the front face of the 'Housing'] at this time the 'Side Cover' will 'snap' into place and will give us the "Peg-in-Hole" mate icon. Release the mouse button to finish. By using SmartMates we added a concentric and a coincident mate between the 'Side Cover' and the 'Housing' in a single step.

r" If the 'Side Covet o o , \

a

i»\i £\1 m j dp

IV

<§>

\

dp d?

462

is flipped pointing inside, release the "Alt" key while still holding the mouse button, and press the "Tab" key to flip its direction. When the part has the correct orientation release the mouse button to add the mate.

Assembly Modeling

Expanding the "Mates" folder in the FeatureManager, we can see a concentric mate and a coincident mate have been added. Selecting the mates shows the faces that were automatically mated in each one. Previous versions of SOLIDWORKS added an extra concentric mate to the holes of the 'Side Cover,' fully defining it in a single step. Origin *

(f) Housing<1> (Machined<_Display Stat

*

"Qj (•) Side Cover<1> (Machined<_Display St

•*"

|Jl@l Mates © Concentricl (Housings 1>,Side Cover<1>) /\ Coincidentl (Housing<1>,Side Covers 1>)

24.4. - To fully define the 'Side Cover,' we'll add a concentric mate between two screw holes to prevent the 'Side Cover1 from rotating. Rotate the cover just enough to see both holes at the same time. Click-and-drag the face or edge of the hole in the 'Side Cover,' hold down the "Alt" key as before, and drag it to the screw hole in the 'Housing.' When the concentric mate icon is displayed, release the mouse button to add the mate. Now the 'Side Cover1 is fully defined and can no longer be moved.

/

\\ i) Origin *

(f) Housing<1> (Machined<_Display Stati

•

SideCover<1> (Machined<_Display State

"*•

(jjij)) Mates © Concentricl (Housings 1>,Side Covers 1>) /\ Coincident-! (Housings 1>,Side Covers 1>) © Concentric2 (Housings1>,Side Covers1>)

463


24.5. - Now we need to add the second 'Side Cover' to our assembly, but instead of adding it and using SmartMates, we are going to use a different technique using the "Mirror Components" command. Select the menu "Insert, Mirror Components."

Insert

Tools

Window

Help

it

Component ^ Mate...

m

Jfes Mate Controller...

Mirror Components...

Similar to the "Mirror Feature" command in a part, we need a plane or flat face to be used as a mirror plane. In this case, we can select the assembly's "Front Plane" as the mirror plane (since it is located in the middle of the assembly), and in the "Components to Mirror" selection box, select the 'Side Cover' either in the screen or the fly-out FeatureManager. After making your selections, click in the "Next" blue arrow to go to the next step in the "Mirror Component' command. -

<9 Assem3 (Default
<9 Mirror Components

•

m

f^>) History ) Sensors

© Front Plane

X Step 1: Selections

j Next Select face/plane to mirror about and thi <• components to be mirrored.

\

1

if

f

Right Plane yv

•

Origin ousing Side Cover<1> (Mac...

Selections Mirror plane:

ih

Front Plane

!

Components to Mirror:

Side Cover-1

3 $

i •w

•

...i—-rr.—• <^>..,.3

464

Assembly Modeling

In the second step we get a preview of the mirrored part and we can optionally change its orientation and/or create an "opposite hand" version of it. In this case, we don't need an opposite hand version, since the same part can be added on both sides. In case a mirrored component is not correctly oriented, select it and cycle through the different orientations until the desired orientation is shown using the "Reorient components" buttons at the bottom of the selection list. After finishing the command, a new instance of the 'Side Cover' is added to the assembly and a "Mirror Component" feature is added to the FeatureManager.

/b irs

•Cj Assem3 (Default
Mirror Components V

®

• El Annotations 1 [jj Front Plane]

X

[jj Top Plane Step 2: Set Orientation Verify the orientation of the components to be mirrored and adjust accordingly using the buttons below

[jj Right Plane Origin *

(Mac..,

• l1^ Side Cover<1> (Mac... Orient Components

•

gfil Mates

Reorient components

02ot4 0 Mirror type: (9) Bounding box center

O Center of mass fjjjkl Igfj

Create opposite hand version

Synchronize movement of flexible subassembly components O Isolate selected component

A Y

Right Plane Origin (f) Housing<1> (Machined<
^ SideCover<1> (Machined<,Sid

Ao Coincident! (Housing<1>,Sid Concentric2 (Housing<1>,Sid MirrorComponentl >

^ Side Cover<2> (Machined<
465


24.6. - Another way to add parts to an assembly is by dragging them directly from Windows Explorer. Open the folder where the assembly components are saved, and drag-and-drop the 'Worm Gear Shaft' part directly into the assembly window.

Nome

i X « Ui Copy

a

Paste

Clipboard

Share

View

jji Wove Wove to to' -

L£

^ Delete Delete » •"

(i Rename

© Copy to '

E

J t *

New Folder

Properties v

II,-.-.

Organize

Select *

t ,ri

D ill "» X •

s X

•

f

v 6

ji « Book... » Finished Files

::

Desktop OneDrive

o i*

Search Finished Files

Threads-Finished

Top

Top

.SLDPRT

Cover.SLDDRW

Cover.SLDPRT

n w

ariablePitc

Worm Gear

Worm Gear

Spring.SLDPRT

Complete.SLDPR

Shaft.SLDDRW

T

id

Worm Gear

ear.SLDDRVV

Shaft.SLDPRT

21 items

Worm Gear.SLDPRT

1 item selecteak91.0 KB

24.7. - After adding the 'Worm Gear Shaft'to the assembly, rotate it to a position that will allow us to view both of the edges to be mated, this is a limitation of using SmartMates; hold down the "Alt" key, click-and-drag the 'Worm Gear Shaft's edge to the 'Side Cover's hole to add a "Peg-in-Hole" mate.

)

)

/

r / r /'

/

0

0

466

Assembly Modeling

In this particular case, mating the outside edges of both the shaft and the cover would work exactly the same, since all outside edges are concentric to the inside edges.

9

24.8. - In this version of the assembly we'll use the 'Worm Gear Complete' to learn a new type of mate later on. Another way 'O ~ £ to add components to an assembly is by tsert Tools Window Help y Q ~ arranging the part and assembly's Viewport New Window windows side by side and dragging the Con Cascade part into the assembly. Open the 'Worm mat ne nunr Gear Complete' part, and using the menu M Tile Vertically "Window, Tile Vertically," tile the -Ins windows vertically. An advantage of Close All using this approach is that if we click and 1 Housing.SLDPRT drag a part's face into the assembly 0 Assem3 * window the SmartMates functionality is automatically activated. We can drag parts into assemblies using faces, edges, or vertices, just as we would when using SmartMates. The only difference is that we don't have to press the "Alt" key while dragging from a part (or assembly) window into an assembly window. If we click and drag the part from its name at the top of the FeatureManager, the SmartMates functionality is not activated and the part (or assembly) is added to the assembly but not mated.

3)

d.

"j1 vsa r"*a

Lofted Boss/Base

i.

0 ^ S"

Fillet

U

Linear Pattern kjD

s,

"

3-

j BoundaryBoss/Base Features | Sketch | Direct Editing | Evaluate | OimXpert | SOIIDWORKS Add-lns Worm Gear Complete.SLDPRT

~§\m.

3 Pn

w , , zfr

7

p & m 9• 0 *1

Worm Gear Complete (Default**Defauf

Q& 0 Sketch!

<3

m

^5 Asseml (Default* Display State-1>)

• (^) History

• (a|) History

fcTl Sensors

fr^l Sensors * 0 Annotations

* 5) Annotations AISI1020

Front Plane

Front Plane


Top Plane

Origin

1^1 Right Plane

'

Origin

*

Qj (f) Housing*1 > (Machined*
Base

*

SideCover<1> (Machined**Defa ( ) Worm Gear Shaft* 1> (Default*

*

Ijjlj) Groove

•

*

[01] Cut-Revolve2

jjjl Mate^ (O) Concentrid (Housing* 1>,Sid,

Chamferl

Coincident! (Housing* 1>,Sid

Filletl •

© Keyway

(5) Concentric2 (Housing*1 >,Sid

[jj

<§) Concentric3(SideCover<2:

Planel

y\ Coincident2 (Side Cover*2»,\

[jj Profile Plane ' [01.1 Cut-Revolve3 '

t£

7-

- m MirrorComponentl •

Cut-Sweepl

Q) SideCover*2> (Machined'

Fillet2

P

Pya CirPatternl @ FrlletS <

> Model

Motion Study 1

Model

Worm Gear Complete

467

Motion Study !

o


24.9. - Drag the 'Worm Gear Complete' into the assembly's window over the 'Worm Gear Shaft' to add a concentric mate using SmartMates (look for the concentric mate icon). After releasing the mouse Select the concentric mate and click OK in the pop-up toolbar to add the mate. File

pS SOLIDWORKS

Edit

View

insert

Tools

Window

Help

(1

* d-^-h-30 od Fillet

. Lofted Boss-Base

linear Pattern

j Boundary Boss/Base Features

Sketch

Direct Editing

<$>

Evaluate

• k - 8 its °

(V1 »

DimXpeit j SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

nnrifii i^-mi. a

^r ^ 0

n h v-

7

m 18

Assem3 (Default* Display State-1>)

y Worm Gear Complete (Default•

f3§) History

q! Sensors

(§) History

isli

fSTl Sensors

[

* BD Annotations

Annotations AIS11020

Front Plane

Front Plane

Top Plane ^ Right Plane

QiJ Top Plane

Origin

"fjii Right Plane t , Origin

*

C|-J) Base

•

CjjJ SideCove»<1> (Machined*
*

"Q) C-) Worm Gear Shaft* 1> (Default*

Groove

(f) Housing* 1> (Machined*
•» |@@ Mates]

(jfl Cut-Revolve2

{§) Concentricl (Housing* 1>,Sid[

l^) Chamferl ® Filled

/\ Coincident1 (Housing* 1>,Sid

1$ Keyway

{§) Concentric2 (Housing* 1>,Sid {§) Concentric3(SideCover<2>,\

Planel

Coincident2 (Side Cover<2>.\

Profile Plane

- b|k1 MirrorComponentl

lit) Cut-Revo»ve3

•

Cut-Sweep I F.IW2

Side Cover*2> (Machined-

A

•§3 CirPatteml 0 Fillet3 mUm Model

? • _ • X

<0*

Worm Gear Complete.SLDPRT

LjJ

Worm Gear Co...

Motion Study 1

Model

Motion Study 1 Radius: .313in

Editing Part

v-

M

J

<0$ Assem3 (Default< Display State-1>) •

f<|[) History m Sensors

c?

• a Annotations Front Plane ^ Top Plane ^ Right Plane

ss

,1*

Origin v

(0 Housing<1> (Machined<
•

•

^

•

<§) (") Worm Gear Complete (Def

-

®| Mates

:s

Worm Gear Shaft<1> (Default
© Lock

(§) Concentricl (Housing<1>,Sid

(§) Concentric3 (Side Cover<2>,\ /\ Coincident2 (Side Cover<2>A (§) Concentric4 (Worm GearShaf MirrorComponentl SideCover<2> (Machined<
Model

Em Concentric

/\ Coincident (Housing<1>,Sid (§) Concentric2 (Housing<1>,Sid

•

tion

Motion Study 1 _f

468

Assembly Modeling

24.10. - The next step is to center the 'Worm Gear Standard Mates Complete' inside the 'Housing.' In the previous assembly Advanced Mates we added a mate using the part's and assembly's planes. Profile Center In this case we'll use a different mate called "Width." Maximize the assembly window to use the entire screen, mmetric select the "Mate" command, expand the "Advanced Width Mates" section and select the "Width" mate. In the Mate "Width selections:" select the two inside faces of the r 'Housing'] click in the "Tab selections:" box and select Linear/Linear Coupler the two outside flat faces of the 'Worm Gear' (the small 1,000in round faces). The 'Worm Gear Complete' will be n 30.00deg automatically centered. Using the "Centered" constraint option the "Width" mate centers the "Tab" selections Mate .alignment: between the "Width" selections. Click OK to finish.

n

ai

^ Width1

V

^0

X

&

Mates

Width Reference

Analysis

n

Mate Selections

Tab Reference

Width selections: Face<1>@Housing-1

I

Face<2>@Housing-1

Tab selections: Face<3>@Worm Gear Comp

W

Face<4> @Worm Gear Comp

V.

•m\\\ \T™!5

\mw

Advanced Mates

®

•^s> . \ \

Standard Mates

Profile Center

5*

\\ Width Constraint: Centered

Linear/linear Coupler '!**y 2,125in

1

The "Constraint" options available in the Width mate are: a) Centered - The tab is centered between the width selections b) Free - The tab can move freely between the width selections c) Dimension - A side of the tab is located at a specific distance from either end of the width selections d) Percent - The tab is located a percentage of the distance between the width selections

469


Width Reference

Tab Reference 24.11. - Now we need to add the parallel mate between the keyway faces to align the shaft and the gear. The 'Housing' was hidden for clarity.

*-

* >.*•••

470

m

Assembly Modeling

24.12. - Add the 'Offset Shaft Gear' to the assembly using any method learned so far, and add a "Peg-in-Hole" mate using SmartMates using the indicated edge. If the SmartMate is reversed (in the wrong direction), release the "Alt" key while still holding the left mouse button and press the "Tab" key to reverse the part's orientation. When the correct orientation is displayed release the mouse button.

A

-

\

s

K

\

1 \1

«

© (S

/

v 1

\

m

\ l

11 471


24.13. - Add the Top Cover' to the assembly, and flip it upside down as shown using the "Move with Triad" command. Remember that for SmartMates to work we have to be able to see both of the entities be mated, in this case two circular edges. Right-mouse-click in the cover and select "Move with Triad." Component [Top Cover) Make Virtual Isolate 1

Configure Component Component Display

©

•

Form New Subassembly

X

^

Make Independent Copy with Mates

X

v\\

Delete Parent/Child... Add to Favorites

Click-and-drag to rotate the cover about the X axis enough to look at its underside.

/ cr 1"

© \ a

472

mb\vwlode\>n9

/\sse

vs. *// vs. vs.

o s

-s.

y so

JF

/

the-atfw* 24.14. - Select the edge indicated, hold down

hole to add a Peg-in-Hole SmartMate.

473

and dragi"10


If the 'Top Cover' is upside down in the preview, release the "Alt" key, and while still pressing the left mouse button press the "Tab" key once; notice how the preview changes by flipping the Top Cover.' Pressing the "Tab" key again will flip the mate again. Make sure you have the correct orientation for the Top Cover' before releasing the left mouse button to add the SmartMate. One possible orientation; press the "Tab" key to flip.

"

•

CT>

\

n

\ vT

s&3. r--*r

|A>

Orientation after pressing the "Tab" key

c=> - —

\

* ..y

•e

14

&

3$

\

CS

;\

24.15. - Now add the final mate to the Top Cover.' Hold down the "Alt" key and drag the indicated edge to the face (or edge) of the 'Housing' to make them Coincident. Adding this mate will fully define the 'Top Cover.' Change the color of the parts as before for easier visualization.

474

Assembly Modeling

NOTE: The rest of the illustrations and exercises will be done using the full gear components.

L \ i

<5 AssemB (Default< Display State-1>) •

History

•

j/C) Annotations

Sensors

* —

^ Front Plane Top Plane

o

o

^ Right Plane

V

L Origin •

^ W Housing<1> (Machined<
•

Side Cover<1> (Machined<
•

(-) Worm Gear Shaft<1> (Default<

*

"sjj) (-) Worm Gear Completed> (Def

*

^ (*) Offset Shaft Complete<1> (Def

•

"(jj) Top Cover<1> (Default<
w

(||l Mates

o •M

(§) Concentric 1 (Housing<1>,Sid

. \i

/\ Coincident! (Housingd >,Sid (§) Concentric2 (Housing<1>,Sid (§) Con centric 3 (Side Cover<2>,\

d?

j\ Coincident2 (Side Cover<2>,\ (§) Concentric4 (Worm Gear Shaf

Width! (Housing<1> .Worm ' ^ Parallel! (Worm Gear Shaft<1

d?

(§) Concentric5 (Housing<1>,Of1 /\ Coincident3 (Housingd>,Of1 (O) Concentric6(Housingd>,To Coincident4 (Housing<1>,To /\ Coincidents (Housing,To • k|s3 MirrorComponentl

A

After finishing the same assembly using SmartMates, it's easy to see why using SmartMates is a good idea, since it speeds up the assembly process making it easier and faster.

475


Notes:

476

Assembly Modeling

Fasteners The commercial versions of SOLIDWORKS Professional and Premium, as well as the Educational Edition available to schools, include a hardware library called "SOLIDWORKS Toolbox" which includes nuts, bolts, screws, pins, washers, bearings, bushings, structural steel, gears, etc. in both metric and imperial unit standards. 25.1. -The "SOLIDWORKS Toolbox" is an add-in package that has to be loaded either using the menu "Tools, Add-ins" or the "SOLIDWORKS Add-lns" tab in the CommandManager. Using the menu, we have to load both "SOLIDWORKS Toolbox Library" and "SOLIDWORKS Toolbox Utilities"; using the CommandManager we only have to activate the "SOLIDWORKS Toolbox" command. Add-lns Start Up

Active Add-ins 0 SOLIDWORKS Professional Add-ins

• • • •

•C$K? CircuitWorks I

FeatureWorks

I I Q PhotoView 360 •

Last Load Time

ScanTo3D

0g£ SOLIDWORKS Design Checker

1s 1s < 1s -

< 1s

0

< 1s 0

SOLIDWORKS Toolbox Library

0

0

SOLIDWORKS Toolbox Utilities

0

TolAnalyst

•

pS SOLIDWORKS CircuitWorks

Assembly

©

fjisi ©

PhotoView 360

ScanTo3D

Layout

Sketch

File

Edit

View

Insert

m

m

Window

Help

#

|

^

-

SOLIDWORKS TolAnalyst Toolbox

Evaluate

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

©

rfsa

Tools

< 1s < 1s

SOLIDWORKS Toolbox Loads or Unloads the SOLIDWORKS

&

cal

Toolbox add-in.

>

Using the "SOLIDWORKS Toolbox" we can add hardware to our assemblies by dragging and dropping components, and SOLIDWORKS will automatically add the necessary mates, saving us time. To make it even more powerful and versatile, it can also be configured to add our own hardware.

477


25.2. - After loading the "SOLIDWORKS Toolbox" we can access it using the Design Library. The Design Library is located in the Task Pane. If the Task Pane is not visible, go to the menu "View, Toolbars, Task Pane" to activate it. • •

_

t3

X

l

f

Design Library

Click to display this task pane tab.I

V

The "SOLIDWORKS Toolbox" was not included in the Student Design Kit as of the writing of this book.

Activating the "Design Library" opens a fly-out pane that reveals all the libraries available in SOLIDWORKS. It contains four main areas: •

Design Library, which includes built-in and user defined libraries of annotations, features, and parts that can be dragged and dropped into parts, drawings, and assemblies.

•

Toolbox, which was just described.

•

3D Content Central, an internet based library of user uploaded and manufacturer certified components, including nuts, bolts and screws, pneumatics, mold and die components, conveyors, bearings, electronic components, industrial hardware, power transmission, piping, automation components, furniture, human models, etc., all available for drag and drop use. All that is needed to access it is an internet connection and log in.

•

SOLIDWORKS Content allows the user to download weldments libraries, piping, blocks, structural members, etc.

The "Design Library" is a valuable resource for the designer, which can help us save time by not having to model components that are usually purchased, and in the case of the Supplier Certified library, components that are accurately modeled for use in our designs directly from the manufacturer.

478

Assembly Modeling

25.3. - To add screws to our assembly, select the "Design Library" from the Task Pane and click in the (+) sign to the left of the "Toolbox" to expand it. «

Design Library

©

m

(W

fnf k 'f Toolbox

&

J ent ra 1

t> (J| SOLIDWORKS Content

fool 1 £>H

e 1 |a — |

|q

5^

After expanding the "Toolbox" we can see the many options available. Depending on how "Toolbox" is configured, some standards may not be available. In this exercise we'll use "ANSI Inch, Bolts, and Screws" and select "Socket Head Screws."

«

«

Design Library

©

(*/

A

A

ANSI Inch <4— Bearings giiii Bolts and Screws

IS*

yjil Machine Screws (Co

A

yjUH Miscellaneous

"4"

Jig Bushings t> CD Keys

t>

(rk

[Jill. Miniature Screws

IS7

t> [_Oi Nuts

0

Design Library

Round Head Bolts jjlllJ Self Tapping Screws QJIUJ Set Screws (Slotted)

©

" O-Rings

t> CCD Pins

§JUli Set Screws (Socket) §MJ Set Screws (Square L

t>

Power Transmission

LjJll Socket HeadfScrews

t>

Retaining Rings

iililli Square Hea'tv Jits

v

Cfriirfiiral Nâmkorr

When we select the "Socket Head Screws" folder, we see in the lower half of the Design Library pane the available styles including Button Head, Socket Head, Countersunk, and Shoulder Screws. For our assembly, we'll use "Socket Head Cap Screws (SHCS)."

479


«

Design Library

-*•

[SA *

o

a o

_r... Bolts and Screws

'

{pill Countersunk Head §iUU Hex Head -j.... Lag Screws giiiii Machine Screws

o

Machine Screws (Counter: Miniature Screws

rt o

Miscellaneous

7 Ii

. Round Head Bolts jjMi Self Tapping Screws Set Screws (Slotted) Set Screws (Socket) giliii Set Screws (Square Head) ^

Socket Head Screws

OMi Square Head Bolts \

\

11

»

Toolbox is currently installed on this computer. While that is acceptable for a single user environment, it is not the recommended setup for a multiple user...

\!

Learn More

L

S

.X

0

*

Socket Button Head Cap Screw

Socket Countersunk He...

Socket Head Cap Screw

Socket Head Shoulder Screw

socket head cap screw_ai.sldprt

25.4. - The first screws we are going to add to the assembly are the #6-32 screws to the Top Cover.' From the bottom pane of the "Toolbox" click-and-drag the "Socket Head Cap Screw" into one of the holes in the Top Cover. 'You will see a transparent preview of the screw, and as we get close to the edge of a hole it will snap in place using SmartMates and the screw will automatically resize to match the hole. When we get the preview of the screw assembled where we want it, release the left mouse button.

If the mouse button is released before placing the screw in a hole it will be added to the assembly, but it will not be mated or sized.

Do not worry if the preview in your screen is too big at first. When we drop the screw in place, it will be sized to match the hole it was dropped in.

480

Assembly Modeling

••r

o> o L--

o x Cm '

c>

/ /

!

Tf

it

Notice that the Design Library hides away as soon as we drag the screw into the assembly; if we want the Design Library to remain visible we need to press the "Auto Show" thumb tack in the upper right corner of the Task Pane. Design Library

X

3

Design Library

Auto Show

a tjiiiii Bolts and Screws

s yjiiii Bolts and Screws

.H

t®

Countersunk Head

Countersunk Head

giiii Hex Head

&

o

Lag Screws

m

Machine Screws (Countei

Machine Screws

Hex Head yjiii' Lag Screws Machine Screws Machine Screws (Countei

yM Miniature Screws

yjlki Miniature Screws

îiij Miscellaneous

yiiiii Miscellaneous

Round Head Bolts

tfiUi. Round Head Bolts

Self Tapping Screws

yiiin Self Tapping Screws

yiu Set Screws (Slotted)

yjiiii Set Screws (Slotted)

yiiu Set Screws (Socket)

yiiii' Set Screws (Socket)

giili Set Screws (Square Head)

gjiiil Set Screws (Square Head)

Socket Head Screws

|gu Socket Head Screws .

§1 Square Head Bolts

a

^ Auto Show

i-Uilii

Square Head Bolts

>

Always visible

Auto Show On

481


25.5. - As soon as we drop the screw in the hole, we are presented with a dialog box and a pop-up menu asking us to select the screw's parameters, including screw size, length, drive, thread length, etc. In our case we need a #6-32 screw, 0.5" long with Hex Drive and Schematic Thread Display. If needed, a part number can be added at the time the fastener is made. Click OK to create and mate the fastener. A word on Thread Display options: The "Schematic" thread selected adds a revolved cut to the screw to simulate a thread merely for visual effect. As we learned earlier, a helical thread can be added to a screw, but, generally speaking, it's a bad idea because it consumes computer resources unnecessarily. For example, if an assembly has tens, hundreds or even thousands of fasteners it would certainly slow down the system noticeably without really adding value to a design in most instances. Helical threads are a resource intensive feature that is best left for times when the helical thread itself is a part of the design and not just for cosmetic reasons. The revolved cut gives a good appearance for most practical purposes, including non-detailed renderings, and is a simple enough feature that doesn't noticeably affect the assembly's performance. Toolbox components are stored in a master file that includes the different configurations of each screw type in the Toolbox data folder. If the assembly files are copied to a different computer, the screws used in the assembly will be created there. If the other system does not have SOLIDWORKS Toolbox, the user can use the menu "File, Pack and go" to copy all the files used in the assembly, including the Toolbox components, parts, and drawings.

482

Configure Component X Replace Component Part Numbers

i

Part Number Unassigned

Add

Edit

Delete

Properties

A

Size: #6-32

V

Length:

10.5

Vj

Drive Type: Hex

V

Thread Length: 0.5

V

Thread Display: Schematic Diameter Comment:

Configuration Name: HX-SHCS 0.138-32x0.5x0.5-S

V

0.138

Assembly Modeling

25.6. - After we click OK, the screw we specified is created with the selected parameters and mated in the hole where it was dropped. At this point we can add more identical screws to the assembly if needed. In our example, we'll click in the other 3 holes of the Top Cover' to add the rest of the screws. Notice the graphic preview of the screw as we move the mouse; as we get close to a hole the screw snaps adding a Peg-in-Hole SmartMate. Click "Cancel" in the "Insert Components" command to finish adding screws.

W

7 i N v

/

!

\

n \ zb tp < >

[Pv® Insert Components X M

e

*

Click in the graphics area to add additional copies of the component. Mates are automatically added if a valid mate reference combination exists. Press Esc or close the PropertyManager when done.

25.7. - We will now add '1/i-20 Socket Head Cap Screws' to the 'Side Covers.' Open the "Design Library" tab and, just as in the previous step, drag and drop the "Socket Head Cap Screw" to one of the holes of the 'Side Cover,' but be careful to "drop" the screw in the correct location. If you look closely, there are two different edges where you can insert the screw: one is in the 'Side Cover,' and the other is in the 'Housing.' The screw will be mated to the hole you "drop" the screw in. Use the snap preview to help you identify the correct one.

483


/

, \ \

'

•s
w t'V \

\ j

W ^

*

V \ ;

484

I

S

Assembly Modeling

25.9. - Instead of manually adding the rest of the screws, we'll make a component pattern using the first screw. Just like a feature pattern in a part, we can add linear or circular component patterns in an assembly, but in this case we are going to use a different type of pattern that allows us qq to make a component pattern to match a qq Asserr Move Linear part's feature pattern. Think of it this way: Smart Show Component Featu Component Hidden Fasteners Pattern we make a pattern of bolts to match the Components pattern of holes in the 'Side Cove;,'this way, IF the pattern of holes changes (more or Linear Component Pattern less holes), the pattern of screws in the far Component Patf assembly updates to match. In the BCa Pattern Driven Component Pattern Assembly tab, select "Pattern Driven Mlrnftn L Component Pattern" from the drop down Curve Driven Component Pattern menu in the "Linear Component Pattern" Chain Component Pattern or the menu "Insert, Component Pattern, Mirror Components Pattern Driven." 25.10. - In the "Components to Pattern" selection box select the %-20 screw previously made, and in the "Driving Feature" select any of the patterned holes in the 'Side Cover,' except the original hole. When selecting a hole's face, make sure the pop-up highlight shows the "CircPatteml" name, this way we'll know it's a patterned hole, otherwise we'll get a warning. After selecting the patterned hole's face we can see the preview of the screws pattern; click OK to continue.

[>[> Pattern Driven •

X

Components to Pattern socket head cap screw_ai<5

Driving Feature or Component

Select Seed Position

Instances to Skip

Skipped By Driving Feature

i—| Propagate component level '—'visual properties

CirPatternl of Side Cover<1

/ !

r / i

•• -r

485


«i s f {>[> Pattern Driven X Components to Pattern socket head cap screw_ai<5

Driving Feature or Component CirPattern1@Side Cover-1@Asse

Select Seed Position

Instances to Skip Feature

4'

V

Skipped By Driving Feature

Options r 1 Propagate component level '—' visual properties

/ i <3^ ^rr^-7

•sjjj Assem4 (Default) •

f§) History

*

(a] Annotations

O.

fo"! Sensors

Front Plane Top Plane Right Plane Origin ^ (f) Housing<1> (Machined< (Machined< (Default< (*) Worm Gear Complete< 1 > (Def <§) (0 Offset Shaft Complete< 1> (Def

\ \l

Top Cover<1> (Default< (l| *§* (-) socket head cap screw_ai<2> (I

0

f3 (-) socket head cap screw_ai<3> (I ^ (-) socket head cap screw_ai<4> (I ^ (-) socket head cap screw_ai<5> (I d|f Mates frrorComponentl DerivedCirPatternl

0

'f' (-) socket head cap screw, ^ (•) socket head cap screw_ai^

"?^y/

'g3 (-) socket head cap screw_ai ^ (•) socket head cap screw. 'g' (-) socket head cap scrjjfi

486

Assembly Modeling

25.11. - Select the "Mirror Components" command from the menu "Insert, Mirror Components" or the drop-down menu in the "Linear Component Pattern" icon.

pS SOUDWORKS

File

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

gg Compo

Assembly

Layout

Linear .. . Component c S™rt Fasteners Pattern

Mate

Sketch

Evaluate

SO §§

o

Help

Move Component r

pf

&

0

CaCa Insert Components

Window

S^W Hidden Components U

A F

Linear Component Pattern Circular Component Pattern

a— a— a—

zb

Pattern Driven Component Pattern

lo

Sketch Driven Component Pattern Curve Driven Component Pattern Assem4 (Default< Display State-1>) •

History Mirror Components

Rfl Sensors

4

25.12. - Use the assembly's "Front Plane" as the "Mirror Plane" and in the "Components to Mirror:" selection box pick the %-20 screw and the "DerivedCirPatternT' feature (which will add all the screws in the pattern). Click in the "Next" arrow to continue to the next step and then OK to finish the mirror. History

Hj|[[] Mirror Components

fcTl Sensors

nor a

-

Step 1: Selections Select face/plane to mirror about and the components to be mirrored.

J

Front Plane

[Jl Right Plane L Origin (0 Housing<1> (Mac. Sde Cover<1 > (Mac...

Selections

(-) Worm Gear Shaftc.

Mirror plane:

x

(-) Worm Gear Comp. (^3 (-) Offset Shaft Comp.

Components to Mirror: socket head cap screw_ai-5

<£^3 Top Cover<1 > (Defa... ^ (-) socket head cap s..

socket head cap screw_ai-6

(-) socket head cai

socket head cap screw_ai-7

!

(-) socket

socket head cap screw_ai-S socket head cap screw_ai-9 - socket head cap screw_ai-10

•A \ll

(i

i\ i\

>

^ (-) socket

m

!

i

t>

DerivedCirPatternl

fe.

487

i

....X


25.13. - Save the finished assembly as 'Gear Box Complete.'

Ft

/ $

ss

v

V

& 6? V

sn.

\

a a a a

\

a a

488

Assembly Modeling

Configurations using Design Tables Previously we covered how to make configurations of parts by manually suppressing features and changing dimensions. Configuring parts using this technique may be adequate when we have 2, maybe 3 configurations and a couple of configured features and/or dimensions, but it becomes very difficult to keep track of changes in the different configurations when we have 5, 10, 20, or more configurations with multiple features and dimensions configured. In this case, adding a Design Table is the best way to manage configurations. A Design Table is an Excel file embedded in (or linked to) a SOLIDWORKS part or assembly that controls dimension values, feature suppression states, configuration names, custom file properties, etc., allowing us to easily manage all the configurations with a single table. The use of Design Tables in SOLIDWORKS 2016 (Educational version vv 2016-2017) requires Microsoft Excel 2010 or 2013. No other spreadsheet Q software is supported. 26.1. - In this exercise we'll create a simplified version of a Socket Head Cap Screw, and then add multiple configurations using a Design Table. The first step is to create a model to configure. Open a new part and add the following sketch in the "Front Plane" in inches. Remember to add the centerline that will allow us to add doubled diameter dimensions.

.250 —

.500

.375 .250

26.2. - SOLIDWORKS automatically assigns an internal name to all dimensions using the format name(p>.feature name. We can temporarily see a dimension's name by resting the mouse pointer on top of it, or we can make them always visible (useful when making design tables) using the menu "View, Hide/Show, Dimension Names," or from the drop down View command icon. The dimension names in your case may be different from the book, based in which order they are added to the sketch.

489


View

Insert

Tools

Window

Redraw

Ctrl*R

IaTc

Help

ir

Mirror Entities

Screen Capture

Disp

Modify

vlove Entities

Lights and Cameras

sO

Hide / Show

il

Hide All Types All Annotations

Toolbars

so »

Axes

Workspace

v ao r-snr~~ii

Temporary Axes

User Interface Full Screen

c

inear Sketch Pattern

Display

F11

So

Cameras

View Dimension Names

Center of mass Customize Menu

Control the visibility of dimension es.

(3 Coordinate Systems Datum Reference Frame

D1

D1 Dimension Names

Live Section Planes

-.500

.250

D4@ Sketch! \

.375 .250

• .500 • (D4)

• .250 • (D3)

.375 (D2) .250 (Dl)

490

Assembly Modeling

26.3. - When adding configurations with different dimension sizes, especially when we use a design table, it's a good idea to change the configured dimension's name and use one that allows us to easily identify them. To rename a dimension, select it in the screen and type a new name in its properties. When renaming dimensions, just add the name and don't worry about the "@feature_name" part; SOLIDWORKS adds this part automatically when we are finished. Turn on the Dimension Names and rename the sketch dimensions as shown. Tolerance/Precision

.500 (Screw_Length)

None

i_

.250 (Head_Heigth)

.123 (Document)

I

.375 (Head_Diarn)

Screw_length

.250 (Screw_Diam|

Dimension Text (XX)

<© LvJI yXl

Another way to change a dimension's name is by doubleclicking on a dimension, and then type a new name in the top box of the "Modify" dialog box.

Modify •

/

X

Screw Length

rrnrrrrrn

26.4. - After completing the sketch add a revolved boss. Since the sketch dimensions are automatically hidden after we make a feature, we need to make them visible while editing the part before adding the Design Table. Right-mouseclick in the "Annotations" folder in the FeatureManager, and activate the option "Show Feature Dimensions" from the pop-up menu. 7

.500 (Screw_Leng1hi|

Part2 (Default<_Display Stat' •

(§)) History

0.250 (Screw_Diam)

m Sensors

.250 —ead_Heigth)

• [PA"] Annotations •-:io Materia |g| Details...

0.375 (HeacLDiam)

Front P

\ toa^f _ \

Ri

Display Annotation..

^

Show Feature Dimensions

60

L Origin Show DimXpert Annotations

Revolvn

Insert Annotation View |

| Automatically Place into Annotation Views Enable Annotation View Visibility

491


26.5. - Add a hexagonal cut in the head of the screw; make it 0.125" deep.

L

.88

(Dl)

yp Cut-Extrude y*

X •

From Sketch Plane Direction 1

/

Blind

.188 DL

0.125in

side to cut

M

ft

°

Draft outward

26.6. - After adding the extruded cut, change the cut dimension's names to "Hex_Drive" and "Hex_Depth." Note that dimensions added in the sketch are shown in black, and dimensions added by a feature are blue.

.500 [Screw_leng1h 0.250

(Screw_Diam]

.250 ~ Head_Heigth 0.375

"~

(Head_Diam)

.125 (Hex_Dep1ti)

.188

(Hex_Drivel

492

360

Assembly Modeling

26.7. - Add a 0.015" x 45 deg. chamfer to the head and tip of the screw as a finishing touch.

26.8. - After completing the part and renaming the dimensions, we are ready to add the design table. Go to the menu "Insert, Tables, Design Table."

^ Design Table

Source

Use the "Auto-create" option; it makes adding a design table easier. Leave the rest of the options to their default value.

Auto create

Browse. Link to file

When we click on OK, we are presented with a list of all the dimensions in the model; this is where we can select the dimensions that we want to add to the Design Table.

Dimensions Please select from the following dimensions to add to this new design table:

Model features and more dimensions can be added later to the table if needed. For this model, select the dimensions indicated. To make multiple selections, hold down the "Ctrl" key while selecting. This is the reason why renaming dimensions is handy, now we know what they are.

Head_Heigth@Sketch1 Screw_Length@Sketch1 Screw_Diam@Sketch1 Head Diam@Sketch1 D1@Revolve1 Hex_Drive@Sketch2 Hex Depth@Cut-Extrude1 D1@Chamfer1 D2@Chamfer1

OK

493

Cancel


26.9. - After selecting the dimensions to configure, click OK. An Excel spreadsheet will be automatically embedded in the SOLIDWORKS part. Since we are using Excel embedded inside SOLIDWORKS, the menus and toolbars are changed to Excel according to Windows' application linking and embedding behavior. SOLIDWORKS Professional 2016 x64 Edition - [Part2.SLDPRT *] I File

Window

.-l :

1

PAGE LAYOUT

La 11:i

• -

Paste

I

A

u -

i_ -

—

A

- A -

&/ •

=- -=- -=

off'Wrap Text

t=: fe

<§> h 7

0.^

1

$-% »h

>8 4°o

Merge & Center -

Alignment

lipboard

m

General

m1

Number

# §>

Conditional Format as Cell Formatting" Table" Styles"

n!

Styles

/ AutoSum Insert

Del«e Format

[T] Fill" Clear*

r tL

^^^Tells

Design Table for: Part2

^3) Part2 (Defaults J)isplay State History to*! Sensors f^l Annotations 8:5 Material < not specified^ Front Plane

(Dl)W-

Top Plane

(Head

L -IT

Right Plane I_ Origin ^ Revolvel

Default

0.25

0.5

0.25

0.375

0.188

0.125

@ Cut-Extrude! Chamfer!

Sheet!

A Model I MotionStudv 1 l_ SOLIDWORKS Professional 2016 x64 Edition

The normal behavior of embedded documents in Windows is to add a thin border around the embedded document. If needed, we can move the Excel file by dragging this border, or resize it from the corners. The borders are very small; be careful not to click outside or you'll exit Excel and go back to SOLIDWORKS.

*SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSJ/'J/'J/'SSSSSSSSS^////?ei.A

494

Assembly Modeling

IMPORTANT: If you accidentally click outside the Excel spreadsheet, this is what will happen: you may be told that a configuration was created, or not, depending on whether the design table was changed or not. To go back to editing the design table, go to the ConfigurationManager, expand the "Tables" folder, make a right-mouse-click in the "Design Table," and select "Edit Table." This will get you back to editing the design table embedded in Excel.

loi

W 7T7 Configurations Q Part2 - Copy Configuration(s) Tables Design Table f=X V Default ( Pari Edit

Table Table

Save Table... X

Delete

1=] Feature Properties Go To... Collapse Items Hide/Show Tree ItemsCustomize Menu

We can resize the table and columns if needed. As we always have at least one configuration, "Default" is listed in our Design Table with the corresponding values listed under each parameter. We can zoom in or out in the graphics area using the middle-mouse-button + Shift, rotate the model with the middle-mouse-button, or pan around with the middle-mouse-button + Ctrl. Making a left or right mouse click anywhere outside of the Excel window or the menus will exit Excel and send us back to SOLIDWORKS.

26.10. - The Design Table holds the data of the parameters that are configured, the configuration names, and values for each parameter in every configuration. The first row holds information about the part and is not used by the design table; we can type anything we want in this row, as the configuration's data starts in the second row.

Configurable parameters are listed in the second row starting at the second column, and configuration names are listed in the first column starting in the third row. Here is a list of some of the most commonly configured parameters in a part:

495


Parameter

Format in Design Table

Possible Values

Dimensions (To control a dimension's value)

name@feature_name

Any numerical value

Features (To control if a feature is suppressed or not)

$STATE@feature_name

S, 1, or Suppressed U, 0, or Unsuppressed

Custom properties (To add custom properties to a configuration)

$prp@property property is the name of the custom property to add

Any text string

Many other parameters can be configured including hole wizard sizes, description, equations, tolerances, etc. Search in SOLIDWORKS help for "Summary of Design Table Parameters" for more details.

26.11. - Now we'll fill the table to add new configurations to the part. Edit the table and fill it out as shown; note that the "Default" configuration was renamed. The configured dimension names were all imported when we created the design table. We only need to type the Configuration names and their values (Cells A3 to G8). Column "F" was formatted to show dimensions as fractions. Be aware that the configured dimensions may be listed in a different order. A

i

-a

n
17 18

G

H

1

CNl

_c

o 0) on +-!

JSt

V >

u

Q X

1

g

Hex_De pt h @Cut-Ext rude 1

X

i5 \6

F

Hea d_Dia m@Sketch 1

_c

%

4

E


-C 4"* «J J* OO

i3

D

Screw_Dia m(©Sketch 1

I

C

Screw_Length (©Sketch 1

I

I 1

'S.W////SSSSSS'/////////////// //////////////•////////////////////A

W/////////////A

03 ^

•mm'sssfs/y/wssssssssssfs/ws/y's/

6-32x0.5

0.138

0.25

0.138 0.226

X 7/64 0.064

6-32x0.75

0.138

0.75

0.138 0.226

7/64 0.064

10-32x0.5

0.19

0.5

0.19 0.312

5/32

10-32x0.75

0.19

0.75

0.19 0.312

5/32

0.09

0.25x0.5

0.25

0.5

0.25

0.375

3/16

0.12

0.25x0.75

0.25

0.75

0.25

0.375

3/16

0.12

0.09

(9 | 10

!11

| 12

Sheetl

| ©

7 r m'SS/S/SSSSSS/S//SSSSS//S/SSSS/S/SSSSSSS/SSSSS/S//SS/S/SSSSSSSSSSS/S/S/SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS*'SS.%

496

i

HZ]

Assembly Modeling

After typing the Design Table, click anywhere inside the graphics area of SOLIDWORKS to exit the Design Table (and Excel). We will be told that the new configurations have been created. Click OK to continue. SOLIDWORKS The design table generated the following configurations:

6-32x0.5 6-32x0.75 10-32x0.5 10-32x0.75 0.25x0.5 0.25x0.75

OK

26.12. - In the ConfigurationManager we can see the configurations added in the Design Table. Note that configurations created with the Design Table have an Excel icon next to their name, and the dimensions configured in the table are displayed with a magenta color (default setting). Activate the different configurations to see the screw sizes created with each one. Configurations {§) Pait2 Configuration(s) (Default)

.500 (Screw_Leng1h)

; Design Table 0.25x0.5 - 0.25x0.75 M - 10-32x0.5

0.250 (Screw_Di 45.0Qjf

pt - 10-32x0.75

.250 ^ (Head_Heigih (Dl) (Head_Diam)

/ .12o~—-

jf>' - 6-32x0.5 \

(Hex_Depth)

- 6-32x0.75 Default [ Pait2 ]

Dl

.188

(Hex_Driy

26.13. - The original "Default" configuration will not be needed, so we need to delete it. Before deleting it, activate a different configuration first, since we cannot delete the currently active configuration. Right-mouse-click in "Default' and select "Delete."

f=x - 6-32x0.5

Show Configuration

|fX - 6-32x0.75 0=O - Default [ Part2 ]

*j-a Add Derived Configuration... Show Preview

X 1=

Delete

N

Propertiby Add Rebuild/Save Mark

497


26.14. - Now we are going to learn how to include additional parameters or features to the Design Table. Right-mouse-click in "Design Table" and select "Edit Table." When asked to add Configurations or Parameters, click "Cancel" to continue, as we don't want to add any of the parameters shown to the Design Table. Add Rows and Columns The following configurations or parameters have been added to the model since you last edited the design table.

Configurations Please select the items you want to add to the design table.

^ Part2 Configuration(s) (0.25x0.5) * fel

Tables Configurations

Design T 0,25x0,5

f-x

Edit Table V

h - 0.25x0.75

lew Wine Save Table,

t* - 10-32x0.5 1* - 10-32x0.75 - 6-32x0.5

Parameters

Delete

SCOLOR SDESCRIPTION SPARTNUMBER

HI Feature Properties

h - 6-32x0.75

•Show unselected items again

OK

f

CanceL

Help

1

i, 31

When the table is presented, the next available cell for adding parameters is pre-selected (in our case "H2"). To add the chamfer as a configurable parameter, we can type $STATE@Chamfer1 directly in the cell, or select the FeatureManager tab to view the features and double-click in the "Chamferf' feature. A

0/*

1

B

C

D

E

F

0.226

7/64

0.064

0.138

0.226

7/64

0.064

j-X — 10-32x0.5 j-X ~ 10-32x0.75 |-X - 6-32x0.5 [-X — 6-32x0.75

2 3 4

j 6-32x0.5

Hex_Drive@Sketch2

0.138

0.75

0.25x0.5

{-X - 0.25x0.75

Hea d_Dia m@Sketch 1

0.25

Design Table

Screw_Diam@Sketchl

Screw_Length @Sketch 1

0.138

6-32x0.75 0.138

^

(ml Tables

[-X

01 "O D 4-* X LU 1 *•> 3 U

Head_Heigth(3)Sketchl

Configurations ^FeatureManager Design Tree

H

G


JZ +->

Q.

<11

Q

1 X 01 X

5

10-32x0.5

0.19

0.5

0.19

0.312

5/32

0.09

6

10-32x0.5

0.19

0.75

0.19

0.312

5/32

0.09

7

0.25x0.5

0.25

0.5

0.25

0.375

3/16

0.12

8

0.25x0.75

0.25

0.75

0.25

0.375

3/16

0.12

9 10 11

498

1

Assembly Modeling

Double-click in the "Chamferl" feature to add the correct nomenclature in the table and its current suppression state, in this case Unsuppressed. If the cell is left empty, the assumed value is Unsuppressed. Optionally we can type S for Suppressed or U for Unsuppressed. ////////SS///S/,m'/SSSS//SSSSSS/S///S/SS/SSS/S//S//S//SS////S/SSS/SSSS//SS///SS//SSS/SSS/SS/S/SSV/SSSS//S////S//SSSSSS

A $

17 Design

US

m

Part2 (0.25x0.5< ^Display Stat (|D History

\

1

2

-5

£

•s

i!

1

® Annotations ®

Material Front Plane ^ Top Plane ^ Right Plane

~

01

3

i

E

F

G

\

S\

eH 0> •o =

£

"5

2

S

J2

£

•!;

a,

^

%

5

E

f

®

e,

®

J?

3

£

3

-=

5

a O 1 X CL> X

£ < P

f

E

i

g

fO
X
1

^

£

®

W

6-32x0.5

0.138

0.25

0.138 0.226

—4

6-32x0.75

0.138

0.75

0.138 0.226

7/64

0.064

1 5

10-32x0.5

0.19

0.5

0.19 0.312

5/32

0.09

10-32x0.75

0.19

0.75

0.19 0.312

5/32

0.09

0.25x0.5

0.25

0.5

0.25 0.375

3/16

0.12

0.25x0.75

0.25

0.75

0.25 0.375

3/16

0.12

7 1 7 18

1

^

J m <" u
b

X

3

H

w

1

«

or

i 2

^ Revolve!

@ Chamferl

f

S

Origin •

D

Table for: Part2

Pol Sensors *

C

*

7

•

B

7/64 0.064 UNSUPPRESSED

1 9 1 10 \

*

Sheetl

0

|

HUti |

26.15. - Now we are going to modify the design table to add a new configuration. Copy the last configuration in the next row, and change its name by adding "NoChamfer" to the name (SOLIDWORKS does not allow duplicate names for configurations), and suppress the feature "Chamferl," just as an exercise. For short we used (/and Sfor suppression states. Feel free to format the Design Table to your liking, as long as the layout isn't modified. A

B

C

|

D

|

E

F

G

H

0.138

0.25

0.138

0.226

7/64

0.064

6-32x0.75

0.138

0.75

0.138

0.226

7/64

0.064

U

5

10-32x0.5

0.19

0.5

0.19

0.312

5/32

0.09

6

10-32x0.75

0.19

0.75

0.19

0.312

5/32

0.09

7

0.25x0.5

0.25

0.5

0.25

0.375

3/16

0.12

0.25

0.75

0.25

0.375

3/16

0.12

0.25

0.75

0.25

0.375

3/16

0.12

u u u u s

8 0.25x0.75 9

0.25x0.75-NoChamfer

10 Sheetl

©

499

01

$ STATE @ C ha mferl

Hea d_D ia m@ Sk etch 1

Hex_Depth @Cut-Extru del

Screw_D iam@ Sk etch 1

6-32x0.5

Hex_D riv e@Sk etch 2

Screw_Length@Sketchl

3 4

2

I

I


Head_H eigth @ Sketch 1

1

U

I


After finishing the changes in the Design Table, click in the graphics area to return to SOLIDWORKS as we did before; as soon as we leave Excel we get a message letting us know the new configuration was created. Click OK to acknowledge and continue. Switch through the different configurations to see the differences.

Top Plane 1SJ Riaht Plane

The design table generated the following configurations: 0.25x0.75-NoChamfer

HI Details...

f(j| Sensors IfAl Annotations o— 2-0 Material
SOLIDWORKS

•

Disnl-r Annnt-itinnr

•^hnifir

Hide the model dimensions and save the part as "Screw Design Table."

„

Show Feature Dimensions

OK

K

DimensjfifliU^r^^

Show DimXpert Annotations

26.16. - The finished configurations look like this:

0

0

0.25 -20x0.5

0.25 -20x0.75

0.

0.

10-32x0.5

10-32x0.75

0.

0

6-32 x 0.5

6-32 x 0.75

0 0.25 -20 x 0.75-NoChamfer

500

Assembly Modeling

26.17. - For the screw we just made to be truly useful we have to add it to our own components library, and make it auto-assemble using SmartMates, just like the SOLIDWORKS Toolbox components. Before adding it to the design library, we have to add a new feature called "Mate Reference"; this feature will tell the component what type of geometry to look for when we drag-and-drop it into an assembly, in our case, give the screw the ability to auto-assemble using a "Pegin-Hole" mate. Select the menu "Insert, Reference Geometry, Mate Reference" or from the drop-down menu in the "Reference Geometry" command. Surface

•

Face

•

Curve

•

Reference Geometry

•

Sheet Metal

•

Weldments

•

Molds

•

[1]

Reference Geometry

u

Curves

yr

•

Plane...

COP Live Section Plane ./*

Plane

Axis...

*

/

Coordinate System... o

lnstant3D

Axis Coordinate System

Point... o

Exploded View...

Point

|J Mate Reference...

0

[}•[] Model Break View...

0|l Mate Reference -Mjh

V

Part...

In the "Primary Reference Entity" select the edge indicated. For the "Mate Reference Type" the only option we can use with a circular edge is "Default," and in "Mate Reference Alignment" leave the option to "Any," this way we can flip the alignment using the "Tab" key if needed. Click OK to add the reference. With this mate reference, the screw will have the "Peg-in-Hole" behavior when it is dragand-dropped from the "Design Library" into an assembly. If multiple mate references need to be added to a component, they can be renamed for easier reference, in this case, "Peg-ln-Flole." Of Mate Reference

v

x

Reference Name Peg

Hole

Primary Reference Entity jg [|Edge<1> ^

Default

^

Any

Secondary Reference Entity

h Default Any

501


myrii none

Origin

After the Mate Reference is added we can see it in the FeatureManager, where we can edit or delete it if needed. Save the part to continue.

flTl MateReferences Of Pcg-ln-Hole-<1?

•

^ Revolvel

•

ffrOl C,,t-Cvtr,.rlo1

For simple mates we can use a single mate reference; for more complex mates we can use a second or even a third reference. Mate References can be defined using faces, edges, vertices, axes, planes or the origin. The following table shows the type of entity and mate options available. Using "Default" will try to add the default mate type for the entity in the assembly.

Mate Reference Types available

Entity

• •

Cylindrical Face

Round Edge

Default Tangent Concentric

Default

Flat Face / Plane

Axis

Vertex/Origin

502

• • • •

Default Tangent Coincident Parallel

• • • •

Default Concentric Coincident Parallel

• •

Default Coincident

Assembly Modeling

26.18. - After adding the Mate Reference to the screw, the next step is to add it to the "Design Library." Open the "Design Library" tab, and press the "Keep Visible" push pin; maintaining the panel open is often helpful but not always required. Expand the "Design Library" and select the "parts, hardware" folder. To add the screw to the library we can either:

Design Library

Auto Show Design Library p^ annotations

H

assemblies

&

p^ features «C7

forming tools

m

|7^ motion

0

p=> parts pT? hardware |7^ inserts (7^ knobs

•

«

Select the "Add to Library" icon at the top of the Design Library

Design Library

7 fir

(jjj) Design Library Add to Library

p^) annotations

H

1> p^) assemblies

IS

t> p~) features

Or drag-and-drop the screw from the top of the FeatureManager into the lower half pane or the folder where we want to save it. Be aware that for this method to work the Task Pane must remain visible. Features j Sketch | Direct Editing | Evaluate

^ 1^

DimXpert

• Q _ fl

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

r»

Design Library

© ^ annotations

d

t> p^ assemblies

&

(<§) History (5) Sensors

t> p^ features t>

FaI Annotations

forming tools p^ motion

Material Front Plane ^ Top Plane Right Plane

©

|j) Design Library

Screw Design Table (0.25x0.5<<^ûlt k

x

parts

v

v

kn<| Copy to h

t , Origin

>

v

MateReferences ^ Revolvel

sheetmetal

> p^ routing p^ smart components

@ Cut-Extrude1

t>

Chamferl

^ Toolbox

0 0 3D ContentCentral

& cotter pir^ jânqe bolt

nut

503

retaining ri...

gear


ito

lei o:

Add to Library

V

X

Items to Add Screw Design Table.SLDPRT

Both options will show the "Add to Library" command. The main difference between the two options is that using the drag-and-drop option pre-selects the part to add to the library, and using the button we have to select the part in the "Items to Add" selection box. After selecting (or pre-selecting) the screw, select the folder where we want to store the library part and optionally add a description.

Save To File name: Screw Design Table Design Library folder Design Library annotations assemblies

Lf)

GB p3/' features Iforming tools j

y/1 motion

hardware

Leave the "File type" as Part. After pressing OK, the screw is added to the hardware folder and is available for use in assemblies.

knobs Gtp^) sheetmetal f

P~7 routing & smart components

Options

Before using the screw from the library in an assembly, close the screw part before using it in an assembly, otherwise we'll be asked if we want to use the currently open file.

Part (*.sldprt) Description:

\

S

©

cotter pin

flange bolt

gear

m

c\

Si

Screw Design Table.sldprt

rew Design Table

©

504

Assembly Modeling

Alternate to SOLIDWORKS Toolbox: In case SOLIDWORKS Toolbox is not available, we can use the screw added to the Design Library instead, and dragging and dropping it into an assembly will have the same behavior as the screw from the Toolbox, adding all the necessary mates automatically. The major difference is that in this case the only sizes available are limited to the part's configurations. <

~

Design Library

3 x

SOLIDWORKS Content

x

Design Library p^ annotations

o

t>

assemblies

t> y) features t> ^ forming tools p^ motion

0

a p^7 parts

8=

pT? hardware p"7 inserts p^ knobs

<8

> p^r sheetmetal

(8

> f) routing p^ smart components t>

<8

i

;i

1

© 7

^ Toolbox

\

s

®

cotter pin

flange bolt

gear Screw Design Table

Boss-txtrudei ofHousing ^

w) i

i •m / -' <47 /a

nut

retaining ri...

47 // After we drop the screw in the hole it will auto assemble using the mate reference and then we'll be able to select the configuration we want to use. Select a Configuration Select a configuration to be used

0.25x0.75 0.25x0.7S-NoChar1 10-32x0.5 10-32x0.75 6-32x0.5 6-32x0.75

OK

Cancel

505


Notes:

506

Assembly Modeling

Interference Detection 27.1. - After the assembly is complete, a tool that will help us find out if we have problems in our assembly is the "Interference Detection" command. Go back to the 'Gear Box Complete' assembly, and select the "Interference Detection" command from the "Evaluate" tab in the CommandManager, or from the menu "Tools, Evaluate, Interference Detection." The components we have made, once assembled, have a built in interference, and its purpose is to help us learn how to use this tool. Select the "Interference Detection" command and click on "Calculate." By default, the interference is calculated between all of the components in the assembly; however, in the "Selected Components" box we can limit the number of components used in the interference calculation, and/or optionally select which components to exclude from the calculation in the "Excluded Components" section, greatly improving performance, especially when working with larger assemblies.

pS SOLIDWORKS Desiln Stu


Assembly

learance rification

File

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

Window

»

^

-1-

0

0

Hole Alignment

Measure

Mass Properties

Section Properties

Sensor

WORKS Add-lns

interference Detection Detects any interference between

rr£a I [-i_componen»s.

^3 Interference Detection V

X

Selected Components Gear Box Complete.SLDASM

Calculate

• Excluded Components Results Not calculated

507

Help

*

q - f e - 0 - 3

Assembly Performance Visualization Evaluation

li

Curvature

Symmetry Check I


27.2. - After running the calculation, we see multiple interferences listed in the "Results" window. Most of these are fasteners because the holes they fit in are not threaded and the screw threads interfere with them. Since we are aware of those, we are going to turn on the "Create fasteners folder" option. When activated, fastener interferences will be grouped together, making it easier to identify problem areas that are not related to a fastener. The option "Make interfering parts transparent" is on by default, this option will allow us to easily identify the interfering volumes. NOTE: The fasteners folder option only works with Toolbox generated fasteners. Another useful option is to hide noninterfering components, this way, the only components shown in the screen will be the ones interfering with each other, making the problem areas stand out, making them easier to find.

Options

^

O Treat coincidence as interference • Show ignored interferences i—i Treat subassemblies as ' components I—| Include multibody part '—' in£ (fî Make interfering parts^ 'transparent .1^1 Create fasteners folder £e matchin(Lt0*fnetic threads 'folder i—i Ignore hidden ' bodies/components Non-interfering Components

C) Wirpfr^mp '(§) Hidden (. j IfSHSparent

O Use current

27.3. - If needed, collapse the "Fasteners" folder and select an interference from the list to see the interference; and now that we know where the problem is, we can take corrective action. In this step ignore the gear-on-gear interferences; we'll work on them later. This is a tool that will help us make better designs, but it will only show us where the problems are; it's up to the designer to fix them. •yg Interference Detection V

©

X

Selected Components

eg

Gear Box Complete.SLDASM o

Calculate • Excluded Components Results

t>

V

A

Q Fasteners Interferencel - 0.02iri7T Interference2 - 0.02inA3 I

V >

Interference88 - 0.00| Q.Q20l8719inA3

47

1

\

Ignore [~1 Component view

508

<9

Assembly Modeling

27.4. - To avoid checking for and displaying interferences we are not interested in, in this case gear-on-gear, select each of those interferences and click in the "Ignore" button to hide them. In our example we have three instances, your case may be different depending on the position of each gear. Optionally we can rotate the gears to a position where they do not interfere with each other. Interference Detection •

©

X

Selected Components

A

A

Gear Box Complete.SLDASM ©

Calculate 0 Excluded Components Results - O

A

Fasteners Interferencel - 0.02inA3

I'

> IS Interference2 - 0,02inA3 > 1^3 Interference87 - 0.000319in Interference88 - 0.000243in

s*

<

1

v

'9nore K

>

1

J Componeh^ê^^J^^

27.5. - To correct the interference in our design (since we know the hole in the 'Housing' is smaller than the 'Offset Shaft's diameter), we need to make the shaft's diameter smaller. To make this change, exit the "Interference Detection" command, and double-click in the shaft's cylindrical surface to reveal its dimensions.

6uu 01:0 005 /s. *)

r

//

/. i /

o.'SOO

\

\

\

\

i\

© 509

//


Double-click the diameter dimension and change its value to 0.575". Click the "Rebuild" icon as shown, and then OK to complete the "Modify" command. Rebuilding the model will tell SOLIDWORKS to update any models that were changed, like the 'Offset Shaft' in this case. Modify

v

Ik% A

D1@Sketch1

Regenerate the model with the current value.

.575

//

n

si

A

v

27.6. - After changing the shaft's diameter run the "Interference Detection" command again to confirm that we have resolved the interference between the shaft and the housing. The only interference displayed should be the fasteners. Be aware that we may see additional gear-on-gear interferences when the shaft's diameter changed; if this is the case, ignore them. Click OK to finish. In the next image non-interfering components are not hidden. Interference Detection V

X

Selected Components Gear Box Complete.SLDASM

Calculate

r/

• Excluded Components

I

©

E> |_| Fasteners

I

&

2 Ignored Interferences

©

Ignore •Component view Options

a \\ ii

*

I"! Treat coincidence as interference

510

©

d7

Assembly Modeling

Assembly Configurations 28.1. - In our book we have made two different versions of the 'Offset Shaft,' one with a gear and one without it. Just as part configurations can show different but similar versions of a part, we can create assembly configurations to show different versions using different components, sizes, options, etc. While in the assembly, select the ConfigurationManager tab, add two new configurations and rename them "With Gears" and "SimplifiedAfter adding the new configurations rename the default configuration to "No Gears."

zh ka

<5

vp < ,

y

zb

ka

ypry

Configurations

C3 Gear Box Complete

ConfigurationManager PCTtfurrvutbpidy

Gear Box Comolete Configuration' h

| History

& Invert Selection

| Sensors

Top Assembly (Gear Box Complete)

l Al Annotations

Hidden Tree Items

Front Plane

Isolate

Top Plane

Comment

Right Plane

Tree Display

Origin

WJilliyUUUUIIFl

^ (f) Housing<1> (Machined<
Add Configuration...

SideCover<1> (Machined < (Default<

\

Add Configuration V

Hide

Add Configuration

X

V

X

Configuration Properties

Configuration Properties

Configuration name:

Configuration name:

With Gears

Simplified

Description:

Description:

Full Gear Parts

No gears, no hardware

O Use in bill of materials

[~| Use in bill of materials

Comment:

Comment:

^ Gear Box Complete Configuration^ jj=Q

No Gears [ Gear Box Comp

j1®

Simplified [ Gear Box Com| With Gears [ Gear Box Corr

511


28.2. - Split the FeatureManager to show components and configurations, and activate the "No Gears" configuration.

11 id 0

7lOrigin

x.

(f) Housing<1> (Machined< (Machined< (Default< <

(-) Worm GearComplete<1> (Defai <3. (-) Offset Shaft Completed > (Defai TopCover<1> (Default<_

f

(-) socket head cap screw_ai<17> (F

f f

(-) socket head cap screw_ai<20> (h

? (-) socket head cap screw_ai<18> (F f (-) socket head cap screw_ai<19> (F (-) socket head cap screw_ai<21> (F

©

i® Mates &|tl MirrorComponentt i>l> DerivedC irP attem2

40 MirrorComponent3

1

©

<5

©

Configurations Gear Box Complete Configuration(s) (i|

f° f°

fca i

©

No Gears [ Gearir Box Comp

/

d7

d?

Simplified [ Gear ar Bo>L^mple1 Bo>L^m With Gears [ Gear Box Comple Y

t

28.3. - Just as we can suppress features in a part's configuration, in an assembly we can suppress components (parts and sub-assemblies), and also use a different configuration. For the "No Gears" configuration, we'll suppress the existing geared parts and replace them with the simplified version of each part. Hide the Top Cover' for visibility, and suppress the 'Worm Gear Complete' and 'Offset Shaft Complete' parts. Suppressed components are shown in grey in the FeatureManager, and, like suppressed features in a part, they affect the weight and volume of the assembly. rum rianc

\ Top Plane na Right Plane lOrigin <£> (f) Housing<1> (Machined< SideCover<1> (Machined<
©

(-) Worm Gear Shaft<1> (Default< (-) Worm Gear Complete<1> (Defai

Supp • e s

<55 (-) Offset Shaft Complete<1> (Defai \ TopCover<1> (Default<_ f

f f f

f

(-) socket head cap screw_ai<17> (F (-) socket head cap screw_ai<18> (F (-) socket head cap screw_ai<19> (F (-} socket head cap screw_ai<20> (F

Y \\¥ Concentric41

^^^wwidthl —hz! *-•-^.«parallel1^^r

(-) socket head cap screw_ai<21> (F

512

y/

Assembly Modeling

Top Plane ^ Right Plane L Origin *

X13

* •

Housing<1> (Machined< (Macff^^~ ^

<§) (-) Worm Gear 5haft< &

j

@

^

n (*) Worm Gear Compj & ^

>y

supp

* l^si) (") Offset Shaft Complete< 1> (Defa" Top Cover<1> (Default<_ •

^ (-) socket head cap screw_ai<17> (k

*

"f3 (-) socket head cap screw_ai< 18> (k

•

§ (-) socket head cap screw_ai<19> (k

*

B

*

^ (") socket head cap screwâi<21> (k

socket

• <

i|jl Mates

*

f§D History

Concentric5

head caP screw_ai<20> (k

Coincident4

mJ/ri/,

>

Gear Box Complete (No Gears< Display!

fo"| Sensors *

Annotations

®

Front Plane Top Plane Right Plane Origin *

*s§3 (f) Housing<1> (Machined<
•

<2>

Worm Gear Completed

Defa

Offset 5haft Completed

(Defa

P

m ^ (-) socket head cap screw,ai<17> (k ^ (-) socket head cap serew_ai<18> (k § (-) socket head cap screw_ai<19> (k

V.

v

After suppressing a component in the assembly, its mates are automatically suppressed too. Mates (§) Concentricl (Housing<1>,Side Cover<1>) A Coincident (Housing<1>,Side Cover<1>) (§) Concentric2 (Housing<1>,Side Cover<1>) (O) Concentric? (Side Cover< 2> Worm Gear Shaft<1*)

(§) Concentric41 (Worm GearShaft<1>,Worm Gear Complete* P'P Width! (Housing<1> ,Worm Gear Complete<1> ) ParalleU (Worm Gear Shaft<1>,Worm Gear Complete<1>) @ Concentric5 (Housing<1>,Offset Shaft Complete<1>) /\ Coincident4 (Housing<1>,Offset Shaft Complete<1>)j

/\ Coincidents (Housing<1>,Top Cover<1>) A Coincident6 (Housing<1>,Top Cover<1>) @ Concentric12 (Top Cover<1>,socket head cap screw_ai<17>)

513


28.4. - Add the 'Worm Gear1 and the 'Offset Shaft parts, and mate them in place as we did before. And now that we know we have an interference, change the diameter of the 'Offset Shaft'to 0.575".

575 +.000

o

005

m

o ;

&Minn r

s~'

c

o

o

514

t

Assembly Modeling

28.5. - Switch to the 'With Gears" assembly configuration and suppress the simplified 'Worm Gear' and 'Offset Shaft that were added in the previous step. Origin (f) Housing<1> (Machined**D Side Cover* 1> (Machined* (Defau (-) Worm Gear Complete*1 > (C (-) Offset Shaft Complete*1> (I TopCover<1> (Default<*Defai

m

(-) socket head cap screw_ai<1" (-) socket head cap screw_ai<15 (-) socket head cap screw_ai*1(

:

(-) socket head cap screw_ai<2( li<2 :autt) (-) Offset Shaft* 1> (Default)

(-) Worm Gear<1> (Default) ult^^^p CM MirrorComponentl

\

Configurations

K

- <3 Gear Box Complete Configuration! 1=®

No Gears ( Gear Box Com

28.6. - Switch to the "Simplified' configuration and suppress the geared components and all fasteners, making it similar to the "No Gears" configuration but without fasteners. Multiple components can be selected to suppress (or unsuppress) at the same time. Origin

iu

(f) Housing* 1> (Machi SideCover*1> (Machir

9

\

(-) Worm Gear Complel (-) Offset Shaft Complete* 1> (I

Suppress

Nî Top Cover<1> (Default* *Defai ^ (-) socket head cap screw_ai' if (-) socket head cap screw_ai<1(

n

(-) socket head cap screw_ai*1? 'f* (-) socket head cap screw_ai<2(

f -) socket head cap screw_ai*2' (-) Offset Shaft* 1> (Default* <1

%

^ (-) Worm Gear<1> (Default*
R

a, a

Configurations Gear Box Complete Configuration" Hjear^êfrlîôm Simplified ( Gear Box x Coi

515


28.7. - When components are added to an assembly with existing configurations, by default, the mates added in the active configuration are suppressed in the other configurations. In our assembly we added and mated the 'Worm Gear' and 'Offset Shaft while the "No Gears" configuration was active; therefore, the mates added are suppressed in the 'With Gears' and 'Simplified' configurations. Expand the "Mates" Coincident14 (Top Covers folder, locate the previously added mates (should be 4t° located at the bottom of the £ \ list) and Unsuppress them in the 'Simplified' Unsuppress £ 6^ ' configuration. Features (Q) Concentric42 (

a

If the mates are not resolved (unsuppressed), the components will move out of place if dragged.

Lock Rotation

Coincident17 ( Housing*

Parent/Child...

•sO,) Concentric43 f Worm Ge Parallel (Wornn Gear Sh

X

a Coincident18CWorm Ge o fa|u MirrorComponentl

Delete Add to New Folder Properties-

Save the assembly. The finished configurations for the Gear Box are as follows. The 'Top Covet has been hidden in all three configurations for visibility:

lOrigin cj (f) Housing<1> (Machined<
No Gears Configuration

SideCover<1> (Machined<<0< (-) Worm Gear Shaft<1> (Defau (-) Worm Gear Completed> (C (-) Offset Shaft Completed> (l|

\ Top Cover<1> (Default< < Defat

\x

(-) socket head cap screw_aid" (-) socket head cap screw_ai<1J (-) socket head cap screw_aid< (-) socket head cap screw_ai<2( (-) socket head cap screw_ai<2'

<3

(-) Offset Shaft<1> (Default<<[

(-) Worm Gear<1> (Default<
lo

DerivedCirPattern2 >

a Configurations

No Gears f Gear Box Cc -

impime

ear Box C

— With Gears [ Gear Box ( v

516

Assembly Modeling

Simplified Configuration Origin ^3 (f) Housing<1> (Machined< (Machined< (Defau <£^3 (-) Worm Gear Complete<1> (C •Qj (-) Offset Shaft Complete<1> (I ^ Top Cover<1> (Default<
5

^ (-) socket head cap screw_ai<2 (-) Offset Shaft<1> (Default<<[ <£^3 (-) Worm Gear<1> (Default<
j>j> DerivedCirPattern2

/t> d,

(s

X? , Configurations

| Gear Box Complete Configurate

A

b c

l ox ci Simplified [

GearMox C

LI tdI

Gear Box < v

With Gears

lOrigin (f) Housing<1> (Machined<
% SideCover<1> (Machined<
(Defau (-) Worm Gear Complete<1> ([ (-) Offset Shaft Complete<1> (I

m

Top Cover<1> (Default<
f

(-) socket head cap screw_ai<1"

f

(-) socket head cap screw_a»<1{

f f f

u

(-) socket head cap screw_ai<1< (-) socket head cap screw_ai<2( (-) socket head cap screw_ai<2"

(-) Offset Shaft<1> (Default) <33 (•) Worm Gear<1> (Default) Mates

i

MirrorComponentl

gg DerivedC irPattern2 ifc re

zb c\ vp . .

Configurations • <£*§ Gear Box Complete Configuratii * I®® r

No Gears [ Gear Box Cc _)ii

iiii|iiiinM11

hi

b\ < v

With Gears ( Gear

>

517

o


28.8. - When we change a part's dimension in the assembly, the change is propagated to the part and its drawing. After finishing the assembly and having changed the 'Offset Shaft diameter, open it's drawing to verify the drawing is updated. Save and close the drawing file. If asked to save modified files, click on "Save All" to save both the part and the drawing.

—v

•5.000

000

575 005

.063

A

Material: Chrome Stainless Steel Weight: 0.47 Lb Volume: 1.65 cu-in Designer: Alejandro Reyes

• 6.500 —V


28.9. - After completing the assembly configurations activate the "With Gears" configuration. With the 'Top Covet hidden, we realize that there is another problem with our assembly: The geared shaft cannot be assembled as designed because it will not fit through the hole in the 'Housing.' In this case the problem is exaggerated to make it obvious, but most of the time in real life it's not always this obvious. To help us find this type of problem we can use "Collision Detection"; it allows us to move a part through its range of motion and alert us when it hits another component. To allow the shaft to move freely along its axis, first we need to suppress the coincident mate added in the offset shaft. To locate a part's mates, expand the FeatureManager and go to the "Offset Shaft Complete, Mates" and suppress the Coincident mate. luyiii rraiic

Origin * • *

^3 (-) Worm Gear Shaft< 1> (Default

*

^§3 (-) Worm Gear Complete<1> (Defa

.

\ \

\

\

2D Mates in Gear Box Compl

•\

\ \ V

ConcentricS (Hc| 7^

/ /

^3 (') Offset Shaft Complete<1> "*•

/

$

ft

^ (f) Housing<1> (Machined< (Machined<
Coincident4 (Housinc ÛP

*

\ v

History Sensors

518

v

Assembly Modeling

28.10. - After suppressing the mate, click and drag the shaft to move and rotate it about its axis to confirm the mate is suppressed. To simplify the view, we'll hide every component except for the 'Housing' and the 'Offset Shaft Gear.' Hold down the "Ctrl" key and select the shaft and the housing, make a right-mouse-click and select the "Isolate" command to temporarily hide every component not pre selected; note that a toolbar with an "Exit Isolate" button will become visible. Pressing the "Exit Isolate" button shows the hidden to the previous view state. ^5 Gear Box Complete (With Gears
A

&& p\.

[^)) History m Sensors

•

Qx] Annotations Front Plane

&

Invert Selection


Go To... Component

(f) Housing<1> (Machined^

ual

fWSPnmed<
• W L JIUL LUP

Isolate

^ (-) Worm Gear Shaft<1> (Defau^S®^^ '

J*"

re CoU^bnent

Component Display

r

'Q} (-) Offset Shaft Completed >J

Fix

npletj ConcentricS (Hou

^ Jemporary Fix/Group Form New Subassembly

/\ Coincident4 (Housing

Copy with Mates

f&l History X

f^fl Sensors

fai Annotations

Q

o—


m

Delete Add to Favorites Save Selection Add to New Folder

Front Plane

Material

m Top Plane

Isolate

o 7$°!

o

o x

X o

o

Exit Isolate

,\ \

6

o o
o

519


28.11. - From the Assembly tab select the "Move Component" command. In essence it's the same as dragging a component in the graphics area, but using the command we have more options including "Collision Detection" and "Physical Dynamics."

(•) Collision Detection"

Check between:

(•) These components Housing-1 Offset Shaft Complete-1

Resume Drag

\

Move Component

Show Hidden Components

Assembly Features

Referi Geonr

Move Component

After selecting "Collision Detection" a new set of options is presented; under the "Check between:" option select "These Components" to reveal a new selection box. This option is used to limit the number of components included in the collision detection calculation, ignoring the rest of the parts in the assembly. The collision detection command is a resource intensive command; therefore, limiting the number of components in the analysis makes the analysis run faster and smoother.

| Dragged part only

• Dynamic Clearance Advancg 0 Highlight faces 0 Sound 1

art ners

Moves a component within the degrees of freedom defined by its mates.

Options

I

00

Add the 'Housing' and the 'Offset Shaft Gear1 to the selection box and press the "Resume Drag" button to continue. Make sure the "Stop at collision," "Highlight faces" and "Sound" options are also selected.

I Ignore complex surfaces

Q This configuration

Using the "All components" option can be used if our assembly has only a few components and we have a fast computer. The maximum number of components depends on geometry complexity, mates, computer speed, etc. and therefore it's more convenient to limit the number of components in the analysis. If we start moving the parts with the "Collision Detection" command and there is interference between any two components being analyzed, we'll get a warning letting us know about it and the option "Stop on collision" will be disabled, but the sound and highlight faces will continue to work. This is another good reason to limit the number of components included in the analysis.

520

Assembly Modeling

28.12. - Click and slowly drag the shaft, notice how the movement is slower than usual, and, depending on the PC's hardware, may be sluggish. When the helical thread hits the housing's wall, it will highlight the colliding faces, alert us with a sound, and stop according to the options selected. o

O O o

W. o /

o

o

28.13. - Collision and interference detection tools can help us identify and fix design errors early in the process before manufacturing a product. After identifying potential problems click "Exit Isolate" to return to the previous view state. Close the "Move Component" command, and Unsuppress the coincident mate that prevents the Isolate shaft from moving along its axis. In the assembly Exit Isolate ite exercises the 'Housing' will be modified to allow the shaft to be assembled.

L

Front Plane Top Plane

o

Right Plane L* Origin •

^§3 (f) Housing<1> (Machined<<&—^SideBoss

•

SideCover<1> (Machined<
*

(-) Worm Gear Shaft<1> (Defau

• w

(-) Worm Gear Complete<1> (C ^ (-) Offset Shaft Completed [q7| Mates in Gear Box Cor

\ i

T°

©A Concentric5

, \i

t4 (Housing- | Unsuppress |

|^| History

©

fol Sensors ("A*! Annotations

Z

C, Q Chrome Stainless Steel Ifl Front Plane

tk t°p Plane

521


28.14. - As a final step to finish the assembly we'll add a new type of mate called "Gear." The gear mate allows us to define a rotational ratio between two cylindrical components, even if the two components don't have any type of contact or alignment. Adding this mate will allow us to simulate a gear driving another gear. While still in the "With _ Gear" configuration, I i Origin Invert Selection select the 'Worm Ql (f) Housing<1> (Machined< (Machined< (Default Gear Complete' and Component ^ (-) Worm Gear Complete< 1> (De 'Offset Shaft Gear1 Qj (-) Offset Shaft Completed> (O from the FeatureIsolate TopCover<1> (Default<
ILIiit JS

l

H i

iil!"

ij i

lil

Select the "Mate" command, expand the "Mechanical Mates" group, and select the "Gear Mate." For this type of mate we can select a cylindrical face, a round edge or an axis of the 'Offset Shaft Gear1 and another from either the 'Worm Gear Complete' or the 'Worm Gear Shaft.' The reason is that since both are connected, moving one will move the other. After making the selections, enter 1 for the teeth/diameter of the 'Offset Shaft Gear1 and 22 for the teeth/diameter of the other selection. This value is not the actual diameter, but the gear ratio at which one will rotate with respect to the other. The "Reverse" option inverts the rotation of the gears if needed. Press OK to add the mate and finish the command.

522

Assembly Modeling

GearMatel

v

Isolate

x ^[y]

^ Mates I

Exit Isolate

Analysis

A *

Message

When using gear mates for SOUDWORKS Motion results, mount the two gears on the same housing. Mate Selections

V

Standard Mates

V

Advanced Mates

r •m

urs

&

Teeth/Diameter: 22

/

Mechanical Mates Cam 1^1Slot

Teeth/Diameter: inge • • >'

ry --in

| Reverse

Rack Pinion

If] Screw * Universal Joint 28.16. - To test the gear mate click and drag with the left mouse button either shaft to see the effect. Dragging the 'Worm Gear Complete' will cause the 'Offset Shaft Gear1 to turn fast and vice versa. concentric id [ i op cover< •

Isolate

/\ Coincident13 (Top Cover< (§) Concentric14 (Top Cover<

|^=J1

/\ Coincident14 (Top Cover<

Exit Isolate

@ Concentric15 (Top Cover< /\ Coincident15 (Top Covers ((3) Concentric16 (Side CoveK /\ Coincident16 (Side CoveK (§) Concentric42 (Housing<1>

>v..

/\ Coincidentl? (Housing<1>

(5) Concentric43 (Worm Gear! ^ Parallel (Worm Gear Shaft

^•^wnctaentimworft^n*^ GearMatel (Offset Shaft Cc

[>[> DerivedCirPattern2 MirrorComponent3

j±s ra

P' • Configurations

Gear Box Complete Configuration" pS ~ No Gears ( Gear Box Com ^ — Simplified [ Gear Box Con |j=Q

With Gears [ Gear Box Coi

523


Click the "Exit Isolate" button to return the view to the previous state and show the Top Cover" to finish the assembly. Your assembly 'Gear Box Complete' is finished and should now look like this.

-©

SS

\

h i

—

B

!

dt

B dr

28.17. - Instead of hiding a component to view inside or behind it, we can make it transparent. Select the 'Housing' in the FeatureManager or the graphics area and from the pop-up menu select "Change Transparency." Click and drag one of the gears to turn it and see the effect. To make the components opaque again repeat the same process. ,-T

jy ^ yyu k jlf % ae Q> e #" ^ Machined "Machine SI

^lodel'

v [jSj"

Change Transparency

&

©

© dp -dl

r

N

/ !

<3

dd

© \

524

dd

Assembly Modeling

© •—

©

m

\ \

©

28.18. - An easy way to manipulate component's display mode in an assembly is by using the "Display Pane." The "Display Pane" can be accessed at the top of the FeatureManager; click in the arrow to expand it. It will be located to the right. If the arrow is not visible, make the FeatureManager wider to reveal it.

$

m

7-

c=:>

^3 Gear Box Complete (With Gears< >

7.
fg>) History fill

<^>

> fig)

History

g| Sensors

Sensors

(

$

*

7-

(3 Gear Box Complete (With Gears
History Sensors

0

®i

C3 Gear Box Complete (With Gears< Display State• fig)

History

fa) Sensors

525

m


In the "Display Pane" we can: Click in the first column to Hide/Show a component.

<8

vL Origin

\

•

(f) Housing<1> (Machined<_Di

•

Side Cover<1> (Machined<_Dis

•

(-) Worm Gear Shaft<1> (Defaults sDefau

0

(-) Worm Gear Complete<1> (Default<
0

•

Ail

r=a n?l

In the second column to change a component's display style.

$ 0 < <* e

<5

vu Origin (f) Housing<1> (Machined< _Di I'Q) SideCover<1> (Machined<_Dis Wireframe

•Q) (-) Worm Gear Shafts 1> (Default<
(£] Hidden Lines Visible

•Q) (-) Offset Shaft Completed> (Default<<[

[['] Hidden Lines Removed

^ TopCover<1> (Default<_Displa

10 Shaded With Edges

^ (-) socket head cap screw_ai<17> (HX-SH

^ J

'f' (-) socket head cap screw_ai<18> (HX-SH

Shaded Default Display

'ff (-) socket head cap screw_ai<19> (HX-SH (§)

Customize Menu

(-) socket head cap screw_ai<20> (HX-SH

~^r~r

^ (-) socket head cap screw_ai<21> (HX-SH

In the third column we can copy/paste, change or remove a component's appearance.

<8

^

u Origin

< \ 0^ '

(f) Housing<1> (Machined<_Di l SideCover<1> (MachinedssDefault>_Dis

\ \

£

(-) Worm Gear Shafts 1> (Defaults sDefau

Appearance

*

(-) Worm Gear Completes 1> (DefaultssC

Copy Appearance

<§> (-) Offset Shaft Completes 1> (DefaultssC

Paste Appearance

Top Covers1> (Default_Displa

mYi x


m


©

g

/

j X

drtv /1 iv n

526

Remove Appearance Remove All Part Appearances From Side Cover

Assembly Modeling

Click in the fourth column to make the component transparent/opaque.

•0 0 < x 0

(S

<9>

7I , Origin (f) Housing<1> (Machined<_Di SideCover<1> (Machined<_Dis ^ (-) Worm GearShaft< 1 > (Default< (Default< (Default<<[ T

r

\ 0 0 [X^ 0,Sin h. 0 pa laJl pa ~z\

Feel free to explore the different display options for the assembly; more often than not we need to change component's display to be more efficient.

<51 ml I8I#I#I< \ 0^

<8>

7-

Gear Box Complete (With Gears • RH History fp\ Sensors *

CD Annotations Front Plane

\

Top Plane

X

^ Right Plane

\

Origin * ff) • *

u 0 00

Housing<1> (Machinedk _Displ Side Cover<1> (Machined<_Displa

^ (-) Worm Gear Complete< 1> (Default< < Defa

*

^ (-) Offset Shaft CompIete<1> (Default< < Oef

•

*§* (-) socket head cap screw_ai< 17> (HX-SHCS

Top Cover<1> (Default<_Display S

•

(-) socket head cap screw_ai<18> (HX-SHCS

*

^ (-) socket head cap screw_ai<19> (HX-SHCS

•


•


\

(-) Offset Shaft<1> (Default) <$ (-) Worm Gear<1> (Default)

<*>

mm

(-) Worm Gear Shaft< 1> (Default< < Default>

y

if

\

s0 00 00 00 30 00 00 00 0 0

• ||JI Mates • [bj(0 MirrorComponentl *

DerivedCirPattern2

When selecting faces in a transparent component, IF there is an opaque component behind the selection, the opaque component is selected, if there are no opaque components, the transparent face is selected. To select the transparent face if an opaque component is behind it, hold down the "Shift" key while selecting. This is the default setting. If the option "Tools, Options, System Options, Display/Selection, Allow selection through transparency" is turned off, the first face will always be selected. Notice the outline of the face to be selected in each case.

527


V.

m 4

m ras

®|) |

m

F i:

L Ut -Revolve2 of Worm Gear Complete

Default selection behavior

Extrude2

Selection holding "Shift" key

28.19. - At the bottom of the Configuration Manager is the "Display States" tab, and just like configurations, we can add as many as we need to show different combinations of the component's visual appearance, including visibility, display style, color and transparency settings. To add new display states, right-mouse-click in the "Display States" pane and select the "Add Display State" command. Display states can be optionally linked to configurations by activating the checkbox at the bottom; this way we only have one display state per configuration and it is shown only when the configuration is changed.

<5

E

B

0 0 Configurations

*

<05 Gear Box Complete Configuration(s) (With Gears) (p®

— No Gears [ Gear Box Complete ]

f®

— Simplified ( Gear Box Complete )

|p® ^ With Gears ( Gear Box Complete ] Display States Q Display State-1

% Add Configuration... opeeunuh^^ ^

Add Display State TfJiyu ritelui id JTTt

L\v

Document Properties...

528

Assembly Modeling

After adding a new display state, rename it "All Visible" and change all the components back to visible, no transparency, and default display style. To change between the different display states double click in it to activate it. Display States

Display States Display State-1

9 Display State-1 Q All Visible

0 All Visible

£

e>

&

v

28.20. - An assembly's weight and mass properties can be calculated the same way as in a part using the "Mass Properties" command. The difference is that in the assembly, the weight will be the combined weight of the individual components based on the materials they are made of. This is why it's a good idea to always assign a material to each component. Optionally, mass properties (weight, center of mass, and moments of inertia) can be overridden if needed by selecting the "Override Mass Properties..." button. Keep in mind that each assembly configuration may give us different results because each configuration may have different components and some components may be using different part configurations.

pS SOLIDWORKS f? Design Study

(!

s


Clearance Verification

File

Edit

View

Insert

1 ^ Hole Alignment

MeasJre 1

Tools

Window

vMass Properties

Slction Properties

Help

©

-'5

Sensor

Assembly Visualization

•

III

Layout 000

Assembly

Sketch

bo

Evaluate

0

SOLIDWORKS !• 3ear Box Com

Mass Properties Calculates the mass properties of the model.

529

#

Pe E


•

Mass Properties

$

Gear Box Complete.SLDASM Options...

c

Override Mass Properties...

^

Recalculate

• Create Center of Mass feature

l~l Show weld bead mass Report coordinate values relative to: - default -

"I

Mass properties of Gear Box Complete Configuration: With Gears Coordinate system: - default -Mass = 6.96 pounds Volume = 26.31 cubic inches Surface area = 251.04 square inches Center of mass: (inches) X = 0.01 Y= 1.93 Z = 0.01 Principal axes of inertia and principal moments of inertia: (pounds * square inches) Taken at the center of mass. Ix= (1.00, 0.02, 0.00) Px= 18.54 ly = (-0.02, 1.00, 0.00) Py = 21.94 Iz = (0.00, 0.00, 1.00) Pz = 23.97 Moments of inertia: ( pounds * square inches) Taken at the center of mass and aligned with the output coordinate system. Lxx = 18.54 Lxy = 0.08 Lxz = 0.00 Lyx = 0.08 Lyy = 21.94 Lyz = 0.00 Lzx = 0.00 Lzy = 0.00 Lzz = 23.97 Moments of inertia: (pounds * square inches) Taken at the output coordinate system. lxx = 44.36 lxy = 0.21 lyx = 0.21 lyy =21.94 lzx = 0.00 lzy = 0.14

I

Help

Print...

530

lxz = 0.00 lyz = 0.14 lzz = 49.79

Copy to Clipboard

Assembly Modeling

Exploded View 29.1. - The next step in the assembly will be to make an exploded view. Exploded views are used for documentation, assembly instructions, training, sales presentations, etc. Activate the "With Gears" configuration, and select "Exploded View" from the Assembly tab in the Command Manager, or from the menu "Insert, Exploded View."

:^T i d[i'i iference eometiy

*#

New Motion Study

Bill of 1 Material

Exploded View

lode

•— •— •—

InstantSD

Os -

Update Speedpak

Gear 80

Tak

View 3 & 01 iu - e Exploded Separates the components into an exploded view.

In the Explode PropertyManager we can see the "Settings" selection box is active and ready for us to select the component(s) that will be exploded. For this example, we will leave the option "Auto-space components after drag" off. <2*- Explode

Explode Step Type Explode Steps

/

Settings

&

s
0.125in

sizi [V

k

O.OOdeg

r—1 Rotate about each component ' origin Apply

/p

Done '

: 'is

•

Auto-space components on drag

0 Select the subassembly parts 0 Show rotation rings

v

'Trimetric

531


29.2. - To add the first explode step, select the four screws in the Top Cover' and:

a) Click and drag the tip of the arrow along the axis of the screws upwards as far as you want the screws exploded, using the ruler as a guide for the distance. b) Add specific parameters for the explode step by entering a direction and distance to explode along, and/or an axis to rotate about by entering a rotation angle. IMPORTANT: When exploding and rotating multiple components simultaneously using the option "Rotate about each component origin" (like the screws), SOLIDWORKS has a counter-intuitive behavior: we have to use the Global direction Triad in the lower left corner of the screen to determine the explode step direction and select the direction arrow in the yellow triad that corresponds to the global direction axis, even if the yellow triad's arrow doesn't point in the direction we intend to explode. We may have to reverse the explode direction twice to force a re-calculation of the direction and make sure it's correct. In the first step we'll explode the top screws and rotate them at the same time. Turn ON the option "Rotate about each component origin" and select the four top screws. Since we want to explode the screws in the global "Y" direction (the triad's green arrow in the lower left of the screen), we have to select the yellow triad's arrow labeled "Y", and enter a distance of 3 inches. The direction of rotation will be automatic about the selected axis; enter an angle of 1800 degrees in the "Explode Angle" to make the screws turn 5 times while exploding. Explode Steps

/

© Settings
A

socket head cap screw_ai-2Q@ socket head cap screw_ai-17(g socket head cap screw_ai-19(g screw_ai-18(§

q

&

U

I Y@Gear Box Complete.SLD^St 3.000in

* +

ZXRing@socket head cap scr 1800.00deg

Rotate about each component origin

'/ 4 d?

q

Âpply Options

0

d? ./

•Auto-space components on 532

Assembly Modeling

After making all the selections click "Apply" to preview the explode step; if the explode direction is incorrect, click "Reverse Direction" twice to force a re calculation. When the result is satisfactory, click "Done" and continue to the next explosion step. "Explode Stepl" is added to the "Explode Steps" list, and the selection box is cleared. Do not click OK yet, we are going to add more steps. Explode V

X

Explode Step Type

I

Steps

a

I

E-pi ode Stepl

I I

Settings

<8

I 3.000in

ll" | IBOO.OOdeg

0 Rotate about each component nrinirt

// <§

rfN

\

If we need to edit an exploded step, select it in the "Explode Steps" list and drag the arrow's tip, or double-click in the explode step and enter a new distance value to change the exploded distance and/or rotation. 29.3. - For the second step, select the Top Cover' and drag the "Y" arrow up about halfway between the screws and the 'Housing,' or enter a distance of 1.5". V

X

Explode Step Type Explode Steps Explode Stepl £)-

Explode Step2

Settings

<9

[ l.51536902in

533


29.4. - For the third step, select the six screws indicated, and just like in the first step, we'll explode and rotate them at the same time. Select the screws, and pick the direction along the "Z" axis of the yellow triad. Enter 5" for the "Explode Distance" and 1800 degrees (5 turns) for the "Rotation angle." Press "Apply" to preview the explode step and, if needed, select the Reverse Direction button to re calculate the direction. Click "Done" to add the explode step. /•

/

•s

Settings

<9

socket head cap screw_ai-24@ socket head cap screw_ai-23(§ socket head cap screw_ai-21@ socket head cap screw_ai-25@

i

socket head cap screw ai-26(g

m

A

X

Z@Gear Box Complete.SLDA S.OOOin '

^~vj I XYRirig@socket head cap scrcl

A

i

<3

|*f 180c|

• •

I.;' '<5?.* •

Rotate about each compon origin ^

29.5. - The rest of the explode steps are done the same way. Select the component(s) and either drag the tip of the manipulator arrow along the desired explode direction, or pick a direction and specify the distance and/or rotation. In the next step explode select the 'Side Cover' and drag the yellow arrow to the left.
vl

a dL' Explode Step2

$

Explode Step3

a-

\ \V i'

i'll

Settings

<9

Side Cover-1@Gear Box Com

v*

Z@Gear Box Complete.SLDASt 5.000in

k~V

XYRing@Side Cover-1

C£

1800.00deg

0

Rotate about each component origin Afiply

Done

Options

•

Auto-space components on

A 534

Assembly Modeling

29.6. - Now explode the 'Worm Gear Shaft' towards the back about 8". To explode in the negative "Z" direction, make sure the option "Rotate about each component origin" is OFF and drag the "Z" arrow.

x*~~

29.7. - Explode and rotate the last set of screws towards the back approximately 7", and rotate the screws 5 turns (1800 degrees) as we did with the front screws. Remember to turn ON the option "Rotate about each component origin," select the "Z" arrow in the yellow triad, and reverse the direction twice if needed. Explode Step Type Explode Steps 0 jfH"j Explode

P1

t> pf1] Explode

p2

0

Explode

P3

0 pi"1"] Explode

p4

>

Explode

PS

/r1"] Explode

p6

Q

Settings socket head cap screw.ai-32® socket head cap screw_ai-30® socket head cap screw.ai-27® socket head cap screw_ai-31® socket heaâ^crew_ai-29®

ieadca^!^î-28®

| T.OOOin p^| | XYRmg©socket head cap scre»| 1800.00deg a Rotate about each component -* origin

A

535


29.8. - Explode the second side cover towards the right as shown.

V /

/ / /

.

0

i

0 0 0.

0

0

0

29.9. - Finally, explode the 'Worm Gear' and the 'Offset Shaft' in two different steps to get the exploded view similar to the next image. When making an exploded view try to group components that will be exploded the same distance and direction at the same time to reduce the number of steps needed. After adding the last step click OK to finish the Exploded View command. Multiple exploded views can be added per assembly configuration.

o.

& & ^P

536

Assembly Modeling

29.10. - After exploding the assembly, we'll need to collapse it. In order to do this, click with the right mouse button at the top of the Feature-Manager in the Assembly name and select "Collapse" from the pop-up menu, or in the ConfigurationManager right-mouse-click in "ExpViewf' and select collapse. Optionally, double click"ExpViewf' to expand/collapse.

\ <9>

Configurations *(5 Gear Box Complete Configuration!

v-

=r

Gear Box Complete

|f® |f®

Invert Selection

|q| History

"" No Gears [ Gear Box Com —

With Gears [ Gea_r_Box_Coi_

w

Go To...

f<2 Sensors

iai Annotations

Simplified [ Gear Box Con

»

ExplViewl

Top Assembly (Gear Box Comple

Front Plane

Hidden Tree Items

Top Plane ^ Right Plane

f

Explode

Comment

Explode | rJ1! Explode

(f) Housings 1; CoMapse

rffl

v_

X

Delete Edit Feature Go To...

\ Explode

rc
(-) Worm Gear

j

/I Explode

isolate

Origin

(-) Side Cover<

Collapse

/I Explode

Collapse Items

Confiauration Publisher...

29.11. - To explode the assembly again, make a right-mouse-click at the top of the FeatureManager and select "Explode"; in the ConfigurationManager double click "ExpViewf' or right-mouse-click in the exploded view and select "Explode." Be aware that this option will only be available if the assembly has been exploded. If we need to edit the exploded view steps, select the "Exploded View" command or select "Edit Feature" from the pop-up menu. \

<5

.ch a vp 7t7

7-

Configurations

<$ Gear Box Complete (j ^

|n,ert Se|ectjon

^ Gear Box Complete Configuration!

History Go To-

Sensors |~Xl Annotations

If®

—

No Gears [ Gear Box Com

I

—


Top Assembly (Gear Box Com)

Front Plane

With Gears [ Gear Box Coi >

Hidden Tree Items

\ Top Plane

Explode

Isolate

m Right Plane

de

Comment

Origin (f) Housing<1> ( <§) (-) Side Cover<1 rfrX.

y

r iJ

X

Delete

Explod nima

Edit Feature

de

If a configuration has two or more exploded views, exploding the assembly from the FeatureManager will use the last exploded view used.

537


29.12. - From the same pop-up menu we can select "Animate collapse" if the assembly is exploded, or "Animate explode" if the assembly is collapsed. This brings up the Animation Controller to animate the explosion and optionally save a video with the exploded view animation. Start

Play

\ \

w

<\

End

Stop

\

I

\

\

I

Save

Loop

/

/

Animati«i Controjter

Half speed

/

/

• !• m 0.00/4.00 s e c

Step back

Step fwd.

Pause

Normal

Double speed

Reciprocate

29.13. - After completing the exploded view, we can add sketch lines to show the path the components to follow for assembly. To add them select the "Explode Line Sketch" command from the Assembly tab. O? "

Reference jeometry

*© 4Y

New Motion Study

&P

Gear Box Comp

m, Bill of Materials

Vie J

© •
Explode Line Sketch

Ins ant3D

Update Speedpak

Take Snapshot

xplode Line Sketch Adds or edits a 3D sketch showing the relationship between exploded components.

If not already active, the Explode Sketch toolbar is automatically displayed showing two commands: "Route Line" and "Jog Line." The route line is used to add lines connecting faces, edges, vertices, axes, etc. of one component to another, and the Jog Line will add a jog to an existing explode sketch line. The Explode Lines are a 3D Sketch connecting the selected entities. For the first line, select the round face at the front of the 'Housing,' then the 'Worm Gear Complete' and finally the 'Side Cover.'

£ _TL

538

Assembly Modeling

Gear Box Complete (With,

o

Zlffl j — R o u t eL i n e

" *0 Items To Connect ©

0

Options CJ Reverse O Alternate Path

@ Along XYZ Front

Housing

b<" o If the route line is pointing in the wrong direction, click in the direction arrow head or the "Reverse" checkbox in the options to reverse it. The "Along XYZ" option is active by default, and helps us create the lines in all three axes, otherwise it would be made using a 2D sketch at an angle.

\

\

' 0\\\

\ \

\

e'5-

e?

\

&•

4r >"

0

0 ffpn 0

0 0

5s 0

\

J tj

Worm Gear Complete<1>

539


B e.ff Route Line

0

(2)

0

" *0 Items To Connect ©

x

Face<1>4?Housing-1 Face<2>@Worm Gear Complete-

\

Face<3>@Side Cover-1

•

Options

72

0

•Reverse Alternate Path

0

0 Along XYZ

0 29.14. - When the selections for this line are completed, click OK to add it and start a new one. Notice the line is drawn using a broken line style and is automatically hidden when passing behind components.

0 0 \ \

0 0

29.15. - Before adding the next explode line, we'll add another step to the exploded view. Cancel the "Route Line" command, and exit the "Explode Line Sketch" to finish adding or modifying the explode lines. This last step exits the 3D Sketch.

540

*

% Bill of Materials

^

*

© Explode Line Sketch

Assembly Modeling

In the Configuration Manager, right-mouse-click in the "ExplViewl," and select "Edit Feature." Notice the newly added "3DExplode1" feature added to the exploded view; this is the 3D sketch with the exploded lines.

pa P _ < \L Configurations

Configurations lsj§

CJJ Gear Box Complete Configuration!

Gear Box Complete Configuration! Ir®

—

jpn

No Gears [ Gear Box Com

— No Gears [ Gear Box Com

|f® - Simplified [ Gear Box Con


^ With Gears [ Gear Box Coi

w

ear Box Coi

•* Qj" ExplViewl

ExplViewl

Collapse

dUExplodel

B Explode Stepl

B\ e*l

Animate collapse

/] Explode Step2

X

B^f

B Explode Step3 /I Explode Step4

^

rJ1"! Explode Step5

e*i

Delete Edit Feature

uiiu... •w

Bin

@~\ Explode Step6

Collapse Items

j-F] Explode Step?

Hide/Show Tree Items..

/iexf

/I Explode Step8

29.16. - In this step we will add a radial explode step to the front screws. Expand the "Explode Step Type" group box, and select "Radial Step."

9

Explode X ^

V

Explode Step Type

v

k

A

X

Explode Stepl

A

Explode Steps Radial step

t> B\ Explode Step3

l>

Explode Step!

l>

Explode Step3

> pF] Explode Step4 t>

_/] Explode Step5

>

j6|] Explode Step6

Explode Step2

Explode Step4

> pT] Explode Step7 J"1

pe

A

> ,£[] Explode Step2

N

^

Explode ®!

Explode Steps >

(f>

<$"• Explode

C4-e.nO

1

t>

j/] Explode Step5

>

£} Explode Step6

i>

y\ Fxnlnrie Sten7

Select the six screws in front of the assembly, and optionally select an axis, cylindrical/conical face, or linear edge to define the radial direction. In our case, the default is the assembly's Z axis which is good in this case. Set the distance to 1", click "Apply" and "Done" to finish the explode step.

541


Qj*' Explode V

X ^

Explode Step Type

Explode Steps Explode Stepl Explode Step2 > £] Explode Step3

> d S Explode Step4 Explode Step5 Explode Step6 • d S Explode Step7

xi

Settings

<5

socket head cap screw_ai-24(§ socket head cap screw_ai-25(g socket head cap screw_ai-23(§ socket head cap screwâi-21@ socket head cap screw_ai-22@ socket head cap screw_ai-26@

Z@Gear Box Complete.SLDAS I.OOOin 1%" foToOdeg I I Diverge from axis Afipiy

i

Exit the "Explode" command to continue.

r

Configurations •Cj Gear Box Complete Configuration! |f® - No Gears [ Gear Box Com [f® - Simplified [ Gear Box Con •»

With Gears [ Gear Box Coi w

&

v3

<5* ExplViewl
&

v3

£1 Explode Step3 £ Explode Step4 £ Explode Step5 £ Explode Step6 £ Explode Step7 £ Explode Step8

&

Explode Stepl0

542

\N

Assembly Modeling

29.17. - Go back to the "Explode Line Sketch" command, and turn off the "Along XYZ" option for the first line.

f( odld ewl

Items To Connect

Explode Line Sketch

llstantSD 1

Update Speedpak

©

Take Snapshot

Options

A

I~l Reverse

^path

Explode Line Sketch Adds or edits a 3D sketch showing the relationship between exploded components.

• Along XYZ

Select the indicated screw hole, side cover hole and screw. By having the "Along XYZ" option off, the line is created on a rotated 2D sketch. Click OK to add the line.

Of- Route Line

®

" x|

x

Items To Connect (jQ

A

0

Edge<1>@Housing-1 Edge<2»@Side Cover-1

Edge<3>@socket head cap sere

\

•Reverse

0

Alternate Pat • Along XYZ

0

Certain line segments can be dragged to resize and position them, as the line indicated next. Editable lines will show a handle when hovering over them.

*

v 543


29.18. - After finishing this line, the "Along XYZ" checkbox is automatically turned on. To see the effect of this option, now add a line to the screw to the right of it, selecting the holes and screw in the same order. Feel free to drag the line segments to your liking.

tzfc, p .ka• '

x

a

G

0

terns To Conne< Edge<4>®Housing-l Edge<5>»®Side Cover-1

•m-ya

Options

D Reverse ath

0 Along XYZ

0

zh r\ vp . • 9

e?)

• x IX Items To Conne<

0

•b

Opbons Q Reverse Alternate Path 0 Along XtZ

0

544

w

Assembly Modeling

In case an exploded sketch line needs to be deleted, exit the "Route Line" command, and while the "Explode Sketch line" is active, select the lines to be deleted, and delete them as we would in a sketch. While the "Explode Sketch Line" command is active, we are essentially editing a 3D sketch.

_ n x

&

tp 7T7 JTL

Configurations Gear Box Complete Configuration! Ir -

— No Gears [ Gear Box Com —

Va S3 limtant3D

Update Speedpak

Simplified | Gear Box Con

V* With Gears [ Gear Box Coi *

Explode Line Sketch

®i'> ExplViewl

n n

(-) 3DExplode1 if) Explode Stepl /I Explode Step2

29.19. - Add a few more explode lines to illustrate the assembly order and exit the "Explode Line Sketch" command.

,.G

545


Exercise: Modify the 'Housing' to allow the 'Offset Shaft Gear1 to be assembled and make the detail drawings for any additional components. Here is a potential solution: Increase the size of the shaft holes in the 'Housing' and add a bushing. If a part with multiple configurations is modified, remember to make the necessary changes to all configurations affected by the change. Also remember to update all the necessary mates to mate the keyway and the bushings.

^rc

ii r$t£h

A f! a

j r

•f -•

i

'j

d I

CCD y

•

/r w / i :

r

To create this image, the component's display style was changed using the "Display Pane."

546

Assembly Modeling

Engine Project: Assemble the engine using the parts built in the Part modeling exercises, and make an exploded view. First make the following sub-assemblies as indicated (shown in exploded view) before adding them to the final assembly. Piston Head Sub Assembly Top Compression Ring_

Middle Compression Ring_

Oil Control Ring_ -Piston Pleads

Pin ConRod-Piston

internal Retaining Ring_

Internal Retaining Ring

Internal Retaining Rings go in the grooves Connecting Rod Sub Assembly

/Connecting Rod Bottom. Connecting Rod

Bushing Top Con Rod_

Con Rod Crankshaft Half Bushing_ ^"Socket Head Cap Screw 1/4-28x5/8"

547


Crankshaft Sub Assembly Retaining Ring Crankshaft Bearing_

Crankshaft

-Sealed Needle Bearing_

Exhaust Sub-Assembly (Parts to be welded together)

Exhaust Base

0\ \ \

\0® 9

Q

Exhaust Cover "Muffler

.625

foi o

o! s£2s

Q

J .115

548

Assembly Modeling

Sequence of components to assemble the engine.

Oil Pan

Crankshaft Sub Assembly

Shaft Seal Gasket

Oil Seal

-

to

Oil Pan Gasket

Connecting Rod Sub Assembly

Crank Case Top

Cylinder Gasket

Make the Piston Head concentric to the Engine Block

Head Gasket

i Piston Head Sub Assembly (only one Concentric mate to not over define it)

Engine Block

^ Mm Cylinder Head

Oil Dip Stick

Shaft Seal Cover

Exhaust

.

wktf iv Intake

Socket Head Cap Screws: %-20 x 1/2", %-20 x 5/8", 6-32 x 1/2"

549


7 l

Ef .y

Washer and Hex Bolt 3/8"-16 x 11/4"

3

1

1

y

y

Washer, Lock Washer, Hex Bolt 5/16-24 x 1-1/4"

As an optional finishing touch before making the exploded view, add a spark plug. You can download one from the 3D Content Central website (free), you will have to sign up to access it. The link to the spark plug we used is: http://www.3dcontentcentral.com/secure/download-model.aspx7catalogicM 71&id=86052

FJ»

After completing the engine assembly, make a section view, and move the crankshaft. If the assembly was made correctly the crankshaft will rotate and the piston will move up and down as it should. Motion Study

Materials

PP4

View

line Sketch

€I - IJD -
Displays a cutaway of a part or assembly using one or more cross section planes.

550

Speedpak

Assembly Modeling

:•! It

r

After adding all the fasteners, the FeatureManager will be very long. To make it easier to navigate we can group multiple components together using folders. Select all the fasteners in the FeatureManager, right-mouse-click on them, select "Add to New Folder" and rename it "Fasteners." This way we can hide, suppress, delete, or isolate all of them at the same time. After adding a folder, we can drag-and-drop components to and from it to add or remove items from the folder. f (•) socket head cap screw

Dissolve Mirrored Component Feature

(•) socket head cap screw

Parent/Child...

'g' (-) socket head cap screw ^ (-) socket head cap scrartf

j^l

Add to New Folder

'g' (-) socket head cap screw" ^ (-) socket head cap screw

•Cjjj Shaft Seal Cover_<1> (Default< (Default< Dis| ^ lntake_<1> (Default<_Pho

•

^ck_<1> (Default< (Default
551


* Image created using RealView graphics

552

Assembly Modeling

For the engine's exploded view we can use the option "Select sub assembly's parts" to explode sub-assembly components individually. If this option is OFF the entire sub-assembly will be selected and moved as a single part. Options C] Auto-space components on drag

CD @ Select the subassembly parts @ shoUTT

mg?

Reuse Subassembly Explode

a

m

e

r•••?>

ptf

<3 Sk y

sc* "

553


Extra Credit: Make the assembly of the Gas Grill using the parts created in the part modeling extra credit project, and then add an exploded view for documentation purposes. The grill's cover must be able to open and close. Close the cover using collision detection.

554



flEMNO.

DESCRIPTION

Q1Y.

Material

1

touting

Cast P/N 1234-6

Cast Alloy Steel

4.33

2

Side Cower

Cast Cover #345

• 2

Weight

AISI1020

0.36

3

Worm Gear Shaft


1

Chrome Stdnless Steel

0.52

4

Worm Gear Complete

Gecr P/N A6C-l 234

1

AISI1020

0.33

£

Offset Shaft Complete

P/N A6C-1234

1


0.49

6

Top Cover

Cast #9876

1

Cast Alloy Steel

0.48

7

HX-SHCS 0.138-32*0.5x0.5-5

4

8

tX-SHCS 0.25-20x0.5x0,5-S

12

//• *

&


II1LC:

Speed Reducer

SEE >WO. HO. Q Gear Box Complete

DETAIL fc

•E

7

l=£ cfi

k~" l>lUM,

n. Aio.

555

cinuni

Speed Reducer

f"» uwlbllbiM


D

T

SCAU II \MIGHT:

^ SMEF 2 OF J


Notes:

556


Assembly Drawing 30.1. - After finishing an assembly we are going to make an assembly drawing. In this case, the drawing will include an exploded view, Bill of Materials (BOM), and identification balloons. To make the drawing, open the assembly 'Gear Box Complete' and activate the "With Gears" configuration; it doesn't matter if it's exploded or collapsed. Select the "Make drawing from part/assembly" icon as we did before; make a drawing using the "B-Landscape" sheet size and include the sheet format ("Display sheet format" checked). Sheet Format/Size (•) Standard sheet size @ Only show standard formats A (ANSI Landscape

(ANSI) Landsca E (ANSI) Landscape an lAKKIl I Jnrtcrsns t^^jUljyg^lddrt

BrowseWidth: 17.00in

@ Display sheet formatJ

Height: 11.00in


Height:

Help

From the "View Palette," drag the "Isometric Exploded" view to the sheet. Change the Display Style to "Shaded with Edges." If the sheet's scale is not 1:2 change it from the sheet properties.

>5

557


When an assembly has an Exploded View, we can change the drawing view to show it either Exploded or Collapsed afterwards. In the drawing view's properties we can change to a different configuration, to show it exploded or not, its display state, and, if the configuration has multiple exploded views, a different exploded view. If needed, right-mouse-click in the view, select "Properties" and turn on/off the option "Show in Exploded State." Drawing View!

Drawing View Properties View Properties

Reference Configuration

|8

Show Hidden Edges Hide/Show Components

Hide/Show Bodies

View information

With Gears'Full Gear Part v

Name: Drawing Viewl

. Show in exploded or model ' break state

Type: Named View

Model information View of:

ExplViewi exploded)

& s Guide\2016-l\Book Files-Finished Files-Gear I

•fnfiguration information

Orientation

^

O Use model's "in-use" or last sa

Standard views:

(§) Use named configuration: With Gears "Full Gear Parts"

Ml O

Li a u a a

0 Show in exploded ormodel break stat ExplView1(exploded)

v

Display State

More views

i

All Visible

"Dimetric *Trimetric asd

I I Show Envelope oon text to sp

•: •

Align breaks with parent •Display sheet metal bend notes Display bounding box 0 Show fixed face

Import options

V Show grain direction Cartoon

Display State

c f.

Cancel

Help

30.2. - Once we have the exploded isometric view in the drawing, we need to add a Bill of Materials (BOM). Select the isometric view and select the menu "Insert, Tables, Bill of Materials," or right-mouse-click in the isometric view and select "Tables, Bill of Materials."

dit

View

Insert

Tools

Window

Help

^ Model Items-

CA Detail View

Br< S

Drawing View Annotations Tables

General Table

Sheet... SOLIDWC Make Section Line

Bill

Materials erials

ObjectRevision Table Picture.,.

558


In the Bill of Materials PropertyManager use the following options: Table Position: "Attach to anchor point" unchecked. This way we can locate the BOM table anywhere in the drawing, otherwise the table will be attached to the BOM anchor point defined in the drawing template. BOM Type: "Parts-only" to list all the parts in the assembly, regardless of sub assemblies. Configurations: "With Gears," the assembly configuration we are making a drawing of. Part Configuration Grouping: "Display configurations of the same part as separate items"; by using this option, the screws, which are different configurations of the same part, will be displayed as different items in the BOM. Keep Missing Item: OFF. This option list removed/replaced items from the assembly in the BOM. Item Numbers: Start at: 1, Increment: 1. a

Bill of Materials

V

X

Table Template

V

Table Position

A

BOM Type

A

H Attach to anchor point 0 Top-level only (§) Parts only

0Indented

Configurations

V

Part Configuration Grouping

^

Ri Display as one item number (•) Display configurations of the same part as separate items O Display all configurations of the same part as one item

O Display configurations with the same name as one item

• Keep Missing Item Item Numbers

v A

Start at: | -j Increment |~i Do not change item numbers

30.3. - After clicking OK, move the mouse and locate the BOM in the top right corner of the drawing. While locating the table, notice the table will snap to the corner. The column's width and row's height can be adjusted by dragging the table lines just as in MS Excel. Since we added the "Description" custom property to the 'Worm Gear Shaft' it is automatically imported into the Bill of Materials. We added a "Description" property to the 'Worm Geaf and 'Offset Shaft,' but it was to the simplified version of the parts, not the parts added to this assembly.

559


ITEM NO.

PART NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

QTY.

1

Housing

1

2

Side Cover

2

3

Worm Gear Shaft

4

Worm Gear Complete

1

5

OffsetShaft Complete

1

6

Top Cover

1

7

HX-SHCS 0.13832xO.5xO.5-S

4

8

HX-SHCS 0.2520x0.5x0.5-$

12


1

Resize column width to fit the PART NUMBER

+

A

B

AA

PART NUMBER

ITEM NO.

( 1

A 01o

)

J

c

C

DESCRIPTION

ofr.

2

1

Housing

V,

3

2

Side Cover

4

3

Worm Gear Shaft

5

4

Worm Gear Complete

i

6

5

OffsetShaft Complete

i

7

6

Top Cover

i

8

7

HX-SHCS 0.138-32x0.5x0.5-S

A

9

8

HX-SHCS 0.25-20x0.5x0.5-$

i 2


i

B

12

...and re-position the Bill of Materials table by dragging it from the top left corner.

A1

%EM |/D. -S

9 8

C

D

PART NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

QTY.

Housing

1 2

3

2

Side Cover

4

3

Worm Gear Shaft

5

4

Worm Gear Complete

1

6

5


1

7

6

Top Cover

1

8

7

HX-SHCS 0.138-32x0.5x0.5-S

4

9

8


1

12

HX-SHCS 0.25-20x0.5x0.5-5

560

B


30.4. - It is possible to customize the Bill of Materials by adding more columns with information imported from the components' custom properties. To add columns to the table, make a right-mouse-click in the "QTY" cell in the table (or any other column), and from the pop-up menu select "Insert, Column Right" (or Left...) to locate the new column. For the "Column type" value select "CUSTOM PROPERTY," and from the "Property name" drop down list, select "Material." j For components with a custom property assigned, its corresponding value J will be automatically filled in the Bill of Materials table.

c

1

D

DESCRIPTION

QTY.

p| Box Selection ^ Lasso Selection

1 2 Shaft with Hex Drive

1 1 1 1

Zoom/Pan/Rotate

•

Recent Commands

•

Insert

• 1 | Column Right ^

Select

•

Delete

•

Hide

•

^^Column Left

|

Uar

Hide selected

4

Formatting

•

Split

•

Sort

12

Insert - New Part

Column type: CUSTOM PROPERTV

v

Property name: ^V 1

C MBER

D 1 2

rift

(

QTY. N

DESCRIPTION

Shaftwith Hex Drive

1

mplete

1

mplete

1

Descript on MyName «SJÂutt orJ^nMror) ""v sw-r.omments((.omments) SW-Configuration Name(Con SW-Created Date(Created Dat SW-File NamefFile Name) SW-Folder Name(Folder Namr SW-Keywords(Keywords) SW-Last Sawed ByjLast Saved 1 SW-Last Saved Date(Last Save SW-Long Date(Long Date) SW-Short Date(Short Date) SW-Subject (Subject) SW-Title(Title) Volume W.inht

1 32x0.5x0.5-3

4 b

3x0.5x0,5-S

12

561

•


Add another column with the "Weight" custom property, adjust the column width and relocate the table. ITEM NO.

PART NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

QTY.

1

Housing

2

Side Cover

3

Worm GearShaft

4

Worm GearComplete

I

5


1

6

Top Cover

1

7

HX-SHCS 0.138-32x0.5x0,5-S

4

8

HX-SHCS 0.25-20x0.5x0.5-S

12

Material

W eight


0.52

Cast Alloy Steel

0.4S

1 2 Shaft with Hex Drive

1

30.5. - Open each part with missing information in the BOM and add the custom properties needed using the "Custom Properties" pane. The material and weight properties will be automatically added; we just need to type a new description for the parts. After adding properties to a part press "Apply" and save it. After adding the custom properties to all parts return to the assembly drawing. If the properties are not shown in the BOM, rebuild the drawing to update the table. To open a part from within the drawing, select the part in the drawing and click in the "Open Part (...)" icon from the pop-up menu. "si

*2 $

b£I a

| Open Part (offset shaft complete.sldprt)

'J: &

"••••

vx

562


Custom Propertie

Exercise Properties

A

Material

0

o

&

/ / 0

Ajl f

;\i

o

4.38

Volume

16.62

Alejandro Reyes i

o

Weight

Designer

m

o

Cast Alloy Steel

Description CastP/N 1234-B

o

-•4*

o o dd

30.6. - Column width and row height can be adjusted as needed, and cells, rows, columns or the entire table can be formatted using the pop-up toolbar, just like MS Excel. When finished, your table should look like this.

f I i 3

A ITEM NO. l_

£

®

Vo

B PART NUMBER

C DESCRIPTION

D QTY.

E Material

F Weight

Hous in g

CastP/N 1234-B

1

Cast Alloy Steel

438

Sio^ Cover

Cast Cover #345

2

AISI 1020

036

Xrorm Sear Shaft


1


052

4

Worm Gear Complete

Gear P/N ABC-1234

1

AISI 1020

033

t

5


P/N ABC-1234

1


049

J

6

Top Cover

Cast #9876

1

Cast Alloy Steel

048

3

7

HX-SHCS 0.138-32x0.5x0.5-S

4

f

8

HX-SHCS 0.25-20x0.5x0.5-S

12

4

To format the entire table, cells, columns, or rows, make a selection, turn off the "Use Document Font" option to display the font toolbar, and change the headers.

1 | T\

||A

I

-=-

- ee a B

1

2

563

IT Use Document Font PART NUMBER 1

H ousing


Century Gothic

* 1

v [ 12

A ITEM NO.

v

0.13in Oin

| B || _Z"

B PART NUMBER

| U ~S" c

1

DESCRIPTION

D QTY.

Materia/

F Weight 4.38

E

2

1

Housing

Cast P/N 1234-B

1

Cast Alloy Steel

3

2

Side Cover

Cast Cover #345

2

A1S11020

,.ak

o

r».;.

i

0.36 n co

We can add as many custom properties as needed to accurately document ( ) our designs and, as we learned, these properties can be used in the part's gf detail drawing and the Bill of Materials. Assembly files can also be given custom properties just like individual components. Final table should look something like this:

Housing

Cast P/N 1234-B

ary. i

Side Cover

Cast Cover #345

2

AISI 1020

036

Worm GearShaft


1


052

Worm Gear Complete

Gear P/N ABC-1234

1

AISI 1020

053

5


P/N ABC-1234

1


0.49

&

Top Cover

Cast #9876

1

Cast Alloy Steel

0x18

7

HX-SHCS 0.138-32x0.5x0.5-S

4

6

HX-SHCS 0.25-20x0.5x0.5-5

12

ITEM NO.

1 2 3 4

PART NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

Material

Weight

Cast Alloy Steel

43S

30.7.-In the next step we'll add identification balloons to the assembly components to match the Bill of Materials. Make a right-mouse-click in the assembly drawing view, and from the pop-up menu select "Annotations, AutoBalloon" or select the assembly view and go to the menu "Insert, Annotations, AutoBalloon." View

Insert

Tools

Window

Help

rt

Q ' |/^7 -

Model Items-

Brc S

iLIDWC

Drawing View Annotations

Note...

Tables

J" Linear Note Pattern...

Sheet-

A*A

Circular Note Pattern..

m

Auto Ballo

Make Section Line

oon

Object... Picture...

(H) (A Hyperlink...

Magnetic Line... Surface Finish Symbol..

/F< Weld Symbol...

DXF/DWG...

564


When the Auto Balloon PropertyManager is displayed, select the option "Follow Assembly Order" to make the balloons and BOM to follow the component order in the assembly's FeatureManager, in "Balloon Layout" use the "Square" pattern, "Ignore multiple instances" to avoid adding balloons to duplicate components, "Insert magnetic lines" to align the balloons, for the "Balloon Settings" options select "Circular," "2 Characters" and "Item Number" to define the size and style of the balloons. If needed, move the assembly view to make space for the identification balloons that will be added later. Auto Balloon V

FTEM NO.

X

Item Numbers Start at:

>ide Cover

3

Worm Gear Shaft

Cast Cover Shaft with He

Worm Gear complete

Gear P/N AS

S j£Li^

Do not change item numbers

6 7

j JI j

Follow assembly order

DtSCRIPl

Cast P/M 1!

2]

4

Increment: y\~

PART NUMBER HO ii'ng

1

8

\

Offset Shaft Complete lop cover ' HX-SHCS 0.135-32 X0.5>0.5-S HX-SHCS 0.25-20*0.5x0.5-5

P/N ASC-" castffS-e

Order sequentially

Balloon Layout Pattern type:

i Reverse direction @ Ignore multiple instances ^ 0 Insert magnetic line(s) Leader attachment:

O Faces

&

(§) Edges Balloon Settings Circular

V

2 Characters

-

Padding: O.OOOin

30.8. - If we click-and-drag any of the balloons before we click OK, all the balloons will move in or out at the same time. This can help us locate them closer to the view. When satisfied with the general look of the balloons, click OK to add them to the drawing view. A balloon's position can be changed as needed by dragging them individually or dragging the magnetic lines to move all the balloons at the same time. When dragging a balloon it will snap to the magnetic lines, and magnetic lines can also be moved around the drawing. A balloon's arrow tip can be dragged to a different area of the part for visibility, and if it is dragged to a different component, the item number will change to reflect the part that the balloon is attached to. Arrange the balloons as needed to improve readability.

565


•

«---{ 7 )

8 n

S •

ss5^

X^rs.

0

•*> vm HX-SHCS

*

17 S~

J0

&

€f

PROPH ITARYAHDCOM RK M1AI I>1 IHE OPAUXXC- C iHf SOil *POP|P|VO» GE PICOMfrAXT 8 «IPl>. AX>"

|H| IXtOCMAIDXCOXIANtO

566


30.9. - Edit the Sheet Format to make corrections and add the missing notes in the title block.

DfSCRIPTION

Q7Y.

M aierial

1

Housing

Cast P/N 1234-5

1

Cast Alloy Steel

4.38

2

Side Cover

Cast Cover #345

2

AISI 1020

0.36

3

Wotm GearShatt

Shaft with Hex Diive

1


0.52

4

Worm Gear Complete

Gecr P/N A5C-I234

1

AISI 1020

0.33

8


P/N ABC-1234

1


0.49

6

rop Cover

Cast #9876

1

Cast Alloy Steel

0 48

7

HX-SHCSO 138-32x0 5X0.5-S

A

8

•IX-SHCS 0 25-20*0.5x0.5-5

12

ITEM NO.

PART NUMBER

Weight

-j*

sf

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS AR E IN INC HES TOLERANCES:

TWO PLACE DECIMAL

DATE

BEND J I

Speed Reducer

ENG APPR.

THREE PLACE DECIMAL i

MFG APPR.

INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER:

Q.A.

Designer: Alejandro Reyes TITLE:

CHECKED

FRACTIONAL 1 ANGULAR: MACH t

NAME DRAWN

COMMENTS:

SIZE DWG. NO.

^

SCALE: 1:4 WEIGHT:

DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

REV

Gear Box Complete SHEET 1 OF 1

30.10. - As we did in the part drawings, add a new sheet to the assembly drawing to add Front, Top and Right views. Click in the "Add Sheet" tab in the lower left corner of the drawing, and from the "View Pallette" drag the assembly's front view, and project the top and right views from it.

VD View Palette him

ttti l~£iSheet1

Click to display this task pane tab.

Vj

00D

Add Sheet Add Sheet

567

III

-None-


rn 1-L--J-1 r-i

Pr

Y •l pi j

see two, HO.

G&r Box Complete ICAIB: 12 VMEISHI:

Of 2

30.11. - Adding a section view to an assembly is just like in a part, the exception is that in the assembly we have the option to exclude selected components from the section. Select the "Section View" command and add a vertical section through the middle of the right view. Immediately after locating the section line a "Section Scope" dialog box asks us to select the components that will not be cut.

| r-jii i

df

(

'

'(

* ZL

'

h

I

i !

|

p

4

I

568


In the right view click to select the 'Offset Shaft Gear,' click OK to finish the selection, and locate the section view. If a section line cuts fasteners, we can turn ON the "Exclude fasteners" option to exclude all Toolbox components. Section View Section Scope The following list of components/rib features will be excluded from the section cut: Excluded components/rib features Gear Box Complete* 18>/Offset Shaft Complete<1>

r

•Don't cut all instances @Auto hatching

7

l~~l Exclude fasteners i

Show excluded fasteners

?
Boss-Extrudel of Offset Shaft Complete*

• flip direction

Help

•

3

J

tm rn|M"pi/iiili
/ c

o

D

3

/

o

/

CZ

ZZ 1

SECTION A-A

30.12. - To exclude additional components from the section view, right-mouse-click in the section view, select "Properties," go to the "Section Scope" tab and select the 'Worm Gear Complete.' Click OK to continue and change the section view to "Shaded with edges" display style.

Set Resolved to Light* Comment iVl/VljUhni ttti

Replace Model

7

Convert View to Sketc

o

Edit Cutting Line Hide Cutting Line X

o

/

o

/

/ /

/ /

Delete Change CaJ

Z

|-l

Properties...

naps Optic

:TION A-A 569

Smart Dimension


Drawing View Properties Hide/Show Components View Properties

Hide/Show Bodies Section Scope

Show Hidden Edges

The following list of components/rib features will be excluded from the section cut: Excluded components/rib features Gear Box Complete-SectionAssembly-1 <1 >/Gear Box

I

I Don't cut all instances

Gear Box Complete-SectionAssembly-1 <1 >/Gear Box @ Auto hatching C Exclude fasteners

Show excluded fasteners

no w ft v* u)i Jimaw/!,({. DO a

nFlip direction

o Sectionl of Worm Gear Complete<1>

/ o

/ /

o / /

SECTION A-A Help

=:

rr iml

k

o

o

SECTION A-A If the section view (or any view in a drawing) is not accurately displayed, for example, circles are shown as polygons, we can increase the image quality by going to the menu "Tools, Options, Document Properties, Image Quality" and increase the image quality. Be aware that using a high quality image may impact your PC's performance.

570


System Options

Document Properties Shaded and draft quality HLR/HLV resolution

Drafting Standard

Low (faster)

S Annotations • Borders

High (slower)

0- Dimensions - Centerlines/Center Marks •••• DimXpert 0-Tables 0- Views

Deviation:

0.00818454in

O Optimize edge length (higher quality, but slower) IZl Apply to all referenced part documents
Virtual Sharps Detailing nraiAiirm Ciit.-Ir

......y.-.S.

.\,.A

S. up

55

5

.-.-v. zt

c

o

cz

\

cz

Low image quality

High image quality

30.13. - Add a new detail view of the region where both gears mesh and change the detail's scale to 2:1. Holding down the "Ctrl" key while drawing the detail circle (or any sketch entity) will temporarily disable automatic sketch relations. ^

\

\

\

F

m o

o

o cz


SECTION A-A

571


30.14. - Since the assembly does not have any dimensions, manually add the overall assembly dimensions to the drawing using the "Smart Dimension" command and move them to the "FORMAT" layer to show them in black, or select the "FORMAT" layer first, and then add the dimensions.

«

J-

m .750

— 6.000 "1 Hi; • ,h

A

D eb

cf

4.250

i

c

3

•$) i

i„4

r7

/.

SEE PWO. HO

Gdtar Box Complete

30.15. - We can modify the sheet format to match the previous sheet, but instead we'll save the sheet format of the first page and apply it to the new sheet.

Activate the first drawing sheet, "Sheetl," select the menu "File, Save Sheet Format..." and save the sheet format using the name 'Exercises b - landscape.'

File

Edit

D

New...

View

Insert

(7^7 Open...

Tools Ctrl+N Ctrl+O >

Open Recent

The sheet format uses the file extension *.slddrt

-p

Q y

Close

Ctrl+W

Save

Ctrl+S

A Save Sheet Format... 1®" —

572

Wi

k}


Bill of Materialsl

30.16. - /After saving the sheet format go back to "Sheet2." Right-mouse-click either in the drawing sheet (not a view), or the FeatureManager in "Sheet Format2," and select "Properties." Browse to locate the new sheet format and click OK to load it.

I

I Sheet?

Sheet (Sheet2)

• qsh

Display Grid

• (OS) Dr, •

m a pj Dre

Edit Sheet Format Lock Sheet Focus

CD

a Or; •

Set Resolved to Lightweight

Jj Sec

Add Sheet...

• (A Del

[j^ Copy

^3 Properties... Relations/Snaps Options..

Sheet Properties Sheet Properties

Zone Parameters Type of projection

Sheet2

Name: Scale:

O First angle

Next view label:

(§) Third angle

Next datum label:

Sheet Format/Size <§) Standard sheet size

Preview

@ Only show standard format A (ANSI) Landscape A (ANSI) Portrait 6 (ANSI) Landscape C (ANSI) Landscape

e,

Reload

n liWCII Isndccauj 1 anHtranp

trcises b - landscape.slddrt

Browse.,.

rsheet format Width: Value

Height: Value


Height:

Use custom property values from model shown in: Default

v

@ Same as sheet specified in Document Properties

OK

Cancel

Help

After changing the template change we are asked if we wish to delete custom notes in the existing template. Selecting Yes will replace the entire sheet format. Every note, modification, ,

.

,

.

.

.

.

.

.

and custom property added in the template loaded will be added to the new drawing sheet. Save the drawing and close the file.

solidworks

i

The current sheet format has notes that have been modified. Do you want these deleted?

YK

573

K

No


M hi

T

— 2.500

=r

+-

OilK

f : -!•- . t

2 500-

an

Oh

\

W

\

|

!

i

hi

i

—i

~7~7~' SECTION A-A

Speed Reducer Gear Box Complete

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:

DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

NAME

TOLERANCES:

ANGULAR: MACHl

TITLE:

CHECKED

FRACTIONAL! BEND ±

TWO PLACE DECIMAL

±

THREE PLACE DECIMAL

±

INTERPRET GEOMETRIC


DATE

DRAWN

Speed Reducer

ENG APPR. MFG APPR. Q.A.

TOLERANCING PER: COMMENTS:

SIZE DWG. NO.

MATERIAL

g

FINISH

SCALE: 1:2 WEIGHT:

DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

574

REV

Gear Box Complete SHEET 2 OF 2 |


Design Table Drawing 31.1. - A drawing of a part with a design table is essentially the same as any other drawing, with the only difference that we can add the Design Table to the drawing. Make a new drawing using the 'Screw Design Table' part, add a Front, Right and Isometric views, import and arrange dimensions, and modify the sheet format as shown.

a

.500 •

.250 —

0.375

0.250

.015 X 45.00°

ihi ESSOI-EPÊISHCIHf D: DMI'ED'fiAK NNOES

IOI EVADES: •PACIDHAis

AKZ.UlA»rwiAC«» HMD 1 IWO PiACE DECMM T ixfll PlACIOECMAl 1

frrofrMAiot- to%• O>K ikpc.1! ifcrioir »oer»'vof srt-r v p»wr>rto *nr 4-OGUC. Of Ai ,»
'oin-.sPtt-c en-

DMV»1 OECtED

ECA^f.

TITLE


OA. COMME »)IS:

see dwg. no.

^

rev

S crew Design Table

scale 4:1 wbght:

shfft 1 of 1

31.2. - Right-mouse-click in a part's view and select "Tables, Design Table" from the pop-up menu to import the part's design table, and it will be immediately added to the drawing. Once the Design Table is added to the drawing we can optionally turn on dimension names to help identify the dimensions using the menu "View, Hide/Show, Dimension Names."

575


Design Table for:Screw Desgn Table

•6

S

10-32x0.; 0.25x0.5 0.25x0.7! 0.25x0.7!

t)

i i O T31 CI X

1 i o §' b

5

XZ 1? cj

1

I

T31

b

6-32x0.5 6-32x0.7! 10-32x0!

JX a

§ ae CI X

rx u 0 1 o 8

X

0.5

0.138 0.226

0.138

7/64

0.75 0.5 0.75 0.5 0.75 0.75

0.138 0.226 0.19 0.312

0.138 0.19

7/64 5/32

0.19 0.25 0.25 0.25

5/32 3/16 3/16 3/16

0.19 0.25 0.25 0.25

0.312 0.375 0.375 0.375

3 TJ 3 2

3

a J

f 1 CI s O < s 1/1 X 0.064 u 0.064 u 0.09 u 0.09 u 0.12 u 0.12 0.12

©

u

s

.500 (Screw_Length)

.250 (Head_Height)

0.250 (Screw^Diam)

.153 (Hex_Drive)

— 0.375 (HeadJ)iam)

.015 X 45.00°_ (RD1) UHUEM OIHEKWEESFECFIED: OhllXSOXS ATI IX HC» IS I Oi FTAXCIS: "•TACIOXAlt AMCtfiAf:MAC»± HMD t IWQi-lACI DICMAI X l»«I FlACI DIC MA I ±

1


, HCAIM. OA.

FKOrn IIAKY AMD COMRDi MT1AL

COMMIXIS:

l»l H'QfMAIDXCQXIANIO N l-B 5 |H|SOK FFOnJITQ* -CMSIHCOMPAXT XAMI «£?£• A fiefODlEIDX IX 'AHOf AS A*«Oil v-1-OUI l-E WfllIX »IIMS5IOXO»
SEE

^

EtOXIIIO.

DWG. NO.

REV

Screw Design T able

SCALE: 4:1

WEIGHT:

SHEET I OF 1

When adding a design table to a drawing, a snapshot of the Excel table as it was last edited in the part is added. To change the design table's format we have to go back to the part, edit the design table in the ConfigurationManager and then switch back to the drawing.

t+7

<

•

Configurations Screw Design Table Configuration^ fffll Tables Design Table

H*

lr*

• 0.25x0.5 -

0.25x0.75

-

0.25x0.75_Nc

- 10-32x0.5 - 10-32x0.75

8=x

_

Edit Table able in Save TableDelete

576

Window


Engine Project: Make an assembly drawing of each sub-assembly and one of the exploded Engine Assembly. Use the following images as a guide. For the "Connecting Rod Sub Assembly" use the "A-Portrait" template, and for the "Engine Assembly" drawing use the "C-Landscape" template to better accommodate the large assembly. Feel free to format the BOM to your liking.

ITEM NO.

PART NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

QTY.

1

Cranks haft_

1

2

Sealed Needle Bearing.

2

3

Retaining Ring Crankshaft Bearing.

2

UN lit* <>THfsvwemeiBEO: DMEHSlOHf A£E*t INCHES T0LKAHC8: HACTOHAU

Crankshaft Sub Assy_ TITLE:

DECIMAL J

SIZE

NEXTMSY

DWG. NO.

SCALE: 1:2 WEIGHT:

d

.sr"® q ©\

® ® 0 0i oj>y

o o ®

\0

REV

a

UttOH

577

SHEET I OF 1


ITEM NO

PART NUMBER

QTY.

DESCRIPTION

1

Connecting Rod.

2

Connecting Rod Bottom.

1 1

3

Con Rod Crankshaft Half Bushing.

2

4

Bushing Top Con Rod.

1

5

HX -SH CS 0.25-23x0.625*0.625- S

2

Connecting Rod Sub Assembly.

"

ITEM NO.

PART NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

QTY.

1

Piston Head.

2

Pin ConRod-Piston.

1

3

Internal Retaining Ring.

2

1

4

rop Compression Ring.

1

5

Middle Compression Ring.

1

6

Oil Control Ring.

1

INIBM OIHfDV\*Etl>fCIRfD

Piston Head Sub Assy_ TITLE:

r«-0'iACf DtCMAi 1

SIZE OWC. NO.

REV

a SCALE: 13 [WEIGHT:

578

] SHEEM OTT~


>(

8

e

Hs

0

§

> .Q £ 0

Is o

: L

v>

<

c0 "a ci

25

5i

i i ii CL dO I

S-

|

? I? ii 1 j:? =i

£

•

3

Iz t 5


Animation and Rendering SOLIDWORKS Professional and Educational editions include PhotoView 360, the integrated software used to generate photo realistic rendered images of parts and assemblies. Photo realistic images generated before a product or design is finished can be very useful; for example, we can show a potential customer how the product would look, prepare advanced marketing campaigns ahead of manufacturing, promotional videos, etc. The resulting images can be of such a high quality and realism that they can (and often are) confused with pictures taken in a professional photo studio. PhotoView 360 allows us to select component materials, colors, backgrounds, light sources, shadow settings, reflections, and a number of advanced lighting settings; the combination of those and many more parameters takes time to master and a lot of experimenting to see and fully understand their effect in the final result. To obtain high quality, photo realistic rendering results, the user will usually have to make multiple iterations, changing and fine-tuning different settings in each pass, especially lighting. In this lesson we'll cover the basic and most commonly used settings to help us understand their effect and how to obtain acceptably good rendering results. Animation is used to show assemblies in motion, to help us see and understand how they work in real life, animate exploded views and collapse them, for example, to explain how to assemble or take a product apart. Also, not only can we animate an assembly, we can change a component's transparency, appearance, display settings, hide, and show them, etc. to better illustrate their operation, inner workings or highlight features. After an animation is completed it can be saved to a file as an *.AVI video or a series of pictures to be used in third party video editing software. At the time of saving the video we can choose to create the video using the SOLIDWORKS screen or a photo realistic animation using PhotoView 360. In the second case, the final result will take considerably longer to generate, as each frame of the animation will be photo realistically rendered, and depending on the rendering settings, the length of the animation, and the size of the image this can take a long time to produce. To practice, we'll produce renderings and animations of the parts and assemblies of the gear box and the engine completed so far.

581


Notes:

582


PhotoView 360

"ig-zg.

*

V

a

583

* *1

*


32.1. - To start rendering, the first thing we need to do is to load PhotoView 360 in SOLIDWORKS. Go to the menu "Tools, Add-ins..." and select "PhotoView 360," or in the Command Manager, select the SOLIDWORKS Add-lns tab and activate "PhotoView 360." We can also turn on the other add-ins included in SOLIDWORKS, including "SOLIDWORKS Toolbox."

pSs

File

RKS

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

e

QrcultWvrfcs PhotoView 5carfo3D

Layc

Window

SOLIDWORKS Toolbox

360

Assembly

PhotoView 360

*E

Help

TolAnalyst

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

PhotoView 360

Loads or Unloads the PhotoView 350 add-in.

irc

^

'

After loading PhotoView 360 a new "PhotoView 360" menu and "Render Tools" toolbar are added to SOLIDWORKS.

*

Edit Scene

Edit Appearance

Assembly

Layout

Sketch

Evaluate

Edit Decal

Integrated Preview

Render Tools

Preview Window

Final Render

Render Scene Region Illumination Proof Sheet

Options

%

Schedule Render

Recall Last Render

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

32.2. - To practice, open the 'Gear Box PhotoView" assembly from the exercise files, or use the gear box assembly made in the book so far.

$

v\

d?

©

584

<4?


18 0 1*

III

ODD

<3 V-

32.3. - The first thing we need to do is to is to activate the "DisplayManager" tab where we can add, edit, and delete a component's appearance, decals, light sources, cameras, and scenes. After activating the tab we can see the different sub-sections for:

Cai Histnrv

0

0

p-Kl®

%

9

DisplayManager

Gear Box_PV (DefaultsDisplay S

•

>

/fa ) Q> scene, Rg

View Appearances

ecas

Sorr omen History

•

,. , Lights, and Cameras

" [©) PhotoView 360 Lights

No decals assigned. Go to the

Appearances

_M

{jj^j Scene (3 Point Faded)

Decals

Scenes, Lights, Cameras

After selecting "View Appearances" we can see all the appearances used in the assembly (or part) listed in chronological order (History), Alphabetical order or by Hierarchy. History lists the appearances in the order they were added, and Hierarchy lists the appearances at the level at which they are added. to o

a— a— a—

%

9 en irances

Sort on

sJ 4

History

91

v

<5

9 an

©

Appearances Sort ori n I Alphabetical v

*>

©

vj

4 color

chromium plate

sj

cast stainless steel

•

U colors2>

color<2> colors 3>

•J color<4> color<5>

* color< 6> * color<7>

• 4 colors 3> • 4 colors4>

* chromium plate * chromium plate<2> * color

color

color<3>

Components

cast stainless steel<2>

carbon steel<2>

color<4>

©

Sort order: I Hierarchy

•

carbon steel

9

Appearances

carbon steel<2>

chromium plate<2>

9

9 a m

carbon steel

color<2>

J

s

^

|tC ra

sj

cast stainless steel

cast stainless steel<2>

J

s

a— a— a—

9|

polished steel

polished steel<2> 4

to o

a— a— a—

*

vJ

•

U colors6>

• '

<$)

•

colors 5>

colors7> Part

^ carbon steel

•J

colors 5>

^ carbon steel<2>

*

colors 6>

sj cast stainless steel

4

colors 7>

4 chromium plate

4

polished steel

^ polished steel

polished steels2>

4 chromium plates2> polished steel s2> ^ cast stainless steel<2>

Appearances will be shown depending on the level at which they are added, and higher hierarchy appearances will be displayed covering the lower level appearances. The hierarchy for appearance display is:

585


%

Applied to a part or sub assembly in the assembly.

Component

•

Applied to a part's face.

Face

© n

%

Applied to a part's feature

Feature Body

Applied to a part's body

Part

Applied to the entire part

For example, in our assembly we changed the color of the components in the assembly covering the part's color (defined by the material). If we remove it we'll see the part's material color in the assembly, and if we had applied a different appearance to a face or feature we would see those too, as they are higher in the (.aruuii siccist'' hierarchy than the part. b

In the assembly we can work with appearances at all levels. Right-mouse-click in an appearance and select the option to Add, Edit, Copy, Paste or Remove an appearance to a Component, Face, Feature, Body or Part.

_l

colo

Add Appearance...

colo

Edit Appearance...

colo

Copy Appearance

colo

Remove Appearance

cclc

Attach To Selection

^ colo ^ colo

Consolidate Appearance...

32.4. - Appearances can be added, removed or edited in the DisplayManager or the graphics area. In this step we'll remove the color from the Top Cover.' Select the Top Cover" in the graphics area and click in the "Appearances" command from the pop-up menu. In the drop-down list we can see all the levels at which we can work with the appearance. Select the red "X" to delete the color we added at the assembly level. To edit the color select the color box next to the assembly level. The absence of a color box means there is no appearance at that level.

v

(jo) Importedl 0Body <§|Top Cov...[^]

X

X

Remove All Part Appear... r •

n

586

i ; /

' /


After removing the appearance, the Top Covef now looks like this:

y •M.

32.5. - For the next step we are going to add a decal to our assembly. Decals are used to show logos, labels, markings, etc. in a component. Open the Top Cover1 part (if using the supplied exercise files for the PhotoView 360 exercise, you may be asked "Do you want to proceed with feature recognition?" If this is the case select "No" to continue). After opening the part, select the DisplayManager tab and go to the "View Decals" section. If a part has decals they will be listed here. Click in the "Open Decal Library" to show available decals in the library located in the "Appearances, Scenes, and Decals" task pane.

©

Appearances, Scenes, and Decals

... j

W* Appearances(color) ecals

No decals assigned. Go to the Appearance tab of the task pane, under the Decal node, drag a decal from the library to the model face in the graphics area ••••• -•

Appearances. Scenes, and Decals Click to displaythis task pane tab.

•rag and drop decals onto the model or FeatureManager tree,

Open Decal Library -o

ii d » : r Barcode

o

h Designed with SolidWorks

587


No decals assigned. Go to the Appearance tab of the task pane, under the Decal node, drag a decal from the library to the model face in the graphics area

To create new decals we would right-mouse-click in the DisplayManager and select "Add Decal."

Open Decal Library Add Decal..

Hp

32.6. - From the "Decals" library scroll down to the "Recycling" decal and drag it onto the top face of the cover. As soon as we drop it, the decal's properties are displayed. In this page we can also select a different image if needed. Notice the recycling logo is rotated in this view. |ggj? Decals •

X

-H

Mapping

Illumination

o

Image

Message Browse to select an image mask file. See the Decal Preview" to view the final decal.

Decal Preview

> •5*

o

[•r±-rr-

Image file path: C:\Program Files\SOLIDWORI

o

Mask Image

32.7. - Just as an exercise we are going to rotate the logo in this step. In reality it is not necessary because the part is symmetrical and can be rotated, but we'll do it to show the reader how to accomplish this. Select the "Mapping" tab in the properties. In this section we can change how the label is mapped in the surface (flat, cylindrical, spherical), its location, size, rotation and optionally mirror it vertically and/or horizontally. Set the label's size to 1" and mirror it both vertically and horizontally, or rotate it 180 degrees. Leave the location in the center of the part (X=0, Y=0). We can also drag the decal's corners to resize it, the ring to rotate and anywhere else to move it. Click OK to add the decal and save the Top Cover.' Close the part file and return to the assembly.

588


Decals •

X

-H

BO Image Mapping

^

ot-

Illumination

Selected Geometry

©

Faced >

© apping

y

Label

a.QGQin f

O.OOOin

mi mi lliiiiiJi

Size/Orien tatkm

(Vl Fixed aspect ratio 1~1 Fit widthto selection Q Fit height to selection

:

I.OOOin

o

£• I.OOOin Aspect ratio: 1.00:1 <>j O.OOdeg

[V*] Mirror horizontally @ Mirror vertically

In the assembly we can see the new decal in the "Decals" section. caCJo-

|fo m

®

|

%

0 Decals

(tnj Decals (Top Cover_PV) •

§ recycle ^

©

© ©

\

i •

\

1

&

589

•


©

32.8. - The next step is to add a scene and lights to our assembly before making the rendering. Select the "Scene, Lights, and Cameras" section. Scene, Lig

meras

gfj] Scene (3 Point Faded)

If the hardware supports it, we can activate the RealView graphics in the View toolbar. RealView will show a high quality real time render using the component's materials, appearances, and scenes added. RealView is not required to render an image but helps when composing images before a final render.

^5) RealView Graphics

l\^

^jQ^_Shadows In Shadec^J
z

C

0

• • •

590

[©] PhotoView 360 Lights jig] SOLIDWORKS Lights

Bo Camera ^ Walk-through fftl Snapshots


32.9. - Built-in Scenes have pre-set lighting, backgrounds, and floor textures. To apply a scene to the assembly (or a part), open the "Appearances, Decals and Scenes" tab in the Task pane, scroll down to "Scenes, Studio Scenes" and select the "Reflective Floor Checkered" scene. To add it to our assembly we can:

«

Appearances. Scenes, and Decals

-H

P ^ Appearances(color)

H

4

tid] $cene5

fafc Basic Scenes

&

Studio Scenes >

Presentation Scenes Backgrounds

• • •

Double click in it Right-mouse-click and select "Apply Scene," or Drag it to the graphics area.

0

p

Q Decals

1

Drag and drop scenes anywhere into the graphics view.

Ketlective Moor black

After adding a scene we can see the new scene parameters in the Display Pane. To further modify the scene we can right-mouseclick in the Scene, Floor, Background, and Environment sections to edit and refine them to our liking. Reflective Floor Checkered

El 18 *

• i

m

Or

Scene. Lights, and Cameras

©

rHScene (Reflective Floor Checkered)

Floor (checker_floor_bright) R] Background (snowcloud) ^|] Environment (kitchen)

•*" £
2 Directional! & Directional •

SOLIDWORKS Light;

So Camera Walk-through • m Snapshots

/

•I

591


32.10. - Pre-defined scenes include lights to match the scene. Turn on the "Preview Window" command in the Render Tools tab of the CommandManager. A preview window will appear to help us adjust the settings before rendering the final image. Be aware that computer resources will be used while the preview image is dynamically rendered, and overall performance will be impacted.

Q Preview Window

Final Render

© Render Scene Region Illumination Proof Sheet

wtrr'

Preview Window Opens the PhotoView 360 preview window.

Gear Box_PV.SLDASM* - PhotoView 360 2016

c3

©

In the preview window we can see that the light is (in this case) too bright. To change the lighting, expand the "PhotoView 360 Lights" section in the DisplayManager. Right-mouse-click in "Primary PhotoView 360 Lighting" and select "Edit Primary PhotoView 360 Lighting."

© a Scene, Lights, and Cameras w

(?)

^cene (Reflective Floor Checkered) ^ Floor (checker_floor_bright) Background (snowcloud) Environment (kitchen) PhotoView 360 Lights

Ie^ Primary PhotoView 360 Lightim Qj DirectionaM

N. Edit Primary PhotoView 360 Lighting

V' Directional •

jg|) SOLIDWORKS Lights Camera Walk-through

•

m Snapshots

Collapse All

ft

Expand All Customize Menu

^

/

!/ .

592


This is one of the settings we need to tweak to obtain the results we want. Change the illumination parameters until the preview shows the desired image and click OK to finish.

m ib ® Edit Scene •

X

©

^

Basic | AdvancedJ Photo View 350 Lighting |

0

Gear Box PV.SLDASM* - PhotoView 360 2016 Fu» Resolubon Preview

Message

A

v {

j Save Preview Image

By default, point, spot and directional lights are off in PhotoView 360 and the lighting in the rendering is controlled by the Primary PhotoView 360 lighting. To change the lighting in your rendering, it is recommended that you first adjust the Primary PhotoView 360 Lighting with a preview rendering enabled (to verify the changes). Then, if necessary, add additional lights. PhotoView 360 Lighting f^lPvnamic help Background brightness: 1,000 w/srmA2

ii» i iTTrmTrrnTTTiT Rendering brightness: 3.200 w/srmA2

2

£j;

Q Accurate environment lighting (slower)

Scene reflectivity: 0.300w/srmA2 '•"•i 111111111:' M i i 11 N I

11111

Environment Rotation

:

14.4deg

32.11. - After the illumination is done, select the "PhotoView 360 Options" command to set the options for the final render.

_(§ H PhotoView 360 Options Scene, Lights, and Cameras w

Scene (Reflective Floor Checkered) J?. Floor (checkerJloor_bright) S Background (snowdoud) Environment (kitchen)

" (5) PhotoView 360 Lights Primary PhotoView 360 Lighting M DirectionaM ' " Directional •

(jlTl SOLIDWORKS Lights Qo Camera ^ Walk-through

• m Snapshots

593


PhotoView 360 Options V

a

X

Output Image Settings 0 Dynamic help Output image size:

•I

1024X768

ID

Turn on the "Dynamic Help" checkbox to get information about the options available to create a final render, as there are too many to cover in this section. We'll show the most commonly used and let the reader explore the rest of the options, possible combinations and their effect in the final result.

(4:3)

f§)

1024

I

1 1 1 1 1u

-

768

1

••u i illi

Ml IJJill

1.333:1

0 Fixed aspect ratio •Use background aspect ratio

0 Output Ambient Occlusion

Set the "Output image size" to the desired size. A larger size will take longer to render but will provide a better image to resize and print. We'll use 1024x768 in our example for speed purposes; larger images will take considerably longer to render but will provide better image quality.

Image format: JPEG

Select the image output format and the path to save it.

Default image path: C:\Users\Alejandro\Desktop Browse... Render Quality Preview render quality: Better

V

Final render quality: Best

In "Render Quality" we can change the quality for the preview window and the final render. The higher the quality, the longer the preview and render will take to generate.

v

• Custom render settings Gamma: 1.5

—

I

L^J

The gamma settings will make the scene lighter or darker. Adjust as needed to obtain the desired results.

• Bloom

When creating a final rendered image, as a general rule, at first, it's a good idea to make the image size small, turn off the advanced lighting effects which add rendering time (Bloom, contour/cartoon rendering, Direct caustics and Output ambient occlusion) and lower the final render quality to evaluate the resulting image, change positions, lights, colors, environment, etc. before committing to a time consuming high quality final render. The PhotoView 360 rendering engine takes full advantage of multi-core processors; therefore, the faster the processor speed and the more processor cores are available, rendered images will complete faster.

594


32.12. - In order to evaluate multiple scene illumination options simultaneously we can use the "Scene Illumination Proof Sheet" command; it will render many small images with various lighting settings. File

pS SOLIDWORKS

*

Edit Scene

Edit Appearance

Assembly

Edit

View

Edit Decal

Insert

Tools

m

PhotoView 360

Window

o«

Integrated Preview Final Renler Preview Window Render Regfcn

Help

Scene Illumination

Optpns Schedule Render

Proof Sheet

Layout

HI

Sketch

liO.

Evaluate

Render Tools

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

Recall Last Render

cene Illumination Proof Sheet Invoke a PhotoView 360 Scene Illumination Proof Sheet.

&

Rendering passes

Rendering passes

Rendering original settings image

Rendering scene reflectivity pass

Selecting an image will position it in the center, and the rest of the images will be updated to show darker and lighter options. Moving the increment slider to "Fine" will make small lighting adjustments, and "Coarse" will make larger adjustments. When the desired image is selected, click OK to apply those settings to our scene. In the next image part colors were removed from the assembly, and the gear box was rendered using the appearances assigned by the assigned materials only. PhotoView 360 Scene Illumination Proof Sheet < Less Rendering Brightness

More Rendering Brightness >

—

e Original

Current Selection More Background Brightness >

less Background Brightne

I

More Scene Reflectivity >

less scene Kenectrvity

Full Render Increment

Number of columns 2

OK

595

|L±J|

• Dynamic Help

Cancel


32.13. - Once the render options are set, select the "Final Render" command from the Render Tools tab. A new window with the final render progress will appear. Each processor's core will process a small area at a time, in this case the processor has eight cores, reducing the time needed to render an image.

Previe Wind

e

Final Render

DWORKS Add

•n

Scene Illumination Proof Sheet

Options

Final Render Invoke a PhotoView 360 Final Rendering.

Final Render

9M 3

32.14. - After the render is finished, select the thumbnail at the bottom and click "Save Image," set the location and save it.

*

596


To add realism to the final renderings activate the "Perspective" view in the View toolbar.

^ - £] ^

^^

- HI RealView Graphics 5p

Shadows In Shaded Mode sion Perspectiv

Feel free to explore different options, lighting, and environments.

maem

m

t

&

597


_

r

a.

WF"

J

m

m i LJ

/ •%. -- ••

/. >a

•

-•

• "7

v

X 598

-


Engine Project: Make a render of the engine using the knowledge acquired so far.

5\

*6

-

The previous image was made using a "Cut Extrude" assembly feature. This is a cut at the assembly level that is not reflected at the part level; think of it as cutting the parts after they are assembled together. Add a sketch in the assembly selecting a face just as we do in a part.

|£0

c •

0

/

; i it

599

Sketch

$ 1

\

<*>

^

0

1° ^

0


After starting a sketch in the assembly, we get a warning letting us know that the sketch is being created inside the assembly and not in a part. Assembly context sketch notification: j

*

Warning : You have started a sketch within the context of this assembly, rather than in a part or subassembly.

Turn Off Warning

Draw a rectangle (or any other profile) to make the cut. Make sure it covers the areas of the assembly you want to cut.

i

i i

J

E ~_p i

3

Select "Extruded Cut" from the drop down menu under "Assembly Features" in the Assembly tab of the CommandManager. pS SOLIDWORKS

Edit rnpon*

Assembly

Insert Components

Layout

%

Sketch

File

Edit

View

Insert

Tools

PhotoView 360

Window

cacj

.omponen Preview

Evaluate

caq Linear Component Pattern

RenderTools

Smart Fasteners

.ompo

Show Hidden Components

>

600

Assembly Features

Reference Geometry

(P Extruded Cut

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

PPo <

D -B&

Help

Bill 01 Materii


Make the cut using the "Through AH" option (only a suggestion). Under the "Feature Scope" uncheck the "Auto-select" option and select the components that will be included in the cut feature; this is the same behavior as the assembly drawing's section view. If a selected component is completely enclosed by the cut (like some of the screws), it is deleted from view. Click OK to finish. As a finishing touch before rendering, we can add a different texture to the cut-extrude feature to show the cut faces as a rough surface, more like a cut. ©

[p Cut-Extrude V

X

0

Through All

I I I Flip side to cut

&

a J Draft outward

• Direction 2 • Thin Feature Selected Contours Feature Scope O All components {•) Selected components l~l Propagate feature to parts • Auto-select

I

Housing(Machined)_Animation-1<3 socket head cap scrcw_ai(HX-SHCf socket head cap screw_ai(HX-SHC Top Cover_Animation-1@Gear Bo> Bushing_Animation-2@Gear Boxi a rnua>lli.l3rhinsHl AnianKnn

© ©

©

©

© jl

d?

d7

s s

601


After mastering the basics, explore different options, textures, lighting effects, and the multiple settings available to create photo realistic images of your projects and designs.

602



Notes:

604


33.1. - With the built in tools in SOLIDWORKS we can create an animation of a part or an assembly; in the latter case, the animation can show the assembly in motion, how to assemble the components (collapse), how to disassemble (explode) them, etc. using a simple interface. To learn how to use the animation tools open the 'Gear Box Animation' assembly from the exercise files, or use the assembly made in the previous lessons. To start an animation select the "Motion Study 1" tab at the bottom left corner of the window to access the MotionManager. v# ------ .. — v. --r

v

*

^ (f) socket head cap screw_ai(HX

y


y


•

ff Mates

Y

x. V

*Trimetric ]_Model\ Motion Stpjdy 1 J SOLIDWORKS Professionals oAo TOroon

<5 i h i k

^.*t

v& Right Plane Origin l 3, (f) Housing(Machined)_Animati (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Anim«

<«> (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Amm; (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Animation (-) Worm Gear Complete,Animr (-) Offset Shaft Gear_AnimationBushing_Animation<1> (Default Bushing_Animation<2> (Default (f) Top Cover_Animation< 1> (D (f) socket head cap screw_ai(HX (f] socket head capscrew_ai(HX

JU )sec

|2sec

r |4 sec

|6 sec

&

\&w

jBscc

i ill ill IIILIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIII n ill ii

llOsec iii ni

114 set III ll I ll llllllll

. III II

II

III

I I I

II

I

(J Gear Box Animation (Oefault< I
fj^) PhotoView 360 Lights

•

fj?>) SOLIDWORKS Lights

y

(f) Housing(Machined)_An

*

(f) SideCover(Machined)J

*

(0 Side Cover(Machined)_/j

•

(-) Worm Gear Shaft.Anim

y

^2) (") Worm Gear Complete,/

PPP

• ^ (-) Offset Shaft Gear_Anim,

Dffll ModeTl Motion Study 1 SOLIDWORKS Professional 2016 x64Edition

Under Defined

Editing Assembly

SOLIDWORKS has two different types of motion studies. The first one is f) "Animation," where we move components manually or with a motor to a new g position using a timeline. The second type is "Basic Motion"; the difference is that a basic motion study takes into account physics, mass, gravity, etc. and the components are driven by motors, gravity, contact between them, and/or springs. In this lesson we'll cover Animation.

605


33.2. - For our first animation we'll manually move components to a new position and record them in the timeline. First we need to drag the time bar, or click in the timeline at the four seconds mark to define the length of the first animation step.

n

Animation

—Hltr 0 sec

A

^

4 sec

2 sec

rail

lllllllll

• •

<3 Gear Box Animation (Default-; I $ Orientation and Camera Vi

6 sec

<^>

£©) PhotoView 360 Lights g[) SOLIDWORKS Lights

• • •

•vijj (f) Housing(Machined)_An i3 CD S'de Cover(Machined)_/ (f) Side Cover(Machined)_^

33.3. - Now move (click-and-drag) the 'Worm Gear Shaft to the position it will have at the four seconds mark; click and drag the shaft approximately % to a turn in 1 the screen. Notice the Offset Shaft Geaf will also rotate because of the gear mate. By default, the "Autokey" command is ON. In this step turn it OFF to learn first the manual, and later the automatic way to add animation steps. Autokey

When depressed, automatically creates a key at the current time bar location for dragged components.

3

Ik &

i sec

8 sec

i i i i i i i m

l l l l l l l l l

d S 10 sec

Sy

12 sec

l l l l l l l l l

0

14 sec

l l l l l l l l l

16 sec

l l l l l l l l l

i i i i

1

i

a

©

y

©

606

©

©


After rotating the 'Worm Gear Shaft,' click the "Add/Update Key" command at the top of the MotionManager, or right-mouse-click in the time bar at the 'Worm Gear Shaft's level and select "Place Key." This key will mark the position of the component at four seconds in the animation. Add/Update Key Creates a new key with the selected item's current attributes, or updates an existing key.

8 sec

AJ\ 1 (•> •4U 10 seS 14 sec Jesec

I l l l l l l l l l II II

11111 l l l l l l l l l

D 16 sec

i i i i l i i i i 111111

EES

Animation u0u

4 sec

MINIMI lllllllll ^

10 sec

nihil

mi

12 sec

Mill

lllllll

Gear Box Animation (Default<[ $ Orientation and Camera Vi •

£©) PhotoView 360 Lights

• (§F| SOLIDWORKS lights •

(0 Housing(Machined)_An

*

(f) Side Cover(Machined)./

*

(0 Side Cover(Machined)./

>

Np (•) Worm Gear Complete./

>

(-) Offset Shaft Gear.Anim.

(-) Worm Gear Shaft_Anim

Model Crdatisc a npu/ tpu r

y*. Place Key

Motion Study 1

I InH^r Rpfirvp

A/ith thp itpm'c fiirrsnf attrihirtAc

33.4. - After locating the first key, the animation bar at the top is extended to four seconds, and a green bar is added between 0 seconds and 4 seconds in the 'Worm Gear Shaft.' Animation

i.

0[c

• 0 sec

7 A

**

2 sec

lllllllll III! Mil

gafc 6 sec

lllllll

III

i i i !

(f 10 sec

8 sec

Ill

0* 12 sec

Mill

*<0 Gear Box Animation (Default<[ Orientation and Camera Vi >

§] PhotoView 360 Lights

>

juF) SOLIDWORKS Lights

*

^ Housing(Machined)_An

y

^ (f) Side Cover(Machined)_^

*

(f) Side Cover(Machined)./

*

^ (•) Worm Gear Shaft.Anim (') Worm Gear Complete./

>

v

*

*^3

Offset Shaft Gear.Anim.

Model

Motion Study 1


X: .250in Y: 1.874in Z: 3.438in

607

Under Definei


33.5. - After defining the end of the animation step, SOLIDWORKS needs to calculate the motion of the components. Click either in the "Calculate" or "Play" command; while the animation is calculated for the first time, the playback may be slow, depending on the number of moving components and/or visual effects being animated. • •

k

^ (f) socket hea Calculate l'fl cnrm h

•

Calculates the Motion Study.

Animation

• •

w

ffl cnrlrpt hpaH ran crrpw ail1 Play

Animation LA#i

• 0s

b-

^3 W socket head cap screw_ai(HX-

V

)

IH

0s

7

ii

Once the animation is calculated we can press the "Play" command to see the video at full speed, and since it's only playing the animation and not calculating anything, it will be faster. When the calculation is complete a yellow bar is added to the 'Worm Gear Complete' and the 'Offset Shaft Gear.' This bar is letting us know that these components are being driven by another component, in our case, the 'Worm Gear Shaft: Pressing "Play" to run the animation we can see the 'Worm Gear Shaft turning from the start to the final position, and the 'Offset Shaft following because of the gear mate. Animation

!•

•

-0 0 sec

2 sec

II Gear Box Animation (Default< ( Orientation and Camera Vi PhotoView 360 Lights @D SOLIDWORKS Lights <§ (f) Housing(Machined)_An ^ (f) Side Cover(Machined)_/ ^ (f) Side Cover(Machined),/ (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Anim (-) Worm Gear Complete,/ (-) Offset Shaft Gear_Anim

Motion Study 1 SOLIDWORKS Professional 2016 x64 Edition

608

4 sec

6 sec

III

8 sec

lllllllll

10 sec

m i l l


33.6. - During an animation we can also change a component's appearance. In this step we'll make the 'Housing' transparent. Move the time bar to the 2 second position. •

(f) socket head cap screw_ai(HX

• (f0"»

cnrlcpt h«H ran

ai^WY- ^ =0=

!• •

Animation uur/

0 sec m i l A

th

2 sec

III

l l l l l

4 sec

lllllllll

& V 6 sec

10 sec

IIIl l l l l

llllllll

llllllllll

Gear Box Animation (Default<[

w

$ Orientation and Camera Vi fpl PhotoView 360 Lights

<#>

(jS) SOLIDWQRKS Lights
Motion Study 1

Right-mouse-click in the 'Housing' and select "Change Transparency." A magenta line will be added between 0 and 2 seconds in the timeline. You may need to expand the pop-up menu at the bottom to reveal the "Change Transparency" command. (-) Worm Gear Complete.Anirr

invert Selection

*(3) (") Offset Shaft Gear Animatioi Bushing_Animation<1> (Defer Component (Defai ^

H'de

Change Transparency

(f) socket head cap
n'c

cnrlri* hmH ran trr*ur ai(

Temporary Fix/Group Material

Animation

mmr y

^ s

^

^

•JS

Appearance

8 sec

[1=1 Component Properties...

IIII111II111IIIII11

- <5 Gear Box Animation (Defa £> Zoom to Selection Orientation and Came •

j^) PhotoView 360 Lights

•

juF) SOLIDWORKS Lights

Hide/Show Tree Items... Collapse Items Customize Menu

[*v3) W Housing(Machined,^. <>3) (f) Side Cover(Machined),/

<3, (f) Side Cover(Machined),/ <3) (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Anim <3j (-) Worm Gear Complete,/ ^3) (") Off"* Shaft Gear_Anim. Model

10 sec

Motion Study 1

609

12 sec

llllllll


Expand the 'Housing' in the animation manager to see the different aspects of the component that can be animated. The magenta line was added in the Appearance row; this is letting us know that the component has a visual change during the specified timeframe. Animation uupu

!•

•

u

2 sec

0 sec

MINI

4 sec

l l l l l l l l

6 sec

8 sec

lllllll

10 sec

llllllll

III

Gear Box Animation (Default-;I $ Orientation and Camera Vi *

[®] PhotoView 360 Lights

»

@[| SOLIDWORKS Lights

*•

^ (f) Housing(Machined)_An [ffl Move <$j" Explode

•\ Housing(Machined)_Animation<2> 2 sec

Appearance •

Mates in Gear Box Anil

t

^=d t&=75%

(f) Side Cover(Machined)J

Model

Motion Study 1

33.7. - After pressing play the 'Housing' starts to fade at 0 seconds and becomes transparent at 2 seconds, letting us see the gears moving inside. fiii

0

7Right Plane

'

Origin *

(0 Housing(Machined)_Animati

*

Nt) (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Anim<

*

'Qj (0 Side Cover(Machined)_Animi

*

(-) Worm Gear Shaft_Animation

*

'Q) (") Worm Gear Complete_Anirm

*

(-) Offset Shaft Gear_Animation-

*

^ Bushing_Animation<1> (Default

'•

Bushing_Animation<2> (Default

*

^ (f) Top Cover,Animations 1> (D

*

Q) (f) socket head cap screw_ai(HX

*

(f) socket head cap screw_ai(HX-

•

ff) cnrlrat h*>rl ran crreu; aifHV.

Animation

!•

mmi

i z«x*x

dd

• lOsec

|2 sec

l l l l l 1111111111111 •

4 sec III

3F| SOLIDWORKS Lights

*

(f) Housing(Machined)_An Move Explode Appearance •

•

Mates in Gear Box Ani» (f) Side Cover(Machined)J

*

^ W îde Cover(Machined) /

•

<§) (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Anim

*

(") Worm Gear Complete,^

^ | Model

Motion Study 1

610

" ill

^ 10 sec

lllllllllllllllllll llllllll

§>

D

18?

116 sec l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l


33.8. - For the next step we will hide the Top Cover.' Move the timeline to 4 seconds, scroll down to the 'Top Cover,' right-mouse-click in it and select "Hide." A new animation step is added, also in magenta because it's an appearance change, going from 0 to 4 seconds. •

^ Bushing_Animation<2> (Defaull

*

(f) Top Cover_Animation<1> (D

* >

a Invert Selection (Top

Nt) (f) socket head cap screw_ai Hide

^ W socket head cap screw_aii

cnrL-pt heart ran crreia/ aifl-IYChange Transparency

Animation

!•

•

Component Display

&

Temporary Fix/Group

6 sec

Material

l l l l l l l l

K

^ (0 Side Cover(Machined)

Appearance

*

^ 0 Side Cover(Machined)

Component Properties...

•

(•) Worm Gear Shaft_Anii

*

(-) Worm Gear Complete

*

^ (•) Offset Shaft Gear_Anir

•

Bushing_Animation<1> I

•

"s^j Bushing_Animation<2> t

i sec

10 sec

12 sec

14 sec

M i l l 111 l l 1111 l l 11111111 l l 111

M i l l

Zoom to Selection Collapse Items Hide/Show Tree Items... Customize Menu

(f) Top Cover_Animation -

~Y~

*

W socket head cap screw.

§

*

(0 socket head cap screw.

4 <

Model

Motion Study 1

Pressing "Play" will show the animation, but now the Top Cover1 will fade until it is completely hidden at 4 seconds. I {'} UU5I IIIiy_/-M IIIi lanuTT^^^L^Lrci I

\ (f) Top Cover_Animation<1J(D

•

y

Qj (f) socket head cap screw_ai(HX-

• cf&. ffl cnrlrpt hparl ran crrpi*/ ai/HY- V

<

>

Animation

o

!• • 0 sec

2 sec

b

4 sec

< >j

6 sec

llllllll CjJj (f) Housing(Machined)_An <3, (f) Side Cover(Machined)_/ (f) Side Cover(Machined)_^ (") Worm Gear Shaft.Anim (") Worm Gear Complete./

/

(-) Offset Shaft Gear_Anim ^ (-) Bushing_Animation<1> •CjJj (") Bushing_Animation<2> (f) Top Cover_Animation ^ (f) socket head cap screwj Model

Motion Study 1


611

8 sec

10 sec

lllllllll llllllll


33.9. - We can also modify the markers in the timeline to change the animation. Just as an example, click in the 'Worm Gear Shaft motion marker at 4 seconds and drag it out to 6 seconds. By making this change the shaft will rotate the same distance as before, but now it will take 6 seconds instead of 4. I Animation

v| tffl.

| \±3Hk

I r

^ w

v

I 2 sec

0 sec 7^ A

(f) Housing(Machined)_An

*

^3 0 îde Cover(Machined),/

y

(f) Side Cover(Machined),/

1

1

1

*

>

"Qj (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Anim (-) Worm Gear Completed

•

(-) Offset Shaft Gear.Anim,

•

(-) Bushing_Animation<1>

o

* *

"^3 (") 8ushing_Animation<2>

v

•

(f) Top Cover_Animation<

*

^si3 (f) socket head cap screw_< <

Model

4 sec

_±

6 sec

w

Ej jjnji 8 sec

lllllllll lllllllll lllllllll lllllllll Mill i•

• • • • • • • • •

*

Motion Study 1

The yellow background at the top of the timeline is now hashed to let us know that we need to re-calculate the animation . a because changes were made to the movement of components. Click the "Calculate" button to recalculate the animation; the background is solid yellow again and the animation is updated. Animation

v

*

Np (f) socket hea Calculate

•

An,mat^.

v

_ , [f$. !• • l0s

^

v

0 sec

2 sec

4 sec

6 sec

^ ^ ll 8 sec

lllllllll lllllllll lllllllll lllllllll Mill

v

*

Housing(Machined)_An

*

*0) (f) Side Cover(Machined)_/

•

*

(f) Side Cover(Machined)_/

•

•

(-) Worm Gear Shaft_Anim

0

*

^

*

^ (•) Offset Shaft Gear_Anim,

•

Bushing_Animation<1>

*

<§ M Bushing_Animation<2>

•

^s! (f) Top Cover_Animation<

*

"^3 (fl socket head cap screw.t

•

0

<

(3

•

Worm Gear Complete,/

• • • t

•

• <

Model

r

Motion Study 1

612


Animation

!•

OB

n

• 0 sec

2 sec

lillllll

4 sec m i l

-•

-

6 sec

lllllllll lllllllll

8 sec m i l

^ (f) Housing(Machined)_An (f) Side Cover(Machined)./ Cjy (-) Bushing_Animation<2> NJj (f) Top Cover_Animation< (f) socket head cap screw.;

MM I • HI

Model

Motion Study 1

33.10. - In the next step we'll change the time to start hiding the Top Cover.' Expand the 1Top Cover" in the animation manager to see its animation keys. Click and drag the starting marker to 3 seconds in the timeline. Animation

!•

u*;

OB

• 0 sec

2 sec

4 sec

l i l l l l l l IIII Mil Mil

Inn

i

6 sec

Mill

^jj} (-) Worm Gear Shaft.Anim ^ (-) Worm Gear Complete./ (•) Offset Shaft Gear.Anim. ^53 (-) 8ushing_Animation<1> Q) (0 Bushing_Animation<2> •*"

'N43 (f) Top Cover_Animation< Move op

Explode Appearance

(f) socket head cap screwj

jj Top Cover_Animation<1> Osec <**=• ^=0% •

Model I Motion Study 1 uujiiiii^_niiinioiiuii~s

*

^ (0 Bushing_Animation<2> \£) (f) Top Cover_Animation< 0$ Move <3^ Explode Appear.

•

TopCover_Animation<1> 3 sec r=o% o

(f) socket head cap screw.; Model

Motion Study 1

613

8 sec m i l


To change a key point to an exact time position right-mouse-click in the key point, select "Edit Key Point Time" and enter a new time. C© Edit Key Point Time

Edit Time 13.00s @ liMkl 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TTTJMiJII 1JI

Cut [j^

Copy

X

Delete

i

V

X 0©

%

\

Our animation manager now looks like: Anima,i-

v

1 ifc

•

35

0 sec A

w

I II I I I I I I

A

^ Gear Box Animation (Oefault<(

2 sec

I I I I I I I I I

v

•+

^:

- %

4 sec

6 sec

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

I I I I I I I 11

8 sec

I I I I I I I

•

Orientation and Camera Vi •

[©] PhotoView 360 Lights

•

jj|[| SOLIDWORKS Lights

•

*

*^3 (f) Housing(Machined)_An

•

*

^ (f) Side Cover(Machined)_/

• •

y

"v§3 (f) Side Cover(Machined)_/

•

^ (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Anim

*

(-) Worm Gear Complete./

*

^ (*) Offset Shaft Gear.Anim,

4

¥

^ (•) Bushing_Animation<1>

•

*

Xl3 (") Bushing_Animation<2>

•

(f)TopCover_Animation<

1

•

• •

•

V <

A

33.11. - For the last step of this animation we'll change the appearance of the front 'Side Cover1 to hidden lines visible mode. Move the time bar to 4 seconds. Make a right-mouse-click in the 'Side Cover's row and select "Place Key." This will be the starting point for the appearance change. AniMtior^

^:

v

0 sec A

w

^ Gear Box Animation (Default<[

•

Orientation and Camera Vi

•

•

2 sec

II I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I

4 sec

6 sec

I I I I I I I I I

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 i

1

f

^ PhotoView 360 Lights

• [3] SOLIDWORKS Lights

i

*

*C$j3 (f) Housing(Machined)_An

4 A t

y

^3 (f) Side Cover(Machined)_/

•

•


4

*

^ (-) Worm Gear Complete./

4

•

^ (-) Offset Shaft Gear.Anim.

4

•


4

•


•

(f) Top Cover_Animation<

< jfP^»'vvcTirn^w^^ & Place Key

Select All ^ Animation Wizard...

4

V <

4 A

614

8 sec 1 1 1 1 1 1 1


V

w

=0=

•

^ Y*

Y A

!•

0 sec

2 sec i i

4 sec

11 1 11 i

6 sec

8 sec

ii i i i i i i i

i i

i i

^ Gear Box Animation (Default •Q) (-) Bushing_Animation<2> \ (f) Top Cover_Animation< rr\ rnrlre* U,.-. J r.m

Model

-

i Study 1

Move the time bar to 6 seconds, right-mouse-click in the 'Side Cover' and select "Component Display, Hidden Lines Visible." A new key is added and a magenta line shows that the component's display will change between these time keys. Origin (jj) (f) Housing(Machined)_Animati

(f) Side Cover(Machined)_.

Invert Selection

(f) Side Cover(Machined)_.

Component (Side Cover(Machined)_AnL.) \

P

Hide Isolate

(-) Bushing_Animation<1s

^

(-) Bushing_Animation<2s

Change Transparency Component Display

•

Temporary Fix/Group Animation

!•

uhpdt

[j?) Hidden Lines Visibl

Material Appearance

£=] -

-

<9 Gear Box Animation (I

Shaded With Edges

Component Properties..

|j| Shaded | Default Display

Zoom to Selection

Orientation and C ® PhotoView 360 Lie

Hide/Show Tree Item,

[®] SOLIDWORKS Ligl

Collap5e l,ems

(f) Housing(Mach

Customize Menu

Q (f) Side Cover(Macnrnetrr7 (5) (0 Side Cover(Machined),/ (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Anim "(5) (-) Worm Gear Complete,/ (-) Offset Shaft Gear_Animt (-) Bushing_Animation<1> tx£)

(-) Bushing_Animation<2> (f) Top Cover_Animation<

f I C \

A

.

615

8 sec


If needed, recalculate to finish the animation

urn Osec

&M

& ¥

2 sec

4 sec

6 sec

|8 sec

i i i i i i i i i i i i C0 Gear Box Animation (Default< I Orientation and Camera Vi Hal PhotoView 360 Lights jg| SOLIDWORKS Lights *£^3 (f) Housing(Machined)_An *0) (f) Side Cover(Machined)J *0) (f) Side Cover(Machined)_/ (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Anim (-) Worm Gear Complete./ (-) Offset Shaft Gear_Anim. ^ (-) Bushing_Animation<1> (-) Bushing_Animation<2> (f)Top Cover_Animation<

33.12. - Play the animation to see the result. •ffl

\

X

JL W

Osec

Osec

i i i i i i i i i i i i ii i i i i i i i i i i

2 sec i

i 1111 i

\J

4 sec

j

1 1 1 1 1

6 sec

11111 ii11

\

1

X 0 sec

2 sec

1 i 11 11 11111 11111 iivi

4 sec

^

&r 6 sec

|0 sec

ji 111111111

2 sec

4 sec

11 1111 1111 i 11111 11111 11111 11

616

6 sec

11 11 1 1 1


33.13. - The view orientation is automatically locked when we start a new motion study, and that's why it always goes back to the same orientation when the animation is played, even if we rotate the view. To play the animation using a different view orientation, right-mouse-click in "Orientation and Camera Views" and select "Disable Playback of View Keys." After disabling it we can play the animation using any view orientation/zoom we wish. Animation

!•

• 0 sec

2 sec

i 1 1 1

•*"

1 1

4 sec

1 1 1 1

6 sec

i i i

1 1 1

i i

Gear Box Animation (Default iult
Disable Playback of View Keys

fjjTl PhotoView 360 Lights

j^gblîe^ce^reatior^

[H) SOLIDWORKS Lights

Hide/Show Tree Items...

(f) Hcusing(Maehined)_Anir

Collapse Items

^ (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Ar •yjj) (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Ar

Customize Menu

I

(53 (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Animativr {[J) (-) Worm Gear Complete_Animat f-1

Offset Shaft Gear Animation<

33.14. - To add view orientation changes to the animation, we have to meet the following three conditions: • • •

"AutoKey" must be ON. "Disable Playback of View Keys" must be OFF. "Disable View Key Creation" must be OFF. Autokey When depressed, automatically creates a key at the current time bar location for dragged components.

i 4 sec I I 11 I 11 I I

Animation dwor

!•

i r n T i i 11

d |10 sec

I I I I I I I M

i

l

l

0

•

2 sec

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

$ Orientation and Camera Viev^~-

X Disable Playback of View Keys

PhotoView 360 Lights Q®

CjJ) (f) Housing(Machined)_Anim (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Ani (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Ani CjJj (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Animati« •sjJ) (-) Worm Gear Complete.Ani •CjJ) (-) Offset Shaft Gear_Animation<|[~

:

g &

0 sec

HO SOLIDWORKS Lights

l §

8 sec

Disable View Key Creation View Orientation Hide/Show T ree Items... Collapse Items Customize Menu

f

617

1 1 ii 1 1 1 1 1

4 sec 1 1 11 1 11 1 1

$

6 sec a

1 1 1 1 1 11 li


The "AutoKey" command automatically adds key points in the animation at the location of the time bar when we move a component, or change the view orientation if the previous conditions are met. Move the time bar to 0 seconds, and set the view orientation to the starting view for the animation.

IS

rct^ o g—

a^ tt7tjt

7-

a

Right Plane I

t

Origin (f) Housing(Machined)_AnimatI

"(Jj (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Animc

\

(f) Side Cover(Machined)_Anim< ^3 (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Animation

\

(-) Worm Gear Complete_Animc "(jjj (-) Offset Shaft Gear.Animation^ (-) Bushing_Animation<1> (Def. (-) Bushing_Animation<2> (Def. •sj] (f) Top Cover_Animation< 1> (D (f) socket head cap screw_ai(HX-

&

y

(f) socket headâp screw_ai(HX (f) socket head cap screw_ai(HX(f) socket head cap screw_ai(HX-

v

> \imation

v

p~3

^

& (f 4 sec

2 sec

sec

6 sec

& 8 sec

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1111 1111 111111111 I I I I Gear Box Animation (Default< Display

•

4$ Orientation and Camera Views •

£©) PhotoView 360 Lights

• Hf) SOLIDWORKS Lights k /iX t£\ • i : fii i_: i\ «

j

i

33.15. - Move the time bar to 2 seconds and add a key in the "Orientation and Camera Views" row.

!• •

Animation «pcr

m

n

0 sec

Orientation and Camera Views

4 sec

2 sec 1 1

Gear Box Animation (Default

&W

r

i i i

+-

I II I IIII i 111 i i 4

•

Move Time Bar

fjjTl PhotoView 360 Lights

View Orientation

[§>] SOLIDWORKS Lights Q) (f) Housing(Machined)_Animatio (s^j

Place Key

(f) Side Cover(Machined)_Anima1 (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Anima1

*

(-) Worm Gear Shaft_Animation<

*

n£) (") Worm Gear Complete_Animat

•

{-) Offcpt ^haft fipar Animation^ j1

6 sec 6

Select All Animation Wizard...

Model! Motion Study 1

618


Move the time bar to 4 seconds and change the view's orientation. The new animation step is added to the view -M £ orientation automatically. In the 0 sec 2 sec 4 sec 6 sec 8 sec I I I I I I I i i Ii i ii I i i i i I i ii i I i i animation, the view's orientation will change between the 2 seconds key and the 4 seconds key and will remain at that orientation. If the "AutoKey" command is used for component movement, it's a good idea to turn the "Disable View Key Creation" option ON to prevent accidentally adding view orientation keys to the animation. Add view orientation animations later to have more control and get the desired results. After finishing the view orientation animations, turn the "Disable View Key Creation" option back ON. The Final animation sequence is this. Feel free to explore animating more components to see their effect. We'll see explode and collapse animation in the next step.

r

|Osee

1

|2see

-

Usee

|6sec

lOsee

|8

1

Llj/l 11111111 1111111111111111111111111

| |2see |

11111111

- - - a i a i i r i Usee |6sec

V I I I \J\ 1 11 1

11 1111

i « IC

11 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

&
I I I I 111 111 1 1 I I 1 1

4 see

6 sec

lOsec

|2 see

Usee

16 sec 1

ll I 11 I I 11111 I 11 I 11 I I I I I 11 I I!SyJjj/i 1 1 1 1 619

[8


33.16. - To create a new animation right-mouse-click in the "Motion Study 1" tab and select "Create New Motion study." Animation I^J

v

n \m

^ EJ£

,r

w

* *

y

(

^$3 Gear Box Animation (Default Orientation and Camera Views

(f

o l ® l 10 see 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 sec

4 sec

2 sec

3

6 sec

&

8 sec

S

• [©) PhotoView 360 Lights •

SOLIDWORKS Lights

y

^5) (fl Housing(Machined)_Animatio

y

(0 Side Cover(Machined) Animal

y

*0) W Side Cov

<

(

•

1

i

Duplicate

1 v

^ ^ Worj^^^^ Create New Motion Study^^^^l Model

Motion Jtuuy i


Under Defined

Editing Assembly

In the new motion study click the "Animation Wizard" command, select the "Explode" option and click "Next" to continue. Animation Wizard Inserts a view rotation or explode/collapse at the current time bar location. IB

v

< o 4D ^

1 4 sec I I I !

l l l l l l l l l

10 sec

6 sec l l l l l l l l l

l l l l l l l l l

<§>

12sec

l l l l l l l l l

I I I

o

|14sec I

l

l

'

I

I® |16sec

M

I

Select an Animation Type This wizard will help you to create simple animations automatically.

'

'

To begin, select the type of animation you want to create and click Next.

• Explode

. H Delete all existing paths

Import motion from Basic Motion Import motion from Motion Analysis Solar Access Study

O Mate Controller Explode and Collapse are available only after an explode view has been created. Mate Controller is available only after one with saved positions has been created. Basic Motion is available only after a simulation has been calculated in a motion study. Motion Analysis is available only if the SOLIDWORKS Motion add-in is loaded and results have been calculated in a motion study. Solar access studies require the model to have a Sunlight defined.

Back

620

Next

Cancel

Help


When we animated the exploded view previously, the animation's length was fixed at 8 seconds, causing the exploded view to run very fast. Using the animation wizard we can make the explosion any length we want. In the following page make the animation 20 seconds and leave the start time at 0 seconds. Click "Finish" to complete the animation. Animation Control Options To control the speed of the animation, set the duration of the entire animation below. Duration (seconds):

(£)

To delay the movement of obji beginning of the animation, set the sbjStsjUHe b start time. Start Time (seconds):

0

All the explode steps are automatically added to the timeline. Press "Play" to see the result. Animation

3 | i

!•

•

r>

Y

IIMIIIIIIMMIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIMI

•/

:•

§>

O

n INI liniliiiil II'IMI

i i

II:rn I n l nil i

t Gear Box Animation (Default* (

-•

$ Orientation and Camera Vi fuT Lights, Cameras and Scene ^ (0 Housing(Machined)_An

-•

^ (f) Side Cover(Machined)J 4^3 (f) Side Cover(Machined)J

•-

{jjl (-) Worm Gear Shaft.Amm ^ (-) Worm Gear Complete./

^ (0

Offset Shaft Gear.Anim,

• •

^3 (-) Bushing_Animation<1> (-) Bushing_Animation<2> ^3 (0 Top Cover.Animation*

• •

l<§) (Q socket head cap screwj ^ (f) socket head cap screw, <§) (f) socket head cap screw, ^ (f) socket head cap screw, (f) socket head cap screw,
Model

Motion Study !

Motion Study 2

IMPORTANT: As of the writing of this book, since the multiple simultaneous explode and rotation step behaves erratically, each screw was exploded individually to work correctly when imported into the animation wizard. Be aware that using the "Animate Explode/Collapse" shows some of the screws rotating about a different axis, but it is correctly imported into the animation wizard.

621


33.17. - After the exploded view steps are added to the animation, turn OFF the option "Disable View Key Creation" and add orientation view animations to zoom it to the screws when they are exploding out. Animation

m &

HtT 0 sec

2 sec

4 sec

6 sec

14

12 sec

10 sec

Inn lllllllll II A

^ Gear Box Animation (Default
w

Orientation and Camera • m Lights, Cameras ai^^ce •

v

isable Playback of View Key Disable View Key Creation

(f) Housing(Machl

*

Side Cover(Machinec

*

^ (0 Side Cover(Machinec

*

^3 (*) Worm Gear Shaft_An

*

^ (-) Worm Gear Complet

Hide/Show Tree Items... Collapse Items

Move the Time Bar to 1 second and zoom into the Top Cover" to see the screws. Gear Box Animation (Default
History

fol Sensors y

Si Annotations Front Plane Top Plane pv[ Right Plane

L 0"g'n y

*st) (f) Housing(Machined)_Animatic

y

(0 Side Cover(Machined)_Anima

y

^ (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Anima

* y y y

*

^

Worm Gear Shaft_Animation<

^ (•) Worm Gear Complete_Animal (•) Offset Shaft Gear_Animation< (*) Bushing_Animation<1> (Defa ^ ("3 Bushing_Animation<2> (Defa v

Animation

!•

i <•> |0 sec

^ Gear Box Animation (Defaults!

12 sec

Inn

.

Orientation and Camera Vi y

HD Lights, Cameras and Scene

>

^ (f) Housing(Machined)_An

k

^ (f) Side Cover(Machined)J

•

^ (f) Side Cover(Machined)J

*

(•) Worm Gear Shaft_Anim

h

^ (-) Worm Gear Complete./

y

(*) Offset Shaft Gear.Anim,

Model

Motion Study 1

Motion Study 2

M

|4 sec

;

|6sec

;

i ; I< -

|8 sec

11

llOsec

<'

I

Il2sec

I!

I

Il4sec

II

0 Il6sec

' 11111'

Orientation and Camera Views f sec

Custom

• • •

• [

Orientation and Camera Views 1 sec

Under Defined

Editing Assembly

33.18. - The problem in this step is that in 1 second the screws are already half way out of view, therefore we need to change the time the screws start to explode to get a chance to see the screws turn and go out. Scroll down to the top screws in the animation manager and window-select all the top screw keys in the timeline.

622


Animation

!•

& (/

•

Y

0 sec

2 sec

4 sec

6 sec

10 sec

8 sec

lllllllll

Xy (") Bushing_Animation<1> x£) (-) Bushing_Animation<2> xj) (f) Top Cover_Animation<' (0 socket head cap screwj xj) (f) socket head cap screw, xj) (f) socket head cap screwj xj) (0 socket head cap screwj xj) (0 socket head cap screw. SIX ,

After selecting all the keys right-mouse-click in any one of them and select "Edit Key Point Time." By pre-selecting all the keys they will be shifted in the time line simultaneously. Animation 0 sec

2 sec

4 sec

6 sec

lllllll

8 sec

i i i i i 1 1

10 sec

m i n i

lllllllllllll

•sjJ) (-) Bushing_Animation<1> (-) Bushing_Animation<2> ^ (f) Top Cover_Animation< xj) (f) socket head cap screwj Edit Key Point Tirr

(f) socket head cap screw.

ace

(Jjp (f) socket head cap screwj •sjj) (f) socket head cap screwj

SSL

cut


Copy

Xj} (f) socket head cap screwj

Individual key points can be dragged in the timeline to make quick time adjustments. Enter a value of +1 second to move the screws' keys to start moving 1 second later. After re-calculating the animation we can see the view will zoom in to the Top Cover1 and then the screws will start turning and going out. Animation

v

&
09

*

• 6 sec

10 sec

8 sec

llll m i llll llll lllllllll ^ (-) Bushing_Animation<1> Xj} (-) Bushing_Animation<2>

Edit Time

Xj} (f) Top Cover_Animation< + 1.00s


•Ml I I i I I I I II I I ill

(f) socket head cap screwj (jj) (f) socket head cap screwj

• X

Xj) (f) socket head cap screw_. X£) (f) socket head cap screwj (f) socket head cap screwj

623

I lllllll

\


To change the speed of the animation, select a multiplier from the "Playback Speed" drop-down box. Be aware that changing the playback speed will also change the speed when saving the video. Animation

!•

•

A r 0 sec

0.25x

2 sec

10 sec

8 sec

12

^ (") Bushing_Animation<1> *(2) (-) Bushing_Animation<2>

3 sec 5 sec 10 sec

^ (f) Top Cover_Animation< 'Cj) (f) socket head cap screwj (f) socket head cap screwj (f) socket head cap screwj (f) socket head cap screwj

33.19. - The screws start moving one after another. In order to make the animation more "fluid," we need to overlap the screw's motion. Select the second screw and shift its start time -0.5 seconds before, the third screw -1 second, and the fourth screw -2 seconds. 0 sec

4 sec

2 sec

6 sec

0 sec

• •

• • •

Co

4 sec

2 sec

6 sec

Edit Time

• •

Edit Key Point Time Replace Key

1§ 1

1 -°'50s

k

4>

x

^ Cut Copy

0 sec

4 sec

2 sec

6 sec

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

4 sec

0 sec

lllllllll

linn lllllllll lllllllll

Edit Time

•

1 -1'00s

6 sec

Edit Time @1

•

•

-1.50s IUiU

•

•

LLLLI

1

MlllU

x

h E

624


33.20. - Adjust the timing of other components accordingly and add similar keys to view and zoom into other components as they explode to finish the animation. •

Add a new key in the timeline where we want to start the view orientation change. Move the time bar to the time where we want the view transition to end. Zoom and pan into the area of interest.

• •

After setting the view orientation, the new animation step is automatically added between the keys. Notice that the next timeline does not have a gap between some view orientation steps. This is done by adding a new key, moving the time bar to the new location, changing the view orientation and repeating the process a second time. The final effect is that the view keeps moving from one orientation to the next without stopping.

<3 11

0

7I Gear Box Animation (Default* Display * ff9l Histoiy Sensors a Annotations

&

^ Front Plane Top Plane ^5^ Right Plane 1_» Origin (f) Housing(Machined)_Animatic (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Anima(f) Side Cover(Machined)_Anima•CiJ) (-) Worm Gear Shaft_Animation< (-) Worm Gear Complete.Animal ( ( - )OffsetShaftGear.Animation* (-) Bushing_Animation<1> (Defa (Defa (f) Top Cover_Animation<1> (De (ft socket head cao screw aifHX> ~

i hfr

v

•

ib 1 &

S&

0

t8?

|14 sec

If 6 sec

l l l l l l l i l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l i l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 1111111111111111111 l l l l i l l l l l i l l

1

lllll

Gear Box Animation (DefaultOrientation and Camera Vi *

|ui) Lights, Cameras and Scene

*

N£] (f) Housing(Machined)_An

*

"^3 (f) Side Cover(Machined)J

*

*C§3 (f) Side Cover(Machined).;

'


• •

33.21. - As a final step, we are going to add a motor to make the gears move for a few seconds. From the Animation toolbar, select the "Motor" command. We can add linear or rotary motors to any component whose degrees of freedom will allow it.

625

Motor

Moves a component as if acted upon by a motor.

i 10 sec

i mini

i & sec

Mil Mil

0 14 sec

16 sec

lllll Mil


For this example we'll add a rotary motor to the 'Worm Gear Shaft,' which will also move the 'Worm Gear Complete' and the 'Offset Shaft Geah thanks to the gear mate. In the "Motor Type" properties, select the "Rotary Motor" option, and for the "Component/Direction" select the outside face of the shaft. A preview will show the direction of rotation. If needed (or wanted), we can reverse the direction. In the "Motion" section select the "Distance" option, and make the displacement 1800 degrees (5 full turns), starting at 2 seconds, with a duration of 6 seconds (finishing at 8 seconds). Click OK to add the motor. Remember to turn "Disable View Key Creation" ON when done manipulating views and avoid accidentally changing the view orientation and zoom settings of the animation.

V

X

©

Motor X

a

Componen Gea 7 hat

Face<

HSH!

\ 0

r."i'if:I'll Distance

lSOOdeg 2.0.75 5.00s

/

8

B

to enlarge

More Options

Other options to define a motor include: Constant Speed Distance Oscillating Segments Data Points Expression

Components will move at a constant speed for the length of the animation Specify a distance within a given time frame Oscillating motion defining the angular displacement, frequency and phase shift Define multiple motion segments using functions for displacement, velocity, and/or acceleration Define motion segments by specifying displacement, velocity and/or acceleration data points Specify a mathematical function to describe displacement, velocity, acceleration, etc. 626


33.22. - After re-calculating the animation to account for the added motor, we can see the yellow motion bars added to the components moved by the motor in the animation controller. it

•

• > 0 sec

12 sec

|4 sec

6 sec

V

O | *8?|

8 sec

14 sec

116 sec

lllllllil lllllllll lllllllll lllllllll III *05 Gear Box Animation (Default-; [ $ Orientation and Camera Vi •

Lights, Cameras and Scene) RotaryMotorl

*

(f) Housing(Machined)_An (f) Side Cover(Machined)J

•

*

4

•

>2 (-) Bushing_Animation<2

•

•

>

•

Remember to turn OFF "Disable Playback of View Keys" command before saving the video, otherwise the animation with not show view orientation changes. —

Gear Box Animation (Defaults Ij 4$ Orientation ao

• IS Lights. CamCj

Disable Playback of View Keys

(3b RotaryMotorl •

(f) Housing(M,

' ^ (f) Side Coverfl •

''1 Hide/Show Tree Items.., Collapse Items

(fl Side Coved!

33.23. - The last step is to save the animation to a file. Select the "Save Animation" command Save Animation Saves the animation as an AVI or other file type. 1x <§>

2 sec

4 sec

6 sec

^sec

10 sec

I III I I I II l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

12 sec

d

I®

Msec

1

lllllllll lllllllll lllllllll

•

H

In the "Save As" dialog, browse to select the location to save the video. In the "Save as type:" we can select to save as a Microsoft AVI file, or a series of images in BMP or TGA format that can be imported into video editing software to create a video.

627


Save Animation to File Save in:

Gear box Animation

@ t P i-

Name

Date modified

Type

No items match you search.

V

Gear Box Animation.avi

Save

"V Save as type: Renderen

rosoft AVI file (*.avi) Microsoft AVI file f.avi Series of Windows Bitmaps (\bmp) Series of Truevision Targas (*.tga)

Cancel Help

Image Size and Aspect Ratio

Frame Information

1269

Frames per second

634

Frames to Output:

@ Fixed aspect ratio

Entire animation

Use camera aspect ratio (•) Custom aspect ratio (width : height)

Time range:

19

C

to 19

In the "Renderer" selection box the default selection is "SOLIDWORKS screen." In this case the animation is made using screen shots of the SOLIDWORKS graphics area. Select the image size, aspect ratio, and frames per second. Save Animation to File Save in:

Gear box Animation

© it

Name

EH*

9

Date modified

Type

No items match your search.

< File name:

Gear Box Animation.avi

Save as type:

Microsoft AVI file (\avi)

Renderer:

Save

£

SOLIDWORKS screen PhotoView 360

Image Size and Aspect Ratio 1269

Cancel Help

Frame Information 634

Frames per second

@ Fixed aspect ratio

20

Frames to Output:

Use camera aspect ratio

Entire animation

>

® Custom aspect ratio (width : height) 1269: 634

Time range: 19 C to 19 C C Motion Blur (PhotoView 360 only) Blur Length: Blur Offset:

628


Finally, select the video size and aspect ratio desired for the video. Renderer

Cancel

SOLIDWORKS screen

Help mage Size and Aspect Ratio

Frame Information Frames per second Frames to Output

[*/] Fixed aspe

O Use camera aspect ratio

Entire animation

(®) Custom aspect ratio (width : height)

Time range:

Match active window Match background image I :1 (Square format) 4:3 (Standard video and print format) 16:9 (HDTV format) 8:5 (Widescreen monitor format) 1.67: 1 (Cinematic 35mm format - Europe) 1.85 : 1 (Cinematic 35mm format - US/UK) 2.39: 1 (Cinematic 35mm anamorphic format) (4x6 print format, landscape) 3:2 (4x6 print format, portrait) 2:3 (5x7 print format, landscape) 7:5 (5x7 print format, portrait) 5:7 (8x10 print format, landscape) 5:4 (8x10 print format, portrait) 4:5 II 8.5 (US letter size, landscape) 8.5 :11 (US letter size, portrait)

19

C

to

19

C

in Blur (PhotoView 360 only)

After we click "Save" we have to select the video compression codec and quality for the video. Click OK to continue to create the video. The "Microsoft Video 1" codec is included in every Windows PC and gives good results. Video Compression OK

Compressor: Microsoft Video 1

Cancel

Compression Quality: < 0 Key Frame Every

85 > 8

Configure... About...

frames

The window size used for the video includes the FeatureManager's area, but with the FeatureManager hidden. Press "F9" or click to hide the FeatureManager to get a better idea of the area included in the video. UN

HSjllW I

IUI IV.

ain l_ Origin ^ (f) Housing(Machined)_Animatic ^ (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Anima'

i

^ (f) Side Cover(Machined)_Anima e

0

(-) Worm Gear Shaft_Animation< (•) Worm Gear Complete_Anima1

Hide FeatureManager (F9)

Show FeatureManager (F9)

629


If PhotoView 360 is available and loaded, the animation can be rendered using PhotoView to obtain a photo realistic video. Be aware that selecting PhotoView will render each frame of the animation. For example, if the animation is 20 seconds long, and we make an animation with 15 frames per second (standard video is 30 frames per second), PhotoView will have to render 300 frames. If the average frame takes 2 minutes, depending on the hardware used, PhotoView settings, image size, etc., saving this video with half the desired frame rate will take about 10 hours. Considering the excessive amount of time required to make a photo realistic video, we want to be sure the end result is acceptable, if possible, in the first attempt. To minimize the risk of having to wait a very long time only to find out the resulting animation is not what we expected, here are a few suggestions when saving a video using the PhotoView renderer: • • • • •

• • • •

Make sure the animation runs smoothly, including component movement, component's display, and view orientations. In PhotoView adjust all the necessary settings to obtain the desired image quality and write them down. Save a video using the SOLIDWORKS screen renderer to make sure the image size is correct and the animation is moving correctly. Go back to PhotoView and lower the quality settings to get a fast render for a test. Save a new animation using the PhotoView renderer (using the low quality settings), a small (proportional) image size, and low frame rate. This way we'll be able to quickly produce a video to make sure we are getting the desired effect and lighting conditions. Adjust whatever needs to be adjusted as needed until the result is acceptable using the lower quality settings. When the animation is moving correctly using these settings, set the PhotoView settings to the optimal parameters noted before. Set the image size and frame rate to the desired values for the final render. Wait for the render to complete.

At the bottom of the PhotoView options there is a section for "Network Rendering." What this option does is to use multiple clients using a shared network directory to split rendering jobs to finish faster. Multiple SOLIDWORKS licenses are required for this option.

D Netwoik Rendering

Client workload:

200% ma I I l V.

ILL M M ,

Send data for network job

Network shared directory: C:\temp\ Browse...

630

m


Exercises: Generate an animation of the engine assembly using the knowledge acquired in this lesson. This is only a suggestion; it's time to get creative. ©

as

631


c

! ^

p

m •»<

Tf f p tf

fl 7 p Tf •SB

s«

tf

tf

ri

r*

632

Analysis: SimulationXpress


Model name:Connecting Rod_Analysis Study name:SimulationXpress Study(-Default-) Plot type: Static nodal stress Stress (-vonMises-) Deformation scale: 43.5541

von Mises (psi) 6.099e+004 5.591e+004 5.083e+004 4.575e+004 4.067e+004 3.559e+004 3.051e+004 2.543e+004 2.035e+004 1.527e+004 1.019e+004 5.110e+003 2.979e+001 Yield strength: 1.030e+005

633


Notes:

634


Background: Why Analysis? Simulation is a very important tool in engineering. Computers and software have come a long way since the early analysis tools first became available, and modern tools have made simulation a lot easier to use, faster, more accurate and more accessible than ever, enabling designers and engineers to check their design, make sure it's safe, understand how it will deform, if it will fail and under what circumstances, or how it will perform in any given environment (temperature, pressure, vibrations, etc.). The biggest advantage, by far, when analyzing a design is that we will have a safe design, and at the same time, save money by making decisions as to what materials to use, component sizes, features and even appearance early in the design process, when it is still all in "paper" (maybe a more appropriate term now would be 'in Bytes'©) and cheaper to modify. As the product development process advances beyond the design stage, making design changes to a product is increasingly more expensive as we approach the manufacturing stage. Picture it this way: Imagine we design a new cellular phone that looks really nice. We make molds, tooling, order parts, and set up an assembly line. Soon the phones start selling, and a month later, we start getting customer complaints: when a button is pressed hard, the battery cover falls off. Then, after we know we have a problem, we run an analysis and find out that we should have had a thicker this or that, with a widget in between the thingamajig and the thingamabob, and those changes would solve the problem. Now, all we need to do is to change the design, the tooling, the assembly line, marketing, and above all, convince every customer that it is fixed. At this point, our customers' perception of our company and credibility are destroyed. This is usually the most expensive part. It's easy to see why making analysis of our products early in the design process will help us design better products and save money and resources. With that said, it also has to be noted that the simple fact of making a simulation does not guarantee that our designs will be successful, as there are many factors involved. Reasons for product failure include using the product beyond its designed capacity, abuse, material imperfections, fabrication processes and things and circumstances we could have never thought of. This is where the designer needs to take into account every possible scenario, and of course, simulate it as realistically as possible with the correct analysis tools. SOLIDWORKS includes a basic analysis package called "SimulationXpress." As its name implies, it has limited functionality that allows only certain scenarios to be analyzed. In order to understand what these limitations are, first we need to learn a little about how analysis works. A general overview of the inner workings of analysis is as follows:

635


Analysis, also known as "Finite Element Analysis," is a mathematical method where we divide a component's geometry into hundreds or thousands of small pieces (elements), where they are all connected to one or more neighboring elements by the vertices (called nodes in analysis). The elements have simple geometry that can be easily analyzed using stress analysis formulas. Elements are usually tetrahedral or hexahedral for most solid models. There are other types of elements including shell and linear elements for different types of geometry like thin walled or long slender components. SimulationXpress uses tetrahedral elements only. In order for us to make a simulation, we need to know which material the component is made of (physical properties of the material), how it is supported (Restraints), and what forces are acting on it (Loads). The next step is to break down the model into small elements; this process is called meshing. The resulting group of interconnected elements is called the mesh; in SimulationXpress the only parameter we can change, if we choose to, is to define the average element size, and SimulationXpress automatically creates the mesh for us.

The next step is to define how the component is supported; in other words, which faces, edges or vertices are restrained. Each node has six degrees of freedom, meaning that each node can move along X, Y and Z and rotate about the X, Y, and Z axes. Restraints limit the degrees of freedom (DOF) of the nodes in the face or edge that they are applied to. SimulationXpress limits the user to restraining (Fix) all DOF in faces. In other words, they are completely immovable.

636


This approach is sufficient for simple analyses, but in order to obtain more accurate solutions, a more realistic simulation must be used that allows selective displacement and rotation of element nodes. Now that we know how the model is supported, we need to define the Loads (forces) that act upon it. SimulationXpress only allows Forces and Pressures to be applied to model faces. We can define the Loads to be normal to the face they are applied to or perpendicular to a reference plane. Another limitation of SimulationXpress is it can only make Linear Static Stress Analysis. Stress is defined as the internal resistance of a body when it is deformed and is measured in units of Force divided by Area. For example, if we load a bar with a 1 in2 cross section area with a 1 Lb. load, we'll have a stress of 1 Lb/in2. The stress depends on the forces and the geometry regardless of the material used. The material properties will make a difference as the model will deform more or less. The "Static" part means the model is immovable; in other words, the restraints will not let the model move when the loads are applied. Loads and restraints are in equilibrium, otherwise the analysis would be "Dynamic." The "Linear" part implies the deformation of the model is proportional to the forces applied; twice the force, twice the deformation. These deformations are generally small compared to the overall size of the part and occur in the Elastic region of the "Stress-Strain" curve of the material used. If we remove the force, the model returns to its original shape like a spring. In general terms, the Yield Stress is the point where the stress-strain curve is no longer linear. If a material is stressed beyond the Yield Stress it will be permanently deformed. In this case we will have Plastic Deformation. Thinking of the spring, if we pull the spring too far, it will be permanently deformed, meaning it had plastic deformation. If the material's yield stress is exceeded, the analysis results of Simulation-Xpress are invalid. If this is the case, we will need to change our design, its geometry, the loads applied or material used in order to have stress results below the material's yield stress.

Stress-Strain curve Ultimate Stress

Stress Yie d Stress

-Elastic Limit

Elastic Deformation

637

\ Breaking Stress

Strain Plastic Deformation


Notes:

638


Engine's Connecting Rod Analysis 34.1. -To show the SimulationXpress functionality, open the 'Connecting Rod_Analysis' part from the exercise files included. This is a slightly different version of the part made for the engine project.

m>.

For our analysis we are going to pretend the engine's shaft is blocked during normal operation, resulting in a high stress in the connecting rod. We'll assume it happens at the point where the crankshaft is horizontal and the connecting rod is at the maximum angle with the vertical, causing the maximum stress as shown in the next image. e3

® _© s2s2s2 •ZD

c

639


34.2. - In order to properly simulate the downward force we have to divide (split) the cylindrical face of the connecting rod in two, where the bottom half will carry the load. To split the face we will use the "Split Line" command. The first thing we need to do is to add a sketch in one side of the model. Using the "Midpoint Line" command draw a line starting in the center, up to the inside edge at an angle. Add a vertical construction line and dimension the angle 103°. The force will be applied perpendicular to this line.

103.00

34.3. - While still editing the sketch, select "Split Line" from the drop down menu in the "Curves" command of the Features Tab.

££

@wrap

15 Reference Geometry

Curves

<5

InstantBD

*

& p • S3$2-
^ Split Line G|||

J)

Project Curve Helix and Spiral

Dividing faces using the "Split Line" command is a common practice in analysis to simulate loading an area of a larger model face. In "Type of Split" select the "Projection" option; this means that the current sketch will be projected over the faces to split. In the "Selections" box "Current Sketch" is listed letting us know that the sketch we are working on is pre-selected. Select the inside cylindrical face and click OK to split it. Notice the face now has two lines, dividing the face in two. The force will be applied to the bottom half. 640


©

^ Split line •

X

Type of Split

O Silhouette

ce

(8) Projection

O Intersection •s

Selections

^1

Current Sketch.

I I Single direction

Reverse direction

1 i Split Line!

f

34.4. - Now we need to create an auxiliary plane that will be used to define the direction of the force. In the Features tab, select the "Plane" command from the "Reference Geometry" drop-down menu.

k

f f l - a - " ) -

-

>!>

1,1

•tp

ittern

Draft

Reference Geometry

„

[||lshel1

Intersect

®i

IS ^ lnstant3D

c43mirr [jj

Plane

•

Point

Coordinate System

Center of Mass 0(1 Mate Reference

641


To define this plane we can: a) Select the edge of one split line and a vertex of the other split line (Edge and vertex definition)

[ p Planel © led9e

I j Perpendicular Coincident Project Second Reference [j£l |vertex<3> Split Linel 0 Coincident •S. | Project

W\ 0 Third Reference ©

b) Select the two vertices of one split line's edge, and one from the second split line's edge (3 vertices definition) [p

Planel

• X Message

A

Fully defined First Reference

A

|Vertex<1>

0

Coincident Project

0> :o Second Reference

A

(jT} |Vertex<2>

0 41

Split Line! Coincident Project

0 Third Reference

©

0

/\

1Vertex <3> Coincident

642


34.5. - Now our model is prepared for analysis; activate the SimulationXpress wizard using the menu "Tools, Xpress Products, SimulationXpress" or in the Evaluate tab of the CommandManager. ;ert

Tools

Window

t?

Help

Connecting Rod_Analysis.S

1

SOLIDWORKS Applications Xpress Products

DriveWorksXpress...

Hoi

Toolbox

Afiza

SimulationXpress.

Defeature.,. Export To AEC...

DLID'

^g.JjoXgresSj.

c

hed :ti. c umen

j

Analysis Wizard

Q Magnified Selection

FfcXpress

DFMXpress

Inalysis

Analysis

'izard

Wizard

St?

SustainabilityXpress.,.

Disp [ 5 Select

*

SimulationXpress

Drive

SimulationXpress Analysis Wizard

Runs stress analysis on your SOLIDWORKS model.

Customize Menu

The SimulationXpress wizard is integrated in the Task Pane and is automatically displayed. Select "Options" to set units to English, turn ON the checkbox "Show annotation for maximum and minimum in the result plots," and leave the results location to the default 'temp' folder. Click OK to accept the options and then "Next" to continue.

X

SOLIDWORKS SimulationXpress 22

Welcome to SOLIDWORKS SimulationXpress.

& m

9 K) si

SimulationXpress helps you predict how a part will perform under load and helps you detect potential problems early in the design cycle. In SimulationXpress, you apply loads and fixtures to your part, specify its material, analyze the part, and view the results. All of this information is included in the Simulation study. Note: Most analysis problems require a comprehensive analysis product for more accurate and complete real-world simulations before final sign-off on a design.

SimulationXpress Options System of units:

English (IPS)

Results location:

C:\Users\ALEJAN~1\AppData\Local\Temp

@ Show annotation for maximum and minimum in the result plots OK

Click here for vour free online training on SOLIDWORKS Simulation fundamentals. Efficiently evaluate performance, improve quality and boost product innovation with the powerful and comprehensive suite of SOLIDWORKS Simulation packages. Click here to learn more about the complete PWORKS Simulation portfolio. Options

Next

643

Cancel


34.6. - The first step will be to define the "Fixtures"; this means the faces will be rigid (all six degrees of freedom restrained) and will not move during the analysis. We are also given a warning letting us know that the results in the regions close to the fixtures may be unrealistic, and more accurate results can be achieved with SOLIDWORKS Simulation Professional, where we can simulate more realistic restraint conditions.

X

Select "Add a Fixture" to define how the part will be supported. In the & Fixture selection box select the two faces at the bottom of the connecting rod and click OK to finish. In this example these two faces will be assumed to be immovable. Remember that the analysis results may not be accurate near the fixed faces but will give us a good approximation in the middle region of the connecting rod, which is what we are interested in analyzing.

e

«

SOLIDWORKS SimulationXpress

2S

1 Fixtures 3 Material

Apply fixtures to keep the part from moving when loads are applied. Warning: Faces with fixtures are treated as perfectly rigid. This can cause unrealistic results in the vicinity of the fixture. Examples: Fixed Holes Fixed vs Supported Fixed vs. Attached Parts

Note: More flexible fixture types are available in SOLIDWORKS Simulation Professional. & Add a fixture

Start Over

Back

ltm

Fixture

•

Qj Connectingtflod.Analj

Type

Example

•

Boss-txtrudel

Standard (Fixed Geometry) Face<1>

vA

Fixed Geometiv

644

f


If more Fixtures were required, select "Add a Fixture" as needed until all the necessary restraints are in place. In our example only these two faces need to be fixed. The SimulationXpress Study now shows the "Fixed-1" condition and "Fixtures" shows a green checkmark letting us know this step's minimum requirement has been met. Click Next to continue. •• _ s x 7

E IS

0'.^

M T°p

nrrn

A

«


*

fixtures

^ Right

lOrigin •

Boss-Extrudel

v

<

Apply fixtures to keep the part frommoving when loads are applied.

>

7-

Warning: Faces with fixtures aretreated as perfectly rigid. This can cause unrealistic results in the vicinity of the fixture. Examples:

SimulationXpress Study (-Default-) (-ISWJAIS

Hylfl Yi SVPWTfg Frcffl Yi PaTi Note: More flexible fixture types are available in SOLIDWORKS Simulation Professional. a Add a fixture

S Back

s Start Over

34.7. - In the next step of the analysis we need to define the force(s) and/or pressure(s) acting in our model. The load we are going to apply will be a force of 2,500 Ibf in the lower half of the previously split face, perpendicular to the auxiliary plane just made.

Click "Add a Force" and select the bottom half of the rce split face to apply the force uniformly in the entire surface. Q Add a force The preview shows the force vectors perpendicular to the surface in a radial fashion, but since we need it to be Add a pressure perpendicular to the auxiliary plane, use the "Selected direction" option and select the plane here. Notice that now the direction vectors are perpendicular to"Planelas explained at the beginning of the exercise. Make the units "English" and enter a value of 2,500 Ibf. If needed, click "Reverse direction" to point the force down. Click OK to add the force and continue.

1b

If we don't give the force a direction, it will be normal to the selected face, making the force radial to the cylindrical surface. In this example we are adding the force to one face only, and the "Per Item" option is the only option available. If two or more faces are selected, we can define if the force added is the total force applied to all faces (Total) or if it is applied to each face (Per Item). Pay attention when selecting multiple faces, as the force applied could be a fraction of the intended load, or several times more. 645


Connecting Rod_Analysis... •

History fp| Sensors

®

Force

• m Annotations

7075-T6 (SN) Front Type

Top 1^4 Right Origin

• 4ft Boss-Extrude1

race

Boss-Extrude2 •

# Boss-Extrude3

•

@ Cut-Extrude 1

•

@ Cut-Extrude2

Boss-Extrude4

Selected direction

r

/:

0 Filled

0

• @ 1/4-28Tapped Holel

Per item

0 Fillet2

013

HpiitTi! $ pi'Rji

D

English (IPS) Normal

Plane

Ibfl iL CC

:::: R r . e r r direct.

34.8. -The "Force-1" condition is added to the SimulationXpress Study where "Loads" shows a green checkmark letting us know this step's minimum requirement (1 force or pressure) has been met.

If more forces or pressures are needed, they can be added using "Add a Force" or "Add a Pressure" as required, or we can edit an existing load. Click Next to continue.

& -t*

Design Study

Measure

Features

%

© Check

Mass Section Sensor Properties Properties Performance Evaluation

Sketch

h

0 0

Direct Editing

18

0

Evaluate) DimXpert

Deviation Analysis

«/j Geometry Analysis

SOLIDWORKS Add-lns

Zebra Stripes

&

Draft Analysis

Check Activ,

Undercut Analysis ^

a Curvature Analysis Preparation

nk

f Parting line Analysts

Document

... „ 5"™

Analysis Wizard

LXol Compare Documents

• • _ e> x

SOLIDWORKS

1 Fixtures

2 Loads

|7

3 Material

M T°P

1^1 Right t . Origin >

Boss-Extrude1

<

V

To simulate the loading on your part, you apply forces, pressures, or both.faimfita

>

Warning: These loads are assumed to be uniform and constant, thg rpw^

7A SimulationXpress Study (-Default-) Connecting Rod_Analysis_ (-7075-T6

& Add a force

0) Fixturj Fixed-1

Add a pressure

id External Loads i-J Edit an existing force or pressure

^ Force-1 OPeritem: 2500 Ibfc)

& Ms @ Bsck

646

0 Start Over


34.9. - The next step is to define the material that will be used for the part. This is important because as we explained earlier, for the analysis we need to know the physical properties of the material. Since a material had been previously assigned to the part before starting the analysis (7075-T6 aluminum allow), this step is already marked as complete and we don't need to do anything else. We can see the green checkbox next to "Material" in the SimulationXpress wizard as well as the Young's Modulus and Yield Strength values for reference.

«


1 Fixtures 2 Loads

*

3 Material

The material assigned to this part is:

7075-T6 (SN) Young's Modulus: 7.2e+010N/mA2 Yield Strength: 5.05e+008N/mA2

If a material has not been assigned before starting the analysis, we can select "Change Material" and pick one from the materials list. Click "Next" to continue. 34.10. - Now that we have given Simulation Xpress the minimum information required to make an analysis (Fixtures, Forces and Material), we are ready to make the mesh (break the model into smaller 'finite' elements) and run our simulation. At this point we have an option to run the analysis with the default settings for the mesh or change them.

Change material

§ Next

SOLIDWORKS SimulationXpress 22

1 Fixtures 2 Loads

•

3 Material

4 Run

Your model is ready to solve!

In general, using a smaller mesh size generates more elements that lead to a more accurate solution; however, increasing the number of elements also increases the time and computing resources needed to run the simulation. SimulationXpress allows us to change the mesh density or the general size of the elements.

You can solve with the default settings or adjust them t-n ci.it your needs. Change settings

Run Simulation

£§ Back

E3 Start Over

In this example reducing the element size from the default size (increasing the mesh density) will not significantly impact the time to solve the problem or its accuracy.

647


For larger, more complex models there would be a notable difference in computing time. SOLIDWORKS Simulation Professional offers many more options and the ability to analyze entire assemblies; with multiple components, a smaller mesh size will most definitively impact the solution time. If needed, the element size or the mesh density can be changed. Select "Change settings," then "Change mesh density." Under "Mesh Parameters" we can set the global element size and tolerance, or move the mesh density slider to make it coarse or fine. For this example we'll use the default mesh settings. Click OK to continue. SOLIDWORKS SimulationXpress

/t\ t?

22

\cm <

•

Mesh 1 Fixtures

^

2 Loads

^

V

X

3 Material

Mesh Density

4 Run

Fine

Coarse Your model is ready to solve! Reset You can solve with the default settings or adjust t e e d s .

0 Mesh Parameters

a Change setting

fcri Run Simulation

^ Back

A

0.13855241in

A •M »

0.00692752in

H—H

a

-

:

Start Over

ABOUT REDUCING MESH SIZE: Making the mesh size smaller improves results accuracy up to a certain degree, but there comes a point where reducing the element's size will not significantly improve accuracy in sequential solutions; this is called convergence and is measured in percentage of change from one solution to the next. For example, if the highest stress value is within a certain percentage of the previous study, for example 2%-5%, we can say that we have reached convergence and assume our results are valid.

In order to start considering reducing the mesh size and look for convergence, our analysis results MUST be below the yield stress and preferably show no stress concentrations. After those conditions have been met, we can start to re-run the analysis reducing the mesh size a little at a time (10% reduction is a good starting point). Convergence values depend on the accuracy needed and can vary around 2% to 5% or even higher. If these values seem high and/or your design has a low factor of safety you may want to consider analyzing your design with a dedicated analysis package to simulate real world conditions and improve the accuracy of your analysis in order to be safe. 648


34.11. - As soon as we click OK in the "Mesh" properties, the mesh is created; in other words, the model is broken into many small pieces (Finite Elements). Notice the model icon in the Analysis Manager is meshed, indicating to us that the mesh is complete. To display the mesh, right-mouse-click in the meshed icon and select "Show Mesh" (to hide it, select "Hide Mesh"). At this time our model is ready to run the analysis. life

Mesh Progress

Meshing: Split Linel

Memory usage:957,584K Elapsed time:1s

Solid mesh inprogress

Cancel

SimulationXpress Study (-Default-) Connecting Rod_Analysis (-[SW];

0 Apply/Edit Material...

0 Fixtures Fixed-1 ±a External Loads

^^^ppl9^yorite Material

Lljif

Show Mesh

J i\

0 Details...

649

*


34.12. - Now that the model is meshed, select "Run Simulation" from the SimulationXpress wizard. What happens next, in the simplest terms, is that the solver (the part that calculates stresses and displacements) will generate an equation for each element, with an unknown variable for each node. Since adjacent elements share nodes between them this generates a very large matrix of hundreds or thousands of simultaneous equations.

After generating the equations, an equations matrix is assembled, and solved for the unknown variables at every node. The resulting value for each unknown value (one per node) will be the node's displacement or deformation. After a displacement is calculated for each node, the physical properties of the material are used to calculate the model stresses at each node.

• Q _ 0 x

y


23 1 Fixtures

2 Loads

• •

3 Material

&

4 Run

Mesh Density

CCj

a

Using the slider in the Mesh Density PropertyManager, choose a density that best suits the needs of your problem. Choose OK or Next to

C3 Next

Since this is a small model it only takes a second to complete the analysis. SimulationXpress Study

_

a

Solving:

Elapsed Time:

•s

Always show solver status when you run analysis

Pause

Cancel

650

More»


When the solver is finished with the calculations, we see an animation of the deformed model.

m

34.13. - The model deforms as we expected in the direction of the force, so we can proceed to & Yes.continu view the results. If the model had not deformed No, return to Drads/Fixtures as expected, we would have to go back to modify the fixtures and/or loads to make the necessary corrections. Select "Yes, continue" Results to view the analysis results. Click in "Show Von Misses Stress" to view the resulting stresses S3 Showvon Mises stress calculated using the von Mises method, which is the most commonly used criteria for isotropic Show displacement materials (materials with the same physical properties in all directions; metals are mostly isotropic). The deformation is exaggerated for visual clarity (in this case 13 times). 0

7

Model name;Connecting Rod_Analysi5_ Study name:SimulationXpress Studyf-Default-) Plottype: Static nodal stress Stress Deformation scale: 13.476?

von Mijes (psi) 7.238e»C04 6.635e+C04 6.032e+C04 . 5.430e+C04

(p 1/4-28Tapped Holel Filled

I

Split Linel

!

[1] Planel

4.8 27e *004 4.224e+C04 3.621 e+C04 3.016 e+004 2.415e+C04 1.812e+004 l.209e+CC>4 6.059!+C03 2.958e+001 "Yield strength; 7.324e+C04

7SimulationXpress Study (-Default-) (-7075-T6

ri

•

c:

in.) . Pei :

a

1 Fixtures

Vl

3 Material 4 Run 5 Results

*1

foal

Iflrl

Results

a

Show von Mises stress

a Show displacement

S

Show where factor of safety (FOS) is below;

Based on the specified parameters, the lowest factor of safety(fOS) found in your design is 1.01189 Use these controls toview the animation. • Play animation Q Stop a

a

Done viewing results

LI B.ck

651

*1

2 Loads

a Start Over


It is important to know that, by the very nature of the Finite Element Analysis process, the results are an approximation to the actual physical phenomenon, and solving such a large number of simultaneous equations will most likely return slightly different values for stress and displacement results. However, the resulting values should be, in general, very close to the results shown in this book, assuming that the analysis is defined the same way (geometry, material, loads, and restraints) and the mesh size is the same. The accuracy of any analysis will depend on how well the geometry is modeled, as well as how closely material properties, loading, mesh size, and restraining conditions match the actual physical conditions. An analysis done with SimulationXpress should only be considered as a general guide and never a substitute for a complete and properly modeled analysis using accurate loading and restraining conditions. 34.14. - In these results, we can see the Maximum Stress in the model is approximately 72,000 psi. The Yield Strength of Aluminum 7075-T6 is 73,200 psi. Based on these results, the lowest Factor of Safety in our model is almost 1.01. The color-coded stress scale will help in finding the stresses in the rest of the model. The Factor of Safety is calculated by dividing the material's yield strength by the maximum stress in the model. We are interested in finding the lowest value because if any area of the model has a factor of safety below 1, this means the stress is higher than the material's Yield Strength; if this is the case, our model will have permanent deformation and therefore considered to have failed.

Results Show von Mises stress

Show displacement

Show where factor of safety (FOS) is below;

F

Rased on the specified parameters, the lowest factor of safety(FOS) found in your design is

1,01189 4

Note that we are talking about permanent deformation and not breaking. To yield does not necessarily mean that it will break; it will break if we reach the Breaking Stress. For most practical purposes, a permanent deformation will almost always be considered as a failed design because the part will no longer have the shape it was supposed to have, possibly compromising the integrity, functionality and safety of the product and/or the end user.

652


The different values for Factor of Safety (FOS) mean: Value

1

The stress at this location in the part is less than the yield strength and is therefore safe. Depending on the specific application, we may have to design with a higher FOS to ensure © our design is safe and have room for unexpected loads.

6

II

>

Meaning

The stress at this location in the part is exactly the yield strength. This part has started or is about to yield (deform plastically) and will most likely fail if the forces acting on the model are slightly more than the forces used in the analysis.

©

V

The stress at this location in the part has exceeded the yield strength of the material and the component will fail with the analysis parameters used, either deforming plastically or breaking.

34.15. - To see how safe our design is, type "2" in the Factor of Safety box, and click "Show where factor of safety (FOS) is below." Areas under the specified factor of safety (unsafe) are shown in red, and the areas over the factor of safety (safe) are shown blue. Essentially, assuming that our design requires us to have a minimum factor of safety of 2, every area colored in red would fail. 1 Fixtures

V

2 Loads

Mm

1.0126 +000

3 Material

o/

4 Run

V

5 Results

V

: :

Results Show von Mises stress

Show displacement

a

X

Show where factor of safety (FOS) is below:

Based on the specified parameters, the lowest factor of safety(FOS) found in your design is 1.01189 Use theseconUoT^?vie^n^riimation. Max:

2.476e+C03

Play animation Q Stop animation

M Done viewing results

13 Back

Start Over

Jni 653


34.16. - Now activate "Show Displacement" to see how much our model deforms using the current conditions. The maximum deformation is 0.04" at the top of the part, as expected since the top is rigidly supported. (The values in the scale are listed using scientific notation.) Max: 4,139e-Q02 URES (in)

I

4.139e-002 3.794e-Q02 3.449e-O02

. 3.1O4e-C02 2.759e-002 2.41Se-OQ2 2.070e-002 1.?25e-002 1.380e-002 1.035e-002 6.899e-003 3.449e-003

|

3.937e-032

Min: 3.937e-032

34.17. - Select "Done viewing results" to move to the next screen where we can generate reports either in Word or eDrawings format. Selecting "Generate report" will generate the files needed for the report and will allow us to fill in additional information before creating it. It will include information as well as screen captures of results and details of the analysis including loads, fixtures, and material properties.

Report Settings @ Description

@ Conclusion Evaluate geometry and material to imcrease factor of safety

Header information

[~l Designer • Company: • URl: • Logo: • Address:

• Phone:

• Fax:

Report publish options Report path:

C:\Users\ALEJAN~1\AppData\Loeal\Temp

Document name:

Connecting Rod_Analysis_-SimulationXpress Study-1

Help

654


34.18. - Selecting "Generate eDrawings file" will make an eDrawings file with the analysis results. The main difference from the Microsoft Word report is that, in eDrawings, we can rotate the models, turn the mesh on or off, zoom in or out, and easily share the results with other people. — + | e « File

View

Tools

Help

Connecting Rod_Analysis_-SimulationXpress Study.analysis.eprt

"O"

•?

—

D

X

^ Connecting RodAnalysis_-SimulationXpress Sti X 1 »•

rd

Model name:Connecting Rod_Analysis_ Study name:SimulationXpress Study(-Default-) Plot type: Static nodal stress Stress (-vonMises-) Deformation scale: 13.4767

Max: 7.238e +004 von Mlses (psi)

B

7.238e+004 6.635e+004 6.032e+004 5.430e+004 4.827e+004 4.224e+004 3.621e+Q04 3.018e+004 2.415e+004 1.812e+004 1.2098+004 6 059e+Q03 2.9586+001 Yield strength: 7.324e+004

Mm: Z.958e+001

£

ft Reset

i|

Animate

| Section

-L,

1

Stamps

35

/

^3

Markup

Studies

34.19. - What we are going to do now is to change a dimension in the model and re-run the analysis to see how much the results change. Click to close the SimulationXpress wizard. When asked if we want to save the results select "Yes" from the dialog box. «


y SOLIDWORKS SimulationXpress

1 Fixtures

|

Do you want to save SOLIDWORKS SimulationXpress data?

2 Loads 3 Material

No

4 Run

- h r

5 Results

6 Optimize

655

Cancel


34.20. - In order to increase the factor of safety and reduce the stress concentration, increase the inside fillet's radius to 0.2" and rebuild the model.

Modify

050

p

X

]$

c

D1@rillet1

-
-

Change the material to AISI 4340 Material ; A2S6 Iron Base Superalloy ; AIS11010 Steel, hot rolled bar ; AIS11015 Steel, Cold Drawn (SS)

*

Properties

Appearance

CrossHatch | Custom | Application Data | Favorites |

Material properties Materials in the default library can not be edited. You must first copy the material to a custom library to edit it.

; AIS11020 Model Type:

Linear Elastic Isotropic

; AIS11035 Steel (SS)

Units:

English (IPS)

; AIS11045 Steel, cold drawn

Category:

Steel

Name:

AISI 4340 Steel, normalized

; AIS11020 Steel, Cold Rolled

; AISI 304 : AISI 316 Annealed Stainless Steel Be ; AISI 316 Stainless Steel Sheet (SS) ; AISI 321 Annealed Stainless Steel (S!

Description:

; AISI 347 Annealed Stainless Steel (S!

Source:

; AISI 4130 Steel, annealed at 865C ; AISI 4130 Steel, normalized at 870C ^MS\ 4340 Steel, anneaie3

Sustainability;

Defined

Property

Value

AISI 4340 Steel, normalized

Elastic Modulus

29732736.22

psi

AISI Type 316L stainless steel

Poisson's Ratio

0.32

N/A

; Alloy Steel ; Alloy Steel (SS) ASTM A36 Steel ; Cast Alloy Steel I Cast Carbon Steel

Units

Shear Modulus

11603019.01

psi

Mass Density

0.283599

lb/in A 3

Tensile Strength

160991.8888

psi

Compressive Strength Yield Strength

psi 102976.7937

psi

Thermal Expansion Coefficient 6.833333333e-006 Thermal Conductivity

0.000595176

rf

Btu/(in-sec°F)

Cast Stainless Steel Apply

656

Config...

Help


After rebuilding the model, select the SimulationXpress wizard to go back to the analysis. Notice the warning icon in the SimulationXpress study. This warning icon indicates that we have a problem; in this case the results are no longer valid because we changed the model, and since the geometry is different the mesh is different and therefore the results are outdated and invalid.

/ i j SimuktionXpress Study (-Default-) meeting Rod_Analysis_ (-[SWJAISI

1^5 Fixtures $ Fixed-1 a External Loads 4 Force-1 (:Per item: 2500 Ibf:) fh) ^ Results

In order to update the results all we need to do is to make a right-mouse-click at the top of the analysis tree and SimulationXpress Study (-D select "Run" from the pop-up menu to update the results. Connecting Rod.Analysis^ (S SimulationXpress will automatically P2 Fixtures re-mesh the model to account for Fixed-1 the geometric changes and run the - ±a External Loads analysis with the updated geometry. w

5

wrong Sun

34.21. - After running the analysis with the updated geometry, we can review the new results. Now we have a maximum von Mises stress of about 51,000 psi, giving us a minimum factor of safety of 2 and a maximum displacement of almost 0.001". Depending on the intent of our design, and industry accepted practices, this may or may not be sufficient to consider our design safe. • •

1 fixtures Max: 5.104e+(X)4

won Mises (psi)

I

i

5.1Q4e+Q04

& pa

4.679e+004

2 Loads 3 Material 4 Run 5 Results 6 Optimize Results

4.254e+004

II

Show von Mises stress

. 3.829e+004

Show displacement

3.4O4e+0Q4

2.979e+004 2.554e+004

ft

S

Show where factor of safety (FOS) is below:

2.129e+004 1.704e+004 1.279e+O04

8.536e+003

Based on the specified parameters, the lowest factor of safety(FOS) found in your design is 2.01747 Use these controls to view the animation.

4.285e+003 3.420e+001

Yield strength: 1.030e+C05

jj'j Play animation Stop animation

Done viewing results

jtjjj Back

Min: 3.42Qe +Qu1

Start Over

\ 657


1 Fixtures 2 Loads 3 Material

Max: I.J&ie-CXK LIRES linl

&

• • •

4 Run 5 Results

1 -3o3e-002 1.249e-002

Results

1.13 6e-002

Q Show von Mises stress

1

. 1.Q22e-002 Show displacement

9.064e-003 7.949e-003

Show where factor of safety ^3 (FOS) is below:

6313e-O03

r— |1

5b78e-003

3.407e-003

Based on the specified parameters, the lowest factor of safety(FOS) found in your design is 2.01747

2.271e-O03

Use these controls to view the animation.

4.542e-O03

J

1.136e-003

Q Play animation

3.937C-032

El Stop animation Done viewing results

g Back

0 Start Over

34.22. - SimulationXpress includes an Optimization wizard that can be accessed after reviewing the results and reports; select "Done viewing results" and click "Next" to continue to the optimization wizard. Select "Yes" when asked to optimize your model.

The Optimization wizard helps us find the lightest model (minimum mass) that complies with the constraints defined. SimulationXpress allows only one dimension to be varied within a range of values defined by the user; the constraints of the optimization can be a minimum factor of safety, a maximum von Mises stress, or a maximum displacement.

S3

1 Fixtures

^

2 Loads

^

3 Material

^

4 Run

^

5 Results

6 Optimize Optimize Your Design SimulationXpress can identify the optimal dimension for most features in your SOLIDWORKS model based on your simulation results.

Run the optimization analysis and try to find a better solution that meets a minimum factor of Would you like to optimize your model? (•) Yes safety of 1.5 by varying the part's thickness. To run O No the optimization we have to define a range of values for the dimension; in our case we'll vary the bj Next connecting rod's thickness between 0.300" and 0.375". The optimization wizard will calculate five § Back 0 Start Over values in this range. After rebuilding the model a new analysis will be automatically run and the results analyzed. After the studies are completed, we will be offered the best solution that meets the optimization requirements.

658


Select the part's thickness dimension to add it to the parameters window. Click OK to continue.

11

Parameters Name D1BossExtrude3

Category Model Dimension

Value w|0.375

Comment

Units in

Linked *

v

i

S *.

"f"

' X-

r Model Dimesion:

D1@Boss-Extrude3@Connecting Rod Analysis.Pari

Select the model dimension that you would like to link to this parameter.

1 yj

-

•

2.3C0 /

34.23. - In the "Variables" section enter a range between 0.275" and 0.350" for the dimension. In the "Constraints" area, select "Factor of Safety" and make it greater than 1.5. In the "Goals" section select "Mass" and "Minimize" to optimize for the lightest part that meets a factor of safety of at least 1.5. Click Run to optimize the model. îew Run..

Results View

V Qitimization

D1BossExtrude3 (0 009525) Range Click here to add Variables

Min: 0.27Sin v

t

Max: 0.35 in

C

|

0 Constraints Factor of Safety

is greater than

Click here to add Constraints

Min: 1.5

HJ

v I

0 Goals Mass

Minimize

DesignXpress Studyjn Progress

Variable View

Results View

Stop Processing scenario 4 of 5...

f

Initial

Rebuilding Connecting

D1BossExtrude3 (0.0071636S) 0.375in

OptimaiX

,

0.282035in

I

1.503108

1

Factor of Safety

2.017473

Mass

0.366358 kg 0.322539 k(^

W

After running the optimization, we can see the "Results View" with the initial value and the optimal value. Selecting a column will update the model with those values. 659


Note: In order for optimization to work, we need to have a study with a factor f ) of safety higher than what we need, basically over designed. If the study g has a high factor of safety, we can optimize the model to make the part lighter, and still have a factor of safety that meets our design requirements. 34.24. - After the optimization is completed we can choose to keep the original dimension or the optimized value. Optimization Results Displaying the results of the optimization as well as the initial model.

Which

use for the

O Initial Value 0.375in), Factor of Safety( 2.01747) <§> Optimal Value 0.282035in), Factor of Safety( 1.50311) ^ Edit the dimension

Edit the constraint

Run the optimization

g Next

660


A final word on analysis The analysis world is a very fascinating one that gives us highly sophisticated and powerful tools to predict how machines, products, or designs will perform in any given scenario, and allows us to anticipate the best way to assure their safe operation. However, it is extremely important to make sure the correct assumptions for restraints, loads and external conditions are applied to a model in order to correctly simulate the actual physical phenomena, as the accuracy and reliability of the results are directly tied to them. Talking about results, it's just as important to understand what the results obtained from an analysis mean in order to correctly interpret them and avoid over designing, or putting our designs at risk for failure. As we explained before, SimulationXpress is a first-pass-analysis tool. This means that its purpose is to give us a general idea of how the design will perform within the set of applied conditions. If our design is not comfortably safe, and/or we know this is a critical component of the design, it may be better to perform a more complete analysis using the full suite of SOLIDWORKS Simulation software, where we can add more realistic loading, restraining and external conditions. Besides, SimulationXpress is only capable of performing linear static analysis; therefore, if we anticipate that a model will be exposed to temperature, vibrations, large deformations, uses non-linear materials, or other conditions that cannot be correctly modeled with SimulationXpress, those analyses should be done using a version of SOLIDWORKS Simulation (or any other analysis software package) capable of properly modeling those situations. Analysis and simulation can be a very complex subject depending on the task being analyzed, and depending on the specifics of it, a higher understanding of mechanics of materials, physics, vibrations, heat transfer and many other areas will be likely needed in order to properly set up, analyze and interpret the results. An analysis can be as simple as a linear stress analysis in a small part like our example, or as complex as a space ship re-entering the atmosphere taking into account forces, temperatures, vibrations, pressure, radiation, phase changes, aerodynamics, etc., and based on our analysis and results, astronauts would be returning home safely, or not. Ultimately, safety is the main reason why we make analysis, and why it has to be done right, with the right set of tools and more importantly, the right knowledge.

661


Exercise: Make a copy of the 'Crankshaft' part and rename it 'Crankshaft Analysis.' Add a split line to divide the face indicated and run an analysis using SimulationXpress using the information given for forces and restraints.

1200 Lbf—

T

RESTRAINT TO SIMULATE BEARINGS

662

Collaboration: eDrawings

Collaboration: eDrawings How to collaborate with non-SOLIDWORKS users Sometimes we need to collaborate with other members of the design team in the same room, same building, or even across the world. With the convenience of e-mail, it's easier than ever to share our designs using eDrawings. We can send our extended design team, customers or suppliers a file by e-mail with all the design information needed for them to review and send back feedback to the designer. A big advantage of eDrawings is that it is available for both Windows and Macintosh computers, and recently for iPad, iPhone, and Android devices. We can generate eDrawings files from Parts, Assemblies, Drawings, and simulation studies. The only thing we need to do is to press the Publish eDrawings File icon from the "Save" fly-out toolbar, or go to the menu "File, Publish to eDrawings" while the document we want to share is active. The eDrawings viewer will be loaded with the same document. After we generate an eDrawings file, it becomes a read only file; we cannot modify it, but we can print it, zoom in, or out, section it, etc. For this example, we'll publish an eDrawings file from the 'Gear Box' assembly drawing. Depending on your installation of eDrawings, your screen will look something like this: X

•

-e

0

D R A W 1 N G S* j^j Gear Box Complete.EDRW *

*

QJ

*

<7EM MO

^

0 -

PARTNUMBER

BE,SCR/P 7/ON

07V

V eight

Mtteri*I

1

•lousing

Cast P/N 1234-S

1

Cast A HoySteel

4.382

2

5 ide Cover

Cast Cover 8345

2

AISI 1020

0 363

3

Worm Gear Shaft

Shaft with He* Drive

1


0.324

•

Worm Gear Complete

Gear P/N ABC-12345

1

AISI 1020

0 328

Offsets haft Gear

P/NABC-1234

1

0.494

6

"op Cower

Casting 89876

1

Chrome Stainless S teel CastAlloy Steel

7

tX-SHCS 0.136 -32JC.5XO.5S

4

*

tXSHCS 025-20JO 5X0.5S

12

I

0.461

* * *

©—

DesignerAlejandro Reyes

(f

Speed Reducer Gear Bo* Complete

ft Reset

&

JO

Animate Measure

1 Stamps

663

/

0

m

Markup

Layers

Sheets


If the eDrawings file is generated using SOLIDWORKS Office Professional or the educational edition, the eDrawings Professional version is loaded. eDrawings Professional includes additional options, including tools to move the components in assemblies, measure, add markups and stamps and, if it's a part or assembly, make section views of the models. Selecting the "Animate" command will allow us to navigate the different views in the eDrawings file. Pressing "Play" animates the views and will change from one to the next. At any time, the animation can be stopped, and the view zoomed in, rotated and panned. While in an eDrawings of an assembly, the parts can be moved by dragging them. To return them to their original location, double-click on them or click in the Home icon.

ft

Move

n

If the assembly has an exploded view, in the "Explode View" tab we can explode or collapse the assembly and animate as well.

B

Part and assembly eDrawings can be sectioned. Select the "Section" icon, and pick a plane to section about from the options. To move the section plane, simply drag it in the graphics area.

JQ

Part, assembly, and drawing eDrawings can be measured. To help protect confidential data, this option has to be enabled at the time of saving each document.

Measure

To activate the "Enable measure" option when saving a published eDrawings file, we have to create an eDrawings file, select the menu "File, Save As..." and activate the "Enable Measure" checkbox, otherwise the measure tool will be disabled.

File name:

•

Save as type: eDrawings Files (*.easm)

•

I | Enable measure

l>

Save

Hide Folders

664

Cancel

Collaboration: eDrawings

A powerful option in eDrawings Professional is the markup tools to allow anyone to add annotations to a file, and send it back to the generator to make the required modifications. Markup

•

a

m

%

a

€>

o

b

/ operties Markup Annotations Components

The markup tools allow us to add: Dimensions Notes Add images Clouds with text Lines Rectangles Circles Arcs and Splines, etc.

After creating the eDrawings file, we have to save it. eDrawings allows us to save the files in different ways. Gear Box Complete.easm eDrawings Files (*.easm)

•*• Hide Folders

K

1 ^1

IeDrawings Files (*.easm) eDrawings 64-bit Zip Files (*.zip) eDrawings 64-bit Executable Files (*.exe) eDrawings HTML Files (*.htm) BMP Files (*.bmp) TIFF Files (*.tif) JPEG Files ('.jpg) PNG Files (*.png) • GIF Files (*.gif)

Saving as an eDrawings File (*.edrw) will result in a very small file size that can be easily emailed. The only thing the recipient needs to do is to install the free eDrawings viewer in their computer. Saving as an HTML file (*.html) will create a web page that can be e-mailed. eDrawings will be loaded automatically if it is already installed in the computer; if it is not installed, the web browser will ask to install and run the corresponding plugin. Optionally, a link to download the eDrawings viewer is listed at the bottom of the web page.

665


Notes:

666


Final Comments By completing the exercises in this book, we learned how to apply many different SOLIDWORKS features and the various options to common design tasks. As we stated at the beginning, this book is meant to be an introduction to SOLIDWORKS, and as the reader was able to see, the breadth of options and possibilities available to the user after completing this book are enough to accomplish many different tasks from part and assembly modeling to detailing in a short time, using the most commonly used commands, including making a stress analysis with the included SimulationXpress software. We hope this book serves as a stepping stone for the reader to learn more. A curious reader will be able to venture into more advanced features and take advantage of the similarities and consistency of the user interface to his/her advantage. We tried very hard to make the content as understandable and easy to follow as possible, as well as to get the reader working on SOLIDWORKS almost immediately, maximizing the "hands-on" time. After completing all parts, drawings, an assembly including the fasteners, exploded view and the assembly drawing complete with a Bill of Materials, the reader is ready to apply the learned concepts in different design projects. As a follow-up, be sure to continue learning SOLIDWORKS with Beginner's Guide to SOLIDWORKS 2016 - Level II. Go further and learn about Sheet Metal, Surfacing, Mold Making and more. One final tip: If you get lost, or can't find what you are looking for while working in SOLIDWORKS, click with the right mouse button. Chances are, what you are looking for is in that pop-up menu. ©

667


Notes:

668

Appendix

Appendix Document templates One of the main reasons to have multiple templates is to have different settings, especially units. We can have millimeter and inch templates, pre-defined materials for part templates, dimensioning standards, etc. and every time we make a new part based on that template, the new document will have the same settings of the template. A good idea is to have a folder to store our templates, and add it to the list of SOLIDWORKS templates. Using Windows Explorer, make a new folder to store our new templates. For this example we'll make a new folder in the Desktop called "MySWTemplates." In SOLIDWORKS, go to the menu "Tools, Options, System Options, File Locations." From the drop down menu select "Document Templates." System Options - File Locations System Options

Search Options

Document Properties

General

Show folders for

Drawings

Document Templates

Display Style Area Hatch/Fill Performance

ro ders C:\ProgramData\5olidWorks\SOLIDWORKS2015\templates

Colors

Add Delete

Sketch Relations/Snaps

Move Up

Display/Selection Dve Down

Performance Assemblies

external rsercî Default Templa

FeatureManager Spin BoxIncrements

Click the "Add" button and locate the folder we just made to save the templates. Click OK when done. You will now see the additional template folder listed. Show folders for: Document Templates Folders: C:\Program Files\SolidWorks Corp 2014\SolidWorks\lang\english\Tuto inn

IIIIIII

nil

iiiiii'niiii

mii minimi

^ C:\Users\Alejandro Reves\Pesktop\MvSWTemplates

Add... Delete Move Up

in

Move Down

669


To create a new template, make a new Part, Assembly, or Drawing file, and go to the menu "Tools, Options, Document Properties." Everything we change in this tab is saved with the template. The most common options changed in a template are Units, Sketch Grid, Detailing Standards, and Annotation Fonts. Let's review them in the order that they appear in the options. The first section is "Drafting Standard"; here we can change the dimensioning standard to ANSI, ISO, DIN, JIS, etc.; by changing the standard, all the necessary changes will be made to arrows, dimensions, annotations, etc., according to the selected standard. Document Properties - Drafting Standard Search Options

Document Properties

System 0|

Drafting Standard £)• Annotations

1

Overall drafting standard

hx1

230

Rename

Copy

Delete

SI- Dimensions Virtual Sharps £)• Tables Detailing Grid/Snap Units

"^j

ISO DIN JIS BSI GOST GB

Load From External FileSave to External File-

All uppercase

Model Display

The "Annotations" and "Dimensions" sections contain all the options for annotation and dimension settings including font, size, arrow type, appearance and every configurable option for them. Keep in mind that setting the "Drafting Standard" will modify these sections according to the standard. Document Properties - Annotations System Options]

Search Options

document Properties [

Drafting Standard

0 q23sh Balloons I- Datums

Geometric Tolerances Notes Revision Clouds Surface Finishes 1- Weld Symbols (£•• Dimensions Virtual Sharps

Overall drafting standard ANSI Text Font...

Century Gothic

niiduimeiii* Edge/vertex:

—-

Face/surface:

—•

Unattached:

ft]'-Tables Detailing Grid/Snap Units

•

-

Bent leaders V Use bent leaders Leader length:

Model Display Material Properties Image Quality Sheet Metal

Leading zeroes:

Standard

•

Trailing zeroes:

Plane Display DimXpert Size Dimension Location Dimension Chain Dimension Geometric Tolerance Chamfer Controls Display Options Configurations

670

P

Appendix

In the "Detailing" area we can change what is displayed in parts and assemblies; for drawings we have more options including which annotations are automatically inserted when a new drawing view is created.

Document Properties - Detailing System Options

13=1 Search Options

Document Properties

Drafting Standard 13 Annotations

Display filter

Import annotations

•J] Cosmetic threads

Shaded cosmetic threads

0 Datums

0 Geometric tolerances

Centerlines/Center Marks

0 Datum targets

0 Notes

DimXpert

0 Feature dimensions

0 Surface finish

ij Dimensions

+ Tables g Views

"" tfps in Grid/Snap

0 Reference dimensions 0 Welds 0 DimXpert dimensions 0 Display all types Text scale: flil

^"1

j Always display text at the same size 0 Display items only in the view in which they are created

0 Display annotations

line Font

n Use assembly setting for all components

Line Style

0 Hide dangling dimensions and annotations

line Thickness

PI Use model color for HLR/HLV in drawings

image Quality

0 Use model color for HLR/HLV with SpeedPak configurations

Sheet Metal

0 Link child view to parent view configuration 5000

Auto insert on view creation -/ Center marks-holes -part ] Center marks-fillets -part

0 Center marks-slots -part 0 Dowel symbols -part 0 Center marks-holes -assembly 0 Center marks-fillets -assembly 0 Center marks-slots -assembly Dowel symbols -assembly

Units

Hatch density limit:

From entire assembly

0 Centerlines

0 Balloons j Dimensions marked for drawing Cosmetic thread display

0 High quality Area hatch display

|4"

0 Show halo around annotations View break lines Gap:

0.5in

Extension:

0.125in

Center of mass Symbol size:

0315in

Scale by view scale

Help

671


In the "Units" section, select the units that we want to use in the template, number of decimal places or fractional values, angular units, length, mass, volume and force, etc. Selecting a unit system will change all the corresponding units to that system, saving us time. Selecting "Custom" will allow us to mix unit systems if so desired. Document Properties - Units System Options

)£=] Search Options

Document Properties

Drafting Standard +j Annotations

Unit system © MKS (meter, kilogram, second) © CGS (centimeter, gram, second)

a Dimensions Centerlines/Center Marks

© MMGS (millimeter, gram, second)

DimXpert

(§) IPS (inch, pound, second) © Custom

+) Tables +l Views Virtual Sharps

Type

Detailing

Unit

Decimals

Length

inches

.123

Dual Dimension Length

millimeters

.12

Angle

degrees

.12

Length

inches

.123

Mass

pounds

Per Unit Volume

inchesA3

Fractions

More

Basic Units

Drawing Sheets

lineF^ ine Style

-

1

Mass/Section Properties

Line Thickness Image Quality Sheet Metal

Motion Units Time

second

.12

Force

pound-force

.12

Power

watt

.12

Energy

BTU

.12

In the "Grid/Snap" section, we can define if we want to have a grid and its settings when we work in a sketch. Most users don't use the grid, but that's precisely why it's called an option. Turn it on if you like it; turn it off if you don't. It may be useful for a new user to help him/her identify when working in a sketch. Document Properties - Grid/Snap System Options

Drafting Standard

Grid

+! Annotations

E] Display grid

+, Dimensions

[?] Dash

Centerlines/Center Marks DimXpert +; Tables

jf=] Search Options

Document Properties

(V) Automatic scaling Major grid spacing:

l.OOOin

i+l Views Virtual Sharps Detailing Trawing"

Minor-lines per major

4

Snap points per minor

1

13

Grid/Snap Units

Go To System Snaps

ine rent

Line Style Line Thickness Image Quality Sheet Metal

672

P

Appendix

Click OK to set the new document properties to the selected options. Another option to save with the template is the material, for this part template select the aluminum alloy 6061-T6. To save the document as a new template, go to the menu "File, Save As." From the "Save As Type" drop down box, select "Part Template (*.prtdot)", "Assembly Template (*.asmdot)" or "Drawing Template (*.drwdot)" (depending on the type of document we are working on). SOLIDWORKS will automatically change to the first folder listed under the "File Locations" list for templates; if needed, browse to the "MySWTemplates" folder, give it a name and click "Save." As a suggestion, give the template a name that tells you something about the options set in it, like material, standard, units, etc. or whatever works for you. ffl Save As

©Q-r

•

Organize »

w I if | | Search MyS\-VTempfates

MySWTemplates

8= -

New folder Date modified

}d~]

©

Type

No items match your search.

> A. • MySWTemplates

i- •••

>

»

> Ji

> JL • > k >M > I,

rs

Inch oOol-To-ANSI

Q Include all referenced components

@ Save as © Save as copy and continue

Add prefix

© Save as copy and open

Add suffix

Advanced

Hide Folders

After saving the template, when we select the "New Document" icon and use the "Advanced" option, we'll see a new "Templates" tab with our new templates listed in it. New SOLIDWORKS Document

•• A

Assembly

a 3D representation of a sii component

Drawing

2D engineering drawing, typically ol a part or assembly

673


New SolidWorks Templates | Tut ori^MySWTemplate*

m~ Inch 6061-T6-ANS I

Help

Drawing templates will include the sheet format and title block with any changes and modifications to it. If editing a drawing, select "Edit Sheet Format" from the right-mouse-click pop-up menu; change the annotations and title block to your needs. When finished modifying it, select "Edit Sheet" from the right mouse button menu and save as a drawing template. When using this template, all notes and annotations will be set.

674

Index

Index Concentric Mate 437 Concentric Relation 39, 72 Configuration 301 Configuration Manager 301 Configure Dimension 307 Confirmation Corner 32 Construction Geometry 116 Convergence 648 Convert Entities 164 Coordinate Systems 171, 174 Cosmetic Threads 78 Crop View 398, 399 Custom Scale 363 Cut Extrude 59 decals 585 Decals 587 Default planes 25 Design Intent 25 Design Library 478 Design Table 489 Detail View 321 Detail view scaling 322 Dimension Names 489 Dimension Palette 330, 360 Disable Key on View Creation .... 622 Disable Playback of View Keys... 617 Disable View Key Creation 617 Displacement Results 654 Display as Diameter 375 Display as Radius 375 Display Sheet Format 311, 395 Display Style 21 DisplayManager 585 Document Properties 379 Document templates 669 Dynamic Mirror 268 Dynamic Reference Visualization305 Edit Document Units 42 Edit Key Point Time 614, 623 Edit Material 99 Edit Sheet 404 Edit Sheet Format 403 Edit Sketch 82, 92

3D Content Central 478 Add Configuration 345 Add Dimension 93, 126 Add Relation 35 Add Relations 140 Add to New Folder 551 Add to Ordinate 378 Add/Update Key 607 Animate Explode/Collapse 538 Animation Wizard 620 Appearance 446 Assembly Feature 599 Asymmetric Fillet 247 AutoBalloon 564 AutoKey 617 Auto-rotate view normal to sketch plane on sketch creation 33, 55 Auxiliary Plane 171 Axes 171 Axis 171 Begin Assembly 432 Bi-directional 270 Bill of Materials 558 Broken View 388 Broken-Out Section 411, 420 Cap ends 270 Center Mark 326, 356 Center of Mass 98, 171, 175 Center of Mass Reference Point. 175 Center Rectangle 126 Centerline 34, 79, 349, 419 Chamfer 188 Chamfer Dimension 401 Change Transparency 524 Circle 61, 75 Circular Center Mark 356 Circular Pattern 85 Coincident mate 440 Coincident Relation 39 Collapse Exploded View 537 Collinear Relation 39 Collision Detection 518 Command Manager 21

675


Midpoint Midpoint Line Midpoint Relation Mirror Mirror Components Mirror Entities Model Items Moments of Inertia Motion Study MotionManager Motor Mouse Gestures Move Component New Part Note Offset Entities Ordinate Dimensions Over Defined Parallel Mate Parallel Relation Parametric Parent/Child Peg-in-Hole Perpendicular Relation Perspective PhotoView 360 Pierce Place Key Plane Play Playback Speed Point Polygon Polygon Tool Power Trim Precision Previous View Projected View Property Manager RealView RealView graphics Rebuild Rectangle Reference Dimensions Reference Geometry Rename Feature

eDrawings 663 Ellipse 219, 398 Equal Relation 39, 140 Exit Sketch 84, 113 Explode Line Sketch 538 Exploded view 531 Extend Entities 112 Extrude 45 Factor Of Safety 653 Feature Driven Component Pattern 485 Feature Manager 16 Feature Scope 601 Fillet 50 Final Render 596 Flip side to cut 169 Fly-out Feature Manager 67 Formatting Toolbar 378 Front View 60 Full Round Fillet 225 Fully Defined 44 Gear Mate 522 Helix 249 Helix and Spiral 230 Hide/Show Component 452 Hole Wizard 78, 89 Horizontal Relation 38 Insert Component 435 Instant 3D 65, 84 Interference Detection 507 Intersection Curve 276 Isolate 519 Isometric View 49 Layer 337 Lights 590 Linear Pattern 94 Link to Property 381 Loft 257 Magnifying Glass 52, 88 Make Drawing from Part/Assembly 311 Mass Properties 100 Mate 436 Mate Reference 501 Measure 135 Mid Plane 184, 206

676

36 249, 640 39 66 464, 487 131, 132 322, 350 98 605 605 625 18, 35 442 30 378 128 376 44 453 39 25 305 460, 462 39 597 584 231 607, 614 157 608 624 91 206 166 111 402 19 312, 353 16, 36 21 590 84 33 359 157 60

Index

Straight Slot 92 Suppress 304 Sweep 222 Tangent Edges Removed 316 Tangent Edges Visible 316 Tangent Edges with Font 316 Tangent Relation 39 Tap 90 Templates 30 Temporary Axes 86 Thin Feature 218 Thread 237 Through All 73 Tolerance 75, 154 Top View 47, 54 Trim 111 Trim Entities 111 Under defined 44 Undo 44 Units 30 Unsuppress 307 Unsuppress with Dependents 307 Up to Surface 132 Vertical Relation 38, 63 View Palette 312 View Selector 20 View Style 57 Volume 98 von Mises 651 Weight 98 Width Mate 469 Wrap 270 Zoom 19

Render Quality 594 Reuse view letters 372 Reverse Direction 95 Revolved Boss 113 Revolved Boss/Base 110 Revolved Cut 155, 156 Revolved Feature 110 Right View 69 Rotate 19 Rotate Component 442 Run Simulation 650 Save Animation 627 Scene 590 Screw Clearance 145 Section View 265, 318 Select chain 270 Select Other 137, 162 Sheet Format 403 Shell 134 Show Component 453 Sketch 25, 31, 32, 92 Sketch Fillet 57, 126 Sketch Numeric Input 93, 126 Sketch Origin 38 Sketch Point 79, 90 Sketch Relations 37 Slice Section 371 Smart Dimension 40 SmartMates 459 Socket Head Screws 479 SOLIDWORKS Toolbox 477 Spline 420 Split Line 640 Standard Views 19

677


Notes:

678

Beginner's Guide to SOLIDWORKS 2016 - Level I Parts, Assemblies, Drawings, PhotoView 360 and SimulationXpress • • • • •

Designed to teach new users the basic concepts of SOLIDWORKS and solid modeling techniques Uses a task oriented approach to learning SOLIDWORKS Focuses on the processes to complete the modeling of a part, instead of individual commands Includes access to video instruction Covers commands found on the Certified SOLIDWORKS Associate and Professional Exams

Description

Table of Contents

This book is intended to help you learn the basic concepts of SOLIDWORKS and good solid modeling techniques in an easy to follow guide that includes video instruction. It is a great starting point for those new to SOLIDWORKS or as a teaching aid in classroom training to become familiar with the software's interface, basic commands and strategies as you complete a series of models while learning different ways to accomplish a particular task.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

At the end of this book, you will have a fairly good understanding of the SOLIDWORKS interface and the most commonly used commands for part modeling, assembly and detailing after completing a series of components and their 2D drawings complete with Bill of Materials. The book focuses on the processes to complete the modeling of a part, instead of focusing on individual software commands or operations, which are generally simple enough to learn.

Introduction The SOLIDWORKS Interface Part Modeling Special Features: Sweep, Loft and Wrap Detail Drawing Assembly Modeling Assembly and Design Table Drawings Animation and Rendering Analysis: SimulationXpress Collaboration: eDrawings Appendix Index

Also Available

The author strived hard to include the commands required in the Certified SOLIDWORKS Associate and Certified SOLIDWORKS Professional Exams as listed on the SOLIDWORKS website.

Beginner's Guide to SOLIDWORKS 2016 Level II

SOLIDWORKS is an easy to use CAD software that includes many time saving tools that will enable new and experienced users to complete design tasks faster than before. Most commands covered in this book have advanced options, which may not be covered in this book. This is meant to be a starting point to help new users to learn the basic and most frequently used commands.

Sheet Metal, Top Down Design, Weldments, Surfacing and Molds

u

Each copy of this book includes access to video instruction. In these videos the author provides a visual presentation of tutorials found in the book. The videos reinforce the steps described in the book by allowing you to watch the exact steps the author uses to complete the exercises. To gain access to these videos follow the steps on the inside front cover of this book to redeem your access code.

Alejandro Reyes MSMECSWE CSWI

Not returnable if code is redeemed

SSM0C

PUBLICATIONS

Better Textbooks. Lower Prices www.SDCpublications.com

ACCESS CODE

< £ > UNIQUE CODE INSIDE

ISBN: 978-1-58503-992-0

SUGGESTED PRICE

Retail $75 School Bookstores $48 READER LEVEL

Beginner

9"781 585"039920

Guide to SOLIDWORKS 2016 Readable - Level I

Recommend Documents